Affinity Photo version 2 complete guide

1. Introduction: Hello, everybody it's Nicholas and welcome to this complete curse with affinity photo. What is affinity photo? It is a very powerful software for photo editing and photo montage. You have also the possibility to create various graphic documents using affinity photo, and you can also create drawing with affinity photo. Affinity photo is not free, but the license is very affordable, and you can do definitely a lot of things using affinity photo. Affinity photo is compatible with all the popular file, and you have different features, including the process to improve photo, color space, color space options. You can use different lives previews as effect, and you can also work with a lot of adjustment, and this adjustment is extremely powerful because you can use as layer adjustment. Apart from high quality image processing, affinity photo has a lot of features that allow you also to work on all types of graphic document. You can create covers, you can create cards. You can create a presentation, any presentation document. Because you have also a very advanced system if you want to add guide if you want to work with text, and if you want to focus with different tools of conceptions. So affinity photo, extremely powerful tool with a lot of mod, extremely ergonomic tools for photo adjustment, photo montage, creation of graphic document. Now, why to use affinity photo? What are the most important features? Concretely, you have a very powerful layer system. Layer system is very powerful. You can do a lot of things. You have a very powerful system of mask layers also. You have advanced photo selection tools. You have advanced photo editing adjustment. You have also the possibility if you need to have different type of filters. You can focus on guide. You can craft a different separation of your page if you want to craft graphic document also. You have a list of a lot of tools to edit any ct any selection, add shapes, and also if you need to drik, do draw. You will have all these type of things. Now, what you will learn in this training course concretely. In this training course, you will learn affinity photo software from scratch, and you will quickly obtain a very good level which will allow you to do all your photo editing, as well as your photo montage and as well as your graphic documents using affinity photo. All the features of the software will be learnt in this course. Step by step, respecting, for example, the dashboard, work with the principle of layers, Master the different tools every time with a different concrete example. Master the photo adjustment, apply filters, work with a mask in a cure structure, you will be able to master all the software. At the end of the curse, you will have also different trainings, different trainings on photo montage, on photo improvement, and also creation of graphic document to see all the features in the curse. Affinity photo is the complete curse. 2. Start with dashboard: We are going to see the dashboard. One of the first things to do is to see the dashboard. When you start with the software first, you won't have exactly this disposition about the different window, but I'm going to explain how to work with this different window and how you can place the different window. So first, totally on the top, you have different options like five, so you can create a new document, you can save your work and you can export your work. Here, this is edit panels. You can for example, copy, you can pass. You can also undo and redo the last actions. Here you can edit the text. You have a lot of options to edit the text. Here it is a document panels, if you want to resize the document, or if you want to edit the va or the marchins, it's possible with these panels. Here this is the layer panel, so you can create different type of layers, but you can also edit the layers. Here, this is different selection options that you can have. On this area, you can arrange so it means just you can change, for example, the position, you can work with the aligment, and you can work with the distribution. It is possible to add filters using the filters features with different categories. You can edit the view if you need to add guides if you need to add columns or any things like this. It's possible using these panels. Here this is the window panels, and in this case, if you want to edit, the different panels that you want to place, like, for example, what I have on the right, like the layer panels and more, you will be able to do this with window. Then you have a panel. This is the first thing to understand. After that, you have another line and on this line concretely, it is different tools that you can use. One more time, you can also edit this line. And it is entesting because you can also change the option. For example, you can change to the liquefy persona modes. You can change to the developed persona mode and you can change for the ton making persona mode. After that, you will have a list of different tools like to increase or have automatic adjustment. You will be able to silic de silt here on this area. You have also more options with mask features. Here you will be able to work with the different snapping options, and you have more options on this area. If you go here, by default, you have different tools on the left, and on this line, it just the tool option. It means if I select any tool here like my selection tools, I will have different options for these tools. But if I select a tool like the rectangle tools here, I will have different type of options. If I select my selection tool, I will have other type of options. So every time when you select the tools, here you will have a line and you will have what you will be able to do with these tools and you will have the tool options. If I select my brush, I have all these type of options with the brush tools. Totally on the left, you have the tool bars, and by default, I decided to put on two columns. But it's possible to work only with one coloun or with three or four columns if you need. In my case, I just decided to work with two columns. Just below, you have the four ground color and the background colors. We have the white color as a foreground as backgrounds and the black color as a four ground by default. But we can just change and select any color from these panels. As you can see, if you go in the center, you can just see your documents. So for example, in this case, if you have the view tools, you can find some information about your document. Here I created a document 1,800 pixel by 1,200 pixels. I will have some information when I select my view tool about my document and about also the color of my color options. When I just go on the right, we'll have different type of panels. This panel by default, they are not organized like this. I decided to put different type of panels and to put, for example, the layer panels, channel panels, adjustment panels, and transform panels on this area, and to work with only two lines. It means this line and this line. On this line, I decided to work with color panel, histogram panel, navigator panels, and history panels. Every time you have the possibility to extend this bar, so you can just drag and move on this area if you need. By deft normally, it's not too bad, but depending on the screen of your computer, you can just change and if you want to increase here, it's possible to increase. By deft you will have not this organization. I decided to put this organization like this because I think for me it is interesting, but you can create a different organization. This is everything that you need. Don't forget that totally on this area. You can have some option. It means you can select any tools, for example, I select these tools, and you will have information about what you will be able to do with these tools. For example, I decided to select this tool, the flute selection tools. On the option, I can click to flout select drug to set the tolerance and fluid control to add l two substrate. So you will have some information about your tool. If I set in my pain brush tool, you can find drag to start painting draft shift to continue last stroke, drag plus to use the color picker. So every time that you use the tools, you will have information about what you will be able to do just on this area. This is how you can start with this dashboard. 3. Edit preferences: We're going to see the preferences. To see the preferences, you can go and edit and you can find here settings. Settings are the preferences. When I click on this area, you can find a list of preferences in different categories. The M is not to change all the preferences. The M is just to see if really you need to change something. You have this possibility and this is why I'm going to explain. So first, it is the general preferences. If you need to change the language here, you can find the language options and you will have to restart if you want to change the language. Here it's possible to change the language. You have your document, by default, you have for example documents open in the current active group and Seft tub nail with document. If for example, you want to reopen a document on startup, you can directly activate this one. If you want to documents open in a new floating window, you can activate this one. I think I didn't change anything. In this area, but it's possible to change if you select the colors. By default, you have different color system like the RGB color profile or the CM ICR color profile. We are going to keep this color profile. Don't try to change all the color profile. It's not very useful, so it means you have the RGB, they propose to you something which is interesting, so we don't need to change the color profile. Here this is a performance. It depends on your computer, if for example, your computer maybe is not very powerful, maybe you can have the possibility to increase the RAM usage limits, so here you can increase this value, and you can increase the disin warning add maybe if you want to increase your performance. But one more time, it depends just only of your computer, by default, You computer is correct. Normally you won't have a eblan, but sometime in some computer, if it's not extremely powerful, you have the possibility to increase, for example, the RAM usage limit, and you can change this value. If I select the user interface. By default, you have background gray level. This is a background gray level. If I increase, as you can see the background gray level, just on this area, you can change this value. One more time I will keep by default, you can snap to come back here. You have also hard bond background gray level. Here it is something little specific, so in this case, I'm not going to see the difference in my case. I will come back here. You can find the text contrast and here just only for the text contrast, so it is the same we don't have not big difference on this area. You have the user interface brightness. By default, we are on height, if I increase, you can change the user interface, sometimes it is useful because of the reflection of the light and sometimes it can be interesting to change depending on your position of the user interface brightness. This is the user interface contrast. We use default. You can change for height and default. It depends sometime about the light of the reflection or the screen that you have on your computer, and sometimes you can change the user interface brightness and the user interface contrast. User interface style, dark or light. Honestly, the dark option generally is good on this type of software. If really you prefer to work with the light option, you just need to switch the light, but in the training course, anyway, we will work with the dark options. Icon style color mono. One more time, you can switch. And if you switch here, as you can see, all the tools, all the elements of the interface are now are now just in one color. So I think it's probably better to use icon style and to activate the color. So this is the user interface features. If I continue, you have tools options. The tools handle size, what is it? It concretely when you use any tools, you will have a small icon with what you will be able to do with these tools and to use these tools. By default, the tool handle size will be on default. Normally we use this, but if you want to increase the size, you can use large, if you want to reduce, you can use small, but honestly by default, it is okay. One more time in the training curse, we will work with default. This is a shortcut, so you can have a listing of different types of shortcut you can have. But it just a shortcut about basic things like, for example, to close, for example, to export, to save, just the basic shortcuts that you will be able to see on this area. Here, this is the assistant options, and by default assistant are enables. What is the assistant assistant concretely adjust when for example, sometimes you will have to use the tools automatically, he will create a new layers. Sometime you will like to use one of these tools and automatically automatically, the assistant will do something for you. I think by default, it is pretty convenient. But if you don't use this will be okay but by default, it is pretty convenient. Here's the some p gin we are not going to use. Here this is services. One more time we're not going to use for this one. You have also this option. If you click on miscellaneous, you have the possibility to resit, for example, fields, brushes, object style, textile, and user defaults. Sometimes it is useful because you can save textile and you just want to resit. You have the possibility to do this in miscellaneous. Sometimes you can work with a brush and you don't know how to resit, you change different type of brush, and you want to come back at the beginning, you can use miscellaneous and rest brush. After for the rest, not more things to know for this option. This is how you work when you start 4. Edit windows: We're going to see how to manage the windows. Concretely, when you start, you won't have exactly this type of windows. For example, when I go on the right, as you can see as organized like this different windows, but by default, you won't have that. So how to organize the window. You can go on window here. When you go on window, you have a list of different windows that you can apply. Let's take a concrete example. If I just select styles here, I can click on styles, and automatically, I will have a new window automatically appearing on this area. This window, I can drag and move and I can switch this window. I can put the window in another place, for example, if I wanted to put the window here, it's possible. But as you can see if you put the window on this area, it won't be extremely convenient. But you have this possibility to put the window just on a specific area. For example, I put the window here. Let's drag and move. You can put the window on the left. You can have to drag and move the window at your convenience just like this. Every time you just need to go left click and you can drag and move the window. You can also reduce the window at your convenience, so you can extend. You can just reduce like this at your convenience. If you want to remove a window, you just need to click here, close panels. Let's sync on the example window, and on window, I would like to select another one. For example, I would like to, I'm going to go on the right. For example, by default, you don't have adjustment, and I put adjustment here. If I drain and move my adjustment window, it is an interesting window because you can have a listing of the different adjustment with predefined template. If for example at the beginning, you want have this, you will select window. And on the window, you will select adjustment. After to select adjustment, the window will appear here. In this case, sometimes it's automatically on the right. Sometimes it is not. You can position the window where you want. For example, I can drag and move my window here, and I can put the window on this area. If you want to change exactly the position, you can select the window again and drag and move at your convenient where you want. For example, I'm going to put this window here. Here it is the same. I have a color window, and if I want, I can drag and move the window here or come back here. So what type of window you can apply. First here, we have a layer window. I think it is one of the basics to have and it is interesting me I just dispositions, one lines here and another lines here and not on Tree line because on three line, I think it's too much and it's not convenient for the layer panels. I decided to put first the layer panels. Second, the channel panels. Interesting, you can find information about the channels. Then I decided to put adjustment, you go on window, you select adjustment, and you can drag and move here. Thanks to that, it will be pretty convenient for the curse. I decided also on the last one to put transform panels. The transform panel can be interesting when you are working on chips and you want to make some transformation and have information. One more time you can go on window. You will select just transform and after that, you will dragon move the transformation panels just on the right. Here, what I display on this area. I display a color panels. You can find these display colors, and the color panel is definitely interesting, to have access to the color, so you can select any shapes here and automatically, you can use one of these colors. I decided to put histogram panels. Interesting also when you open any pictures, you can have information about the at lights, the shadows. Definitely, if you work for photo editing or photo montage or just to improve any pictures, the histogram can be interesting. I display my histogram here. Here I display the navigator panels, and here the history panels to undo and redo the last action. You can find on this window here, just slick window. For example, the color is here. The histogram is here. The navigators is here, and the history panels is just here. Every time you just need to drag and move any window, for example, if I slick another example like the brushes, and every time you just need to drag and move a window on the position that you want. You can also, if you go here, as you can see, it is just on all this area. So definitely it's not pretty convenient. Sometimes it's a little long when you use the brush window. And I just close the panels window. I silic one more time brushes and the brushes will appear on the last position. But you can just reduce dragon move or position the window where you want. If I silect another example, I can use, for example, something like style one more times, and you can dragon move the window and you just need to switch in the location that you want. It's okay for that. So for the curse, you just need to position the window like this to follow in the right way the curse, layers, channels, adjustment transform, color, histogram navigator, and history. 5. Edit tools: We are going to see how to edit the tool bars and we can find two different tool bars. The first one is on this area, so it means this line, and the second one is on this area with the different tools. To edit the tool bars, you need to go on view here. When you go on view, you will find a different type of things. Here you can find show the context tool bars and you can find show the tool bars. It means I just click here. I'm not going to find the context tool bar, so view and I can recuperate the context tool bars. It means when you use one of these tools, you will have information about the tools, and you can find also show the tool bars here. You can find the tool bars on the top is not appearing like this, and you can recuperate show tool bars just like this. So if you buy de food, for example, you remove this one, it just because you need to go in view, and you can find again show the context tool bars and show tool bars. After to do this work, you can find also here's the dug tools, so you can deactivate the duct tools and the tool bar will be moving so it means you can move like this. Let's come back on view and duck tools, and you can find view also and shot tools and in this case, you will add the tool bars on the left. Is it useful? Definitely no because you need to have these different tools, but sometimes it just maybe at the end of your work. You want to activate a preview. Maybe you can just remove the tool bar just in this case. For the rest, we need to keep shot tools. After that, when you go on view, you have two options, and you have customized tool bar and customized tools. If you click on customized tool bars, it is to customize this tool bars on this area. Concretely, we are going to keep the tool bars and this tool bar, but it just to show you that you can change if you want. For example, I have different options here. But most of the options are already here. Limon panels is located on this area. Range panel is located on this area, for example. And you can move any panels. If for example, I select one of these panels, I select all I have already here. But just to show you you can just dragon move and you can put the element just here. Or you can dragon move and remove element. If you select der one, here you can find more things, like for example, you can have blear operation. If I wanted to put all the boolan operation here, I can put this one on this area. But you have access to the bolean operation in a different way. Why we don't have the boolan operation because we are going to work on affinity photo. And we work less with the Boland operation, even if it can be extremely useful if we want to craft owing. I'm going to remove and position this one here. This is the first thing to do. I'm going to close after you have the tool bars on the left with the different tools, and for this, you can select view and you can activate custom, customized tools. Something important to understand in the tools is when you stay left click, in some tools, you can have more options. For example, I can click on close. If I go here, you can find the pain brush tool, but you can have also a color replacement brush tool on the pixel tools. If you just stay left click here, you can find Ease brush tool, background, as bruh, erase brush, and fluid erase tools. This is the tool that we use the most. If you select view, you can activate customized tools. If for example, I wanted to add something like the defuse tool, I can just go left click and position my default tool maybe here. If I want to work with the ripple tools, I can just go left click and position the element here, or less deterion, and more. You can just drag and move and you have access to more tools on this area. Is it useful, honestly, not too much, but sometimes, for example, you can find something like shadows at lights. We can use the adjustment shadow at lights. But here you can do this with a brush so maybe it can be interesting to use sometime. You can just go left click to come back on this area and to remove the tools. If you just click here, you have the possibility to se it. And in this case, you will recuperate your tool bars with all the basic tools. Here this is a number of colons. By default, I decided to work with two colons. You can also do this if you want. It's better for the curse, but if you want to work with one columns or more three or four colons, it's definitely possible. Me I think two columns were pretty good was pretty good for a simple reason that depending on the size of the screen, you can work with one or two colons, I think, and two colons for the size of my screen is pretty good. 6. Master selections: We are going to see how to work with the selection. So concretely, the selection, what is this? You have the possibility when you add element or you add object to create some selection using the selection tools. I'm going to show you how to work because this is some basics to know when you start. First thing to do, I have this document, and I'm just going to add a sheeps, so I will go here, and I will add rectangles. I will click on the rectangle tools. Left click to start my rectangles. After to do the left click, you can define colors on this panels, so you can also click on the color panels, double click, and you can search a color, for example, this one. Let's place an image. I will go on file here, and I will select place file, place, and I will define a image. I will go on this area and we will take the example one more time with the road. And I will go left click to Dragon Move my image on this area. We have two elements. First thing to do is by default, every time you add something, you will have the selection tool activated. The selection tool is located here. It is a move tool for me, it is to selection tools, and when you click on this area, you can select any object. When you select object, depending of what you choose, you will see what is your selection on the layer panels. For example, here, this is my image, and here this is my rectangles. I Zoom little bit here, you have the possibility, for example, on this rectangle, to drag and move to change the size. If you press shift and you click here, you will keep the ratio. You can also create some rotation if you need dragging and moving and you can press shift to also activate a constraint. So something important, you can also move your object, so you just need to click on the section tool, you select the object, and you can drag and move. You want to disilic just go left click outside and you can deselect. Now if I go here, I can just activate here. We are working on the selection only with the selection tool because after you have the selection to create selection for photo montage or photo editing. Here is just to create basic selection when you want to select a layer or you want to select an object. Something that I'm going to do now is to position this layer, dragon move on the top here. I will put my image on this area and increase the size. After if I dragon move, I can define a center. I will put my rectangle also here. Maybe on this area and extend little bit. I will select another object. I will click here and define the ellipse tools. I will craft the first ellipse on these directions. Define the color. I will click here, double click, and I will define, for example, this type of blue color. And I will duplicate with my selection tool. So I can click on my selection tool, click on the circles. And to duplicate, I can press Control left click and I can duplicate. Control left click, and I can duplicate Control left click and I can duplicate. I will select my different circle. To select all the circle at the same time, I select the first one shift. The second one shift the third one and shift the front, you can use shift to select the different. Sacs. I click on this one shift, this one, this one, and this one. After to do this type of work, I selected the four circle and I can drag and move. I will show you how to work with Aligan distribution after. But at this moment, I will just click on Aligan, and I will select here and distribution here. So you can select multiple sap us this shift, or you have another way to select multiple shapes. You can or multiple layers. You can go left click and you dragon move a frame of selection, you stay left click, and you can create a frame of selection just like this. I selected also my four ellipses. In this software, if you just create a frame of selection and you touch any layers, the layers won't be selected if you don't englobe all the layers. For example, if I want to select the rectangle, I need to create a frame of selection all around the rectangle, and now all these elements are selected. But in some cases, for example here, you can select all the circle like this. It's pretty fast. But if you don't want to select the rectangle, sometimes you will have to click on shift, and you can select only the circle just like this. Another way to create a selection is to go on the layer panels. If I go for example here, I can just click on my rectangles. Layers, and it means I selected the rectangles. If I click here, I selected this ellipse. So on the layer panels, you can also create multiple selection. I can slick this first ellipse. If I press control, I can select the other ellipse just like this. If you want to select all the layer from the first one to the last one, you select the first one. Shift, you stay shift. Left click on the last one, and you can select all the layers between the two, and here selected all the layers as you can see. It is another way to create some selection. You can also use this layer panel. 7. Brush selections: We are going to see how to create a selection with brush. For this, we can use these tools. This is a selection brush tool. Concretely, what we will be able to do, we can use a brush, set the parameter of this brush, and thanks to that, we can create a selection. The tool is extremely convenient, I will select these pictures for my first example. I will go here and I will define the selection brush tool. In the selection brush tool, you can find two mode. Add mode and the substract mode. I will select for the add mode and here this is the size of your brush. By de 40, I have 50 pixels, if I want to increase the size, I increase the value, I have something bigger, or you can also decrease the size to have something smaller. You have the snap to edge or layer soft edge, the most of the time will keep snap to edge. I think definitely it's more convenient about your selection, because if you don't use snap to edge, sometimes it's not extremely convenient and he won't be able to define exactly the contrast edge. This is why the most of the time we can keep snap to edge and we don't need to remove this one. Because the interest of this tool generally it's because you can snap to the edges, and when you have part with contrast, you will define automatically the contrast. So if I slick this tool, maybe I can start with around 75%, you have two options. If you have contrast, you can just go left click, stay left click and automatically he will snap to the different edges. Here stay left click. I don't stop the left click, and when I think everything is okay, I can stop. As you can see with just one left click, I think the selection is pretty good. I I just invert the selection to slick the back room, so invert the selection, I can press delete on my keyboard and deselect, and as you can see, this is our selection. Let us come back just here. I would click on this lick. Second option, you can press multiple time left click. It means if I go one left click here, one left click, one left click, one left click. You can also work like this. It depends. Sometimes it can be interesting to just go one left click. Sometimes it's better to continue and just to do like if you were painting. But it's convenient also even using this process. Now if you want to, for example, remove a part, you can click on substrate. If I go on this area, as you can see, I can substrate from here. If I want to re pert add, and I can come back again on this area. I selected this flower, I can go and edit, copy this selection, if I go here, edit and pass the selections with my move tools, I can now drag and move, resize, if I want these layers, and we have created this selection. Let's see a second example. In this second example, I would like to use this tool to select the part with the sky. We have different way to select this, and we can use this tool also. If I use my selection brush tool, so here we need to click on ad and I define the size. I think one more time around This time I think around 100 will be pretty good. I I I stay left click, just like this, I can just in just one way. As you can see, the tool is very powerful because I just dragging and moving a little here and automatically he define all this area. I think the section is pretty perfect. I just go one left click here, and I press delete, and I think definitely the selection is pretty good. I can go here, and yes, that's definitely interesting. If I go on this area, I can create new layers. Add the pixel layers. Put the layers on the back here. With the field tool, you can fill the layer with the color. Here is a white color. Here it is a blue color, here it is a green color. Let's put, for example, this type of blue color, just like this. Yes, that's it. Here just fill with the nodern layers with the color. I'm going to come back with my history panel, and do did, and we're going to come back at the moment where we didn't have the selection. Let's just come back here. Just like this. I can di select hoops before s just like this, and I can deselect. If you just put one left click, so you select the tools, and for example, you start with maybe one left click here, one left click. Yes, automatically he will stop here. I can continue one left click because we have contrast it's working really properly. But this is why it is important to keep the snap to edges. Generally, we don't to this tool if you don't use snap to edges, it's not very interesting to use this tool. That's it. But if for example, I go here, as you can see, you can complete with another part, so you don't need to link all the part. If for example, I go here, I can also complete with another part, or I can use minus here, and you can also cut and select another part on your pictures. Here, I can click plus, come back on this area, and I selected also this part. We have this part. We have a separate part, and we have again a selection. You can select multiple area on your picture. You don't need to have something in continuum. You don't need to have something contiguous. You can add another part of your pictures definitely not a problem. It's okay with this selection. 8. Create document: Create a new document. For this, as you can see, I have a document here, and when you slick this tool with the view tools, I have a document with 1,800 pixels by 1,200 pixels. If you want to create a new document or open an existing document. You need to go on file here and you can select new. One of the first things that I'm going to show you is, if for example, you want to create a photo montage, and you need to open different pictures. You have different way. O the first way is just to click on pen here. When you click on Open, you can go for example on your computer and select the picture that you want. For example, let's just select a picture on this area will select this pictures, and I can open this one. Let's select again file open. If you have affinity photo file, you can open Dirco Affinity Photo file. If you just want to open a image file to create, for example, a montage, you can select a image file just like this. You will have multiple documents on this area and thanks to that, you can create selection, you can mix the selection, and you can create montage. You want to create a new document now you go find and you select new fine, new. After to do this type of work, you have different type of options. One of the first options that you can do is when you go here, you have different type of categories. If I select for example, the category print, I can find something like the A four document or I can find something like the P five document, and you can continue because you have more options. If I select something like webs. For example, you can find if you just continue webs. Yes, just go on this area. You can find one more time to categorize also, and the categories are located here. If I wanted to create something for a letter, I can click on letters and automatically I will have some information. Depending on the predefined template that you choose, the unit will be different. If I silic letters, as you can see it is in inches. But if you silic A four, it is in millimeter. But if you silic something different, it can be also in pixels. If I just continue, here, this is, for example, for social media, it is in pixels. So you can select different options and depending on the options, it can be in inches, it can be a millimeter, or it can be generally in pixels. You can also go on the left, craft a new document from here or open a new document when you have these panels. Now, if you don't want predefined models, you can just go in this area and you define the page that you want. For example, you have the document unit and I can select pixels. If I select pixels, I define the size that I want. For example, I want something with 200 for 2,400 for my wide, and for the eight, I want something like 2000, I will tape this value, and I can press enter. As this is the DP height. We can use 300, but sometimes we can change if we need. This is a document unit in pixels. If you want to work in millimeter, you will have the correspondence in millimeters. If you want to work in inches, you can also work in inches, and you will have exactly the correspond value. Let'll just come back in pixels first. If I just want to create something like this. I have also the color with the color formats, and you can find RGB and CMC, concretely HRGB. It's more if you want to keep your document online on the web, or if you use CMC, it is if you want to print your document. But when you export your work, you can change that after. It's definitely not extremely important because you can also change that after when you will export your work and you can include the margins. Here, for example, we have a margin included if you don't want to deactivate the margin. And to create the new document, you just need to click on CreAT, just here. And I created this new document as you can see. I just have a problem about the correspondence. So if you want to remove a document, you can just click here. I'm going to come back, fine, new. And I will change I'm going to go on this area. I will change that for for example, A four, but I will change the unit pixels one more time and I will redo with another one. I will put 22800 and here, I'll put 2000 pixels. But the margins, I will not include the margins. I come back to my layout, and I will go on rat just like this. Now it's perfect. You can find the information when you use your view tools. I have 2,800 by 2000 pixels just on this area. That's it. After when you have your different document, you can drag and move your document at your convenience, so it means you can drag and move the position. You can also change the position of any document. If you want to put something more on the left on the right, you will have all your document located just here. If I just come back so open, you can open an existing document or you can just open pictures that you want to use for a photo montage, and when you click on you, you will have the possibility to create a new document. Here, I deactivated show on start U, but when you start affinity photo, by default, you will have the panels. If you want to deactivate, you just need to deactivate show on startup. This is what I was going, but if you just want to keep on start up, it is definitely not a problem, and it is pretty convent. The last point is here in this area, you can change landscape for portraits. For example, I have this AFO document. Again switch portrait landscape portrait landscape. If you just want to switch portrait to landscape, you just need to click on this area. 9. Export work: We're going to see how to export work. You have the possibility to export your work to export your document. You can also save your work. One of the first things to do just to create a montage, just montage, a basic montage. For this, I have this document, 1,800 by 1,200, and I have this picture and this pictures. Let's just make something very basical. I will select the pictures and select all the layers. We will see in details all the parameters after how to work. But here just go edit, copy the layers, and just go here, edit and pass the layer. You can also use Control C or Control V to copy and pass. After to do this work, I will switch for my selection tools and this element arrive here, and I can just increase the size of my element and I will put in the center. After to do this type of work, I will click on this pictures. I would like just to replace the sky on this area. I'll click on this pictures, select the rectangle tools, and just create a rectangle of selection around this area, and edit, copy the selection. And I will go here, edit, and pass the selection. Now I have this element, I will increase the size to arrive close to the line of the horizon, and I will put this on the line of the horizon, just like this. After to do this work, I create it, for example, this montage, and I just want to save and export my work. You can file and you can find save or save as. When you click here, something that you can do is to export in affinity file. He it will be affinity file and you can just change the name here. Why it is interesting, it is because you can use this in any affinity software. If you want to re use a different affinity software, with this file, you will be able to open, it is not a problem. It is just pretty simple. You just need to click on Save and you will be able to export your work to save your work. Now if you want to export Gun file, and you will be able to click on export just here, and when you go on export, you have different type of options. Basic exportation, what is this? Basic exportation, it is GPEg or it is PNG five. If you slick just GPEg five, here, you will have information. One more time, if you want to resize after it's possible. My document is 1008 by 1,200. If I the exportation, I want to change and I want to reduce, I can put a different value as you can see. You can keep the ratio or you can brock the ratio just here, and you can take to different value, generally, we don't brock the ratio, an example, but generally we keep the ratio. If I want to come back, I can define my value at the basic. Here, first, when you export your work, even if you start with the size, you can change the size just here. After you have the quality, generally, it's better to keep 100, but if you reduce, you will have different size. For example, if I put 100, estimated five size, we can find this value. But if I reduce estimated five size, it is pretty small. Sometimes you can just change the quality just if you want to reduce the size, but if it's not the case, generally, we keep 100. Area, what you want to select. Normally, we keep the world document, and quality one red, you just need to click on export and you select the folder on your computer, and here this is the GPE file. You can go and file export and another basic exportation, just a PNG file. It is useful sometimes when you have a transparent backgrounds, and it is exactly the same type of way. Now if you want to export with the layers, because if you export in GPEg or PNG file, you won't have the layers. It's just a document, a image document, nothing more. Exactly like, for example, this document, just a image document. If you want to keep the layers, and you want to reopen on another graphic design software. If you have another graphic design software or photo montage software and you want to recuperate the different layers and information about your conception, it's possible. You can file, you select export, Here on this area instead to select GPA or GPE, or PNG, you have the possibility to select PSD or something that you can use also is EPS. PSD is interesting and you can use also EPS. In the two case, you will be able to re open in another graphic design software with a different layers. Here, for example, I have EPS for exportation, one more time, the word document, and you will find some information just here. If I just select one more time, something like PSD. At the same world document and here preset PSD. If I just come back to EPS, I will select here export, and as you can see, just the EPS folder. And another last type of exportation. I'm not going to show you all the exportation, but something that you can have also, it is if you want to export, for example in PDF, you can find the PDF also. If you want to export in SVG, you can also export SVG can be enteesting if you want to work in vector. If you want to work in vector, for example, you craft a drawing in affinity photo, and this drawing, you use different chaps, and you want to reuse in another graphic design software to work with vector format, you can export in SVG. And you will keep the different layers, but it is perfect if you want to work with vector. If it's for photo, it's better to keep EPS or PSD. But if it is for drawing, you can export in SVG also. This is how to work with the exploitation. 10. Add images: Add images. We're going to see how to add images. As as explained, something that you can do it's to open images. But you can also place directly images as new layers on your document. If you want to open images, as I explained before, you just need to go and file, you select open, and after to select open, you can go on your computer and you can open the picture that you want. For example, I decide to open these pictures, and the picture will appear here as a new document. Let's select another example file. Open, and I will define another one. So for example, I want to open these pictures. I will click here, and the pictures will be open. But when you do this type of work, automatically, what you have, you have a new document. It means if for example, I'm here, and I want to create a montage with different photos using this process, I will have every time to go on for example, edit and copy. All the layers are a selection. But if I want all the image, I go on edit copy, go here and edit and pass, and I will have this one as the new layers just like this. But if you don't need to work on selection, so it means you don't need to work on a specific part. You don't need to do this type of work. If you want all your pictures, you can just use the place image options. For example, here, I'm going to remove this one, and you can use place image feature. Select file, and here you can find place file place. Now you can select any pictures. Let's take an example. I will select the pictures. Left click, and automatically you have a small element appearing here. When you press left click and stay left click, you can drag and move the image, keeping the ratio at your convenience and defining the size that you want, just like this. Automatically, as you can see, I go on the right, and now I have image layers appearing on this area. If you don't have to, for example, resize, if you don't want to resize or not to resize, if you don't want to create a specific part, have a selection of a specific part of the image. You just want to create a montage and have all your image. You can do this type of work. For example, I can place my image on the back rounds Just like this. If I don't make any work on this image, if I don't want to create any selection, I can do this type of work. You can also integrate multiple image. First, you can go and file. A I slick place, you can select multiple image at the same time. For example, I'm going to go here, and I have different temple image on this area. I can select this one, this one, this one, and this one. I selected this four temple image and I can click on Open. Now and you will have a new a new tab here opening and thanks to that inside, you can see your different image. You can select the order that you want to use to place your image. If I want to start with this one, I just need to click here. But if I want to start with this one, I can just click here. You can position the first one left click Sy left click with the size that you want. Now, the first image is place, and as you can see, we can have access to another one, like for example, this one, but I can select another one if I want. And I can dragon move my second image. After let's position my second image just here, and let's position my four image just like this. Now, as you can see, we have still the place tab open. As you can see, you can drag and move like this. If you want to close because you can repeat this process, but if you want to close, if you click here, the best thing to do, you need to click here and you can close or close the group. It depends here the two are going to work, but sometimes you just need only to close. Now I have four. Images in four different layers, as you can see. This different image, you can make adjustments. You can resize at your convenience, be careful because if you take this or if you take this, you will lose the ratio. It's important to not lose a ratio. This is why it's better to use this one. But if you click here and you press shift at the same time, you will be able to keep the ratio. 11. Place images: We are going to see how to place images inside shapes. It is interesting to use these features in a different way, and I'm going to show you concrete example. For some thing that I'm going to do is to place the image. We go on file here, and I will select place. Thanks to that, I can import a image from this area. Let's just select as an example this image first, and I can position my image just here with left kick. Let's create another image. I will go on f place, and I will select another one. What other image I will select in this example, I will select this one just like this. The interesting point, if you want to crop image like this, you will use shapes because the image concretely is as a layer in this type of case. We have just a image layer. This is image layers. Sometime you would like to have exactly a specific size. I'm going to select the rectangle tools just here, create a rectangle with with a different ratio of this one. I will define for example, the green color. So you have two options. The first options, I have this image, and I can pull this image first just below the rectangles. And if you're selling the two element, and you go right click here. You won't have directly the possibility to craft a mask or to do something like this. One of the best things to do, it just to work with your layer panels. I want to position the image inside the rectangles. You salic the image here, and you drag and move the image. On the rectangle, you go a little bit on the right, it's better. And the image is now inside the rectangle. You can see here, you have the rectangle and the image is inside. Why is useful because now if I extend my image outside, as you can see, We are not going to be outside of the rectangle. So the rectangle will be used as a mass. Concretely, you can create a rectangle with the size that you want. After you have the image inside, you can make what you want. You can scale the image inside if you need. Absolutely, no problem. And if you want to move, you move your rectangle, and the rectangle will move with the image inside. If you double click, you will be able to have access to the image and to change the size or the position. Let's he second example with the circle. You can select any shape it's going to work properly. Let's select the ellipse tools, and I will create the ellipse here. I would like to see the face of the woman around this ellipse. I will select this image and I will put the image around this area. We'll select again, my circle make little adjustment just like this. Something that I will do is to select this image, drag and move the image on ellipse just inside. Now as you can see it's perfect. If you go one left click, you select the circle and you move the image at the same time, If you double click, you select the image inside the circle and you can drag and move, you can scale, you can create. Also, if you want it to create rotation, it's possible. You can do after dragging and moving the image, but the image is inside the ellipse. If you want to do the opposite process, you just drag and move the image outside of the saps, as you can see. For example, here can drag and move outside of the sp. Now, let's see a concrete example. I'm going to remove this one, remove this one, remove this one, and I will separate in four part my element. I will go on view here, and I will select first show colon guides. I will go on view, and I will select guides. Something that I will do just to separate in two colons, here I can type two, just like this. Here I can tape two also. I will apply a gutter. What gutter I will apply, maybe I can work with 80, and I will apply a margins also with 80. I. So two column two gutter eight and margin 80 pixels. As you can see, we have a specific size. If you import pictures, place pictures, which are not the size of this area, you need to use this process. First, I will place four pictures. File place, and I can slick multiple picture at the same time. For example, I have this temple, this temple, this temple, and this temple, pen, and I will place the first one here, the second one, here, the third one here, and the last one here. After to do this work, here we can close this one. I I I slick, for example, my first one, as you can see, I don't have the same ratio, so I will be outside of this space. This is why it's not good and if I slick this one, I won't have a good ratio. As you can see, it's not good also. This is the reason for which process that you need to use is to crater rectangles with exactly the size, you can snap here and you can snap here. After to snap from this corner point to this corner point here, you can replace by a image. Of first something that you can do is to press control alt duplicate like this. Control l duplicate here, right click, arrange, move to back. Control control left click move here, just like that. We have multiple rectangle. First, let's position the rectangle in the right disposition. This is the first one. This is the second one. The third one I will place here, and the fourth one I will place here, just like that. Now I will put all the temple on the top just like this. I will select my first temple and this temple, I need to put inside the first rectangle. It means just here. If I move my temples, now he is visible here. As you can see, I can find my temple perfectly in the same rectangle, and now it will be perfect to center for example the temple and I can adjust at my convenience. Let's lick the temple to. I need to correspond to this rectangle. I drag and move the temple number two inside this rectangle. And now if I scale, as you can see, we are inside the rectangle, so it's perfect to use this exactly like if we wanted to crop the image. I select the temples, and go on my third rectangles just like this. Now it's here I'm inside, and I can increase the size and for example, center, like this. I will slick the last one. So temple number four, dragon move inside my last rectangles. Now I'm inside, perfect, and I can scale and position at my convenience. So this is how you need to process if you want to make this type of work and definitely it's convenient. Because if you import different pictures, the pictures won't have, for example, the same ratio, and the picture won't correspond to your colons and rows, and this is the reason for which you need to craft your shape first. You place your shapes and after you display the image inside. Very interesting process to use. 12. Crop images: Crop images. To use this type of features. We can go on the left and we can find this tool. This is a crop tool. Thanks to that, you can crop a image. You need to be careful because it's not convenient if you want to crop layers, but it's convenient if you want to just to crop all your images just like this. I have this image and after we'll focus on this one, but first let's see this image. The only thing that you need to do is to select your cpt tool. So after to select your crop tool, you will have multiple options located here. So you can apply a mob and here you have unconstrained original ratio, custom ratio resemble. If you select unconstrained concretely, what you can do, you can drag and move the different handles at your convenience, and dragging and moving the different handles, you will see the radule with a size here crop. This will be my result, and you can just click on apply just here and you can crop your picture like this. So now you have more option. If I just come back and edit and select the crop tool again. This is a S constraint. You can apply original ratio just like this. It means you keep the original ratio of your pictures, and when you resize, you keep automatically the same ratio, as you can see. You can focus on a custom ratio and here concretely the custom ratio, what is this? You define the custom ratio that you want. If for example, I want 400 by hundred, I will use this ratio and after when you want to resize with any handle, you will keep the ratio 400 by 300. And you can also have a resample and concretely resample, you will just come back to the original ratio that I have at the beginning. If you just go on the right, you have some option, you can rotate your element, you can use strengthen, just like this. Thanks to that. If you want to create a line, sometimes you'll have an horizon is not really good, you can use strength ten, and you create a new line here with left click and you can as you can see make an adjustment. In this case, it's definitely not convenient, but sometimes it is interesting to use. If I select my crop tool again, Something important to do, it's also the overlay. By de foot, we use the third grid to have different information if you want to find perfectly your center here or one of the corner, but you can change for none. You can change for third grid, grid, golden spirals, and diagonals. Let's just come back to third grid. Something important is, you have predefined custom ratio. When you click here, presets, you can select the custom ratio that you want. If for example, I slick one by one, I keep a ratio one by one. This is why we have this square just like this. If you tap here, you just change the ratio again and it will come back for custom. When you go in the predefined, you can select the ratio that you want, here it's one by one. Here it can be S for one, you can select. If for example, you want something like photographic paper, We have this type of ratio, and you have so much more options. If you want to have this one screen size, you can select this size and you will have the ratio. After that, you just place where you want and if you press enter or crop, you can upturn your render. So that not many more things to do. I will select this image and I will click here one more time. Depending on what I want to do, I can change one more time, for example, define a ratio if I need two for one. I can also click on rotate. As you can see the ratio is not pretty good. Something that I will do is to rotate again. In this case, I will use unconstraint. Using constraint, I can just crop on my convenience. If I want to crop on the face maybe on this area, I can press enter and validate like this. This is how you can work. So just need to select these tools, select the mud that you want. If you want to apply specific constraints, you can apply a specific constraint, and not many more things to know with these features. 13. Master navigation: We are going to see the navigation. To see the navigation, one of the first things to do I have this document. As you can see by default, you can have this tool, this is the view tools. Thanks to the view tool, you can find information on the top about the size of your document. Thanks to this view tool, if you just go left click, you can just drag and move like this on your space of work. Important things if you want to work with the navigation. You have different type of options here. But when you click on these different type of options, it's not extremely convenient. If you go here, you can find some information about the layers, information about the selection, arrange, filters, and view. If you select for example view, you can have access to the Zoom here. And you have also some views, but it just views about the document that you have. If you go on Zoom, you can for example Zoom in Zoom Out, and you can also have access to percentage, and you can also have access to the shortcut. If I silic 200%, I will directly go to 200% for my document. If I silk view, and I just want to Zoom out. I can click on Zoom Out. But one of the best things to do is to use a scroll wheel, a mouse with a scroll wheel and to use also shift and control. If you just go on the left just first. You can find this tool. This is a Zoom tool. You can click on the Zoom tools, and here you can define a percentage. If I want 150%, I can define 150%. If I want 80%, I can define 80%, but you can also dragon move just using the toolbars. At this moment, if you want to change the pixels, if you want to change the unit, it's possible to change the unit using the Zoom tools. Here on this area, you can change the percentage. Now some things that I can do. If I want to move, you can also use the view tools and you can drag and move laces. One of the best things to do is to use a mouse with a scroll wheel. What does it mean? It means concretely that with a scroll wheel, If you click on the scroll wheel, for example, you use one of these tool, I'm using, for example, the brush tools, and why I'm using the brush tool, I click on the scroll wheel and I can have the same thing that the n tools. You have any tools here, you click on the scroll wheel and you can drag and move like this. Now if you want to Zoom, you click on control, and you drag and move the scroll wheel. You click on control, and you can drag and move the scroll wheel to zoom in and to zoom out. If you drag and move the scroll wheel, you will just move horizontally. If you drag and move the scroll wheel and you press shift on the keyboard, you will drag and move horizontally. Vertically, if you drag and move the scroll wheel and shift press the scroll wheel, you can drag and move horizontally. Let's see a concrete example. I will go on file and select open, and I will define a image. I will select this image just like this. After to select this image. I have two options. I can use this options to zoom in Zoom out. I can use this to drag and move. But one of the best things to do if, for example, I have one of these tools, a tool of selection is I can press control the scroll wheel, drag and move the scroll wheel, and I can zoom in and zoom out. After to do this, I can click on my scroll wheel and I can drag and move on my image. When I click on the scroll wheel like this. I want to zoom out, control scroll move the scroll wheel, and I can zoom out. Something important, also, as I explained before in the window panels, I decided to put a navigator. So Window, and you can silic navigator. I decided to put the navigator option on this area. Sometimes it is useful because you can use also the navigation panels. Thanks to that, you can zoom in and zoom out, and as you can see it's pretty fast. If for example, you zoom here, you have the possibility to drag and move directly from these panels, and it's also something pretty convenient. You will find the percentage on this area. It is just another way to focus on the navigation, and you can also use the navigator panels, and you can zoom in here. This is the maximum and I can zoom out also just like this. So you can use this navigator panels if you need. This is how we can work with the navigation. 14. Master layers part 1: We're going to see the layers extremely important to understand the layers. For this, as you can see, we can find the layer panels on the right. So I display the layer panels here, and thanks to that, we can have some places to see the different layers on this area. We're going to create a montage and thanks to that, we will see the layers. First, I selected this picture for this montage, these pictures, these pictures, and these pictures. First, I will select this pictures and select all the layers with edit and copy. So thanks to that, you can copy all the layers. I will go here, edit, and pass. First, when you want to create something like this, you can also use Control ser Control V. Thanks to that, you will have a new layers with your image. I can select my layers, and I can resize with my selection tools and put this in the center. After I will select also this image, use my rectangle selection tools, and create a frame of selection on this area. I will repeat the process edit copy, edit, and pass. I will increase, and position this element on this area. First things to understand if you want to change the name of the layers. You just need to double click, and when you double click on the layers, you can change the name. For example, this can be I can take something like Osh. After to do this type of work, I will click here, and I will change, double click and I will tape sky. You can re you can change the name, rename your layers just like this. You just need to double click and you can change the name. Let's just continue. I will select the pictures and use my flud selection tools, select the tolerance around 20% and click outside. I need to invert the selection to select the face of the woman, so invert the selection. And then I can use edit copy. Go on this document, edit, and pass. I will with my selection tool automatically dragging and moving here, and I will change the name, and I will change the name for woman, just like this. I will even change the name for woman number one. After to do this work, I will select also this picture. And with this pictures, I will create a selection. I will use the selection brush tool, and I want to select the flower so I can use my brush and just paint like this. After to do this work, edit copy, I will go on this document, edit, and pass. I will change the name, and I will change the name for flower number one. One of the first things to understand is the position for ground backgrounds. The layer totally on the bottom is on the foreground. The layer totally on the top is this one is on the backgrounds, and this one, the layers totally on the top is on the foreground. You can change the position of a layer. You just need to click on the layer and you can drag and move the layer on another position. For example, I display the ocean on the foreground because the layer is on the top. But if I change the position here, I will see the flower because now the flower is on the top. If I go here, I will see the face of the woman, and if I go here, I will see mask. You can change the name just like this. What you will be able to do also. You have the possibility to go right click and when you go right click, you will have different type of options. For example, you can change and lock the layers. You can select the layers. You can click here. Lock. Why it is useful because sometimes you want to work and when you will select something, you will dragging and moving, for example, the backgrounds, and this is why you can lock the layers. If you local here, for example, I log these layers, I can try to move, try to select. Nothing will happen for a simple reason that the layer is logged. If you want to unlock, you just need to click here or you can go right click, lock, and right click, deactivate lock here. You have also the options on this area, Tgal visibility, and thanks to that, you can remove the visibility of one layer or multiple layers clicking on this area. Now, if I want to duplicate the layer, I want to duplicate the face of the woman. You have two possibilities. The first possibility is to click on the layer, right click duplicate, right click duplicate. Thanks to that, I can position another one here, dus. The second possibility when you select a layer is to press control and left click. So directly here, control, left click, and I can duplicate these layers also in this way. Now I will rename the layers. I will change this one for woman number two, and I will change this one for woman number three, and I will repeat the process with the flower. I can position this flower in the midle and I can g right click here, duplicate, and position another one. So here, If I want to duplicate directly from this selection, I can press, click here also, control left click and duplicate, and I will increase the size just like this. Now I will change the name for flower number two, and here we'll change the name for flower number si. So as you can see, we have this one. We have this one, we have this one, this one, this one, this one, this one, this one. If you want to select multiple layers, it's possible. Whether you can, I can, for example, select all the face of the woman we shift directly from the selection panels. But in the layer, I can create selection also. First, I select everything. I go on the layer panel. If I want to select the S woman, I click on the first one, Control or shift, and I can click here, and I can click here, and I selected from the layer panels, the third layers. You can also select all the layers, you see the first one, shift, the last one here, and you will select thanks to that all the layers between the two, and I selected all my layers on this area, as you can see. When you use the right click, you will have more options. For example, something that you can do is to go right click here. When you go right click, You have the possibility also to delete the layer. If you want to delete any layer, you select the layers, and you can go right click and you can use delete. But when you have the right click here, for example here, you need to go the right click directly on the layers to have access to delete, so I can use delete, for example. If I want to recuperate, I will go on edit and do the options, you can also delete edits, and do edits, just like that. You can also click on the layers, and when you go on this area, you have the options, remove layers, just like that. Yeah. 15. Master layers part 2: We're going to continue with the layers. Something that we can do, we have seen how it's possible to work with the layers. You can classify your layers with a color code, and for this, when you click on the layers, right click, you can set a color code here. For example, this one I can put in blue, and now you can find the blue color just on the right. If I click here, right click, I can define this one like yellow. I can select my Sie woman layers and right click put another color like purple and select the sie flower layers and right click put, for example in red. So it's just a way to have a color code to indicate, for example, how you can organize your layers to show that, for example, he almost the same type of layers. This one, this one, also, this one or again this one. On each layer, I will show you details after, but you can change the opacity and the bland mode. For example, I slick my flower number one, so it means this one, and I can change the transparency just here, and thanks to that, you can create different type of effect. I can also change the bland mode. You click here and you have different types of options. The bland mode, thanks to that, you can have different mode of crystation with the layers on the backgrounds. Example I clic overlay, I will obtain this render for my flower, just like this. Let's come back with the selection tools, and I will come back here with normals. But I will explain this in details after. You can create also just a pixel layers. For this to create just a new pixel layer, you can click here, add the pixels layers. On this pixel layers, if for example, I wanted to use one of these tools like the pain brush tools, I'll define just a wide. Clic for example of color. If I just go on this area, we have the harness, also, I can increase to 100 just to start. If I just go here, I don't have the maximum of opacity. This is why we have this render. But I can paint like this, as you can see. We can change the harness also, change abs opacity, and you can just paint like this. When you paint, you need to be on a new pixels layer and you can see the element just here. Something that you can do also. If I just remove this one. You can also create new layers. I can see the rectangle tools, with a rectangle to create the rectangles here, define a color, and now we'll have a new shape layers. You can find the difference of the layer just on the left. Here, it means this is a pixel layers. Here it is a rectangle layer, so it means a shape layers. I can draw and move just the element here, and thanks to that, I can see the flower also, and I can create my rectangle just around this area. If you add a text, it will be a text layer. For example, I can click on my text tool, Dragon move W left click, and I will tape title. I can tape title here. If I want to use my selection tool, increase the size, and I can change the color for wise, just like this. And this is just a text layer. If I want to put this on the front, I can dragon move on this area, you can see the layer, so it means it is artistic exactly artistic text layers, just like this. Will be able to convert this element and to restorize this element, I will explain after. If I want to delete, you can press delete directly on the keyboard to delete this type of layers. Something that you can do also is to create new layers here. Add pix salt layers, and you can organize layer sub layers. It means I can select the swift flower here. And I can dragon move inside the pixels layers. If I dragon move inside this pixels layer, you will have the different flower. But in this type of case, it's not extremely interesting for the simple reason that it is hiding inside the pixel layers. In this case, it's not extremely interesting and it will be better to crato group. I will come back here just before to put this inside. This one I will remove, and it will be better to crato group. I can select my swi woman layers, right click and possibility to crato group or Control G. I will select this one, right click group. For example, this group I can put woman, just like this, and this group, I can put flowers. You can generate group like that, and thanks to that, you can just go one left click and you can select also elements of your group, you can resize. You can center also elements. It's pretty convenient for multiple way. If you want to ungroup, you click on here and right click n group or I can click here, right click and ungroup also. One of the last point is to merge the layers. When you click on the layers, right click, you have the possibility to merge or merge visible. If you just use merge D, you only merge with the layers just below. Thanks to that, I merge, all the flowers layers. Let's just come back, edit, and do, edit, and undo. If you want to merge all the layers, cilic, for example, the last one, right click merge visibles. Thanks to that, it is interesting because you keep all your layers here. But automatically he will craft a new layers with everything inside. For example, these layers have all the element in just one layer. These layers, it is just this one as you can see. We have all the elements inside one layers. It isn't interesting because you can keep the order layer, you can just hide if you need, and it is pretty convenient. Last point is, if you want to have access to more elements, you can go layers, but finally, you will find again the other type of sin. When you go neyer, you can create a new layer here. You can create also a new group. After you have other type of layer, but concretely adjustment layer will show you with adjustment, fill layer just to fill with a color. I will explain also how to work with a mask. One more time you can log the layer, nlog duplicate when you select, for example, a layers. You can unlock all also. You can hide, show show all, so you can merge, merge, merge selecting merge visible. You will find again the same type of options, even if sometime you have more options when you go here. So this is how you can focus on the layers. When I go on this area, don't forget that you can extend little bit the panels if you want to have more space on this area. You can extend little bit the panels. You can also click on a layer and when you go on this area, you will be able on a layer to add, for example, adjustment or to add an effect here. You can also group the layers directly from the panels. 16. Master masks part 1: Work with mask. We are going to see how to work with the mask. First, I selected different pictures, so I have this picture. I have also these pictures, these pictures, and these pictures. One of the first things to do will select the flowers. After to select the flowers, I will use a copy and paths. So first, let's select the selection brush tools. Left click, and we can create a selection of the flower. After to do this type of work, so I can paint, craft my selection. I have the possibility to copy the selection, edit, copy or control C, and I can go here, edit, and pass or control. I will come back just here and use the silt. After to do this type of work with my selection tools, I can move the flower and I will put the flower on the sky here, and I will zoom a little bit. How to work with the mask. First, I will double click here and change for I will rem, and I will take for example road, and this layer I will change for flower. To generate a mask directly your selector layers, and after two selector layers, for example, slice layers. After that, you can go on this area and you can find layer mask. After the mask is positioned directly on the right, and as you can see the color of this mask is wise. Why it is interesting to create a mask because it's totally non destructive to be able to erase or recuperate your image. Cupert layers. But it's non destructive because at any moment you can edit the mask again, and at any moment, if you want to delete the mask, you can. Because you have some tools, for example, you can use just eraser tools. You can use erase brush tools. When you use the erase bush tool, you increase, and if you don't have a mask, for example, here, I can go right click and I can delete the mask. If you don't have a mask, you can erase like this. After to arise, it's totally destrictive. If you want to come back, it's not possible expect with the historic panels. This is why I will come back here, and I will use instead to use this, I will use the mask. I will come back, Yes, just on this area, and I will be able to use the mask. So let's select these layers. Cratu mask. When the mask is in wise, you can select the pain brush tools, and if you want to a rise, you need to activate the black color on the for ground. You activate the black color, just see. After you have the different parameter for your brush, let's put 100100100. Concretely, the opacity, what is the opacity, it is the transparency. The flow is Just the number of time where you will apply the maximum of colors, and the hardness is to have blue to have a transition on the edge of your brush. So if I just syllx this, reduce little the wie of my brush. As you can see, will be able to rise, just like that, so here I can rise because I have the white color on I have the black color on a white mask. You can see here we can erase some of the layers. If I want to recuperate, I just need to invert the color, take the white color, and if I take the white color, I can recuperate. As you can see it's totally non destructive at any moment, you can come back here. Now why it can be useful. Because with your brush, you can add multiple type of effects. First, I can increase just like this. With your brush, you can apply multiple type of effect. For example, first, I can decrease the harness and just put the harness at 20% to have a transition on the edge of my brush. With the edge of my brush, now I invert for black color, and I can just arise a little with the edge of my brush. On this area of the flower first to create an effect. After to do this type of work, I can change the transparency, reduce. Let's put just 30%. If I put 30%, I can rise with some transparency. If I just stop, I want to apply again 30%, I can stop left click and redo again the astction, stop and redo again just like this. At any moment, I can invert for wise, set the parameter of my brush and I can reper some part also clicking using my brush tools. As you can say, you can create this type of interesting effect using this. Another thing, important to. You have the mask here, right click, you have different options. You can also click on edit the mask, and if you edit the mask, you can find directly the mask just like this. Is it useful? We don't use this too much, but you can do something like that. You can go right click one more time and you can edit mask again to come back to this view. If I remove my mask, you can click on the mask, so you select the mask here, right click, delete. Now you can create a mask and directly have this mask black. How to do this. You can click here and create a new mask layers. This mask in this wise. T fill the mask in black, you have two options. The first option is just to press I just to press A on the keyboard. When you press A on the keyboard, control A, control A, you can invert the mask. Now the mask is in black, as you can see. I. Come back, the second options. I just to select your paint field tools here. You select the black color on the for gun color and left click and you will fill the mask with the black color. If you fill the mask with the black color, automatically, you will hide all your layers. If you select the pain brush tool to recuperate some element, you will use the white color. You will set the opacity harness anything that you want here on the parameters, and I will be able to recuperate. Can decrease the opacity and create some effect just like this. I want to repare the maximum, I can put 100 on all my brush options, and I can recuperate the maximum of my layers just here. You can also do the opposite process, so you can start with a black mask and after you can paint with a white color, or you can start with the white color and paint with a black and use a black color to paint and to ei or recuperate, it depends up if you have a black mask or if you have a white mask. Let's just go right click and delete this one. This is the basic to create a mask. Anyway, we focus. I will explain in different example how to repeat this process. But the most important thing is definitely to go this ba. Some things that we're going to do is to slick these layers, and I will just delete these layers. After I will take another example because we'll use these pictures, and we will use also this pictures to show you that it's possible to work differently. 17. Master masks part 2: We're going to continue with the layer mask. We have seen how to use the mask and something that we will do is to see another example. So to see another example, I will take this picture first, and also I will take this pictures. So let's create a selection of all the layers. In this case, you don't need to create a rectangle of selection. You can just go and edit, copy, and automatically, you can copy all the layers. And I will go on these pictures and edit and pass all the layers. After I will use the selection tools, resize and put this on the corner on the top left corners, and after I will select this corner to extend until to up turn this render. So I would like to create the effect using the mask. I will just rename first to hear we change for sum. This one, I will change for women. After to do this type of work, I will create a mask. I will click here, and I will create a mask. As I explained before, the mask is in wise. If I slick my brush tools, and I apply the black color on the foreground color, just like this, so here I can check the black color. I will be able to rise. For example, here I would like to create a transition. I have the possibility if I do this, as you can see to rise, you can switch and you can recuperate just doing this type of work. It's totally non destructive. Some thing that I can do is to decrease here this value of the hardness like 20. On this area, I will increase a little the size of my brush. I can increase a little bit more. And thanks to that with the edge of my brush. I need to silic the black color, I will be able to create this type of transition just like this. As you can see now, it's more interesting. If I want to create some specific effect, I can then decrease the opacity like 20, increase a little bit more, the size of my brush. After we can paint just like this and I can paint a little bit more. Every time I will have a opacity of 20%, just like this. You can make this type of effect transition using this type of mask, as you can see. But something that you can do, you can also directly apply a gradient. But first before you see that, I will click on this mask and right click Delete. You can do the opposite process. You can craft a mask and you can press control to invert the mask, control, and I will invert the mask. Now we don't see the layer because the mask is in black and I can invert for the white color. Now I can recuperate using I have the same opacity and harness. Thanks to that, I can recuperate some effect, as you can see, and I can paint like that. I can switch black color and I can pull this on this area one more time to try the best things here. It's just to do something like this. Now if you want to create a transition with a gradient, I will select my mask and right click delete. I will gun the left and on the left, I will create a transition. So first, I create a mask. The mask is in wise, and I will select my gradient tools. Thanks to the gradient tools, you select what type of gradient you want, and I can select linear gradient. Thanks to that, you can go left click and you can start the two point. To edit the color of your gradient, you need to go here on the options. As you can see, you can select the first point and the first point you can go on color. And here on one of the corner, you can sect the black color, and you select the second point, you go color, and you go on the corner, the top left corner, for example, to select the white color. Now I have a gradient black to wise. If I change, I have steel my gradient tool, if I change the position of the gradient on this direction, as you can see, it's not really what I want to do. I will change the white color on the left, and I will pull the black color on the right. You pull too much, you will see this line here. This is why I will redut and I will pull the black point around this area. Here on this ay depends I can extend or I can reduce. It depends on the effect that I want. Something that you can do also is to move the midle point here to change your type of effect. For example, I can extend, do something like this, and I can dragon move this point or I can extend outside and drag and move little bit this point maybe around this area. You can see the gradient appearing directly on the mask. At any moment, you can also click here, and if you want to change the midpoint, just the gradient option, you can work like this. Don't forget that you can also change the opacity of the layer. If for example, I'm satisfied I can stay like this. But if I'm not satisfied I can just click on the layers, and I have also the possibility to reduce the opacity after. I have also the opacity to change the bland mode after. For example, I can use screen, I will see just a little bit, or I can just come back to normals. So it is interesting, and as you can see, just one layer, one mask, we can create this type of render. It's very fast, and you can use the gradient. If I want to complete, so here I use a graduate. But if I needed to complete, I can click on my mask and I can come back with my brush. At any moment, I can complete with one more time is or black. If I come back with here the wise, I can recuperate more effect. Here we have a opacity of 100. Let just decrease, I can come back to 100 to 20%, and if I want to recuperate bit more effect just on this area, it's definitely possible. And if I want to rise more, I switch to the black color, and if I want to rise more here with 20%, I can also complete using my brush. This is how to work with the mask. It's very pretty convenient and interesting features. As I explained it's non destructive, so at any moment, you can go right click, and if you want, you can also hide the mask. Hide the mask, keep the mask, but only hide. Sometimes it is interesting, so you only hide the mask and you can see your layer at the base, and you can come back with the mass. You can also go right click and at any moment you can delete the mask and thanks to that, you can recuperate your layers exactly like at the beginning. Totally non destructive. It's okay with the layers. With the mask layers. 18. Master blend modes: We are going to see the blend mud. For this, I selected these pictures, I selected these pictures and I selected these pictures. To see the blend mode, one of the first things to do. It is to create a selection here, and we will create a selection in the sky. For this, I will just use the rectangle selection tool, create a frame of selection just here, and edit, copy this selection. I will go on this area, and edit and just pass the selection. After to do this type of work again dragon move here and extend a little bit until to go until the line of horizon. What is the bland mode and why it is interesting. Here on these layers, you can use a bland mode to create different type of effect on the layers on the backgrounds. For this, when you go in this area, first, you can understand that it's possible to decrease the opacity. Thanks to that, you can have a transition between the two layers and you can obtain this render. Maybe I can change it little bit the position, and I think like this, it will be pretty better. Second options, it is to work with the bland mode. The aim is not to show you all the bland mode. It depends really about the circumstance, and depending on that, you can select the bland mode that it is the most useful or the best depending of what you want to do. You have a lot of options here that you can use. For example, let's select one of these. I will select something like hard light just like that, and I will obtain this render. You can see before, and now with this layers and the bland mode. Now, let's see another example. I will remove this part. Something that I will do is to click here and select the flower. I will use the selection brush tool. Zoom metal bit and left click. You can stay left click and you can apply multiple time left click to create a selection of the flower just like this. And I will copy this selection. Edit, copy the selection, go here, edit and pass the selection. I will reduce it a bit position this element this time around the ocean, and I can one more time decrease the opacity, for example, to obtain this render, but I can also change the blend mode. I will click on this area and one more time, I have different type of options. Something that I can do is to for example, I can sell this time, why not soft light. As you can see automatically, you have crustation effect of your element. If I duplicate, for example like this, can duplicate multiple times, and I can obtain this render. This is a type of thing that you can do, and we use this bland mode. Another example of the bland mode is, you can add something like, for example, shapes, and you can use the bland mode also. I can use my rectangle tool just here, and I can crate the rectangles on this area. If I put the rectangle at the level of the sky, I can define a color of these rectangles. Depending on what I want to do, I can one more time change and apply a blend mode. And let's silic something like overlay and I can obtain this render. If I des activate the rectangle before after, before, after, or I can switch also the rectangle maybe on the ocean to have a different type of blue color. I can put this one here. I decrease little bit, the transparency. Here I silic this layers, change a little bit of transparency with this value, and thanks to that, I can reinforce the blue of the ocean using this type of methods. You can also just on the top crate like a screen effect. What does it mean? It means I can remove this one, I can select the rectangle tools, crate the rectangle just on the top of these layers, and I will define something like the red color. After to do this type of work, I can change here and I will select different type of plan mode if I select something like screen, I will obtain this render. It's pretty convenient. You can create this type of effect just adding a shapes, and after to add this shapes, you can change the plan mode. You can also focus on the opacity just clicking here. So it says how to work with the bland mode. After the is not to explain all the bland mode, it depends really about the situation, the circumstances, and what you want to do for your work. 19. Create groups: We are going to see how to create a groups, and for this, I created this document first and we will add a rectangles. Let's select the rectangle tool, create a rectangle on this area, and I will replace with a different color so you can activate a color here f, and I will define the red color for this rectangle. After to do this type of work, I will extend at a bit here on this area. And this rectangle, I will duplicate with control and left click control and left click. Now as you can see, I have three different rectangle. Something that I can do first is to select all my rectangles, and I will go on the aligment panels, and here you can find different type of options, and I can also click here and activate directly the aligment, adding Mdels, and the distribution space horizontal. Put this in the center. After to do this work, I have the three different rectangles, and I can create a group. How to create a group, you select the layers that you want. Here or on this area, and you have different options. You can create a group from this panel, first, group layers. And thanks to that, now you have inside different element. Why it is interesting to create a group, you have different reasons. We the first reason can be to organize your layer panels. Another reason is when you go one left click here, you will select all the group and you can move all the elements of your group. You can also scale all the elements of the group, you can create a rotation or all the elements of your group in just one time because you have created a group. You can also center. For example, if I here, I can decide to center my group, and it's okay because I created a group. If you don't have a group, all the rectangle will go in the center. So it's not pretty good, so this is why it can be useful to create a group also. After to do this type of work, you have a group here, you can rename your group. For example, I can take group number one. Something important if I want to change the color of all the element of my group, I can just click on the group, and I can change with a color just like this, and it will be applied on all the element of the group. But if I want to edit only one rectangle, it's possible. Instead to go one left click, you double click, and when you double click, you can enter and select only one of the rectangle. If I want to change that, or if I want to change the color of this one, it's possible. You can also on your layer panel directly select one element of the group. Let's just come back with the same color. I'll click on the group, fill options, and I will define the red color. If I want to duplicate this group, I can click on this one and right click, I can from the layer panel, it's precipitor, right click and duplicate. I created an oder group. I can change the color, just like this. And duplicate again, right click duplicate, change the color, and right click duplicate again with duplicate and change with another type of color, let o sic green color. I can rename my different group, so this will be the group number two. This will be the group number, and this one will be the group number four. If I want to alig my different group, it's great because if you are near rectangle, it's not pretty good. Here I can select my four groups. In my four groups, I can define the ligment, and for the space just like this. I can define center and center. As you can see, this is what happens when you click on center and center. It's not pretty good. If for example, I have this, and I define center like this, all the group will go in the center. This is why if I want to center everything, I need to create another group. I select the group one, group two, group, and group four, right click, group or Control G, and now I created another main group. So this is my general group, as you can see. Can tape group Object, just like that. And inside, I have multiple group, and I have my four group inside. Now, if for example, I want to center, I click here center and center, and it's going to work properly because I have a main group. If you want to un group, you can go right click and you have un group, right click and ungroup, or you can click here, right click, and you have also the possibility to un group and ungroup. What is the difference? If you just click on un group here, I will just come back with my four different groups. I'm going to show you again and do the last action until to come back like this with a group of all the object. And the second possibility when I click here is to go right click ungroup Hall. In this case, I will ungroup all the groups that I have to recuperate only all the rectangles. This is how to work with the group. If I take another example like this one in the flower, I will select the flower with my selection tools. I will click on the selection brush tools and create a selection like this. After to do this type of work, I will go and edit, copy the selection. I will just go here, edit, and pass the selection. I will reduce it to bit the flower, and I would like to have different flower and create to group. First things to do, I can duplicate control, left click and control left click just like this. If I want to c a complete group, one more time, I can rename, for example flower number one. This one I can rename for flower number two. This one Flower number S. Maybe I can complete and I can reduce my different flowers, position ones here, position another ones here. And duplicate again and control duplicate again, increase it to be the size. This will be the flower number four, and this will be the flower number five. And I want to crate a group. I select all the layers. Whether I can use this panels or I can crate a frame of selection in this case. Control G or click group, the selection. I have one element. It means if I click here, I can drag and move all the element in one times. I can also scale all the elements because I have the group. But if I want to change only one flower, it's possible just double click and you can enter inside the group and I can move only one flower, I'll reduce the size. It's possible for a simple reason that I enter inside the group. If I want to ungroup, I click here, right click, ungroup or ungroup all. In this case, the two will be exactly the same, and I ungroup this different element. 20. Master positions: Position a object, and it is important to understand because you can position a object for grown background. Concretely, when you will have element on your lear panels, you can change the position. So one of the first things that I'm going to do is to go on file here, and I will place an image. And I will select just an image that I will put on the background that's it, so I will silic for example, this image with the road. And I will go left click here to increase my image. And after to do this type of work, I will position like this in the center. So now we have a layer, just these layers placed here, and I will define rectangles on the top and create a rectangle on this area. I will change with a different color. At the same time, something that I will do is to also ado ellipse. I will go in this area, cryo ellipse, and I will define a color like the white color. I will change a little bit the ratio and put something like this. I will define my text tool artistic text tool, tape something here, and I will tape title. I will use my selection tools, change the color for wise, just like this, and I will increase the title just here. Maybe I can change the title on this area. I will select my artistic text tool again, just crit something here and just put content. And this content, I will change the color for the black color and put content in the middle of the circle like that. So something important to understand, I will define maybe d one, it's the butt I'm going to stay like this to start. As I explained before in the layer panels, the element, the most on the bottom here is on the back. So concretely, if I take my image and put here, my image will be on the front. And if I just drag and move from one step, I can see content now. No step, I can see title, another step. I can see my circle also, and here we'll be able to see all the other element. You have also the possibility is when you select an element, if you go right click, you have the possibility to have access to arrange, and you can move to front, move forward one, and you can use also this type of element. For example, if I use a move to front, just here, as you can see the element, move to the front, if I go right click arrange, move to back, I will go to tally on the back, but you can also do just from one step so I can go right click. Range, move to front, right click range, and move back one, one step. Right click range. Move back one, just one step, right click range. Move back one, just one step again. Range, move back one, just one step. So it is important to understand. Extremely useful also when you want to create a Nitro wing with multiple element. Can be very interesting to use this type of tools. For example, a cat rector girl just here, and these rector girls, I will put the green color. And I will convert these rector girls to a curves, so I will define convert to curves, and I will add one point here, one point here. I will also Dragon move this sprain, Dragon moves this point, Cylic this point, convert to smart, sylx this sprain, convert to smart also. So thanks to that, I can turn this render. If I have different type of element to add. For example, I want to add something on the back, I can use one more times my pain tools, and I can just do something like this. With my pain tools. And if I do something like that, I just apply a color like for example, this type of color. As you can see were on the front directly, because I just created like a new curve layer. So I need to put this on the back, so generally you can drag and move the limen from your layer panels just like this. But generally what I'm doing it is to a right click range, move to back directly. If for example, I define an ellipse, so I will create an ellipse just here. I will define ellipse on this direction, maybe here, and I will define like darker green color. Or put this one just here, put this one here, put this one here. But I want this one be between this element. Something that I can do is to click here. If I go right click range, I can move back one back one and click here range Move only back one, click here range. Move on ops for that one. So range move back one, right click range. Move back one. Oops, right click. Range, move back one, but it's not enough, so I need to continue arrange move back one, just like this and right click range, move back one. Here you can work with the layer panel, but sometimes it's not extremely convenient if you have a lot of layers to re per it, so you can also do something like this. It is same fc to rectangles. Here, the rectangle will appear on the top. If I want this rectangle on the bottom, you can just dragon move my rectangle here or just right click range. Move to back. So thanks to that, you can change the display of your different element, and definitely it is something very convenient. So not many more things to do when you crat example drawing, or also just work with the layers. You can draw and move the layer here to change the position. Or you can go right click here. You have access to range, you have also the shortcut, if you prefer to use the shortcut, you can use a shortcut. And you can use move to front, move forward, one, move back one, move to back. 21. Shape selections: We are going to see how to create selections with shapes. For this, we can go on this area and we have different shapes selection. One of the first things that we can do is to select the rectangular selection tools. Concretely, what is the base? If I just work on this document, you use the rectangular selection tools, and you can create a rectangle of selection just like this. This rectangle of selection after you can drag and move because you have a cursor, and you can drag and move the selection. Important to understand for each selection, it's also for the different tools of selection. You can have different mod. By defod, this is a new mode you can find add mod, substrate, and intersect. If I stay on the new mode by default, and I crit the rectangle again, the rectangle will replace the last rectangle. But I can complete my selection with ad, and in this case, I will craft another dctngle, and I will add a new rectangle to the existing rectangles. I will be able to click on substract in this case, I can substract rectangle to the existing rectangles, or I can use intersect, and in this case, I will intersect my rectangle to the last rectangle. This is the first thing to understand. Let's take a concrete example. When you go on this area, you have some options, select all, di select, and invert selection. Again deselect here. When I go on this area, if you want, for example, just to select all, you can select all the layers, and here you can deselect, and here we'll be able to invert. If I use again my rectangular selection tools, and I want to select the part with the sky. I can create a rectangle of selection like this. But if for example, it's not enough, can drag and move my selection, but something that I can do, is to click on ad, and I can create another rectangle to complete my existing rectangle just like this. If I want to replace, I click on new, and I can create a new rectangle of selection. Concretely, you can make adjustment with these different options. I created this selection. If I want to invert, I can invert, just like this. If you want to remove the element on your selection, you presented lit on the keyboard. Now I have this part on transparency background, and I can use D silt. You can do exactly the same thing with order type of basic sheps. For example, I'm going to come back with undo de silect and undo delete, click here. So I have also the example. If I select this one, you can just use the Elliptical Marquee selection tool. Concretely with this one, you can only create ellipse or a circle if you prefer. And if you press shift, you will constrain to have a circle. If you don't press shift, you will have on your rectangle. It is the same way. After that, I can drag and move. If I want to add, I can add another ellipse, as you can see, just like this. If you want to substrate, you can substrate another ellipse, and if you want to create an intersection, you can create an intersection. Something that I'm going to do to click here and de select. Other type of tool that you can use, it is a colon market tools. With a colon market tool, what you can do, you just define a colon with a wide on this area. You enter the wide that you want here. If for example, I want to create a colons with 400 pixels. I enter the value of 400, and after to do this type of work, if I just go one left click, automatically you create a colon with a constraint of 400 pixels. I will have a 400 pixel wide and I will have a total lane just like that. You change here and I put 200, it's going to not work for this one. It's going to work for another one depending of the mod. But something that you can do also, I'm going to show you. Now I have 200. I can use my ud here and create a new rectangles. Here I can see this mod and define rectangle for example here. I can click on add and I can craft an oder one, click on add an der one, or add ander one just like this. If I press delete, as you can see, we turn this type of render. So something that I'm going to do is to come back because you can do exactly the same thing using these tools, and you have also the row Market tools. It is exactly the same way. With this tool, you define the eight. This time I define maybe 300, and you select the mode, you, for example, and I can start with my tool just like this. And one more time, I can go on the options. So we can just create a frame of selection, but you apply a constraint. This is only difference. Let's click on undo here and de select. H After that, something that we can do we have also this tool, the free end selection tools. Inside the free end selection tools, we have different modes. First, I will select another picture like this one. Concretely, what you can do with this tool, so you click on the tools, and as you can see, you have the type. And by default, it is three nd, but you can use polygonal and magnetic. If I just select the three end, concretely, you can add multiple point just like that. If I want to just cra selection, a fast selection on the part of the phase, I can just go here, and even if you don't finish, automatically, you will close the selection. For example, if I wanted to take this part to put, for example, on another face, it's possible I created this type of selection. But one more time, it is the same, you can use the mode add. It means if I want to add a part, I can go here. And I can add a new part. You can add any thing that you want, just like this. You can also just turn and thanks to that, you can do this type of work. I can just turn nest or here I think it's not convenient. You can also remove. You click on substrate. If you click on substrace, you go inside, you will be able to remove, but sometimes you need to turn for example here or for example here one more times. You can also remove and substrate and the last thing is intersection, but in this case, it's not very useful to use intersection. You can change also the mode for polygonal, and If you click on polygonal, you add multiple segment. Concretely, you add multiple lines like this. It is the same type of word, but you can add multiple line. Don't forget that you can also do this with pen tools. Here, it's not working because I need to validate ne again. I can go here and you can do something. First, if you press enter, you will be able to validate your selection. Let's just de select and the last option is mageti. When you click on Mnetic, concretely, he will define some edges. Automatically if you go left click and you Go in this area automatically, if you stop the left click, he will try to define intersection and he will add multiple points for you. Is it really useful? Personally, I don't use this too much, but it's just interesting to know, and you can use this type of work, but think it's not very convenient to have a good precision in this type of example if you use, for example, the free and selection tools. So multiple way to create selections. As you can see, if I want to make something simple, I sick my rectangle tools, and I can just create a frame of selection here. I will click on substract to substrate phrase example this part. Edit copy. I will go here, edit, and pass or control C control V, position this element just here, scale little bit, and I will select these pictures, rectangular selection tools, Qt a frame of selection here, edit, copy or control C, go here, edit, and pass or control V. I will position my element here, scale on these directions, and I will be able to crato montage with these two rectangular selection. 22. Flood selections: We are going to see how to create selection with the flout selection tools. We can find this tool here, flout selection tools, and I selected different pictures. First, I'm going to work on these pictures after we'll work on this one, and then with this one. If I take this picture first, I will click on this tool. One more time you can find the different mode, so it means new mode, add mode, substrate, and intersect mode. You can define the toleon. The most important things here is the tolerance. Concretely, if I start with 20% and I want to select the face of the woman, I will focus on the back round. I will go left click here. As you can see, we can select this part on the back round. But it depends of your tolerance. For example, if I click on d silect, and I reduce my tolerance just like this. If you reduce the tolerance, you will have more precision just like this. But in this case, it's not very useful. This is why if I increase the tolerance here, just like that, I will have less precision. This is why he will have something bigger about the selection. Depending you need to define a tolerance. Something that I will do here to click on D select. I will change the toll rounds around 20 was pretty good by default, and left click here. I can invert the selection, invert. Now I selected this part, I can go for example, an edit copy, go here, edit and pass, and I can find the face of the woman here, I can resize if I need, and I created this selection. Now, let's see a second example. I will click on this area and one more time I can use this tools. If for example, you want to select the flower. It will be not pretty convenient. Here I selected this one. Let's click on the select. I can reduce the tolerance. In this case, I will have more precision, but as you can see it difficult, it's not enough. If I increase my value, I will have too much I will have not enough precision. Here, I cannot select anything. Yes, just like that. Don't forget that you can also complete. For example, you can define a value. You can select new and you start with this. After you can continue with add. If you continue with add, I can click again until to define the flower, but here for example is too much. Maybe I can go on this area. It's too much again, you can do this type of work. In this case, the best thing to do is to I will go and add and I will select the back rounds just like that. As you can see, it's pretty better. Don't forget that if I go here, so I selected the back rounds. And I can click on add. If I go on this area, I can add also here add here on the back room, but here for example is too much. Don't forget that you can mix with different tools. I can use also the selection brush tool, and with the selection brush tool, I can click on subtract or ad. If I click on add in this case, I can complete with these tools. As you can see, you can mix different tools together is definitely not a problem. If I come back to my flute selection tools. Now the Brood is selected, If I want to select the flower, I invert the selection, and for example, edit copy or control C, go here, edit, and pass or control V. Now I have this flower selected. So Let's see my last example. And I will sling my flute selection too. If I want to select the sky, it will be pretty fast. I can define around 20%, left click here on the sky, so I need to come back to new mode left click. The layer is not selected. This is why it was not working properly. Now if I go left click as you can see it's to too much on this area. This is a reason for which maybe I can reduce to have more precision, and if I redo, I will obtain this render. It's not enough, but I can complete with ad. Left click here, left click here. And left click on the angle, but I think it's okay, maybe one left click here, and I can complete. Now I selected this part if I press delete on my keyboard, D select. I think the selection is pretty good. Something important also if I just come back around here and de select. You have contigus. It means the area need to be contiguous, but if you deactivate this, you can for example silic here. At the same time, you will silic here because we have a range of color on this area and we have the same range of color on this area. This is why it is important to understand that here, for example, if I want to silic the sky, it's not going to be convenient if you deactivate contigruous. Anyway, most of the time we will use contigous. But sometimes we can not use contiguous, but the most of the time definitely contiguous will be perfect. This is why by default, it is activated. If I click here or anything like this, he will define a multiple area with the same range of color. If I just want the sky, I just need to click on Conti gros, and I will replace the selection, just click here. I think I can increase the tolerance, maybe around 70, and I can try to replace the selection, complete with this one, click here and click here. I the sky is perfectly crop if I press delete on my keyboard, D select. We can remove this area. If I only tell it as you can see it, it's great. We have really very and interesting selection. Even for the part with the tree, as you can see, it's very nice and you almost don't need to make anything more because definitely the tools are very powerful. It's okay with this selection. In a different example, we will use this tool because a lot of time we need. I definitely every time when you want to select something in the back rounds, you just have one color or the same type of range of color. You can use this tool. I think it is the most convenient because in one left click, you can definitely select all the element. Here it is the same. If I select, I'll just go one left click on the part outside, it's convenient. I can complete with a tool. For example, these tools. And I can complete, for example here here, and you can complete with another tool is going to be perfectly working. You can even complete with the shape selection tools, crateric tangle, circle, any things like this. You can complete with the different selection tool. 23. Flood erase selections: We're going to see how to craft selection with the fluid eraser tools. For this, when I go in this area, I can find fluid erase tools. With the fluid erase tools, concretely, what you will be able to do, it's pretty fast, he will define contrast with element like the foreground and contrast with element like a backgrounds, and automatically you can put this on a transparent backgrounds. The only thing that you need to set, it is the tolerance value. For example, if I start with 20% and I go left click here, don't forget to select your layers, and as you can see automatically, he will put this on the transparent backgrounds. Now, let just increase the percentage. I will increase the percentage and Net click, and as you can see, we have less precision and because we have less precision, in this type of case, it's not really good. Let just reduce the percentage to for example six. If I just valid it, maybe it's not enough because this is not taking this one, not taking count. But you can complete also if you want and continue with your tools. If I just come back with my history panels, here, let's just come back at the moment where I was on these directions. In this case, I think around 20% will be great and I use left click. You can complete with these tools, but if it's not working properly, one more time you can switch with another tools. In this case, one more time you can just complete with erase brush tools. You select the size and you can complete and you can erase the parts that you need if you want to complete, just like this. If I want to change the color on the back rooms, as I was explained before, we can create a new layers, put these layers on the back, and I will replace the color using this tool, the flood field tools. I will define a color like, for example, this color, blue color, and I can put the blue color on the back rooms. So this is another way to create selection. Is it good? Is it less good th order, it depends on the situation, even if personally I prefer to focus more on the flood selection tool or on the selection brush tool to create the selection. But you have also this possibility. If I just click on this area, let's also try this tools. So I will use one more times the flud as tools. If I apply 20%, I think, it's pretty good. Now I can increase the tolerance, and as you can see it's too much, If I decrease the tolerance with maybe 4%. As you can see it's not enough because he's not able to take this and take this even if we can complete after it's definitely possible. We can do this type of work in multiple way. If I just come back here definitely with a value of 20%, by default, I think it was a good value and ops, it's not working properly. Oops, I'm going to come back because here, I think I didn't do let's try with Let's just try with this value. Let's come back with this tool fluid isor tools, decrease the tolerance, let's just put 24, maybe S 28. Let's just try as. Now it's going to properly. It was detail strange. I think it's good with this type of selection. If one more time, I want to change the color on the backgrounds. You can also feel on this area. But definitely the best thing to do it to work on a different layer. Add the pixel layers. Put these layers on the backgrounds here, so that means on the bottom on the layer panels, and after I can define a color. By select for example this color, I will use the flout select field tools, and I will go left click to change the color on the background. As I've explained, it is just another way to create selection, but you cannot improve the selection. It's not possible to improve the selection. Sometimes it's not extremely good. As you can see when you are on the edge, I think about the tool, it's not extremely good. So This is why I think my advice in this type of case when you have this type of background. Definitely, I think it's more oritic to use the flute selection tools or to use the selection brush tool. Because I think about the selection, it's a little pretty better, and at the same time, you have the possibility to improve the selection. If it's not perfect, you have the posy to improve the selection. When you use this tool, it's not possible to improve the section. This is a selection tool, but at the same time the base is to craft a transparent background. It's a little different even if, I think you can use this as a selection tool also. A 24. Erase brush selections: We are going to see how to create selection with the background eraser tools. For this, we can see the background eraser tools here. This is a background eraser brush, and concretely what you can do, we're going to select this one. When you click on this element, you will define contrast between some elements and different type of element, and we can use a brush to create a transparent backgrounds. I will go on the wide option here because the first thing to do, it is to define the size of your brush, after you can focus on the opacity, flow, and hardness one more times. If I only little bit on my pictures, and I use the left click here on this area, first I slick my layers. Left click. As you can see, automatically he will detect the contrast. You can see the preview at the same time and every time when you go left click, he will try to find the contrast. But I can also increase my wide for the brush. Here. Something important is also the tolerance because here we have a tolerance. Concretely, if you increase at the tolerance and you put your brush like this as you can see it's going to go on the flower. It's not really what I want to do, but if I decrease too much the tolerance, it will be almost impossible because here he's not too bad, but sometimes as you can see here it's not going to detect or maybe I can try this one, try this one, so you need to set also the tolerance. Thing that can do it to increase a little bit, and here on this area can turn around the flower and he will try to do something like this. You can put the background on transparent just like that. One of the problems, sometimes it will be pretty difficult, so you can reduce the white. Honestly, we don't use this tool too much. I think we can create selection in a different way, for example, here it's difficult to select this one. One of the best things to do if you want to complete is you can switch to another brush, and here you can select the eraser brush too. This is a basic eraser brush and here you don't have any constraint. You don't have constraint, you don't have the possibility to work. With a specific value, so I can just increase my wide, just like that, and I can erase all the backgrounds if I need. Can rise here, rise here, all these directions. If you want to complete, one more time, you don't have to forget that you can mix different tools together. For example, I can just do something like this. If I reduce my brush, I can zoom little bit on this area, and I can also rise here. Let's your second example. I have this profile as I explained before, definitely if you use the flute selection tool or even if you use the selection brush tool, it will be one of the best to crop this surface of the woman. But you can also use this tool. Backgrounds a rice brush tool. One more time you will detect the contrast. Something that I will do first, it is to increase the wild just like this. After I will define my tolerance. About the tolerance, let's start with the around 20%. And I will be able to put my brush just here. And on this area, I can phrase on parle turn all around the face of the woman. Here maybe it's not working properly. Some things I can try to do to reduce the size of the brush. But even if I reduts, yes, now it's working it's better on this area. After to turn around, one more time, the best things to do is to use the eraser brush tool and you can complete on the back rounds. You increase the brush and here I think it's too much and need to reduces, and you can just paint all the order area, and you will arrive on a transparent back rounds. In the two case, if for example, after you want to feel with the color, you want to change the color backgrounds, you can create new layers just like this. Place these layers just here. With the fut feel selection tool, you can, for example, define a color. I will obtain this render. But as you can see the selection is not extremely good it by opinion. If I'm here, I can create a new layers also. Put this layer on the back roots first, define a color like this one, and with these tools, I can feel maybe I can change a little bit the color and feel like this. 25. Refine selections: We are going to see how to refine selection. For this, I selected this picture first and second, we will work on these pictures. First with this one, we will be able to see the basics, and after with this one, we'll be able to see more advanced features. First with this picture, I'm going to create a basic selection, and for this, I will use the selection brush tool. With a selection brush tool, I will increase the tol bit the size of my brush, silico mod add and left click here to crop the most important part of the dog. I can go here, I can complete on this area, I can complete on this area, and maybe I can complete the tole bit on this area also. As you can see, we have this selection, and the principle to refine selection first is Automatically, you will have features. Here you can find refine. You can find refine here. If for example, I invert the selection just here and I press delete, I will obtain this render. But as you can see, it's not pretty good on this area. Something that I will do is to go and edit undo delete and edit undo invert the selection, and I will select refine. After to refine the selection, if you don't touch to anything, so it means we have adjustment brush tools, you will have automatically something that we call a border wide. And automatically, what you will be able to see is that automatically, we have smooth the edges. The edges here are smooth with a border white of 10%. Here it allows you to smooth using a border wide value. And here we have 10%. You can also smooth a little bit more using these features, but if you use too much, as you can see, you will turn this render. If you want to see better, you have also different preview options. This is the overlay preview. You can find the black preview. Is mat, black en wise and transparent. If I select, for example, the black mat just like this, and I activate smooth. As you can see, you can find the difference and definitely it's too much. If you select feaser, just like this, automatically, it's interesting if you want to create a little transition between your selection, and for example, the elements that you are going to select. Here is a ramp something little bit specific. You can extend little bit your selection just like that, but be careful when you use this one. By default, we just have a border y to smooth little bit here. For example, I can increase little bit, maybe 20%, and you extend little bit and smooth at the same time even if you have the smooth option here, but when you change the border wy, you can see little the difference, you can apply and now it's little bit different. It means if I invert my selection and I press delete on the keyboard, as you can see the render is not the same that before. Let's click on and do. This is the basics to no. And I will come back to here and D s. Now let's see a second example with this example. It is a great example because if I zoom a little bit as you can see it's not easy to crab this type of air. We are going to try to crab the maximum of air and to keep the maximum of details here we refine the selection. So first, let's create the selection of the back rooms. I will click here flout selection tools. I will define a tolerance value and we will just use 20% that we use the most of the time. Left click here. As you can see it's not very interesting, I will click on you. Left click here. And here, it's not extremely interesting. Left click here. It's not working very properly. So I will increase my value and one left click here. Here, it's not the case, I need to change one more time of value. Let's work maybe with 30%. And click on this area. Yes. I think 30% will be great. So I selated this part and now I will invert the selection. So I I just press delete here, whoops, I will delete with invert delete. I will obtain this render and if I little bit, this is not selected. We can see the wise background on this area is not pretty good also. This is why I need to refine the selection. I will go and ed it and do, and I will invert the selection first. The face of the woman is selected. I can apply a refine. After to apply a refine, one more time, I can sil different type of preview, and we can see the default here. I can change wise met, black and white, and transparent. If I silic overlay, you can see the default here, we have the white background, we have the white background here, and we don't have too much irate. Something that you can do is to use the adjustment brush tool. What is the adjustment brush tool? Concretely, if I zoom a little bit. Here this is fiser you can just select the size of your brush. The most important is mate, I show you fiser here you can create a transition. If you select back round concretely, you will remove selection just like this. And this is not what I want to do. If you slick for gro, you will recuperate selection. I think you need to be extremely careful about this element for a simple reason that it wasn't going to be perfect. I think the best things to do is to create properly the selection first and to only work with the adjustment brush and matt, and you are going to understand why. So I will come back here, Silic Matt. And with the matt option, what you can do. When you have something like this, you just need to paint on this area and you paint with your brush, and you will see what happens on this area, and automatically he's able to remove the white backgrounds here and to crop in a better way the different hairs. When you have something like this, you just need to take your brush and you take your brush on the different area where you want to increase your selection. Generally on all this part, we will use the brush. I can also try to parse on this part. You can do this in one step, but you can do this also in multiple steps. I think it's pretty better, and I can go on this area, and it is same, I can just use my brush. Maybe I can continue little bit here on this area also, and I can stop first to obtain the render. Maybe I can pull little bit here. As you can see, it's definitely really better when you refine the selection and you have something little difficult to select, like for example, this type of errors, just like that. So now it's definitely better. You can one more time, change here and check the different value, let just select overlay. When you are satisfied on your work, you have different output options, whether you stay on the selection mode, but you can also create a mask, create directly a new layer with this selection on a new layer with mask. Lets just keep selection, apply, and automatically my selection in realize. As you can see, you have so much more details on this area. If I want to remove the backgrounds, I will invert the selection. So now I just need to invert, and I will press delete. On my keyboard and then de select with de select options. As you can see it's pretty good, let's add the backgrounds. I will just click on this area and create a new layers, and on these new layers, I will fill with a color. Float field tools, select a color first position the layer on the back to see the face of the woman and define a color and I can go left click here to change the color. If I Zoom little as you can see it's pretty good about the selection, we don't have all the airs, but the quality is really good, and we can change. Let's put something little in yellow, and you can define the color that you want if you want to change the backgrounds, just like this. 26. Clone selections: Clone selection. For this, we can use this tools. This is a clone brush tools. One of the first things that I'm going to do is to duplicate the layer, so right click and duplicate the layers. After to do this work, you have the possibility to clone selection. When I use these tools, clone brush tools, what you will be able to do. Concretely, you can set the parameters of your brush. I will increase the size of my brush. First, little bit here. I think it's not enough. Let's focus around 180. After to do this type of work, I can work on the opacity, flu and harness. At the beginning, I will start with the harness of 100. You can even add a stabilizer if you need. Something that I can do it is to define first a source. To do this to define the source, you need to select Alt plus left click. If for example, I wanted to erase this wise line, I can define a part of the road and put this on the wise line. Let's just decrease a little bit the wise again. For example, if I go here, if you click here automatically, he will define a message like what, you must to use helpless click to set a source before trying to code. And I will press out left click and I define this source. If I zoom a little bit, and I click here, one left click, I will obtain this render. But you can also paint like this following your source. As you can see, it's not really good. Why it is not really good for a simple reason that on the brush, the hardness is 100%. Because the hardness is 100% is not pretty good and we don't have transition on the edge of the brush. This is why I will reduce the hardness and work for example with 30%. Now, let's redo again. I will press Alt left click and silk this source. I will go here, and I can go one left click, another one left click, and as you can see it sprea ti better. I will repeat the process here, Alt left click, and you can also paint like this, so you can stay like this, follow the cursor that you have, and be careful when you follow the cursor on the right that we have. Here, because the color is a little different, I can press Alt left click on this area, and I can also paint like this. Alt left click to take this part, and I can also paint like this. That's it. As you can see, the render is not bad, it's pretty good. You can also improve. You can press alt left click and you can try to make some improvements. You can go alt left click and try to change little bit. The more difficult thing is to try to have the source in coincidence with the rest of the road in this type of case. I could continue Alt left click and I can paint also on this area. Reduce the wide of my brush, Zoom little bit, and alt left click and here where it's little pixels, but it's going to be enough for what I want to do. Thanks to that, as you can see, I remove the wise line on this area. Even if I think it's not to right, but I will show you that we have the tools can be a little bit more interesting to do this type of f, but it's possible to do this. If I increase my size just here. For example, I want to I can press left click and you can extend the road on this area. We can press left click and you can decide to extend the road. So I'd left click and I can try to extend the road on this area as you can see. Some things that I can do it is the opposite process. For example, I can press left click, take a part of the grace, and I can duplicate like this. A left click and duplicate like this. Definitely, we can have a very interesting render. You just need to be careful about the source and to try to make something realistic. But this is a principle and this is how you can work as you can see. Let's see a second example. In this example, I have different clutes on the sky. Can duplicate, so right click duplicate the layers. If I wanted to duplicate for only one reason because you can put before or after, and you can see the transformation. If I select this one, this b clones, one more time I can use my tools, clon brush tools, and I want to extend little d the clots. Something that I can do is to reduce the white first. For example, I can press at left click. As you can see, I can extend the clots, so Alt left click, and I can change the cloud just like this. At left click. And alt left click and every time you just need to use your brush. If for example, I want to extend here outt left click, and as you can see, I can do something like this. It's red because you keep perfectly the texture, and this is the reason for which you can keep a realistic render in this type of case. But you can also remove element. For example, I have this one. If I press Alt left click, I can take the blue sky and I can try to remove. Sometimes it's a little bit difficult, so you need to try again and you can try again to paint Alt left click. As you can see, this type of case is not pretty good. Sometimes it's not perfect. If I try again Alt left click and I put this, the blue color won't be matched perfectly with with what I have. I need maybe to try a different source, maybe like this one, or maybe like this one to make adjustment, try this source. Try this one, and I think it will be little better. Don't forget, you can continue to try to change the source. I think this one will be Better and it is the same. I can try a different source. It means alt left click, left click, At left click and you put your brush directly on this area. Alt left click, alt left click, alt left click, alt and left click. This is the type of thing that you can do. You want to make some transformation like this. Definitely, it is possible. I can see before, after, before, after, just like this. 27. Change defaults: We're going to see how to remove default using the painting brush tool. For this, we can have access to this tool on this area, and this is the painting brush tool. Concretely, what we can do with this, we can use a brush. We can just put the brush on the default that we want to remove, and it works perfectly. Some things that I'm going to do, first, it's to duplicate my layers. So right click duplicate here. I will zoom on this area. You can define the options that you want for your brush like the wide opacity flu and hardness. If I put my hardness a 100% to start, and something that you can do, you can just go left click and automatically if you paint, you can remove default. I'm going to show you again, I will go here. If you just go one left click, you can remove a default like this. But something that you can do also is to paint, so it means you can paint on area just here. So in this type of case, here, even with hardness at 100%, it's not too bad, but I will reduce the hardness 40%, and I will just go one neclick to turn this render. I will repeat the process on the different part where I want to remove my default. As you can see it's pretty fast, because you just need to use one neclick, and automatically, he will define the portion of skin around to make adjustment. So I can click here. Click here, here, it's not very good, so I can click again to try to have something better. If you need, you can also just change the size of your prosse. I can also zoom on this area and remove this one. If I zoom meter out, we can see the difference before, after, and we remove all the different default or all the different spot on the skin of the woman. This is how you can work. If for example, you are here, and you decide to paint on the aprox just like this. What he will be able to do it, will be able to remove like that because as you can see you can paint on all area, and automatically he will define the portion of skins and you can obtain this render also. So it's okay for that. I'm going to remove this one and just see another example. When I go here as I explained before, let's take the example where we want to remove the wise line. For this, I can use the painting brush tool and define a wide. I will increase it to be the wide, keep a hardness of 40%. And if I go on this area, I will be able to remove this. You can just go one net click, but you can also just put the brush and paint paint like this to remove all the wise line. As you can see it's pretty good, you can also put your brush again if you want to try to make adjustment and make something better. The render is definitely fast, and I can reduce my wight for the brush to continue on this area, and I can click here. But you can try to make adjustments so it means at any moment, you can put the brush, and as you can see the render is very fast, and at the same time to be fast the render is also good. So if I go on this area and I decide to increase the wide of my brush like this, and I put my brush here. What he will be able to do, he will be able to recognize a little bit of the road here and try to put some part of the road directly on the grace. But it will be definitely a little bit more difficult because we don't have too much contra, so it's not extremely extremely good. But in the case where we focus here, it's definitely good. I forgot to duplicate the layer to see the difference before after, so it's not a problem, but yes, definitely, you can use these tools to do this type of work. Something that I will do, I will use my history panels, and I will come back at the beginning. And if I come back here, I can now, for example, duplicate the layers, and that's it. At any moment, you can just put your brush just like that, and as you can see, it's very very fast. And it's not only fast, you can have a great render. Definitely, I can reduce here, and I can paint also on this area. Maybe it's a little too much. But if I zoom lit all out, you can see the difference before after and before after just if I want to remove this wise line. 28. Remove defaults: We are going to see how to remove default and to do this type of work. When we go here, we will use the blemish removal tool. Very useful tool because you just need to click on the default that you want to remove, and automatically you will be able to remove. Here you won't have a lot of options, so it means concretely the only thing that you can do is to edit the size of your brush. It means you won't have to focus on different parameter of the brush. You just define the size of the brush and you click on the default that you want to remove. I have selected the pictures and right click duplicate the layers. After to do this type of work, I will zoom at this area. I just define the size of my brush and one F click and you can just remove a default. It will be pretty fast. You just need to click on the default that you want to remove. Sometime maybe you need to make adjustments so you can click multiple times. And automatically the default will be removed. It's pretty fast. It is another tool to remove. You have multiple tool to remove the default. It is another one. This one is very simple to use because concretely you only have to define the wide of the brush. After to do this w, you just need to click on the default that you want to remove. As you can see, it's pretty fast. If you try to paint, just like this, it's not going to work. Don't try to paint here. You just need to go left click and when you stay left click, you can define a transformation. In this type of case, if you want to remove this type of element, it will be definitely not easy. You can try to paint and go to search another element, but definitely, I think it's not extremely convenient. So if I say these pictures, just to show you if you select one more time the blemish removal tools, and just to show you that you can select a portion of element. So if I just go one left click, I will obtain this render, for example. But something that you can do, it's, for example, if I go left click and I stay left click, I can go and around a area. And I can do also this type of work, going to increase the size of the brush. And left click, stay left click, and you can also search a portion on the area. Sometimes it can be useful, even if we don't use too much, but I can do this type of work and just search a portion on a specific area. But here, for example, in this case, is not really good, so I can use left click again, maybe to try to have something different. But here on this area definitely won't be extremely good, even if I'm using this type of work. If I go on this area, I can use one left click again. Maybe it's a little big and I can reduce the size of my brush and left click again. For example, I go in this area. I can define higher value and I can, for example, left click, and I can try to search a specific area here. I can use left click and try to search here. But the render won't be pretty good in this type of case. If I do the opposite process, you can do for example, left click on this area and you can try to search, and it is like to duplicate, but you don't duplicate exactly in the same way. At the same time, you will have an adjustment directly on this way. In this type of case, I didn't duplicate the element, I can use and delete or just come back to my position. I think in this case, maybe you can use this tool. You can also try to use only one left click to just try to make some transformation like this. But definitely in this type of case, if you want to remove the wise line, this tool won't be the best. I think you can slick better tools to improve if you want to remove the wis line, you have better tool to If the result is not too, but I think it's not really good in comparison of some tools that we can use in this area. 29. Remove with brush: We are going to see how to make correction with the healing brush tools. To select the healing brush tool, you can go on this area, healing brush tools. One of the first things to do I will go on the right and right click, I will duplicate this layer to see the difference before and after. Something that I will do is to zoom on this face. As you can see, we can find different spot on the skin and something that I would like to do is to make a correction of this default using this brush. I can slick my healing brush tool just here. One more time on the option, what you have. You have first the size of your brush, here, it's pretty simple, just the size of your brush. One more time you can find the opacity, the flu, and the harness. I will start with the harness of 100% to show you that the most of the time you need to decrease the hardness to have a better render. One more time, you can also work with the stabilizer if you need. So concretely, what is the. The is to define a source. You can define a source with click plus lt. If for example, you just go one left click here, the assistant will tell you you must click plus l to set a source before trying to heal. If I want for example to remove this element, I will press, left click and I will define this part. Now as you can see, I have this part of the skin, and I think to do this type of work we have an under tool more interesting, but you can use this tool to do this type of work. If I go left click here, I can obtain this render. Think it's pretty good. Maybe you can see a little bit the circle, even if almost not. The things that I can advise you, it's even to decrease the hardness. Let's focus on 50%, and I will go on outt left click to take this part and outt left click here. As you can see the render is pretty good. Now let's just continue. I will go on this area, and I will to go outt left click, take this part, and left click here to arise. I will go around this area. Maybe I can take this part of the skin, It left click, and I will put here. I continue I'll left click here. I'll left click here. Don't forget you can change the size of the brush. If it start to be too big, you can reduce the size. Oops. Let's define Alt left click here. Alt A slick this part, left click to arise, to put this part of the skin on the Oder one. Alt left click here. Let's go on this area, Alt left click. Alt left click and put this one here. At left click and left click again to put here. At left click to take this part and left click here. And I just continue at left click here and at left click here. As you can see the render is pretty good if I zoom little bit, and I define the render before after. Yes. Definitely, it's realistic. We don't have any trouble. We don't see we'll use a difference if we add something before or after. You can try to use this tool also to make some adjustment. Maybe I can use one here also. But if for example, you don't try to select this part and to try to put this here. Because if you try to put this here, you will mix the two and it's not going to be pretty good. Or something that you can do, you can try to tape out left leak to take this area and you can try to increase a little bit the volume of the bros. But when you mix like this generally, the render is not really good. If I just take my second example, right click on the backroom layers and just duplicate. After to duplicate this layer, if I wanted to try to write some set concrete example. I just want to show you that it's difficult in this type of case because we have here specific light, here specific light. If I want to try the same type of things, it will be really difficult if I use these tools to make something realistic. I can try to, for example, sylx this part, and try to put here or sylx this part put here. I can try even to paint. But as you can see, it will be really difficult, even if you can increase the wide. You can increase the wide and try to take something bigger like this one, and you can try to put this here. You take this one and you can try to put this here. I think in this type of case, it's pretty better to try to work like this. Here if you increase the size, you can also do this type of work just like that. I think it's not bad. If you work with a bigger cursor, you can do something like this. Let's just reduce little bit the wide. One more time. If I click here and click here, can try to paint and to remove little the grace on the tree, even if it's not easy, but you can remove little bit, but here in this type of case, we have something not really cool. One more time, you have tools depending on what you want to do. Sometimes it will be interesting, sometimes it won't be interesting. Don't forget that on the left. You have a list with other type of tools to create this type of render. 30. Remove with patch: We are going to see how to make correction using the patch tools. To make correction, some things that I'm going to do first, I selected these pictures and right click duplicate the layers. After to duplicate the layers, we have these tools, and this is a patch tools. Concretely, what you can do with this tools. You craft a selection and you have the different mode of selection here. From this selection, you can dragon move to replace this selection by an der part. Let's tact concrete example on this face. Here we have the spot here. I define my first, it is just to create a new selection. I can, for example, go left click and I can start a selection just like this. After to stop my selection, I can start left click. You can drag and move around and you can select a part of the skin that you want. For example, this one, left click here. After to do this work, if you want to scale, if you want to turn to make adjustment, it's also possible. If you are satisfied, you can just press. You can just validate here, it was not really good. You need to validate with the left click. I'm going to show you again patch tools, and accurate something like this. I can dragon move maybe for this area. When you are here, you apply left click again, and as you can see, I can remove this part. This is the type of thing that you can do. This type of work to remove the spot. I can do this also with these tools. But it's just a little different. I create a selection like this, and I can search a different part. You can also remove the selection. I can do something like this, and I can dry again move just here and left click. We are going to repeat this process. I can use my patch tools and just create a selection. I think I didn't select it properly, so I can press a scap and try to redo again, left click, left click. Let's do again left click left click. Let's do again left click, left click. So *** explain you are different way to craft the same type of render. So here, you just craft a selection. After you just need to drag and move on the side and you can remove the spot using this feature. I like to show you this type of example because you can see different tools, and with these different tools, you can have the same type of render. I can click here. Left click again, left click again. But I think it's not pretty good sometime here, for example. I think it's not pretty good. Let's just click here, I can go on this area. Left click again. L et's just click here and left click again. And Let's just click here, left click again. I have again this area. Let's click here and left click again. It's okay for that. Now if I zoom a little bit, we can see the different before after, before after. Concretely, if for example, I selected, I don't know, maybe I can select this part, and it's not enough, you can complete your selection, so it means you can complete here or you can complete here just like this. Even if I think sometime it's not extremely convenient, but you can complete your selection as you can see convenient, you can substrike or interst also. Just come back to this selection. I can for example, turn around just like this. If you just move and for example, you do something like this, you can try to do this type of work. Here to show you something little different. It's not interesting in this type of case, but just to show you that you have this possibility, you can select a bigger part and you can do this type of work. That's okay for this example. Let's remove this one and I will select here. If I duplicate my layer first. I can click here and duplicate the layer, right click duplicate. After I will go on this area, one more time we have this rocks. If I use this tools, I can create a frame of selection around, then I can drag and move. Oops. I think I'm not on the right mode. Let's click on you. Click on the tools, silic the layers, and ops. Let's just de silect again, going to make something little bigger. And that's it and you can try to find another part. Even if depending on the part, maybe it's not going to be pretty good, maybe I can try with this part and left click left click to try to remove this area. But I can also try maybe to duplicate some grace. We have this grace here. If I continue with this tool one more time, and I define for example this one. As you can see, you can remove just by another element, but you can also slick for example this one and you can try to put something different. Even if it is this type of ss, it's not extremely convenient. If for example, I define this one, but maybe I defined something like this. Just here. I try to put more something like so Share, I can try to do something like this, but in this type of case, it will be difficult. Just how to use this tool. As I explained, you have a list of different tools, and From some of this tool, you can do the same type of work. Depending on the situation, some tools will be pretty better and other less useful, it depends really about what you have to do. It's okay with this. 31. Lighten images: We are going to see how to lighten images. At the same time that to see how to lighten images, we will see how to darken images. For this, we can use a brush. First things to do I have these pictures and I will duplicate my layer so right click duplicate. After to do this work, I will slick my layers and when I go on the left, you can find on this area, and you have the dodge brush tool to lighten and the burn brush tool to darken. If I slick the dodge burn. If I slick the first one, the Dodge brush tools. I will define the size of my brush. Opacity flow and hardness. It is important to not put the harness at 100% because if you put the harness at 100%, I'm going to show you the render, you put your brush like this, and as you can see, it's not pretty good. This is a reason for which if you want to create a transition and have a better render, you need to decrease the hardness and you will focus around 20 or 30%. Let's focus on 20%. As you can see, you can lighten some area using a brush. You can also work with the transparency, so it means you can decrease the transparency here to just add small effect, and I can add a small effect on the sky here. Maybe a little bit on the sky here or a little bit on the sky here. As you can see the effect, it just a little bit on this area. Here, this is a tonal range, so you can also change the toll and range mid turns. Concretely, what it will change, I will change the impact depending on what you choose because if I silic for example, shadows just here. I will silic shadows. As you can see, I will turn this render, if I select mid turns this render, and if I select at lights this render. It will be a little bit more powerful if I select the at lights. At the same time at the opposite process, if you silic of this tool, the burn brush tools, you will darken your pictures. First, let's remove the layers, remove layers, and duplicate, again, duplicate the layers. If you click here, it is the same. I can use shadows, and I will darken. I can use min tons, and I will darken with this and at light. Concretely stronger if I select at lights in this type of case. I will come back just here, just here and just here. This is how you can work. Now why it is useful. I select this pictures, and for example, I want to lighten maybe a little bit of the sky. I can also create the selections. For example, I can use this selection tools, and I can create a selection here. If it's too much, I can reduce and redo again these actions. And I will obtain this render, I will click on ad and click here. Why I create a selection because thanks to that, I can duplicate my layers, and when I will use the tools, I won't be on this area. If I want to lighten the sky, I can just select the touch bush tools, I will define the size of my brush here. As you can see, we'll obtain this render. Definitely it's too much because I'm on plights, I can come back for mid tones. If I just put my brush and stay left click, I won't be outside because I have my selection, and that's it. I just lighten the sky, I can deselect, and you can see the difference before after and before after. But I could do also the opposite process. If For example, I want to lighten some area. I can also continue with these tools. If it's too much, I can reduce the opacity, and take a glans, I can lighten, for example, this area just here. If I want to darken area, I will switch the tools for the burn brush tools. For example, I want to darken little bit. I will click here, and I want to darken maybe around this area with, for example, the trees just here, I can put my brush tools just on this area. You can see the difference after before and after. Thanks to that, I can put more contrast between this one and this one. I can also darken a little bit here. A and I will create more contrast, but here I need to be careful to not overtake. Just like this. The last thing that I'm going to show you is this example. I will go right click and I will duplicate the layer. I will little bit. If for example, I want to take a look. Here, we have some light. If I want to lighten a little bit more, I can use my dodge push tools, but I will decrease the opacity, maybe 30%, and I will increase a little bit the wide of my push. If I just go here, I can lighten a little bit more. Using my brush just here. If I want to darken on this area, I can also switch to burn and here I can darken just like this. You can see the difference like that. But if for example, on this area, I decide that maybe we have too much shadows. I can select my dodge brush tools. I will work with the opacity around 20%. And I can lighten this area to have less shadows impact just here. K is the same, if I want, I can use also this brush. So now let's take a look. Before after before and after. So you can make this type of correction. I will explain that we have adjustment at light shadows, and you can do this type of work, but we don't use a brush. Here you can work with at light shadows, it means you can make correction to lighten into darkens, but you use a brush. This is something important to understand. 32. Change saturation: We are going to see how to use the sponge brush tools. You can find these tools when you go directly on the left. And when you go to the left, you can find the sponge brush tool. What you will be able to do with these tools, concretely, you will be able to increase the level of saturation using a brush. But if you want so we can increase the saturation, but if you want also to desaturate, it's possible. First, I will select the layers and duplicate the layers. I will zoom a little bit and you will set the parameter of your brush like the wide. You will be able to work with the opacity. Let's focus to 100%, flow 100%, and I will start with the hardness of 100%. You can use a stabilizer one more time if you want, and here you have the option saturate or desaturate. If I click saturate, for example, I go in this area, left click and if I stay left click, as you can see, you increase the saturation where you will put your brush, just like that. If I go here, I can also increase the saturation. We can find the different before after, before, after. And I can do a little bit more every time that I use my brush and I repeat this process, I will increase the saturation, just like this. You can also apply to any selection. For example, I can duplicate these layers. I will select one of these tools. Some things that I can do, I can use my pain tools. When I use my pain tools, I can crater to lines here until maybe can zoom it all bit, maybe this part, just like that. Then maybe this part here. I will go back on these directions, these directions, this direction, and these directions. After that, if I want to here, for example, it's not pretty good. But something that I can do is to craft a selection, just like that. If I just press a scap, I will remove my selection. I'm going to redo again because it was not exactly what I want, so I can do something like this, something like this. For example, go an area here, here, here and here. I will crate the selections, and I will invert the selection. Invert the selection. Thanks to that, I can select this part. If I using my brush, sponge brush tools, I can make the choice, for example to saturate my selection. But one of the problem is here, we have a pixel layers. I'm just going to duplicate this layer, right click and duplicate. If I use my brush here, I will just saturate the part outside of the road. I can put my brush here, and I will saturate on this part. Let's increase the little bit the size of my brush and I can saturate one more time more all this area. Every time when I'm using my brush, I can saturate more. He's definitely too much, but it was just to show you the difference before, after. Now, if I delete this one and I crat again a new layer, you can also make the choice to desaturate. I will go right click, duplicate, and this time I will change for desaturate. In this case, if I go here, don't forget also that you can decrease the hardness. If I go on this area, I will desaturate using a brush. It means you will remove some color. But if I want to do more, I need to stop the left click and do the left click again to desaturate this area. But here we won't have any impact. At the opposite, I can invert the selection saturate and I will saturate more this area, just like this. L et's finish with D silect. This is the type of thing that you can do. If I select the pictures, it is same. For example, I'm using the sponge tools, saturate. If I go in this area, I will saturate this part. If I click desaturate, I will desaturate here. You can really see the difference in these pictures. Something that I will do is to duplicate my layers, right click duplicate. Grato selection with my rectangular selection tools and grato selection just here until the line of horizon. After to do this work, I will invert the selection, and I want to saturate more of them. I can click here and I just need to take the option saturate and put my brush on all them. We can have adjustment vibrant saturation to do this type of work inside the selection, but you can also use this brush. That's it. You can see the different before after before after, but if you want to have more effect, I can do again to increase again my effect. So if I'm satisfied, I can use this select. As you can see, we increase the saturation of the ocean. 33. Change colors: We're going to see how to replace color. For this, I selected this picture first, and after that, we will focus on this picture. If I select this one, for things to do, I will duplicate my layers, and we have the tools on the left here. This is the color replacement brush tools. Concretely, what you will be able to do. You will be able first to go on the right and here to define a different type of color. For example, I can define something more in orange here. After to do this type of w, you have the basic options of the brush. Here I can find the basic options of the brush. And opacity flu and harness, let's put everything at 100%. You can even focus on the length, and something important, it is a tolerance. Concretely, if I put my brush here, as you can see, I obtain this render because this level of tolerance. If I increase my level of tolerance, concretely, I will be able to change like that, and he will define some contrast and you can replace the existing color by the color that you choose on the right just here. But first things to do, I can, for example, put my brush on this area. Why it is useful because sometimes when you are on this area, he will define the contrast and you are not to go outside. It depends. For example, here, I go outside, so it's not really good. This is why I can complete. But something that you can do also is to reduce the size of the brush. You can decrease the tolerance, and for example, you can only put your brush here. But it's not enough, so I need to change the tolerance again. As you can see it's too much on this area. So sometimes it's pretty good, sometimes it's a little bit more difficult, as you can see. Just an example about what you can do, but you can select any brush here and you can put your brush and you can try to replace the existing color. We don't use this too much, we have different ways to do this type of work like, for example, if you want to do this type of work, you can just select the flower. After to select the flower, you fill the flower with the bucket field tools. After you work with the blend mode to upturn different type of render. You can work with the transparency also. But you can also use this tool, I want it just to show you how it works, and you can do something like this, for example. But one of the problem, is not possible to come back. For example, when you have something like this, you won't have too much possibility, expect maybe to take the eraser brush tools and to try to erise on this area. Because I duplicated the layer, but if you didn't duplicate the layers, it's not going to work properly. Concretely, this is what you will be able to do with this type of tools. If I select these pictures, right click, duplicate. In this picture, I just want to change the color of the eyes and after I will you with the mouse. I can use also the color replacement brush tools, and I will select on a dark type of blue color. If I zoom a little bit, I will change little the white of my brush. When I put here, as you can see, you can change the color of the eyes. But here I have a tolerance of 10%. I'm going to come back and increase the tolerance maybe 26%, and I can change the color like this here. As you can see, you can do this type of work. I can go on the right. And I can do this type of work also. But something that you can do is also to create a new layers. You just do this work with the pain brush tool and after you change the bland mode and you work with the opacity to obtain exactly the same render. Let's take a look before after and before, after. Want to change the mouse. It is exactly the same way. Here as you can see, you can change the color. Something that I can do, it's directly to silic to color like this one. In this case, I will decrease the harness like 25%. Let's just change the size of the brush one more time, and here it's too much. I will focus on this. I have a tolerance of 26. I think it will be nice, and I can just paint on this area. Sometimes you need to stop the left click and to redo again if you want to obtain this type of render. If for example, it's too much, because you have a duplicated layers, you can select the eraser brush tools with harness, like for example, let's supply 30%, and just with the edge of my brush, I will be able to remove some effect, but because I have a duplicated layers. Plus if you don't duplicate the layers, concretely you will obtain this render. This is why it's important to duplicate the layers just like this. Even with this type of effect on this one, you can also No change the blend mold because you will apply on all the elements, but you can work with the opacity and you can reduce little the impact of the effect with your opacity value. For example, in this case, I can decrease for 68%, and I will obtain this render to change the color of the eyes and to change the color of the mouth. One more time others explain if you want to do this type of work, I think you can work differently better. But just to show you how to work with this type of color and this is the type of use that you can do. 34. Add blur: We are going to see how to add blue using a brush. To add blue using a brush, first I selected these pictures. I will little bit and duplicate my layers so right click duplicate layers. To add my blue, I can go on the left and here we have different type of tools, and I'm going to select the blue brush tools. Concretely, you will have the size of the brush first and one more time the opacity, flu and harness. As you can see for these different type of tools they don't put the harness by default at 100% because definitely it's not very good. If you just go here, concretely, you add some blue as you can see. So I'm going to reduce the hardness because in many case, it's more interesting to not have the maximum of hardness, and I can go left click and I can add just blue where I'm going to put my brush. Where I will paint, I will add some blue. I can go on the right, and here I can add some blue on this area. We can see the difference, we have blue here, we have blue here, and we can see the different before after and before after. I will delete these layers, and I will duplicate again with right click and duplicate. If I use my pen tools, I can create point around this direction till these directions go here, and at another point may be on this area. Oops, something is wrong, going to redo again. Yes, just like this and close to this point. I can create a selection from this. Click on the selection tools. If I want to add blue outside of these selections, I will first invert the selection. I will use my brush. This is the blue tool here. You can do this with adjustment. You can add bluer with the filters. It's definitely not a problem, but you can also do this using a brush. I will work with the harness around 41% opacity flu. I will just increase the size of my brush for a simple reason that here, it's okay because I'm inside a selection, and you just add some blue on this area. If I want to add more, I can stop the left click and apply another left click on all the area just like this. I can finish with the select, and you can find the blow here, not on the road, but outside of the road, we have some blow. But I can reinforce maybe a little bit again on the sky if I need to create a little bit more transition just like this. Something that I'm going to show you, it is another example. I have this example. It is the same. I can use my tools here. I will decrease the wide just on this area. If I go here, you can see the blue appearing. Something that I can do, it's for example, create a selection with elliptical selection tools. Oops, start a selection. It's not working properly. I will create a new selection. Yes, just like this, now it's going to work properly. I will create a new selection, maybe like that, and I will try and move around this area. I will add blue on the backgrounds. First, I will duplicate this layer, right click duplicate, and I will use my blue tools, and you can also work with the opacity if you need. But maybe I can position the blue outside, so I will invert the selection, and I can add first type of blue just here, and on all the area at the same time. Now if I want to create the transition effect, I can hoops maybe a little bit more here. I can add more blue may be here again and more blue, every time I apply left click one more times. I can de select and we'll obtain this render. I can decrease the opacity and maybe add a little bit blue on this area to create a transition effect. Yes, that's it. See the type of work that we can do. Thanks to that, I can only focus on the face, as you can see. 35. Sharpen pixels: We are going to see how to sharpen images. For this, we can use these features just on this area, and we can find the sharpen brush tool. You can do, you can just sharpen, so it means you will increase the level of details using a brush. I will select this tool first and I will warn the right and I will duplicate my layer. So right click, duplicate the layers. When you goarn this area, you can find the options. We can focus on the wide of the brush first, so I can click here and increase the wide. I can focus on the opacity also. Let's put 100%, and you have also the hardness on this area. Let's just keep around 40%. Zoom little bit, you can find, for example, this mountain. I will reduce little bit the size of my brush, and if I just apply left click here, what I will be able to do, I will be able to sharpen, so increase the level of details just here. Ometal bit, you can see the difference before, after. It's not extremely powerful, so you can use the left click again to reinforce more. But you need to be careful because if you do this too much, I'm going to show you left click again. Left click again, you will have the feeling that you just burn the pixels and after the render won't be good. If I just click on this area, you can see the difference now. But here it's definitely too much. You have the possibility to click on the mode here clarity. You can also use unsharp mask. It's a little bit different when you go on this area, and you have an der mode, it is arch mode also, and it's extremely powerful, so definitely in this type of case, it's not interesting. If you just want to reinforce little the details using a brush, you can use this tools. Can click here. Just deactivate this one. If for example, I just change the mode again with the clarity mode. Sometimes it is useful, you can have something like this, like for example, you have the trees, and I can just put my brush around this area. But before to do this, I will duplicate my layer so right click and duplicate again. Let's put the brush just here and on the duplicate layers, I can put my brush just on this area and I can reinforce little the level of details. If I zoom little bit, you can see the difference before after before and after just here. If I Zoom little out before, after. Clearer you can see the difference. Let's see a second example. My second example will be this one. When I'm using these pictures, something that I would like to do is to increase the level of details where. For example, around the eyes, and for example on the mouth, I will go right click, duplicate the layer again, Zoom little bit on this area. Something that I will do is to select my tools, so the sharpen brush tools. And if I zoom directly on the eyes, I will slick one more time. We'll keep this value of opacity flow hardness and just left click on the eyes and around the eyes. This is by first left click, and you can see a little bit the different. It's not a lot. I can put a little bit more again just here, and maybe on the Apros also. Let's just see the different before after and before after just a little bit, but it can be very interesting in this example. One left click first, just here and here, and I will use left click again around the eyes. If I zoom little bit, I click here, you can see the difference, in this case, it's interesting. I can zoom little out, select the mouse. And on the mouse left click, and I will use this first one. Thanks to that, you can recuperate a little bit more the texture of the mouse. I think I can recuperate, I can redo again this action second time. Let's click second time on this alba. I think it's enough, you can see the different before after before and after. And that's it. I can just only do this on these pictures. Take a look before after, before, after. So just a little bit, but it can be interesting to cra little bit more details, and at the same time, little a bit more contrast on the eyes, or again on the texture of the mouth, just using this tool. 36. Smooth pixels: We are going to see how to smooth with the metian brush. For this, we can select these tools. This is the metian brush tools, and Fst thing that I'm going to do is to duplicate these layers. After to do this work, if I zoom a little bit on this area, what you will be able to do, you can smooth using a brush, and it's interesting in different ways. It can be interesting on selection, but it can be also interesting if you want to create a special render. Something that I'm going to do is to select my median brush tools. You can set the different options here first, and I can define a wide for my brush. I will keep these different parameters and something that you can do. Sometimes when you want to craft selection, you can smooth directly on the edge just here. You can smooth just on this area and it can be more interesting to craft selection. If I zoom here, you can see the difference before, after before and after. You can see this difference on the edge of the flower. Before after, before, after. While it can be useful one more time as explain if I crate a selection. I can use one of these tools, for example, the selection brush tools, and I can use left click to crate a selection of the flower. And the render can be sometime more interesting if you smooth with these tools on the edge of the flower. Something that I can do is to invert the selection, invert the selection, and I will press delete on the keyboard just here to delete this part. But I have my order layer on the background. This is why I don't see anything, so I need to hide these layers and the select. Sometimes it's pretty better, but the edge, even if we can also refine selection. This is one of the first use that you can do. If I decide to come back, I will click here and remove this layer. So we'll just remove this layers. Duplicate again so right click and duplicate the layer again. If you want to create an effect, you can also just select your brush, and you can put the brush, for example, on where you want. For example, I can paint just here on all the flower, and you can repeat this action on other times. And you can create a special effect to smoothly tell all the pixels using these tools. You can find the difference before after before and after. So now if I select this picture. Can create also an effect. For example, I'm going to show you on the eyes because you really see the difference, so I can click on this picture on this tools, right click and duplicate. For example, if I'm using these tools, reduce first the wile and apply this, you can really see the difference. If I apply here, you can really see the difference, how it can smooth the pixels. You will take the average of the pixels to create this type of render. As you can see, we can change like this. In this type of case, if I apply my effect, you can find this difference. It is the same if I put this on the mouse, just here, and you can really see the difference and what will be the type of effect that you can do. You can add this type of effect, but you can also use this as I explained on some edges if you want to create some selection. And this is the reason for which I will remove this layer and show you my last example. When I zoom little of it and f to craft some selection, as you can see, we can find these different airs on this area. Something that I can do is to use this brush tools, and I will work with the size first. I will reduce. I will go right click and duplicate the layers, and maybe I can put my brush just on the edge. That means I can go left click here and just put the brush on this area. Just on this area, and you will see the render after. First, I put my brush, and I'm using the brush just here on all this area. Here also. And until this part. If I o a little bit, you can see how we can smooth and you can see before, after. If I select this part, you can see before, after, and you can really see the difference on this area. If I go here, I can see before, after also. If I'm using one of the selection tools in this type of case, I can use the float selection tools. I will change the tolerance. Maybe we can work with around 20%, and I would use left click on this area. The selection won't take in account this type of things. I can if I need, for example, press delete on my keyboard and just hide my first layer to see the transparent back rounds. Let just click on this select and you can also use these tools before to create selection depending of the render that you want to opt. 37. Mix colors: We're going to see how to use the paint mixer brush tools, and these tools is located here. Concretely, what you will be able to do, you can mix the colors. When, for example, you use the paint brush tool, you can use this one also to make the colors. But something that you can do also is to work with a picture with pixels, and you can cate different type of effect. First thing that I'm going to do is to craft a new layers here. I can add a new pixel layers. If you use these tools concretely and you define any colors, you will focus on the wide of your brush and the flow, and you have also the straight of your effect. If I just do something like this, as you can see, you can just paint, but if you select another type of color, for example, I select the blue color, you can mix the color just like this. It's a little bit specific about your brush is different than a normal brush. You can also increase the strength, and if I increase the strength with this value. As you can see, you can really mix the colors. You can select here and you can just mix the colors. I can select the red colors. As you can see, you can mix using this type of brush, and I can define this color also. Depending on the strength, you can mix just like this. I can also have the flu, but definitely you need to manage the flu and the strength at the same time because the fluid you can turn or you can drag and move in a very fast way, for example, I can turn and mix the color just like this. Definitely, you can really mix the color at your convenience. Another example about what you can do. If I select this picture with pixels. First, I will duplicate the layer, so right click duplicate. Some things that I can do is to use my tools. I will select the paint brush tools, and I can define a color, maybe something like the pink colors. If I go on this area, as you can see, you can paint like this and at the same time mix the pixels. But here definitely is too much. Something that I can do is decrease my strength, and I will decrease the flu also like a 22 here, we have 18. If I do like this, I can create a small effect on my flower, but just a small effect just here. I can just paint the flower, I can pull. You can also increase. Let's increase a little bit the strength, little bit the flu, and I can do something like this for the effect. The feeling we have little blue, it's not the case, it just to put the effect, but I can also change if I want the color and mix with another type of color. This is the type of thing that you can do. My last example will be this one. If I only tele bit, you can see the clothes on this area. Something that we can do, it's to select one more time The pain mix our brush. If I define the white color here, I can decrease the size of my brush, and we have the clues on this area. If I use these tools, as you can see, you can pull like this, and I'm going to come back just here. Let's come back. It means you can pull little bit and mix the color and create little effect. You can also increase the strength here, and I will increase little bit the flow. As you can see you can pull and mix the pixels. Thanks to that to some clothes, I can create different type of effect just like this. I forgot to duplicate the layer. It's not a problem. I'm just going to work like this. As you can see, I can create effect on the clothe just like this using this type of tools. Here I create i effect for a simple reason that I apply also the wise color. I'm just using a brush, just like this. Here. This is the effect on the sky. But if for example, you create new layers and you work on another type of layer. You can also do this type of work, but because you don't work directly on the pixel layers, as you can see the render is different, is definitely different. Because you don't work directly on the image, you work only on a pixel layers. Here, if I work like this, it's little different about the render that if I focus directly on this area to create this type of effect. D 38. Spread pixels: We are going to see how to use the smug tools. For these four things to do, I selected these pictures and I will click on the layers and just go right click, duplicate the layers. After to do this type of work, I will go on the left, and we can find the smug brush tools. After to click on this area, something that you can do it to set your parameters, and you can focus on the wide of your brush first. And you can focus also on the flow, it will be like the power, but you can mix, you need to mix on the flow and you need to mix on the strain to define the power of the effect. Let's increase first the wide. I'm going to show you what you will be able to do if I Zoom little bit on this area. Concretely, you can mix like this the pixel. If you turn here, you will be able to turn this render. So after that, depending on the power, I will come back if I decrease the flow. As you can see, it's not fast in the same way, but you can also work with the strength and put 100%, just like that, and really you can see the difference. So this is why you need to work with the flow and work with the strength depending on what you want to do. And you can craft specific effect. For example, I can decrease to something like around 20%, and sa will decrease with around 25%. I will remove these layers and then duplicate again. So first, I remove these layers and right click duplicate. After I will create a selection of the flower using the selection brush tools, and I will create a selection of the flower with this brush. Why I p the selection for a simple reason that I want to apply my Smudge bush tool only inside the selection. I have this selection. If I click on these tools, something that I can do is to increase little my brush. Oops, I think something is wrong about the selection. Take a look here. Yes. Now it's better. Something that I will do is to use the Smudge Bush tools and click here. With the power that I apply, I can use my tools just here. Then I will di select and I will obtain this render. So you can see the difference using these tools. But I could also work with the selection if I wanted. But it was only to impact the flower. This is a first example. Let's the second example. I just want to show you something. For example, we have the river here, we can see the shadows. We have a different level of deep, so this is why here it is darker, and this is why here it is lighter. I can use these tools, the smudge bush tool first, just go right click and duplicate the layers. And I can focus with the wide. If I just go a little bit here, as you can see you can pull little xes and create this type of render. It is the same here, can, for example, pull little xes on these directions, and you can smirch the pixels and you can change little bit the render using this type of tools. So mean testing, you can create some effect, for example, using these tools, as you can see, just like that. You can see the difference before, after before, after. So you can create some effect on a, as you can see, for example, on the leg using these tools. So just like this. Something that I can do also is to show you with my last example with these pictures. So I will use the right click one more times and duplicate the layers. What we have on the sky. We have different clothes, and you can also use this tools to create effect on the clothes on the sky. I will sell my smudge brush pools. Let's try again with the flu and the strength. Maybe I can decrease the strain with 25% and decrease the wide for my brush. If I go on this area, you can pull little like this at the level of the clod, but the strength is not extremely powerful, so I will increase with 50%, and I will increase the flu with maybe 42%. Now you can pull a little bit more and you have more power. And while more time, it can be useful if I want to make some transformation on the cloud, definitely, I can also use this tools. You can pull some pixels on the directions using these tools. You can also go on this area. You can work this. I'm going to focus more on the wise clothes. If I just come back a little bit here, we can see the difference before, after, before and after. If I zoom meter out, you can see the different before after and before after. So concretely, this is the type of thing that you will be able to do with these tools. You can go here. You can also increase the strength, a little bit more to have something more powerful, as you can see. 39. Remove red eyes: We are going to see how to remove red eyes. For this, I selected these pictures and the first thing that I'm going to do is to duplicate the layers. Now let's just take a look about the red eyes that we have. As you can see, we can really really see the red eyes on this area. If I move on the right, we can really see the red eyes here. And you have a tool allows you to remove this type of problems. First, I have my first layer, my second layers, and something that I can do is to go on the left, and here you can find this tool. This is a red ice removal. Definitely, it's pretty fast because you just need to click on the ye. After to click on the ys automatically, he will detect the reds, and I can click here. Automatically as you can see, I have my render and I can recuperate the color of the eyes. Something important to know is if I undo the last actions. If for example, you click outside. It is very powerful because even if you click outside, you click here, or you ground the right and, for example, I click here. Here as you can see it's too fast, so it's not going to work. But if you just click maybe around this area, automatically he will detect the eye. After I sure if you click on the area very fast, very far, it's not going to work properly, but when you have close to the eyes, automatically he will detect. So the best things to do generally, just to click on the ye, so like that you will be pretty sure to improve the render, so I can click on my pat rooms. I can zoom, little bit, just click on the ice anywhere here it's going to work. And with the left click, the red ye is removed, and I can recuperate this type of color for the eyes. Can go here also and left click. Sometimes maybe if you left click again, you need to be careful because if you left click again, you will add another transformation. This is not what you want to do. Generally, you only need to use one left click on the eyes. After that, nothing more to know about this tool. So if I click here, you can see the difference before after and before after. If I remove that, and do this again, right click, duplicate the layers. Use these tools. Red eyes removable tool. We don't have any options to manage. You just need to use one left click. Left click here, left click here, and automatically we can remove the red eyes. 40. Change perspective: We are going to see how to work with perspective. For this, we can see these tools here, and we can have the perspective tools. Thanks to these tools, we can have this element and we will be able to work with the perspective. But if you work with the perspective, as you can see here we are on a transparent backgrounds. You will have access to the different point and you can change the perspective on any layers. I can select these layers. For example, I can change the perspective, and if you just click on apply, you will be able to edit the perspective of your layers. I'm going to come back and show you a concrete example. I have these layers just here. First, I would like to create a selection of the flower. Something that I will do is to use my selection brush tools, define the wide of my brush, and with the left click, I will select the flower. After to do this type of work, I selected this flower, I will copy and pass the flower. I will use edit copy, and I will go here, edit and pass. With my selection tool, I will resize the flower and put the flower on this area. I will repeat the same process with another picture. I will select the pictures, and I will create a selection also. This time, I will use the flute selection tools, and I will define the tolerance with around 20% and left click on this area. I will invert the selection invert selection to select this part, and edit, copy, go here, edit, and pass. After to do this type of work, I will reduce mettle bit my element, and something that I will do. As you can see, if I want to put these two layers on the ocean, this perspective is not the same. If I want to create the effect, I can select, for example, these layers, and I can use the perspective tools. With the perspective tools, you can work on different plane, single plane, but you have also the trail plane. If I select the single plane. You have a mode, that just select the destination. You can also term like this if you need your layers, and you can also define and you can split the view. Concretely, you will be able to have access to the different handles. With the different handle, you can just change the perspective at your convenience. Here, if I just select this part, I can split the view before or after, but it's more convenient when you have something different because here if you split the view, it is not pretty good in this type of example. I can just change the perspective to have the flower in the same way that the ocean, and I can do more something like this. If you are satisfied, you can just click on ply and as you can see the perspective is now pretty better in comparison of the Ocean. If I need, I can change the blend mode, you something like overlay maybe or change the transparency, and I will obtain this render. If I select these pictures, I will go also at the perspective tool but this time, I'm just going to show you the dread plane, even if in this type of case, it's not pretty good, but you can just have access to more element. For example, if you take this one, as you can see, you can change the perspective on this direction and also on this direction. Just another way to focus on the perspective. You still have this handle, still have this handle, but you have also these handles, and you can make something little different. This type of case, it's not very interesting, but definitely you can move the different handles to really, for example, I can do something like that, and you can change the perspective at your convenience. Here. But in my type of case, it's not very interesting to address to show you. I'm going to undo the transformation and undo the last transformation to work with the basic perspective. Let's select again these tools. Click here, and I will change the perspective. In this type of case, the same, I will change this point, change this point, and I will select this point, and I will select this point also to cratttle differenti fic can be something like this. Maybe I can change little this point, change little this point also, and maybe only do something like that. I can just click from I'm satisfied with apply and now the perspective is a little different. If I just click here, I will see, for example, overlay. You can also decrease the degres of transparency. Here on this one, I can also change the level of transparency if I want to make adjustment. If I resize, we can see can keep the perspective on this area. This is how you can work with a perspective. 41. Mesh warp: We are going to see how to use the mesh wrap tool. For this, I can select this tools and you can find the mesh wap tools. So concretely if you just have a layer like this, like an image with background layers, and you define to select the tools. So you select the mesh wap tools. You will have access to different handles, but you can work also with this one, this one, and you can make some transformation with the different handles. I can also go outside, for example, I will be able to do something like this, or to do something like this to change. For example, surrender of my image. This is the first things to understand. Some things that you can do also, it's to add a node. To add a node, when you click here, you can create a first click and a second click, and you can create your own grid on your element. Double click, and when you double click, you can add more element and you can create more specific transformation as you can see. After you can really make what you want on your pictures using this different way. If you are satisfied, you will just click on apply and make some transformation. I'm going to undo. I just want to show you something if I click here, and I want to craft my grid. I can, for example, doable click here, double click, do click, do click here. These different nodes, if you want to delete one, you can select a nod, delete node. If I want to recuperate ander nod, double click. On each node, when you click on a nod, when she is selected, you can convert to sharp, or you will be able to convert to Smooth. It means to have access to handles and to be able to turn. If I double click here, I can add more element if I need. After two creator create, as you can see, you can pull on different directions, and you can just drag and move like this using the different end ups just here. This is the type of thing that you will be able to do. I'm going to use an edit and undo. I will create a selection of the flower with this picture. I will use for this my selection brush tool and just left click to create selection, just like that, and then copy pass. Edit copy, as I explained before, go here, edit, and pass, and with the selection tool, we can dry and move the flower and place the flower here. Let's select now this picture. Crato selection with the flute selection tools. Select the tolerance of 20%, left click outside, invert the selection with invert. After I will go and edit, copy this selection, go here, edit and pass this selection, and put this element around this area. We have these layers. I want to create some transformation of the flower using the weh map tool. I can use this. For example, you can only use your different extremities. If for example, I want to pull on this direction, I can pull on this direction. You can just use this different element and you can create the transformation that you want. But if I want to add handles to at new point, I can double click, do click, double click and I will be able to add more. Element on my grid. After to add more element on my grid, you can also make some transformation, more local transformation, or a simple reason that you have more point. When you are satisfied, you can just click on a ply. I'm going to select also these layers and click on this one. Activate the tools, and it is same I can craft my own grid do click, double click, do click, and do click, do click, do click, and do click. Even inside the face, you can see you can make some transformation. For example, I can open little the eyes, just like this, clicking here and clicking here. For example, maybe it's a little too much, and just make something just little bit. Here we have the mouse. You can also double click here and I can move my face also in these directions. This one, take a look, I can make some transformation. Here I made some transformation, but it's a realistic transformation. We can make something fun, as you can see, and I can drag and move for example, this one. Here, we have double click, and I can drag and move little This area on the directions. Here I have also these eyes. Let's just make something like this if I want to increase little of the ears, we can pull little bit on these directions or maybe double click here, double click here, and we can pull little on this direction or again these directions. We can make this type of transformation. If I just click on apply, take a look, we make some transformation on this space, as you can see using this tool. This is a Wsmap tools and this is how you can use this one. 42. Add colors: We are going to see the colors, how you can add colors and how you can manage the colors. First, let's just create the rectangles, and I will select my rectangle tools just here. When you create any shapes like this, to add the colors, you have two options. The first option is to go on the feel on the shapes, and the second option is to go on the color panels because at the beginning, we place the color panels on the right. So if I just click on feel here, it is exactly the same. So when I go on feel, you can find color gradient, and you have also switches. Concretely, if you go on color, you have a panels. By defaut, we use the erg based liders, but you can have more options. If for example, you salic H SL color wheel, you will have access to this color wheel to search your colors. But you can come back to another we, you can silic saturation, and this is just another way to have access to a color wheel, and you have multiple options here. If I come back to the erg base lider, You can just have access to this type of color wheel. Here you have the wise, here you have the black on each corners, and after you can select a range of color. For example, I select this blue, you can make adjustment with the different channels, and here I can change with these channels, these channels, and these channels to make adjustment with my RGB sliders. You can also click here, Color Picker, and thanks to that, you will have access to a color that you can pick, but I'm going to show you this after. So you can choose the color from these panels. If I come back on feel, you have also swatches. And when you click on Switches, you can see all the recent colors that you use on your document. You can also have access to multiple basic colors from this one, and it is like color palette, and you can find different type of color palette. So here I can select, for example, this one, or I can select this one, and you have access to multiple color palette. Let's just come back on color. Here to really define color palette, it's more interesting if you want to focus on drawings. But I think it's important because you can also create graphing document, and you can also draw with affinity photo. If you go on this area, here we have colors, but if you go on swatches, directly, you can have access to the black color on to the white color. Let's just come back on color and select one of the color. When you go on this area, you can also here, switch for ground color, b ground color. If you don't want color, you can set feel no, and if you click again here, you can define a color. You can also have access to a color clicker if you doable click here. When you doable click here, you can have access also to the color chooser. And you define the main range of colors that you want on the top, like, for example, red. Here on this area, it is the white color, the black color, and you can select the red color that you want. On the right, you will have more advanced information here. If for example, you have a work to do, and you want to enter a color code, you will be able to enter the color code here and tape the color code. When you go on the right, we have this color panels. Concretely, when you go on view here, you can have access to colors. When I go on this area, a window, you can have access to color just here. And we put this. You can also have switches one more time. So if you want, you can also add switches. We just put color at the beginning because I think switches, we don't use too much in affinity photo. Expect if really you want to focus on a specific drawings. But if not, you don't need to use afin switches, you can just keep these color panels. These cor panels is a summary or what I've show you. Concretely, you can find again the f room color and the back room color. At any moment, you can switch f room and back rooms. If for example, I put a craton dir rectangles and define another color like the blue color. I can put this rectangle on the back and put this element just here like this, and define this rectangle, my second rectangles on this corner in this corner. I will add at the same time, maybe a circle, so I will select my circle tools, grato circles. You can also repeat the process here, so you can select a range of color and after you have the red channel, green channels and blue channels to make adjustment. But you can also double click here. Don't hesitate to double click because sometimes it's more simple to select a color from these panels. For example, I can select the yellow color and validate. I will duplicate this circle with another ones here. I will select for example this color, and press control left click, duplicate, resize, and define another color. Now, you have the color picker here. Concretely, what is this? If I select my rectangles, and I want to reuse this green color, exactly the same. I can click on the color picker, drag and move, stay left click, and you go on this area, and you stop left click. Thanks to that, he recuperated this green color. I know I can just click here, and as you can see you can recuperate this color. If I want to recuperate this yellow color, it is the same. You can drag and move the color picker, salect this one. And you can click here, and now I can have access to this yellow color. Extremely useful if you want to recuperate color. You can also double click here, and you can find again the color pic here. I want to recuperate this one. I can drag and move here. And now I can just click here, and it's going to work properly. This is how you can work with color. Don't forget that you have also the opacity. For example, if I click on my blue right tangles, you can also decrease the opacity of your co. It's the opacity of the colors. It's not the opacity of the layers because in some case, you won't have the same render. This type of case, it's not going to change anything. I I change the opacity here or the opacity here, I will have exactly the same render, but in some case, it's interesting to separate these two opacity. 43. Create gradients: We are going to see the gradient, how to create gradient. For this, something that I'm going to do, first, it is to create a shapes, and you will see how to insert the gradient inside these shapes. Let's select the rectangle tools. Create rectangles here. Let's just put a color first, and now I would like to fill with the gradient. To fill with a gradient, you have two options. You have the gradient tools, and you have also the field options here, and you can work with the two element. Let's just click on feel here, and you can switch for gradient. After two go and fill, switch for gradient, you can define two colors. This one, this is the first color, and you need to define the colors that you want on this area, and you select the second point and define another colors. Here. And you can select the type of gradient that you want. So you click on gradient type linear, elliptical, radial, and conical. If I just focus on linear here, you will be able also to reverse your gradient just like this. One of the problem is here, it's not possible to set the position. So this is why you need also to use the gradient tools here. And when we go on this area, you can select gradient tools. After two sic gradient tools, when your layers is selected, or your object is selected. Now you have the possibility to so litle here to change the position of my gradient. If I want to work vertically, I can do something like this. If I want to work horizontally, I can do something like this. You can also pre shift to apply a constraint, and if you want to perfectly be vertically or horizontally, you can press shift to apply some constraint. I can go here and apply a constraint with shift. So if you reduce the transition, concretely, you will take this point at this point and here reduce the transition. And if I increase the transition, I will be able to do this or to do this. Here, this is a midle point to have more blue color, for example here, or to have more green color, for example here. And that's it. So after you can come back, you have your gradient tools. You can come back here. And as you can see now, it's possible to change the midpoint. So the midpoint, what is this? It is just the midl point that you have here. And you can also add multiple color. So if I click here to add a color, you can go left click here and you can add new point. This new point, you click on color, and you define another one. If I want to add more point, you can go left click here or you can click on Insert. Also, it's going to work properly. And I can go on colors, and I can slick, for example, range. It's also even possible to focus on the opacity on one of the point of your gradient. You can also decrease the opacity when more time reverse the gradient. You can also use here and you can drag and move the point at your convenience. If you want to delete a point, you go left click on the point, drag and move outside, it's going to work. Or you can select also a point and press delete just here to come back for example with only two point. This is how to insert a gradient. For example, I want to insert a gradient on the back rooms. You just click on your tool just here. So I select the rectangle tools. Ct rectangle just here. Automatically, I have the last parameter. I can define the red color first to start, and I can use feel. And on the fill options, I will define gradient. So I selling my first point just here. Color. I want to cred gradient with this type of blue to another blue. I selling my second point. Click here color, and I will define a der blue. So now I want to set the position, so I go out like this. I select my gradient tools, and thanks to that, I want to create something vertically, so I can go in the center here to here, and I created this gradient, and I can make some transformation with a midpoint depending on the t. Now, if I want to create a gradient, not a linear gradient, let's just remove this one because when you use the gradient tool first, you click on the gradient tools, you have different type of gradient that you can use. So let's select the circle tools here, ellip tools, create a circle, and I will define a color just here, and I will select my gradient tools. So you can also select the type of gradient that you want here. You have the different options. So you have even bitmap something little specific. You can insert a gradient with a predefined models that you can have self, so here I'm not going to show you this. But you can create, for example, conical here. So you can have a con render. First, let's click on this area. If you click on the conical, as you can see here, we have automatically s color. But if you change for radial, automatically adjust have two color. Let's slick radial, sick the first point color, and I will define maybe this type of maybe this type of orange color, and I will define my second point color just here, and I will define more this type of color, just like that. If I click radial, so I can move. I can for example extend. We can also create effect, for example, put this orange color more on this direction. Dragon move here, and you can dragon move here. If I want to change the color, it's not enough dark, I can click on this area and make something a little bit darker here. And I can dragon move to create this type of effect of my element, but I can change radial conical again. This conical, I can put this in the center, and you can change the position of this point, and you can also change the position of the second point. Can drag and move and craft something conical just like this. You can also dragon move, and you can turn here on this direction on this direction to change the effect. You can also work with elliptical. We won't have big difference with radial just a different way. You can dragon move this point, dragon move this point, and after you can change the main position with this one. You can extend on these directions or you can also focus on this mid point. I can increase here to create a sued effect and position my element may be on this area. But if you don't have your gradient tool, you just select your shapes. When you go in the field option gradient, you can we more time change here with these four options soolnear, elliptical, radial and conical. But if you want to make the transformation, for example, silipy elliptical, you need to be out and you need to silect these tools, and now I can adjust at my convenience. 44. Edit strokes: Oh. We are going to see how to work with strokes. And for this, the first thing that I'm going to do it is to create the rectangles. So I will select my rectangle tools, and I will create rectangles. So this rectangle has explained you can apply feel and strokes. So if I just click on feel, I can define a color, for example, the blue color. And if I want to stroke, you need first to activate the stroke here, and when you click on this area, you will have options. The first option to do is to work with the white, so you can increase the white just like this. Let's, for example, apply a value like around this value. After to do this type of work, you can see the stroke appearing on your shapes. Something that I can do also, is to define the color. To define the color, you click on stroke here, and on the stroke options, you can select the color that you want for the stroke. Let's define, for example, the red color. So let's take a look more in details about the stroke options. Let's just remove the color, feel, no color. Let's take a look more deeper about the options here. If I click on this area, something that you can do, so this is the wide. First thing to do it is the cap. The cap is more when you work with line, so here it's not going to change anything. Something important will be the drain. Because if I just go here, you can see how it is finished with rounded corner, small rounded corner for the stroke. So you can change that. Here it's round drain, Bavel, and you can change also for meter drain if you don't want to have the small rounded part on your stroke. Let's just come back on round drain. You can also change the ligment. Here you can see in the selection, where is position the strokes in comparison of the line of selection of our shapes, and you can put inside, stroke is inside outside or medal. After you have more options here, I'm going to reduce Little bit, and one of the options that you can use is to change for dash line style, and you can true work with dash line. We have even texture, but yet a little bit more specific. We're not going to see that. We're just focus on dash line style. When you click on dash liine here on this area, you can create a system of repetition. By default, you can define the size of the dash, so you can just enter a value, and you can define the space between your different dash. Here, I have a dash with a value of four, and I have a space with a value of four also. But you can change. I can also put four, maybe here. I can put A. It's also possible, and you can do something like this. Something that you can do also it is a system of repetition. For example, I can put two, and I can put two on the first phase. But on the second phase, I want four, and I want to have eight just like this. O on my last phase, I want to have one, and I want to have two. You can create multiple phase like this and create something like that for your stroke. So this is the first thing to understand. And you can create a stroke on any type of shape, you can see the shape that you want. You can define for ellipse, create a circles, and I can come back here with for example solid line style, and I will be able to focus on my different parameters, just like that. For example, I have this stroke, if I create another ellipse, one more time, I will have another one, just like this. It is also important to understand the stroke when you cort a line. To create a line, you can also use here, we have the arrow tools, but you can also focus with the pain tools. So if I click on my pain tools, I can just go one left click, a sad left click, and I can just clot to line and validate with this. So here we have a line, concretely sees the curve layers, and let's just take a look. Here we have the stroke, so I can define the color, let's just change for black, and I will see the options value here. Now, I can focus on the cap because if I has little bit here, we can see round cap, but cap, and we can see square cap, just like that. This is just a different way to finish your element. If I go here, here it's not going to change anything, train and aligment. When you work on a line, it's not going to change anything. When I go on this area, one more time, I can use Dahl sein. If you don't want this type of repetition, you can only remove this one, so I need to remove. When you clad here, you can balance. You can also create some phase. In this type of case, I'm just going to come back here and put a value of zero. Here a value of zero, here, a value of zero, and here a value of zero to have something with exactly this type of size. I just want to have S for example and S here. This is the type of line that you can craft as you can see. If you want to add from this base arrow, it's possible. Concretely, I'm going to come back here. Increase a little bit the wide. And what you can see, you can see start and end. So concretely at the start, I can change. At the beginning, if I want to t angles, I can apply three angles. If I want to change the end and around another type of triangle, you have all these type of options as you can see. Around this type of triangle, I can change the first one for, for example, something different again like a square, and I will turn this render here. This is the type of thing that you can do, and after that, you can also change the size with a percentage. It means your finish element, you can change the size with a percentage is also something important to know. But you can also repeat this process. Here, I created the line. But when you go in this area, for example, you have different tools, Pacific, for example, the arrow tools. Automatically it's little different because you will have arrow like that, and it's little different. It's not the same type of arrow that you will be able to create. I can put the black color. But if in this case, a focus with dotted line, it will be a little bit different. Here I'm going to come back with 100%, and on this area, 100% also. After to do this type of work, if I want to hear your dashline, I can feel remove the options and go in this area, can use this one, or I can use this one. And that's it. So here why we have something a little strange on this area for a simple reason that if I go stroke here. Something that I can do, I have the start and the end, so I can come back to none, and here we'll come back to none also. And I can just validate this one. This is how you can work with a stroke. One more time, something brought on to no, also, going to click here and remove. 45. Fill with colors: We are going to see how to feel with colors. For this, we can find these tools just on this area, and this is a flute field tools. Concretely, what you can do with these tools. Here I can create a new layers on this document, and I can click on my field tools, and you will have a tolerance value. If you just have a pixel layer, so it means it's not a image with pixel, you just create a new pixel layer, you can only fill with the colors that you want. For example, I can define any color here or double click and you select the colors that you want. Let's define a red color. On this new pixel layer, I can just feel like this. If you want to fill a background, you can just create a new pixel layers, and you can do this. You can also do inside a selection. For example, I can use a rectangular selection tools. I can focus on the same layers or on the different layers, create a rectangle of selection. If I want to fill with another color, I select a different color here, double click. Let's select the blue color. And with my field tool, you don't care about the tolerance when you work like this because it's not image with pixel. You won't have anything inside the layer, just a selection, it just a transparent layer, so it's not important the tolerance in this type of case, and I can just de select. This is the first thing to understand with this tool. Other type of thing to understand. When you have here and I will just duplicate the layer, so right click duplicate. Here, definitely it's different because if for example, I wanted to fill the ocean with the color, I can use this field tools. And I will define blue color, for example, this blue color. Here's the tolerance is important. Because if I go here, he will try to serve the same type of range of pixel with the same type of color. If you decrease here, you will have more precision. If I go here, I will have more precision, and this is the reason for which I see almost nothing because it's too much precision. If I do something like this, as you can see, we have too much precision. But if I reduce, if I increase the percentage to reduce the precision, I go in this area as you can see it's too much. This is something that you need to understand when you want to work with the fluid. Here we have it's too large, so it's take in count also the sky. After that, you need also to understand that it's contiguous. It is the area contiguous. If you di select here, it won't be area contiguous. It means he can select this part to fill, but it can also salect this part because he defines the same range of color. It is something important to understand contiguous and not contiguous. But in this type of case, something that you can do, you have two ways. You can do this type of work with the selection. Concretely, you can craft frame of selection just here. And you can just feel you can put a tolerance with this one, i tolerance to be able to feel all the elements and that's it. After you can change, for example, the blend mode, I can use overlay. I can also reduce the opacity and I can de select, I will upturn this render. But you can also just click here and you can also just create a rectangle of selection on this line of horizon hops it's too much. Let's go on this area. You can just create a new pixel layers. On this new pixel layers, you select this tool. You feel and after that, you can, for example, decilic first, and you just need to change the bland mode, can be something like soft light, and you decrease the transparency depending of what you want, just like this. You can see the different before after before, after. The last point will be this point like this. If I want to, for example, grand modification, if I use my field tools and I want to feel the sky. I use my field tool and directly if I click here as you can see, we'll optn this render. Let's just take the proper color just to see the difference. Here I will opt this render. But if I activate contiguous, it is important because I won't go on this area for a simple reason that it is contiguous, so it will stop on this area. Something that I can do, it's now it's to reduce the tolerance, and now I will obtain this render. Maybe I can reduce again the tolerance like 21%, and I will obtain this. I can feel the sky. I can repeat the process dress here. But you need to understand that if you don't apply contiguous here, I select this one, I will have color here, and I will have color in this area also. Something that you can do one more time, I can duplicate the layer, so right click duplicate. If I want to change the blue color, I can select a blue color here. And Cilic contigrus feel. I can complete with this area. One more time it is the same type of thing. You can change the bland mode one more time, or something that you can do because it will apply on all the layers, maybe it's better to just decrease the opacity. Even here it's not pretty good because I have a selection here. But don't forget that you can create a selection. For example, I can just duplicate my layer first, and create the selection with the fruit selection tool, left click here. It's not pretty good. It's too much, so I need to reduce. Left click here, and I will complete with left click here and left click on the corner. It's k, we have the selection. Now I can use my bucket field tools and whether I stay on these layers, I feel like this. And I can change the bland mode, the bland mode will apply on all the elements, in this case, I'm not going to change the bland mode just the opacity of the layers. If I just select, I will obtain this render before after, before after. Something that we can do also is I will duplicate the layer again. Duplicate the layer, right click and duplicate. I will create one more time selection, selection here. I will complete this, this area. This time, I will create a new layers, add the pixel layers, and I will fill on the new pixel layers. I will select color, my pen bucket tools, select the color. And I will feel like this. I can the silicate, and now it's different because I created the element on the pixel layers as you can see on the transparency layers. So this is why now I can use the bland mode because it will apply only on this one. For example, I can silic something like why not Softlt one more time. You can see the different before after before and after. If it's too much, you can just reduce with the opacity value of your layers. For example, I can put 41 just here, and you can see the difference before, after, before, after. So this is how you can work if you need to feel with a pen bucket feel too. We have also different type of views, but concretely here, it allows you to have a great overview about what you can do with this tool. 46. Create shapes part 1: Add shapes. We are going to see how to add shapes. For this, we can use these tools here and we have a list of different tools that we can use. The aim is to see how it works, and after you can repeat the process with the different tools. Let's just slick the rectangle tools, craft a rectangle around this area. After to define this rectangle, you will have multiple options on the top. The first option will be to define the color. You can click here and define the color with a color wheels. If you need to crato gradient, it's also possible. When I go on the right, I can also define the color of my shapes on this area. Here, this is a stroke, so you can activate a stroke, define the wide for your shapes here, and you can define also the color of the stroke just on this area. And after you have multiple options, we'll see details after how to edit the stroke or how to feel or how to work with the gradient, but this is the basicle that you need to know first. So now if I want to remove the stroke, I will click here and remove the stroke. After you will have multiple options to edit the shapes. When you have a rectangle, for example, you have predefined options. When you click here, this is a preset. So you can create a rectangle with automatically who dit corners. You can create a rectangle will, for example, this one, for example, this one, or for example this one. So you have multiple type of preset. And after that, you will have option to edit the preset here, or to edit the preset here. For example, if I select a rector girl with this type of corner, I can dragon move, you have a small red point here, and thanks to that, you can dragon move to edit the corner. Something that you can do also is to click on this area. One more time, you can change the type of corner that you want. And if you go here, you can define a percentage. So if I come back on rounded and go in this area, and I can define a percentage. Don't forget that when you go one left click, you have to just select your rectangles. When you have your rectangles, you will be able to resize if you press shift, you can constrain to keep the proportionality. If you want to resize non proportional, you don't press shift and you can resize like this. You can also create a rotation with these handles. In any corner, you can also create a rotation. If I just come back on this area. If you double click, you will have the possibility to edit with a different option. In this type of case, I just have the corners. But if you double click, you can edit your saps with a different options. You can also convert to curves of shapes that will explain just after why it is useful. I'm going to delete this rectangle. Let's select another shape. I'm going to select the ellipse tool. It is exactly the same way. First, you create your ellipse, just like this. If you want to create a perfect circle, you can press shift, and when you press shift, you can create a perfect circle. After to do this type of work, if I If I want to edit this circle, it is the same. You have multiple options here. If you double click, you can enter to some options, but in this case, I need to convert to donut, or convert to P. So I I just sylect this one, I can just slg my circle again, convert to donut. In this type of case, you can, for example, have access to this point. You can open your shap on this direction. You can also have access to this point, this direction, this direction, or this direction inside. But you can use this point and come back at any moment and use this point to extend at your convenience. It corresponds to this value. For example, you have the who radius, so it is same you can work with this value or you can work with a point if you prefer. Here I can change with the start angle. This is the end angles, and I can change also, and this one is the total angles. You can also invert the angles, or you can close P clicking on this area. If you just want to edit another type of preset for your circle, you can click on preset. And one more time, you have multiple types of presets that you can use if you prefer. But when you use any preset, you just like to change the value of the all radius start angle, and angles and total angles. You just come back here, you can also close to come back to a basic circles. You can also break the proportionality if you want to come back to any ellipse. So this is how you can add ellips if I just continue. I want to round rectangle tools. You have directly the rounded rectangle tools, and automatically you have this preset and you can edit the corners. So here, it's not very useful to continue with this rounded rectangle tools. If you want to let's click, for example, the triangle, you want to craft a triangle, you start a triangle like this. If you want a tree gle perfectly proportional, you can pre shift on the keyboard, and you will have a tree angle perfectly proportional like this. If I just click on this one, Zoom little bit. One more time, you have the option to go double click, and if you double click, what you can see, you can see this point here. Thanks to that, you can drag and move on this direction. If you want to change the preset, you go on this option. For example, I have the mirror. I can drag and move like this. Here, this is my top point. I can also change in percentage. And on this area, I can define another type of preset. When I click here, you have this preset. You have this preset, T young rectangles. This one is T young. Eso cell. You have this one, 300 rectangle, and you have this one, 300 rectangle on this direction. Each time you can drag and move the red point to change the value. This is how to start, for example with a cringle. If I just continue here, Let's silk to something. I'm not going to show all the elements. We can use a polygon tool. Polygon tool can be interesting. We can define the number of sides just here. So if I want to start a polygon with eight side, I can define a polygon with eight side. And if you want to keep the proportionality, you go left click, pre shift, and you can keep the proportionality. After to define this polygon, I can change the number of sides. So here this is the number of sides. You can change that. You have also the possibility to work with the curve, but the curve is corresponding to this point. So you have this point here. And if you drag and move on a direction or on another direction, you can activate curves inside instead to have a segment. Just click on the curve here. You can change the percentage, and it's going to be exactly the same. So if you prefer to drag and move here, or to use this value, you can also use this value. Possibility to smooth the point, but it's not very useful in this case and define another type of preset. For example, you want something like this, or you want rounded triangular. It's possible you can change. Let's select to octagon one more time, I can dry and move my point on this direction or this direction. This is the type of thing that you can do if I just select this area. I can continue. Let's craft, for example just where a star or a double star. I'm just going to select the star tools. One more time you can define the number of point. If you start like this, you will craft the basic stars. You can press shift to keep the proportionality. One more time you have axis to the point, so you can change the point just on this area. I can define your inner radius, outer circle inner circle. You can dragon move this value here with a red point like this. You have also the options. If you just prefer you have also the sions to change with the percentage value inner radius. Outer circles and then inner radius. We can also drag and move from this point. Here this is a curve edge. One more time, you can apply this, and if you apply curve edge, you will have a more point and you can curve like this on this direction or in this direction. Sometimes it can be useful, you can just change this one. So just a complementary option, if you don't want, just need to deactivate. When I go on the preset options, you have multiple presets that you can use one more time for this one. And if you say it tiny preside like this one, every time you will be able to change the different ameters, as you can see, and one more time, you will find again inner reduce ca cal inner cacs. 47. Create shapes part 2: We can continue with the chaps. We have seen how to position different she chaps, how it's possible to eat it, and we are going to continue because we have more type of options. Something that we can use, for example, it is something like a arrow. I can see the arrow tools. Automatically, you can create arrow, you can drag and move the arrow. One more time, if you press she, you will keep proportionality. After we can take a look about what we can do on this arrow. One more time you can change again the fill option, you can change the color. If you need to define a stroke, you can also apply a stroke and change the stroke color just on this area. If you don't want to stroke, you can remove at any moment the style and put for none. Here, what you will be able to do. You can have access directly to the different red point. Thanks to that, you can increase the thickness of this line here. On this area, you can change the view of The arrow on this area, it is the same, but on this direction, and on this area, we can drag and move here or we can drag and move here. After to do this type of work, it is same. You can use the thickness value. As as explained, you can use also the proportional with the lent on this direction. You can use the inner offset also, and you can use also one more time the lent on this area. You will have even more options here with the possibility to focus on the inner offset, and here this is a convert to curve that I will explain just after. Per something important, if you want to change, the first arrow and the last arrow, you have the end here, and you can find the beginning. If I click on the end and I want to change for non, to only have one arrow, I can do this type of work as you can see. If at the end, I want to have something different, it can be something like box, I can apply box. And one more time, we can change with a different value located here, or we can work with a percentage on this area. Here, this is the left on the right adjust here. We have also some options, so I can also click here and make some transformation for this one. Also. You have predefined sheps so select a preset, and if you want directly a preset with only one arrow, it's possible or preset with double arrow, you can select this one. Or if you prefer something like this, it's also possible. So you can define the preset that you want. So after I'm going to select this arrow, just press delete on the keyboard and let's continue little because when you use this type of tool, like, for example, donut tools, Cressa tools, if I sect the donut tools, finally, it is exactly like the circle. So as explained before, you can create a circles, so you can select the lip tools, or shift crate circles, and you can convert to douut, and you will have exactly the same thing. It is exactly the same thing to use this one or to use this one. So only difference is you can have axis directly here with a to use preset. If you want to create something like a crescent, you can use directly the crescent tools. You can press shift to keep the proportionality. After you can focus on this part, and you can focus on this part with the red point. Automatically, you can find also left curves. Here, this is the right curves. If you want to mirror, you just activate mirror just like this, and if you want negate to invert like that, it's possible to apply negat also. When I go on this area, this is the left curves, and when I go on this area, this is the right curves. Here you have different type of options like the transform origin, and I will explain a little bit how you can use transformation panels because it can be interesting when you use this one. Here you can transform the object. But when you have any object, you have also some transformation panels and with this transformation panels, it is possib to work with different type of options. Something that I'm going to do is to just come back here. I will use that will come back to the layer panels and just click here and remove. Let's just continue. I will go on the left on this area, so we have seen the different type of tools. Something in testing that we can select it, for example, the **** tools, and automatically, you can create this type of shapes. One more time, you will have multiple options like this point to increase or decrease the circle inside, like this one. So thanks to that you can drag and move this. This one, if you want to add curves on a direction or a d direction, and this one also to reinforce the inner part. I can extend here. You will have the same options on this area for the number of ts. If you want to increase or decrease, you can change that. One more time inner radius. A radius just here and two size just on this area. Here this is a notch size. You will have more options one more time, so you can click here. If you want to create something like a cloud, you will have an option like a cloud. You can go on the parameter, define the number of bubbles for your cloude Just like this. And if I just continue, you can also have interesting tools like you have something at the end. It is spiral tools. And when you click on the Spiral tools, you can automatically create a spiral. Only difference when you create a spiral is you don't feel the spiral generally, you only apply a stroke, just like this. If I double click, you have multiple point and you can also extend proportionally. Here, I can define my stroke, and you have different type of style for your element. If I just come back on linear, you can define a number of turns, as you can see. You can invert just here the directions. You can define a arc angles, and you can define a inner radius. So something that we can do is just to create a basic drawing using these shapes. So first, I will select my rectangle tools and just create a rectangle on the back rooms. And on the right, I will define a color like for example this one. Then I will define triangles. I will select my triangle tools, and I will create first triangle around these directions, strike option, none, and I will define a color, like for example, can define a type of gray color. I if it's not easy to find just click here, and we can define, for example, this type of color. And I will put my triangle around this area. I will press control and increase little bit here, and control left click to define another one maybe on this direction. I can extend here and put this maybe around this area. So let's extend a little bit also this one on the directions and extend a little bit this one on this direction. Something that I can do also, it test to crater rectangle. I'll crayoctangle tools may be rectangles around this area and define a color like for example, the green color. I will complete with some ellipse, or I click on my ellipse tools. Crate, for example, ellipse here with another type of green color like this one. After that, I will press control left click to create an order one here. Let's change little bit the color. And control left click to create an Oder one here. I can create a small rotation. Change little beat the color also, and control out left click and displace another one just here. After to do this type of work, I can define, for example, maybe I can click here. Reduce the little bit on this direction. This one on this direction, this one on these directions, select my ellipse tools, re shift rato ellipse on these directions, activate the yellow color, and put my element maybe on this area. If I want to add the clothes, I can select my clock tools. After I will explain the bolear operation, how you can transform object. But first here, we just use the basic tools, just to make something really basical to see how we can work with the sheps. So this one, I can define the white color. Just here, I can reduce define the number of bubbles, but you can reduce also. Let's work with eight bubbles and press outt left click, and I can resize, we shift, press outt left click, and I can resize. We shift again. Just like this to put title codes on this area. What I can do, I have more options, one more time. If you just, for example, your triangle tool, you can define a triangle. But if you want this match, you can see it's not directly convenient. So this is why we'll have the possibility if we want to resize. We can put this element here, but definitely it's not very convenient. So in this type of case, it will be better to use a different tools. If you use the segment tools, I didn't show you, you can also create this type of segment. So in this type of case, we will be able to use the pain tools, for example, to complete and maybe make something like this here, and I will change the stroke for no stroke and fill options for the white color. And I can double click. I can edit my different point and my convenience and repeat the process with the pain tools. And I will go in this direction, just snap here. First, slic the triangle, define the pain tools, and I will be able to snap on these directions. One more time, click here and work with the field options white color. And I can double click to edit the point. We'll see that in details after. And I can do my last things. I have something wrong. I think on the back just here. On my rectangles, yes, I have this one. I will zoom le bit, slick my pain tools, and this is the same, I can snap here because I have the snapping options. And Let's do something like this. Selection tools, stroke, and define no stroke and defy a field color with the wise color, just like this. Let's make just something basical. It's okay for the saps, so as you can see you can add multiple shapes on this area. It's interesting when you use the shapes to mix with the bole operation. This is what I'm going to show you after, and you can mix also with the pain tools if you want to create drawings. 48. Draw with pen: We are going to see how to draw with the pen tool. For this to have access to these tools, you can click here, and this is the pin tools. Let's first see the basic of the pin tools, and you can craft first, something that you can do, you can craft line, you can craft segment, and you have the possibility to craft curves. First, if I want to create multiple line, you will just position one point with left click, then a second point, for example, left click. Left click again. Left click again, left click again, left click again, and you can position multiple point. If you want to finish, you have the possibility to just here and you create your curve, you use your selection tool just like that. And automatically you can validate curves. When you go on the right, I created multiple segment, and I have a curves layers. Something that I'm going to do also is here, this is my curves, why I don't see anything if I deselect Because these curves I need to add a stroke. So I can go on the stroke options on the top and I can define a stroke with a different values that we have. I just add a stroke for example with this value, and you can define also the color of your stroke. Let's just define the black color. After that, with a pin tool, you can also create something like a polygon, it means you can add multiple point, just like this. After you can close here, you select your selection tool and you can validate. Why you create something like this, if you want also to feel inside, it's possible to feel with a color. Now why it is interesting, it interesting because you have the possibility when you use a pin tool to create the curves. How to craft a curve, you define a first point. And when you want to craft your second point and craft a curve, you stay left click. And when you stay left click, you can go on a direction with your mouse or another direction just like this, and you can pull the handles to work with the curves. If you are satisfied, you stop left click, and you can define another point. So for example, I go here, left click, stay left click, and I can try another curve. Can go here, left click, stay left click, craft another curve, stop, and here left click, stay left click. If I just sl my selection tool, I can d, and you have created this type of curves. I can also close the shape, so I select my pen tool again, but here we de select first, Pen tools, and I create the first point, second point, I start to curve on the direction. Noder point, start to curve, an nother point, just like this, like this, like, like this. And like this. And here I created the sharp, I can fill also with a color. So I will show you after that it's possible to edit this different point. I will come back with no color. So it means when we click here, if you click one time, you can just select your element as an object. But if you double click, you can enter and automatically, you will be redirected to the Note tools. And with this note tools, you can select each point and you can make transformation, but we will see that more in detail just after, so we can just select the different handle, select the point, and apply some transformation. I will show you also that you will be able to convert to sharp, to smooth, to smart. And if you have more transformation, it's possible using the different tools. Here it is the same. I can double click. Here I I did a new point, but I can, for example, this point, I don't like like this. I can convert to smooth and start the curves, and after I can make adjustment to create a curve, as you can see. So now from this, you will be able to I'm going to show you a use. We are going to create a small drawing. So I will select my pen tools just here. First, I will craft a rectangle just on the back. Let's crate something basical, so just a basic rectangle to craft a back rooms. Here struck, no struck. After I would like to craft something like mountain on the back, so I will define my pen tool. It will be perfect, and I will start, for example here, and craft first mountain just like this, maybe a second one. Just here, and maybe a third one. And I can go outside, I craft just multiple segment. And after to do this type of work, I can use my selection tool, stroke, no stroke, and I define a color, or I can go also on this area, double click, and I can search a color here. Let's define, for example, this color. If I want to craft an effect for my mountain, maybe I can change a little bit the color, just like this. F to craft an effect from my mountain, I can select my pain tools, and I can snap here. You can snap to this point. I can go a little bit on this direction, and maybe I can snap to this point and snap here. You need to have activity to defer snapping options. Is my selection tools struck. No struck and fill options. We will double click here and we make something little darker, just like this. Prat 20 fit. I will continue. I will select my pen tool again. I will start snapping here. Put something until this area. Go back here. This point and snap to this point. It is the same selection tool, struck, no struck, and I will fill with the same gray color. Concretely, you selling the Hopper tools. You find this color, and you click here. Let's redo the same action. I can click on my pen tools. Just go on this direction, the direction, this direction, snap here, here, selection tools, stroke options, no struck, and I will recuperate this gray color. As you can see, we can create something like this. I will create another element with my pain tools. So for example with my pain tools, I will start from this point, this point, and here I will create a curve, so I will draw a point, stay left click. Here stay left click, and here stay left click also. And I will pull like this. Go outside. Here, it's not a problem. You can go outside exactly as you want. And I will define a color like this type of green color and stroke. No struck. And I will increase a little bit. The size of this element. I will click on my paint tool again. Start maybe again just here. And do something like this, something like this, and something like this. Also, p here, go outside, come back here and select, stroke, no stroke and just make something a little darker, just like that. I want to add something like a snow effect on my mountain. I can use my pain tools. Snap around maybe this area. Here, we don't have a curve, so it's pretty simple. We just need to do maybe something like this. And every time selection tool struck, no stroke, and the white color, so I can go and feel, select the white color and obtain this type of render. L et's go here. Continue. Pen Tool. I think it's a good training to create some basic drawing like this because you can see different things. Sometimes it's not working properly to snap. So when you have the type of problems, For example, I'm going to click here. It's not pretty good. I will select my selection tools. Why I'm in trouble because the curves here was not in the foreground. I'm going to remove this. Come back to my layer on the foreground and now if I select my pain tools, it's going to work because now I should be in the foreground. Yes, so now it's going to work. We need to be careful to something like this. Let's slick here. T it is perfect to train with a pin tool to try to make this type of drawings. It is perfect. And I click on the curve to stay on the for groom and define my pin tool again, click here, click here, click here, and just make multiple line like this. Strike and activate the se color just like this. If you double click, you can edit the different enter point, cyclet to the curve here down front, so we can dragon move your different point to make transformation. If I wanted to add some clothes on the sky, I can also use the pin tools one more times I slick my pin tools, can go on this area, t the first curve, second curve. But maybe it was not pretty good what I'm doing here. I'm going to come back at the first curve here. I think definitely if you want to create a clue, we have better things that will explain. It's not pretty good to use this type of tool, but we can do this. I will select my gray color, just do something like that or put this in wise. Strike, No struck, like this, and just do something like that. I can double click if I need and make some transformation. On different point. Like this. I created this, I can press control. I left click can create another one control left click, and we can create multiple cloudes, just like this on the sky. We could continue. Just an example, but the pin tool, we can continue with this extremely useful when you want for example to. You can make a lot of things with this type of pin tools. M 49. Edit points: H. We are going to see how to edit her point. For this, we've seen how to use a pen tool. It's possible to edit the ensur point. You can edit the she point when you use the pen tool, but also when you craft the shapes, and you convert this shape to a curves. So first, if I select my pen tools just here, and I'll just add multiple segment just like this, so I can add multiple segment just here. After I will show you with curves, so I can click on my selection tool validate. Let's just craft the second curves with the pen tools. But this time we can stay left click and thanks to that, we can create multiple curves like this, stay left click and do something like this. I will use my smooth tools and just validate. If I need to here, I have a struck, I have this struck, and here I have this struck, so it's better to see what I want to show you. How to edit the sure point. You need to you have two options. Double click, and when you double click, you can have access to the different sure point. Or something that you can do, it's just go to go to the Not tools. And the lot not tools allow you to be the same thing that the double click. If you click once here, you can edit the sure point. If I zoom little bit on this area, what I will be able to do. Concretely, you can just silect a point, and you can drag and move the point, you stay fe click, and you can drag and move the point. When the point is selected, the blue color is full just like this. It means you can slick multiple points. If I click here, I can select this point, shift, this point, shift, this point. So now the swi point is selected, and if I drag and move this one, the swi point are going to move at the same time because I selected sweet print at the same time. You can also when you click here, create a frame of selection, I can create a frame of selection of this sit print, and now I selected the sit print. And you can do the same with the curves. When you have a curves, you have your no tools, it is the same. You can drag and move a point, drag and move a point like this. But when you have a curve, you have also two handles. It means you have a first handles and you can work with your curves in a directions, and you have a second handle to work with the curves on another direction. When you train a lot and with experience will be perfectly how to drag and move the handles in a direction or another ection to have a bitter curves. Something that you can do it to add Ensure point. How to add Ensure point. For example, I have this one, and when I'm directly on the segment, if I just use one Nef click, I can add a new point. I click here, one nef click, I can add a new point. Now I have a new point here, and I can dragon move this new point. I have this one, Dragon move here, and this one, Dragon Move here. Let's do the same thing here. If I want to add a new point, maybe ones here. Left click on the curves, and I created a new point. For example, I can drag and move this one here. This one here. This one on this direction, and when I have this one, I can change it to beat the curves, moving the handles, but I can also change also the curves, dragging and moving the two handles. Now you have more options. It means when you have for example here, something like this, something that you will be able to do is to convert to sharp, to smooth or to smart. Concretely, if I go here, we have something with angle, and it is equal to sharp. So if I want to convert to curve or smooth, to craft just a curve here, I can use convert to smooth or convert to smart. You won't have big difference between smooth and smarts and for example, here, craft convert to smooth, I obtain this render. If I use convert to Smart, it will be almost the same thing. And after that, you have access to the handles, these handles, and we have created the curves. If I click here, convert to smooth. But you can also select multiple points. For example, I can select this sw point we shift and convert all to smooth. I can also slc this one, convert to smooth, slx this one, convert to smooth. Sex this one, convert to smooth, sylx this one, convert to smooth. I converted all my curve to two smooth just like this or too smart. Thanks to that, now I have these different curves with handles. You can do the opposite process. So when you have any point like this with the two handles, you can convert to sharp. For example, see this one, and I can convert to sharp, just like this. Now we have a sharp angles as you can see. But if I want to continue, I can click here and maybe shift and click here on this two point. Convert to sharp, just like this, and I will obtain this type of render. So you can also convert to sharps. Something important also is you can do this type of work on any sharps. For example, I slick my rectangle tools just here, and I will create a rectangles. These rectangles, I will use a color. Let's se the red color. And I will define an or tools. So what type of other tools I will define for my example, will define for example directly Yes, just the lip tools, and I will create a circle just on this direction. So now I have these two shapes. And as I explained before, you need to convert to curves if you want to edit the nodes. So if I slick the tools, the note tools here, nothing will happen. So I will go right click, convert to curves, these rectangles. So now I have access to the different shore point, and with my note tools, I can slick the different shore point. For example, if I click here, I can drag and move this point on this direction. If I go here, I can drag and move this point on this direction. I can also click on this one and convert to Smooth. I can also go on the line and add another point. And do something like this. Click here and convert to smooth also. So concretely, you have a base. And from this base, you have the possibility to prt multiple curves. As you can see it's pretty fast. So now, for example, I can play this one here, I can maybe extend, put a color. If I want to add more point, I can go here and add a point on this area, a point on this area, and we can make some transformation at our convenient. The base is the rectangles, and you can definitely in a pretty fast way add multiple point if you need, and you can convert to curves also if you need, and I will turn this render, just like this. It is for example, I have this element. This element, I will convert to ur first to convert to curves. Something that I can do, I can sic for example this point, and I can drag and move on this direction and you can press shift if you want to constraint on the vertical axis. I will click on this point, shift, click on this point, and drag and move on this direction, we shift to go on the vertical axis. Maybe I can click on this one and drag it and move a little bit. I can change the color, and as you can see, dragging and moving the sure point will allow me to make this type of transformation just like this. Here. I I just select let's just add the basic rectangles on this area to let's just make something. Here, I will select this one, right click range, right click range, move to front. I will craft to group with this element, clicking here shift shift, right click group. Now I have this group. I can resize proportionally. For example, I have this element. I just make something simple, I can press control, and duplicate duplicate, maybe something like this. Twice just to show you how you can edit the share point, as you can something pretty convenient that you can do to edit this point extremely practical in a different way. 50. Draw with brush: We're going to see how to use the pin brush tool. And to use these tools, we can click here. And first, I'm going to show you how we can use the pin brush tools with the basic and you can use for drawing. But it's also possible to use the pain brush tool if you want to make modification on different image. So first things to do if you want to use a pin brush tool just to paint or to create drawings. First, I click here and the first thing to do is to define the options. So the first option is the white of the brush and define a color. You can define a color in the color panel that we set here, so for example I can slic the red color. And if I use opacity flow harness at 100, and I paint, I will obtain this render. And I paint again, I will obtain this render. While we have the assistant, because automatically you will have a new pixel layer created. So if you don't have any pixel layers, and you start to paint automatically, he will create a new pixels layers. Now, let's see the difference between opacity, flow and harness. So Gorretly, the opacity, it is just the transparency. If you reduce, you won't have 100% of color, you will have only 20, in this case, 29%. And if I paint again, I will have 29% again. Now, let's talk about the flu. The flu is this, it is the time to have the maximum of colors. So if I reduce the flu, when I start, I won't have 100% of color. So when I start, I won't have 100%, but after yes. But at the beginning, I won't have 100% of colors. The harness, what is this it is to have transition or blue on the edge of the brush. So for example, if I put here, I don't have any blue or transition on the edge. But if I decrease the harness like around 30% like this, and I use my brush, as you can see you can find the blue. On the edge of the brush. This is a different options. After you can use also a stabilizer. I'm going to remove this one and create a new pixel layer. The stabilizer is useful. I'm going to show you if I increaseample the white of my brush, and I define the green color. For example, I can draw like this, or I can put the harness at 100%. If I want to draw something like this, as you can see the curve is not pretty good, and this is the reason for which you can use stabilizer. Can activate stabilizer here, and when you activate the stabilizer, you can use a lane. Depending on the length, if you increase the length, you will have more power for your stabilizers. For example, if I do do this, you can find a small line around, and as you can see, you can make so much better curves. But you can also increase the stabilizer, you will have less precision. But the curve will be better again, so I can increase the stabilizer. Let's put this value and left click, and as you can see, you can pull like this, and I can make very nice curves because I use the stabilizer. At any moment I can deactivate the stabilizer. For example, I can paint again just on this area. Now, something that I can do is to create a new pixel layers, go on the back. For example, I can use again the stabilizer. Click here, create something little in gray. I can double flick here if I want to select a different color like for example, maybe this one, and I will go on the back and on the back, I can do something like this. And that's it. After I can remove my stabilizer, and if I want to paint, I can paint here. As you can see, because the layers is on the backgrounds, it's okay and I can repeat this type of things. If I just want to have a blue background here, I can create new layers. Here, and I can use just a blue color, so I can see this type of blue color, increase the wit of my brush, and I can paint like this. But I will put this layer on the back. So it's just an example. Now, I'm going to remove this layer, this layer, and this layer to show you that you can apply also a mirror and asymmetry. So concretely, what you can do I will decrease my wide of the brush, associates again too much, and I will decrease for around 30%. On the color, I will define the black color just like this, and I will create a new layers, and I will activate here the symmetry. If you activate the symmetry, for example, you have this line of symmetry, and if I draw like this, as you can see, it is perfectly symmetric. But it's not with mirror. It means if you activate moreover mirror, I will obtain this render. But if I deactivate mirror and I go here, as you can see, the line will appear on this direction. This is why you need to be careful between symmetry and symmetry and mirror. If you just activate mirror, here, nothing will happen, so you need to focus on the mirror with the symmetry. Let's remove this one, create a new layer again and activate the symmetry. You can turn your axis of symmetry. How to turn your axis of symmetry? When you are closed, you can see the small arrow, and you can draw again move and you can change the position. Something that you can do is to press shift to constraint, and when you press shift, you can apply a constraint and for example, pretty good to perfectly position this axis on this area. If I don't have the mirror, take a look, If I draw a line here, the line will appear on the direction. But if I activate moreover, the mirror, the line will appear here. Something that we can do. It's for example to use this axis, and I would like to draw something like a face so I can decrease the wide of my brush. I can for example, create something like a first layer, only to create like a sketch. For example, I can go here to something like this. Here we can separate. In this first layer, it will be just to draw the basics. For example I can separate in one line here, one line here, one, two, and three, and I will decrease my wide. For example, the position of the eyes will be around this area. The position of the noise will be around this area and the most probably around this area. Ears will be around this area, just like that. Here we can make something for the hair. And if I need to I can create der layers, here it will be a sketch layers. You can change on this one, the opacity, just like that, and you can create an der layer with, for example, the stabilizers, you define the size that you want. I can change little the length of my stabilizer, and I can do something better as you can see. But on the new layers. It means on this one with 100%. It means I can draw like this. I can draw this for my face just here. As you can see, you can use the stabilizer. If the stabilizer is too strong, like, for example, here, I can decret, I can decrease the value and do something like this. You can create a first layer to have the base, and then you can create second layers to, for example, draw like this. Here. I can complete on this area. As you can see my first layer, I can just remove the view or if I don't need any, I can also erase just like this. This is the type of thing that you can do with this type of brush. Another thing is you can increase the symmetry. If for example, I remove these layers, and I want to increase the symmetry, I want to have multiple axis. You can change the number here, and you can increase the number of axis until 16. Why it is useful because if you want to create something like patterns, you can draw like this. As you can see it's pretty fast, and you can really do this type of work also. Like this. I could continue. If I want to add a point, I can add a point just here or just a line, and you can do something like this is definitely pretty fast, and you can use this with affinity photo it's definitely not the problems. I can deactivate my symmetry, and I will obtain this render. The last point is you can use the brush when you want to make some transformation. For example, here I can create new layers. I will define my pin brush tool, and I will define a color like for example, the pink color. And directly I can paint. It means I will increase little the wide of my brush here, increase a little bit, and I will decrease the harness. It will be pretty useful in my case. I will go in these directions and I will paint on the mouse, and I still have a stabilizer, as you can see. And I can do something like that. After that, I can change the bland mode, slick something like slight, and I can decrease the opacity. If for example, it's too much, I can create a mask, but if I don't want to mask, I can just use the razor brush tools, change the harness and just rise with the edge of my brush here. You can do this with your brush tool also. I I decrease little bit of opacity, this is the render that we can do just using a brush. This is how to work with this story. 51. Draw with pixel: We are going to see how to draw with pixels. For this, we can use this tools. This is the pixel tools. You can draw using pixels. First, let's take a look about the parameter. You will find the same type of parameter at the brush, but you have little bit difference. It means here we focus on opacity flow. But as you can see, you have also the hardness, it is not possible directly to edit the hardness. I can create the new pixel layers, and then you will find one more time the stabilizer, and you can focus on symmetry also. Concretely, if I go in this area, I can define a color. Let's define the red color. I will define a wide, and after to define my wide, I can draw using the pixels tools just like this. As you can see, we have multiple pixels, you can also just put some pixels on this area, and you can just draw with pixels. This is the type of thing that you will be able to do. I'm going to remove this one and create a new layers. If you want to activate symmetry, you can click here. One more time, you can try again move the axis and you can press shift if you want to constraint, for example like this, or I can turn here and press shift. You can also activate the mirror tool if you need, and you can also increase the number of axis just like this, and I can decrease my wide Zoom bit. I have still my red color, and I can add a point here, and I can also draw like this. Can decrease so wide just on this area. And if you want to add more point, you can do something like that. Let's hear another concrete example. I will click on these layers and I will press delete. I will then deactivate the symmetry, the mirror, and let's come back here with the value of one. I will just define white first. Let's increase the size. Until to turn maybe this value here. It's a little too big. Yes, just on this area. I will create a new layers here. I will define one symmetry, one mirror. If I just go here, you can go one left click. For example, I can go around this area and one left click. It's perfect. Now I will define a different size like this. I will create something like that. After I will decrease again the size of my brush, and I will do something like this. Then I will change the color for the whit. Increase a little bit, the wide with my brush and do something like that. Here. Something that I can do is to continue with this one and I will recuperate this red color, and I can do something here, something here, and something here. We can just do anything that you want. You can use your pixel tools. If you need to draw something using the pixels, is definitely possible. Can go here. As you can see, it's pretty good. The aim is to try to draw something when you use this type of tools. Here. It's okay for that. This is how to work with this type of tools. You don't need more to know, just to draw using pixels. After you can recuperate this pixel tools, if you want to create environment environment with pixels, definitely, you can use these tools, and s you can do anything that you want, and you will use some pixels to draw what you want. 52. Erase with brush: Rise with brush. For this, we can use these tools. This is the erase brush tools. But before to use this tools, we need to draw something. Something that I can do is to create a new pixel layers, and I will use my paintbrush tool first. With my paint brush tools, I would be able just to select a color. For example, I can select the red color. I will define the wide of my brush here, and I will define hardness 100%. If I just paint like this here, and I select after my rise brush tools. You have exactly the same type of parameter that you can use, so it means you can rise with the opacity flu hardness. I'm going to put this at 100% also, but you can use also a mortal stabilizer. And even the symmetry and M feature. If I go here, I can just rise. If I want to use, for example, the harness, it means to have blue on the edge of my brush, I can do something like this. That's it. This is the type of thing that you can do. You can also change the opacity and the flue if you need. You can draw anything, you can use, for example, pain brush tools, and I will go on the right. I will double click to define a color. Let's see, for example, this type of color. Maybe I can define this one, and I can start to draw something here. And I will decrease the value and maybe do something like this. And I will select one more time, my pen brush tools, and I will define a green color. I can also in this area, just increase the size of my brush, and you can just go for example, one nef click here. Here I will go outside, but I can just use one neve click here and it can be pretty fast, just like this. If you need to erase, you just click here and depending on what you want to do, you can set the different parameters, and if you want to erase something, you can use this type of tools. So it's okay for that. It was just some bicycles. If you click on this image. First things to understand if you use Rs brush tool, just like this and you set your parameters and let's just fix hardness at 100%, you can just errise, and you will be on a transparent back rounds. So every time when you have a image, just like this, if you use your eraser brush tool, you can just rise and you will have the transparent back rounds. This is one of the first things to understand. I would use my historic panels and or maybe I can come back here. I think it will be pretty better. But you can use also in a different way. If I take the example again of if you want to paint and to add lipstick using the brush on the mouse. I can craft the new layers, select first, paint brush tools, and I will define a wide. I will decrease the hardness to maybe around 40%. I will select a color like a pink color, and I will zoom on this area. Let's increase a little bit the wide. Just here, it's too much. Let's focus around this area. It's too much again. After to do this work, I can paint just here. As you can see, I can go outside because if I want to rise after, it's definitely possible. For example, I can do something like that. I will go on the bland mode and on the bland mode, I will select soft light. Already the render is pretty better. But if I want to rise and to have a better render, I will select my erase brush tools. In this case, as you can see, you can find the render. In this case, I will decrease the wd. In this case, I will just use the edge of my brush, and this is why I will decrease the hartnes to maybe 30%. Thanks to that, I can just use the edge of my brush to erase a little bit and to create interesting transition between the skin and the mouse. I can just rise with the edge of my brush. Thanks to that, I can obtain this render. To finish this work, I will decrease the opacity. Let's focus around 40%. Thanks to that you can have a realistic render. Maybe I can rise a little bit on this area, can be perti better and here also. So I can find the different before after and before after. This is different use of the eraser brush tool. 53. Master boolean operations: We are going to see the Bolean operation. To do this type of work, we are going to create a rectangle first, so I see the rectangle tools. Then this rectangle, I will define a color, Let's just define the red color, and I will put my rectangle around this area. Then I will create a circles, so I will select my ellip tools. Create a circle, I will rieckly tell me the proportionality, activate the blue color and define here after I will show you concrete example, but let's first see the basics of the blear operation. So you can apply this to one to two or more shapes, and you need to understand the object on the force. F on the foreground and the object on the backgrounds. So first, I will select the two object with shift or with a frame of selection, and to have access to the bolean operation, you can use right click and you will find geometry. Add substract intersection divide. The first operation is add, so concretely, you will add the object on the foreground, form the object on the backgrounds. So if I click here, I have now one entity converted to curves, and I have only one element converted to a curves. Now let's just come back with the historic panels. I will come back here, come back here, and come back here until to have my two shapes. That's okay. I'll select the two shapes. Second bollard operation right click, select geometry, it is substrate. So we'll substrate the object on the foreground, so I mean the circle from the rectangle, substrate. Thanks to that, you can see this type of created on this area. Order type of boran operation. Let's select all the element, right click geometry, intersection. We will have an intersection between the object on the foreground and object on the backgrounds. Concretely, we keep the part of the circle at the intersection between the two objects. Let's just come back here, select the twot one more times and right click geometry. The last operon is just the opposite process, we will remove the part at the intersection of the two object. So we'll remove this part. If I just come back, I'm going to show you the last options, I will click here, and we will select directly right click, and I will apply geometry divide. Concretely, where neslic divide, we can divide insanity, this part, this part and this part. I'm going to show you why it is useful. Let's see another concrete example. I want to create something like a moon. I can create a first circle. Then I can create second circle with shift, define an oder color. Put this circle here, increase with shift, do something like this, and I can select my two circles, and right click geometry, and I will select substract to turn the shapes. Let's select another example. I will click on my elips tools, create a first circle just here with a specific colors. And I will put my first circle around this direction. And then I will press control left click to duplicate and to define another color. And I will press control, left click duplicate and define another color and put this one also here. So something that I'm going to do is to select this two circle, try to dragon move in the middle of my document, and select this one in the middle of my document also. Maybe I can drag and move a little bit more, select my two element, my doll perfect. Now, click on the shapes, decrease the opacity. Click on this one, decrease the opacity also, and click on this one, decrease little bits opacity. What we can see, we can see, we have a part here on the intersection, and I want to turn this shape here. So what I can do, I can select my Swiss circles like this, right click, and I will define geometry, and I will define Here in this type of case, I can just use intersection. And thanks to that, I can obtain this type of shapes. I can come back with the maximum of opacity. And thanks to that, I obtain this render as you can see. So now let's see a concrete example. Going to craton element, so I will select, for example, the pain tools first. So we'll define my pain tools. At first, I will save my rectangle tools. We're going to create a basic drawing with something for the sky just like this. After I will define my pain tools, I will select the pain tools here and create just multiple point just on the directions. And I can come back here. I will define a color. So first, I deactivate the stroke color, and I will work with something little in gray like maybe, maybe it's better to click here, double click, and we can have access to a gray color. It's pretty simple when I go on this area. Something that I will do also, is to craft rectangles just here and to apply the green color. Maybe I will click on this one and reduce little bit. Now, what I will be able to do, I will click here on this element, convert to curves. Add a point on the directions, and add a point on this direction. Maybe I can decrease little bit the point. Something that I will be able to do is to click on this point and create a curve is and click on this point, create a curve less. If I go on this area, I will lick on this point. Convert to smooth. Click on this point, convert to smooth. This one, also it will be good. This one, also, it will be good, and this one also it will be good. Something that I will do is, I want to use my pain tool, so I will use my pain tools here, and I want to craft something like snow here. But if I want to follow the curves, it's almost impossible. This is the reason for which I will just c something like this, multiple point around. Oops, think it's not pretty good. I will just come back on this direction. For example, this direction, this direction, these directions, and maybe here, I will do something like that. I have a stroke, I need to remove the stroke feel with a white color. And now it's perfect if I crat intersection. I'm going to show you afters. First, just sylla pin tools, just go around like this. Here, here, here, here. And here. I will use my selection tools, right click, range, move to front. After about the stroke, no struck, and abo the field options y Color. I will repeat to last time this element, I will create something like this. Come back here, come back here, here, here, here, and on this direction. I will use my selection tools. No struck, and field options color, right click, range, move to front. Something that I can do now to obtain the render that I want is to select this element, shift, the mountain, so it means this curves and right click right click geometry. I will select divide. Thanks to that, I can separate, click here, and delete and obtain this render. I will do the same thing here. I select this element, shift this element, right click, right click geometry, divide. Thanks to that, I can select this one, press delete, and click here, click here. We shift, right click, geometry, divide. Thanks to that, I can select this part and just press delete on the keyboard. Another type of example is, I'm going to use my lip tools to show you again, Devine. Now I will create something like this with a color just like that. I will make something little darker, put the circle here, press control, left click, and I'm going to duplicate multiple time this element just here. After that, I will go on the left, create a frame of selection to select all this element, and I will go right click geometry ad. Thanks to that, I just have one entity. One other the problem, I want to follow this entity with the curve and cut this part here. Something that I will do. It's important to duplicate this element. Duplicate this element first, right click here and duplicate. After to duplicate this element, as you can see, I have a second element, the same just on this area, put on the same position. Something that I can do is to select this one, shift, select this one, and right click geometry divide. Thanks to that, I can have a cut on this area, so I can move or press delete on the keyboard, and we can follow perfectly this area. But this is why we need to duplicate this curve because as you can see, we have a cut here. Now I can delete also this one. And my last example, I'm going to repeat the process again before to show you my last example. So I can click here and repeat the same process. Maybe can extend a little bit just like this. Ratops. Salic we shift the different circles, right click geometry ab, just like this. After to do this type of work, I can click here, duplicate this element so right click duplicate. Then I slick this one and this one, right click geometry divide, and I will remove this part, just like that. So this is the type of thing some example about bole anueration that you can use, and as you can see it's pretty good to use, for example, these divide options if you want to turn this type of render. 54. Master transformations: Transform object. We are going to see how to transform object. So we have seen how to add shapes, and these shapes, we can use transformation panels, and we have also the possibility to change the position point to add a transformation. So first, I will slick my rectangle, just crat rectangle on this area. And I will define a color with a fiel options and just define this red color. Some things that we can do. I'm going to reduce a little bit by rectangles. One of the first things that we can do is to go on the right here. As I explained, we place transformation panels. You can also go on window and you can find transform window transform. At the beginning, we position the transformation panel on this area. Concretely is useful for the different shapes, but it's also useful when you add any element, you will have the transformation panels. First, here, you have the position, the wide, the eight. My rectangles, I have this wide and this eight. If I want to display a specific value. For example, I want 500 for the wide, I can take 500 for the wide. If I want 300 for the eight of my rectangle, I can take 300. You can also break the proportionality lock, the aspect ratio and if you click on lock, and I change for 600. Automatically here will have 360. Or you can remove lock aspect ratio, and in this case, I can enter the two values that I want on this area. Possibility to work with a position. This is my position on the x and y axis. If for example, I tape 100, I will have a position of 100 on the x axis. So if I silton order rectangles just on this area, and these rectangles I define on the x axis 100, I will know that we have perfectly in the same aligate, I silton order rectangle here, I define x position 100. Automatically, here we have zero, and on this area, we have exactly 100. You have also the position on the y axis. So if I dra again move here, we have the position on the y axis, if I tape 300, I will have 200 on the y axis. But I'm going to remove this one, remove this one depending of the shore point. Because here, for example, I have y axis, if I tape 100, for example, I can tape 100. So I have 100100, but the 100 position 100 pixels if from the top left corner of my shapes. And you can change that. If for example, you click here, you will have 300, from the midle point left here. If you select this one, you will have 500 pixels from the bottom left corner sing this point. Why Be the reference point can change, so it means your reference point is not every time on the top, you can define the reference point from this area, and if I define 400, I will be here, and 400 from this part. If for example here I define zero, I will be perfectly in the corner. This is where you can change this point. If your click center, it will be from the center of your shape. Here if I define 400, it will be from a center of my saps and 400. Now something that I can do if I define this point. And I define for example zero, I will be here and zero, I will be here, as you can see. So this is why this point can be sometimes interesting because definitely you can change the position. Here possibility also to craft rotation with this panel, so you can turn, and you can also apply here, and you can do something like this on your sheps. As you can see, the rotation point here, it's not because of here. So if I define center, You can change from the center, but it depends on the element if I defined right here. You can turn from the right point. So this point can be a reference point, and it can be useful for the xn y axis, but also when you want to turn your object. By default, if I'm located here, I will decrease my object. By default, if you slick top left corner, and you create the rotation, you turn around the top left corner. If now you define center, the sur point will be in the center just like this. If you define right and you turn, you can also turn from the panels. But if you turn from the panels, it's not going to work properly. It's only from this one from the transformation panel. If you click here, you will turn around this point, so it means this one. Something important also to know if you want to create a rotation but directly from here. Something that you can do it to define your center point on this area. You can find enable transform origin. When I click here, origin is in the center. I I create a rotation, I will obtain this render. Now if I dragon move the point and I position in this corner, I will turn around this corner. Even if you don't work with the transformation panel, I can come back here. It's not a problem. If for example, I dragon move my point here, I will turn around this point on this area, as you can see. This is why it can be interesting. I'm going to show you something you can for example, create a circles, can define a small circles, may be in the center. I can put my circle in the center, center, and center, and define a color. Then I will duplicate the circles with control left click press shift control to resize on this axis, and I will define the red color. Now I want to turn my circles, but here's the shore point is on this area, so we can activate this activates the shore point. If I turn, I will just turn like this. May I want to turn around this circle. What I can do, you can select Nable, transform origin. Dragon move the point and snap directly in this intersection. Now what's happened? If I turn, I will turn around just like this. This is the reason for which I can for example, change little bit my element just like this. I can press control left click and if I press control left click, you will be able to duplicate and turn around this point. But it's not working too much properly. The best thing to do it is to press control, dragon move to just duplicate, come back here, and now you can turn just like this. O of the problem is maybe the point was moving when I press control. I need to change my inter point again, locate it here, and I can turn on this area. Yes. Now if I press one more time, control, left click, I can duplicate, come back here, and I can dragon move on this area. L et's repeat control left click here, and I come back here, and something that I can do is to turn, and I will turn around this sure point. You can also select this four element, and you can press control left click to duplicate first. I will come back here. If I just turn, I can create something like this. This is the type of thing that you can do. Now, if I select all these different ellipses, we shift, and I decide to resize, I can shift and control to resize from the center, and I will be able to do something like this, for example. I can also s this circle, shift control to reduce, and select this Different element, shift control radius, and I can turn maybe this render. This is the type of thing that you can do or I can stay like this. Also, increase my circles. Click this one, and I can repeat the process maybe on more times. I will use control left click to duplicate first time. After I will press shift to turn around, and I can turn maybe like this just letting little space. I can increase this control left click to create something like this. This is the type of thing that you can do if you want to repeat element, you need to move the transformation point. When you select an element, you have also more options, here it's to activate the n sharp point. First, and my sharp point, if I just click on this area, activate the sharp point is located here. Something that you can do also, it's just to show the aligment handles. Here just specific aligment handles that you can use and you can move a little bit, but we don't use this too much. Here, it is height selection while dragging, concretely, when you move your object, you don't see the selection. When you click here, you can move your object, you see your selection, and here is transform objects separately. It's more when you focus with crooks. It's something little specific that we are not going to see in this example. 55. Convert to curves: Convert to curves. We have the possibility to convert to curves when you create a haps, you can convert to curves, and thanks to that, you will be able to edit the different sur point. So I will click here, I'll select the rectangle first and create a rectangle on this area, and I will define this color. You can convert to curves any shape. This is why I will select anoder one like the ellipe tools and just create ellipse on this directions, just like that. I will select another possibility, like, for example, something that I can do. It's to select anoder one, like just select maybe the polygon tools. Here, I can create the polygons, just like this with H eight sides. So let's come back to the rectangle, move the rectangle here. As I explained before, if you go one NF click, you can select your object, dragon move great rotation. If you double click, you can only you won't have any option specific. The only thing that you can do if, for example, you change for this preset, and you double click, you will have access to these options. So now if you want to convert to curves, you have the possibility to go the right, convert to curves, or select right click convert to curves. After to do this work, automatically, you will be moved to the note tools. And thanks to the not tools, you can edit each note. We will see that in details with the pen tools, but concretely now if I de select everything. Take my selection tool, one left click, you select your object, normally, double click, you have access directly to your node tools, and now what you can do, you can drag and move the different nodes. So you can select the nodes. The node will appear in blue, and you can drag and move and you can make transformation just like this. But something important is if now you select your element, it's not possible to edit your shape like before because now it is a curves. So if you go on the right, By default, when you add saps, you have a shape layer. For example, here for this polygon, we still have a shape layer. Polygon layer, if you prefer, but it just to shape layers. When we go here, now we have a curves. And because we have a curve is different, if we double click, we can edit the sure point. We can also use one nef click here, one nef click here to add more point. And this point when we click here, we'll be able to convert to Smooth, for example, I can click on this one. Convert to Smooth also, and I can drag and move the different handle to make some transformation. It works for all the elements. I can select this circles and convert to curves. Now I can for example, dragon move this one. You can also select multiple point at the same time. For example, I can create a frame of selection, select this nodes and this node, and now I can dragon move the two nodes at the same time if I need. And here, it is same, I can convert to curves, and I can have access to the different point and make E transformation at my covenant. So definitely, it is something extremely convenient. Let's take an example I would select my rectangle tools, and I can select and craft a rectangle just here. Define a color. And this right tangle, something that I can do it to convert to curves. Convert to curves. And now I can go left click here. Left click here, so I at two point. I can dragon with this point, dragon with this point, slect this one, convert to Smart and slect this one, convert to smart. After I can dragon move, for example, the handles and these handles to create something like a curves. Depending on the curves that I want to create, I can make adjustment with the different handles. And I can move again like this. It depends after what you want to do, dragging the different handles. It's okay for that. I think I added a point, so it was not pretty good. Maybe I can remove this one, remove this one, click here and convert again to a curves and dragon move this handles. This is the type of thing that you can do. If I define a tre angle, for example, I have a three angles here, and this t angle, I want to change on the top. I can convert to curves, slick this point, and if I want to convert to smart, I can do something like this. If I want to move this handle or move this handle, it will be possible. The Last important point, you can also convert to curve text, so you can select here the artistic text tool. With the artistic text tool, you can go left click and stay left click, you can drag and move, and I can take, for example, let's tep title. After to tep title, I will increase my text with this handle increase a little bit, and I can convert to curves this text also. Here this is a text layer by default, artistic text layers. If you want to convert to curves, right click, convert to curves. After to do this type of work, what I can see, I can see a group, and inside my group, I have each letter converted to a curves. So it means you can select any letters, and with your selection tool, you can drag and move the letter independently. You can also if you want, change the size of your letter and deferent direction it's possible. You can move the sur point. For example, if I double click on this sleper. I can select do click again, select this point, and convert to smart, select this point. Convert to Smart also, this one, convert to Smart, and this one convert to smart. You can change definitely the aspect of your ratio with a different type of options. This is the interrat to convert to curves. 56. Add text: We are going to see how to add text. For this, we can go on this area, and we can find the artistic text tool. With the artistic text tool, you can just add simple text concretely. You won't have a frame type, just add a simple text. The aim is to first you stay left click, and when you stay left click, you can drag and move to define the size of your text. For example, I can define this size. I can stop left click and you can tape what you want. Here I can tape what I want, Let's just tape something like title, after to tap to tech title here. You have the possibility to edit some parameter, but if you edit some parameter directly here, nothing is selected. You need to select for example your text, just like this, and now you can change. One of the best things to do is to just use your selection tool. You can click on your selection tools, and you can select de select. If you've got the right, you can see the text layer, it is artistic text layer. So when you use your selection tools, you can just click on the text and you can drag and move the text. You can also resize the text in a pretty fast way just using the different handles, even broking the proportionality like this, if you need, or on these directions, if you need. You can also create a rotation here or you can create the rotation using the different corner point as you can see. After that, let's take a look a little bit more in details about the options. You have your text. First, you can change the phone family. So you want to change the phone family, you just need to click here and you have access to all the phone family. After depending on the pm familie you have more options here. So just classicals, and you can define also the size from this panel. You can define the size from the panels, or you can just resize directly here. But if you want to specific size, maybe you can tape something, for example, I want 62, I can tape 62. After one more time, you can put again your texting ball if you want, but if you use, for example, bolt here, it will be bolt here also. When I go in this area, it is a character style, and you can also craft paragraph style, it is something a little bit specific when we want to focus on text. So here we are not going to see that just directly. L et's continual little bit on the right. You can have different type of ligment, but this type of aligment is more if you have more content. This is why we will add more content. I will click on my artistic text tools and just craft another artistic text tools, and we will tape something like, for example, content example number one, and I will press enter to tape content hoops. Let's just tape content. Example number two. Content Example number three, and content example number four. As you can see, you can create, for example, something like paragraph like this. I can place my element maybe around this area, and Zoom little bit. If I click here, you will define the ligment inside your frame just like that, but it's more when you focus here on the frame text tool that you will use this parameter. What you will be able to do, you have access to a panel when you go on window here, and if you want to have access to more options. Here just basic options, generally, affinity photos enough because we don't use too much the text. But if you want to create a graphic document with more advanced feature, you can go on text here, and you will slick the character options. After I'll show you paragraph options when we will work on frame text. So let's just slick character options first. As you can see, we have now these panels, and we have so much more sees on these panels. So if I come back to just my title here, You see again the basic features like for example, the phone family that you can change. One more time, you can also define the size, just clicking on this area. After you have the decoration and you can find more options here for the decoration. And something interesting is you have also the outlet line here. So phrase I can define my text, and something that I forgot to tell you it is to change the color of the text. When you go here, you can change the color of the text as you can see. When you select your text, you can also burn the right and define the color. If for example, I define the wise color here, I don't see my text because it's in wise, I can activate outline style and define a outline style like this, for example with a size, and you can define the color of the outlines us here. So sometimes it is interesting to create effect, and you can put also a color, for example directly on this area. If I don't want to outline style, I can come back and recuperate no line style. Here we have some position and transformation panel. It will be more interesting if for example, I'm using this type of element. So one of the first things to do here just to carry it something little bit specific. So here, it's a ian interesting. You can work with shear here and you can define a number of digress. You have also the possibility to work with the tracking. So it means you can extend the space just like this. But here you have horizontal scale and vertical scale for your letters, and here it is about your w. So you can just use this to let more space, but more space between the different letter. Here it is the space between the different letters. And when you work here, it is the size horizontally of the letter. So you can increase the size horizontally of the letters with percentage. And you can also focus with the size vertically of the letter in percentage also. If I just continue, we have a baseline. You can change the baseline. So in this case, you will crate offset, not very interesting, but something more important in this type of case, it is a leading override because I can increase the space between my different lines using the leading override. For example, I can put 20 in this case. After you will have more options, spelling options because you can have a correction when you make some mistake and depending on the spelling option that you choose, and after it is more advanced features. You can add some text just on this area and you can create some content. If for example, I want it to add a frame, I can use my rectangle tools, create rectangles like this. Define for example the red color. Put the rectangle here and define this rectangle on the background. I can draw ag and move on the back rounds first. Put, for example, my rectangle here. Sect the title, change the color for wise, and salect this one and just change the color for wise also. I can define re size, put this one just here, and put the title maybe on these directions and define the frame just on these directions. I can also put my element in the madels. If I need, select the two element, distribution panel, handing center, just like that. 57. Add frame text: We are going to see how to add text frame. For this, we can use this tools, and you can find the frame text tool. In this case, it's possible to add frame and to fill with a text. So how to process. One of the first things to do is to create a frame. So you stay left click and we stay left click, you can define the size of your frame. After to do this type of work, you can tape what you want. For example, I will tape something like a mortal cont, example Example, let's take title one and I will press enter conta example. Title two, content example Title three, and content example title four. So I have this frame. I put some content. At any moment, you can select the contents inside, you can change for example the phone family. Let's just come back with this phone family. You can change one more time with the different options, exactly like the artistic text tools. You can also change the size at your convenience. Something important is, if for example, I'm using my selection tool just here. When you click here, you will see the frame text. So even if the frame is smaller, just like this. As you can see, you will have still your text outside, but it's not extremely convenient. This is where you need to have definitely your text frame outside of outside of your text. If you just click here, you can define also the color for your text. It just come back with the black color. And because you have a frame just like this, you can extend also your frame. And you have the possibility inside your frame to place your text. For example, I can define my frame here and inside I can use ing left, handing center, handing right, and you have also some justification that you can use. But this type of case is not very useful because I don't have a paragraph. So I will come back to justify for example center. If you click on ify center, you can move here and as you can see the text, will stay in the center depending even if I'm moving my frames. Something interesting is you can click here also, and you can work not only horizontally but vertically. So here we have on the top, but you can use center. You can use bottom, and you can use justify vertical. So what does it mean? It means if I select justify vertical and here justify all, all my text will fill the different corners. Now if I want to have everything in the center, I will select justify center and center vertically. And we have all the elements perfectly located inside the center of this text frame, as you can see, If you go on the right, you have a little bit more options, but here it's going to be okay to add this element. One more time, you can slick window text characters. And the character panels, if you want to have access to more options like for example, the space between the different lines or want to work horizontally, you will have access one more time to these different options. So it's okay for that. Something that I want to show you also it is if you create a frame frame text tool, but you want to fill with a character and have paragraph. So you create your frame like this. And first, I will reduce the size inside. I will change with the options top, a linked, and the option justify left. When you go right click, you have insert a filler text, and thanks to that, you can fill with text just like this. If you click on this area, you can at any moment, for example, reduce. But as you can see, we have a lot of space because I need to come back on window text characters, and here I need to decrease this value. If I decrease this value, now I have different renders. For example, maybe I can put eight for this value. After to do this work, we have now multiple paragraph as you can see. If you dragon move the text, the text will be adjusted. The place text will be adjusted depending on how you are going to move just on the direction. One more time here, for example, it can be interesting. If I want to use the justification, I can use the justification. When you have this type of things, you can use also the paragraph options tools. Let's just see window text, and you can find paragraph. This is another panels with more advanced features, but not for the character directly from the paragraph. So what you can see on the right, you can see the leading here. And you can change some leading options here. It's not going to really have a great impact. Something important is here. If you want to create inside your frame, c to offset on the left, you can create offset on the left with a value. Here you can also create offset on the right with a value just like this. We have offset on the left, offset on the right, and here this is also a space that you can use between the different paragraph, and you can just change this value one more times. So here you can work with this value. It's more a space before. So before eight paragraph expect on the first, you will have this type of ender. So now you have also a line over end. So it means on each beginning of paragraph, the beginning of each paragraph, you can create a upset. Here, it's its last line dent, something a little bit more specific here it's not going to change anything, and you can also define more space here. This is a space after each paragraph, just like this. So this is how to work with this type of paragraph. Something that I'm going to do is to just come back here with you can also create some space in a different way. I can come back with 30 because you need to adjust with the left hand, if I have left hand 30 pig cells, and I want to have the same here, I need to put 30 pig cells also. So here in this area, we'll put also a value of 30 pig cells. So this is some more things you can use the aligment. Also, on this area, we can use the different aligment options that we have. Some things that I will do, I will just come back here, select these options, and this is how we can work with the paragraph options. If I reduce bit, let's make just maybe just something like this. Yes. Going to be a char increase, just focus on three paragraph. If you want to have something on the back rooms, you can just crater tangles. It means you can cratertngles, with for example a color, right click, range, move to back, and you can put your text to define the colors that you want, for example, the white color, and you can do this type of thing. But you can also place texts inside any shape. For example, I can define rectangles, define rectangles on this area. And when you click on this rectangle, right click, you have convert to text frame. And when you convert to text frame, you can now tape tape your text inside this element. I can go right click in ir filler text. I don't see anything because the text is in wise, so I can change for the black color. You can also create any different type of shape if I select the ellipse tools. I can craft a ellipse or just a circle like this, and I will go right click and convert to text frame. This is the same I can take what I want or one more time, I can go right click, insert a filler text, and we can fill this shape directly with this. It is also something important to know you can create any shapes, and you can fill the shapes with text just like this. H 58. Create character styles: We are going to see how to create a character style. To create a character style, something that we can do first. It is to define here who will add elements. I will go on view first, and I will select show colon guides. After I will go on view and we will add guides first. On the colon guide options, we can activate three columns. I will add also a margin here, and I will change to apply a margin. And I will tape just 100 pixels. So Solon and a margin 100 pixels, the gutter will be also at 100 pixels and I can close. I will use my rectangle tools and just crate a rectangle just here. Define a color like the red color. It's normal this color will be like this just because you are on the guide, so this see why the render will be like this. I will use my text, artistic text tools, and we will take just title number one. I will change the color for the wise color, increase a little bit my text, just here, put in the Midol, and I will seek my text options and at the same time the rectangles, and I will press control left click to duplicate here. Then control left click to duplicate here. I will select this element of text and control left click to duplicate in the Midol here, and control left click to duplicate here. Now just change the content. I will just replace by Title number two. Here I will replace by Title number three. Title number four, title number five, Title number six, title number seven, title number eight title number nine. I can Zoom little out. J here. Perfect. Something that I can do, it directly will go on view here, and I will deactivate directly if I go on the guide options. Now I don't need my guides anymore. It was just to start like this, and I will go on view and I will deactivate col guides. Thing that I can do is to craft a character style. How to craft a character style. When you click on the text element, what you can do. You what you can see. You can see on this area character style here, and you can see paragraph style. I will show you after a paragraph style. Concretely, by default, you have different styles that you can use like emphasize, strong, strong emphasize on your text. But if you want to craft a new style, you can click here. If I craft a new style, now I can find craft character style. Concretely, what I will be able to do, I just define the parameter for my style. First, I can put, for example, title style number one, and you just define the information that you need. Here we didn't put any style at the beginning, so I can define a font family. Let's see for example of this font family calibry. I can define a size. Let's just increase like for example, 20. Maybe I can increase more 28. After I can define also some color and decoration, here we are in wise, position and transformation. You can also have more options on this area if you need. Like, for example, if I just go here, you have leading override, but it's not very interesting, but you can find something like the tracking, and I can apply 20%. I can validate and I created my first character style. And the character style will appear here, title style number one. Another option to create a character style is just to if I select this one, just to define what you want here first. So you define what you want here first, so for example, just change the font family, like, for example, this one. Or maybe I can try another one, but I think it will be okay. After that, I can define maybe the size of the text, maybe just this one. I can define some more parameter because you can have also more options on this area. I keep just this justification. I can just define the pyramid that I want on this area. After to do this type of work, I have a second style. But I need to create my new style. You can also have the possibility to create a style from view. And you will be able to silic for window and you can silect text, and you can find textile. Here you can create a paragraph style with these panels, first, or you can create also a character style. This panel, if you want to increase the size, you can increase the size, you will have a summary of the different size that you want for the text character style, but also for the text paragraph style. So now if I click here, create character style. I can create a new character style, but this will be based on what I was doing. So first, I change that title style number two. After to do this type of work, if I select my options, we can see the character that we use, font style, font sile that we use all these type of things. Maybe I can increase the little bit, maybe the tracking options. Sometimes it's useful can let apt bit more space between the letter. Let just increase with maybe 80% just here. I will just validate to craft this new character style. And I can just click here and put this element in the midle. Now I have created two style. In fact you click on any text, you can find titles Ty one titles type two. If for example, I see this one here, I can apply my title Style one, as you can see, or I can apply my title stay two just like this. Let's take a concrete example. I can select multiple text layer. This one shift this one, this one, this one, this one, and this one. I selected the six text layer and I want to apply the Title style number one. I can just go here and I select title style number one. After I just need to make adjustments, so admit to put the text in the midle of my rectangles. I have different ways I can click here, click here, and for example, put center center. Each time you can select the rectangle and the text, and you can use your ligan panels to center. I can click here, click here t Center Center, or I can click here. And click here, and this is the same way I can use Center center. Can click here and click here also center center. I can select this title seven, Title eight Title nine we shift, and I will apply my Oder character style number two, as you can see. I can select this one in this one Center center. This one and this one, center center, and this one and this one and center center. The last point important is if you edit your character style, it will apply directly here. For example, you can go on window text textile, and if I want to edit my textile number one, I can go on this area, and I select edit Title style one. And for example, if I decide to change the font, and change the font. What you can see, the font will be change of all my elements. For example, I can select this one, andara, and the font will be apply on all my elements. If I change the size of my text, it will be applied also on all the elements concerned by the style. This is the type of thing that you can do. So only problem after you need to adjust yourself, you want to center again your object. If I say Title style two, I can go here and I can edit Title style number two. It is same I can change if I want to change the font or just, change the size, I can just change the size, as you can see, and just validate. The last point is if you want to remove a style, you can click on your style, go here, and you have the possibility to delete your style. If you delete your style, so you go here and delete the style, automatically, you will come back to a no style. If for example, a slick this style, this title, as you can see, you don't have any style applied now for the text, character and for the paragraph. By default, will be every time with no style, and you can apply your style, and this is the interest to crat style. As you can see it is definitely interesting, you have different type of options to create style. You just need the most important things to understand the process, why it is useful to create a character style, why you can use this in your conception concretely. 59. Create paragraph styles: We are going to see how to craft paragraph style. To do this type of work, the first thing that I'm going to do, it is to go on view here, and I will define show colon guide, one more times clic view guide. I will separate one more times in Sedi firm columns, and we will use again the margin with 100 pixels on the different size of our document. I can just click and close. Something that I will do, is just to use my ITstic text tools and I will just go on this area, and I will start to tape something. I'll just tape title first, and here we'll take content example for for you. I just put any sings laces. I just put any content here. After to put this content on this area, I will click on my selection tool, rediuc a little bit, and maybe I can put my element just lass. After to do this type of work, I will add another text, but this time a frame te tool. I will start snap this point. And do something like this. I will go right click Insert a filler text, right click insert a filler text. But as you can see it's pretty big, so this is the reason for which I will reduce just here. The best thing to do is to use your selection tool and you can reduce the phone size here. Let's try to have multiple paragraph, so maybe I can change for I think it's not pretty good. Maybe I'm going to do this again. I can go here. I can go and six and right click in third filler text. Maybe it's pretty better. I can select these different options, and I can reduce with five, and now it's better for the render. I will click here. Control left click Duplicate, Control left click Duplicate, and click here. Control left click Duplicate Control left click Duplicate. Now, let's see how to craft a paragraph style. We have seen how to craft a character style. It is the same principle, but you have more options. So I can click on this area, and two ways to create a style. First, when you go here, you select a text frame, you can find character, and just after you can find paragraph style. When you go in this area, you have just simple predefined paragraph style that you can use, but you can just create a new style. When you click a new style, just here, you can define the name, so it can be style, for example, content number one here. You define what you want for the font family. Let's just define maybe this font family. I can define the font style and the size. Maybe I will define the value of ten. After to do this type of work, you can put also some color decoration, position transformation, so one more time, you can change, for example, the tracking value. You have also the lead override. In this case, I'm going to change a little bit to put value of 40 point. The difference between only the character style here, you can focus again with style character. But you have also the option typography with more advanced feature, it's a little specific, and you have also the paragraph option if you want to create inden space before space after. You can focus with this. You have also the justification on this area. You can change your justification panel here. If I just validate here, I'm going to create my style content number one for this paragraph. But second point, you can also define what you want at first, so I can click on this frame text, and I can just define what I want first. It means I can just change the style, just on this area, maybe with this one, and I can change maybe the color, like for example, the red color, this one. If I want, I can define the fe size, let's just put five again. I can justify my text to create something like this. Before to create a new character style, I'm just going to go on view and deactivate my guide so guide, I will change for one just here and view, deactivate Shocol and guy. So now from this element, I can click with my selection tool. I will rato style. Second wight rato style, so you set your parameter first, you select window one more time text, and you can find textile. But this time instead to use rat character style, on the left, you can use rat paragraph style. After to do this type of work, I can use the same type of thing, style content number two. I can have access one more time to my different options, so I can edit my different options here. As you can see I already selected my phone family, my phone style, my color, so here resin looks okay, and I will just validate. Now I have a second style. So you can click on any element. Now if you go on paragraph style, you can find a list and I can find my style content one and Style content two. If I click here, I want to apply my style content one, I will go on paragraph style Content one options. If you click on the paragraph options here, here you will have the possibility here to option to have the character panels. But when you click on the character panels, you don't have directly the style, but you can go on this area. When you go on the paragraph here, you have the paragraph panels, and you can also define the style that you want from these panels. It's also possible. I can also click here and define my style content one. As some thing that I will do it is to select this front text, shift this one, and shift this one. And what I will apply, I will apply the style content, number two, just like this. Now why it is useful. It is useful because definitely after if you edit the style, you can directly apply on the element concern the element, which you apply the style. So for example, clic view here, I fclic window text, and I come back to my textile options. I can define my style content one and go in this area. When you click here, you can go and edit Style content one. And what happened? If I just change here, I change the font, and I define an oder one, it will be applied not only to this one, will be apply on all the elements with this style. And I can also change the size if you need, so I mean this one, this one, and this one. This is why it is interesting. I can also edit the style of the content two. Here, we have the style content two and this one, this one and this one. What happened? If I did my style content two, I can click on Style content two options, and I will define edit Style content two, and I can change for example, the size, just like this. Or I can just change the font family. I can change also the color, I just change the color, put something maybe in blue, just like this, and I can validate. All the element with this style will be concerned. This is why it is useful. Definitely, it is something extremely useful to do, if for example, you have a document. On this document, you want to repeat the same type of style on different paragraph or different title. You can earn time because if you want to make modification, you just need to edit the style and you won't have to edit each text element, each text layer, one after one. You can earn time. We don't use this too much in affinity photo. It's not too much in affinity photo, but it can be useful to know even when you use affinity photo. If you want to remove a style, you go on window, you select text, you define the text style options. And when I go on this area, I can find my style content one, when you go on the options on the right, you can delete the style. You have so option but here we are going to focus on this one, delete the style. And if I slick my style content to, I will go right click, not right click. You don't need to go right click because if you go right click, the option will appear here, and definitely not extremely useful. So you just need to click here and you can delete the style. If never you delete the style, one of the problems is your element, will come back with the reference style and what is the reference style you just no style. You don't have any specific thing, you just have this font family with this value, and you will have no style appearing here. You have also predefined style like body, heading one, heading two, table body. Even if we don't use this too much, but you have also this predefined style that you can use. This is how to work with the paragraph styles. 60. Master alignments: We are going to see the ligment. For this, I have this document, and I will select the rectangle tools and just craft the rectangles on this area. After to display these rectangles, will change the color on the right. First things to do to see the ligment when you select layers. You can find on this area, the ligan panels. On the aliment panels, you will have different options horizontally and different options vertically. Something that I'm going to do, first is if you want to adding one layers, the layers will be automatically alig to your document to your document. So for example, if I select onlys, and I'm using directly adding horizontally or vertically. The reference will be my document. So for example, e fc here. Adding center, I will go in the center. An fcl here, adding Midol, I will go in the Midol because the reference will be my document. If I go here, I will go on the left, here, I will go on the right, here on the top. If I want for example to go in the Midl you can click here and click here. If I want to go in this corner, I will select adding horizontally left and ling top. At the same time. This is the first things to understand. Second things to understand it is when you have two object. If you have two object, for example, I display an image, so file place, and I will select an image. Let's just select, for example, I will use this one. I will display this image and position this on the left here. Now I will sick my rectangles, just put the rectangle on the top and put the element just here. You have smart guide, it means if you use the different snapping option that you are here. Automatically, you will have smart guide like what you can see the del. You can see the center here. You can also snap to the corner on your document, and you can also snap on the object. But you can use your liment panels. If you see two object, so it means this one, shift, and this one. Now these two layers are selected, the layers on the back ground will be the reference. You will li layer on the foreground. On the layer on the back rounds. I can click here. Repeat the same process. If I want to go in the center, I will select link center, ling Midol. If I want to go in the top left corner of the image, I will select ling left, link top. If I want to go here, I will go with ling right. If I want to come back in the center, ling Mids link center. This is something important to understand. So it's important to understand the reference. Now I'm going to remove this one and remove this one and select again rectangles, and I will duplicate this rectangle multiple times. I can press control left click, Control left click Control left click. But your Aman as you can see, you have smart guide, thanks to the snapping options, and you can link your object like this. But some things that you can do also, if for example, your object are Like this, you can use the litan panel. First, you select all the objects that you want. Let's create a frame of selection of the four different objects, and then I will click here. If you select ling top, he will take the object the most of the top and an on this. Here it's not a good example. Let's put this one here. Select again all the object. So if I select ling top, he will select this object, the most of the top, and link to the top of this object like this. If I just come back and I select here, and I silt ling batom, he will take the object on the bottom, most of the bottom. I mean this one ling all the object here, ling batop. If for example, the last options, I'm going to select all the object, click here. And the last option in alig medal, he will take the average of the different object to ling in the medal. You can repeat this process also on this direction. For example, I do something like this. I select all the object, gman panels. If I use alig left, he will take the object the most of the left, which mean this one, ag left. Let's repeat the process. I will select all the object, go here. If I select alig right, he will take the object the most of the right this one to cratligment, like this. L et's just come back here. And if I select all the object like this, and I use ling center, you will take the average of my four object to ling all the element in the center just like this. This is how to work with the ligment. You have this panel extremely useful. You'll just go right click. You have also ligment, and you can find this again. For example, I select this one, right click ligment, and you can find again ling left, ing center, ling right, ling top, ling midle and ling bottom. 61. Master distribution: We are going to see the distribution. To see the distribution, I will select rat first multiple object. I will select the rectangle tools. With this rectangle, we will duplicate this one. I will duplicate the first time, I will duplicate the second times just like this and another one. We have seen how to align the object. In this case, I will select my four different object and I will go on the right, and here we have seen that it's possible to an. For example, I want to an in the average, I will select the ling dl options. Now if you want to work with the distribution, you need to position the first object exactly where you want. For example, this one, I place where I want. This one, where I want. You have information in green arrow about the distribution here, to have the space, but if you just want to use the panels, you can select all the object. You will click on this area, and you can find horizontally the distribution space horizontally, and you can find vertigal ally the distribution space vertically. In this type of work, I want to focus horizontally. So I will click on horizontally, and that's it. We have now the same space here. Here and here. If for example, I select this one, Crato group, right click rato group, and I want to for example center, my group. I will click here, center and center. But if you don't have a group, it's not going to work properly, all the object will go on the center. This is why I created the group. Now we can do the same thing. I can click here, and we can do the same thing on this direction. I create a rectangle, press control, left click, control left click, and control left click, just like that. Something that I can do is to select all the rectangles. First, ligan panels, and I will select Alim medal. I obtain this render. Here it's not what we want to do. We are going to click here and limizontal center. Now I place this rectangle where I want on this axis, and this one where I want on this axis. Then I can select all the rectangles, and I will use this time space vertically. Now I have the same space here here. Here. As you can see, it's pretty convenient. If I just come back on these directions, do again something like this. I will change to I will remove this rectangle first. I want to show you something. I will create the first one. I will deactivate the color and change the stroke. I can go on the stroke options, define value. And the value that I want let's just place value of maybe s two, and just validate. After I have this first rectangle rectangle. Something that I can do is to press control left click to duplicate, left click and left click again. Now I place my first rectangle where I want, for example, here, I select all the rectangles, and first, I will distribute a Mdle. Next step is to work with the space space horizontally like this. Now I will create a group. I will select all the rectangle right click group. After two group, I will press Control left click and I will be able to make some transformation like this to duplicate control left click, and I will be able to duplicate. You can also duplicate from this panel, select group and right click duplicate, and I can drag and move. Right click duplicate again. Drag and move, right click duplicate, and when you duplicate like this, automatically will duplicate with the previous space. Now I select all my group limen panels, and I will use link center first, I will select this distribution space vertically. If I want to center everything, I select all the group, crato complete group, right click group. Now it means I have all these things and I can center everything with link center and link Midol. Thanks to that, you can turn this rand. It's important when also you work the aliment and distribution panels to take in account to crato groups if you want to make something better, when you will use your aliment or distribution, everything will go on the same position. This is why you need also to crato groups. 62. Add grid: I We are going to see how to add grid. For this on this document, I would like to display a grid. You can go on view here, and when you go on view, you will find show grid. After it's important also to understand when you click on show grid, the snapping option. One of the first things to do is to click on show grid. You can see a grid appearing here. Automatically you will have the disposition depending on the size of your document, and then it's possible to edit this grid. How to edit this grid, you can go on view. On view, you have the possibility to select grid and axis, grid and axis. And when I click on this area, you can find different type of preset. But here you can one more time deactivate the view of the grid, and you have also a pixel grid, but this is something little bit specific. If I just come back on show grid, Zoom little bit. The mode is automatic. By default, you will have a grid with a number of subdivision and a space fitting automatically depending on the size of your document. Here you can find the colors, cred lines, subdivision line, pixel grid line. If you want to change the tt bit, this type of color, it's possible and you can reduce or increase the litle bit. You can also change the color if you want a different ones. You can change automatic for basics on this area, and if you apply basics, you have the possibility to edit your spacing and your number of division. If for example, I want to agreed with every 100 pixels, I can enter the value of 100 on this area. Depending if I only want two subdivision, I can take two subdivision. But if I want ten subdivision, I can apply ten subdivision also. But when you apply ten, you need to Zoom if you want to see your number of subdivision. If I want four, I can take four. You can have also more advanced features. Like advanced. We don't use this too much in affinity photo because we work more on photo editing and photo montage, but it's also possible on the advanced features to use grid type, and you can change the standard view for something isometric. If you want for example to crat drawing and the drawing, you want to work with a perspective, you can use isometric. You have also bl you have more options. You're going to show all the options, but you have different type of options that you can use. Example, I come back to isometry. This is the same, you can define the space that you want on this area and also the number of subdivision. You can even apply a gutter as you can see, so it means a space between the different element of your grid. It is more useful if you want to focus on drawings. We don't use this too much in affinity photo, but it can be interesting to know. So this is the possibility. So we have the first axis, depending on what you choose, you can work with multiple axis also. If I just come back to standard, you can also use cube here. When you use cube, you can find a cube scale just like this number of subdivisions. For example, if I change that, I can put 200, that will increase the size of my grid, and you focus on two axis. So first axis, and for example, second axis, and the up axis. It means if you want to have something at your right tangle, you can change the different axis. If I just want to come back, I come back to the mod automatic. In my case, let's just come back here and close this panel. This is how to display the grid. After it is important to understand the snapping option. When you click here, you have the snapping options, and here I have the snap to grid. If you don't have the snap to grid, it's a snapping option, let's just select a shape. Cra a shape here, nothing will snap. You can cra a shape, you can drag and move the shape, you are not going to snap to the grid. Something that I will do is to click here. And I can craft my shapes first. I can change, you have the snapping options on this area, and you need to activate first a snapping and second snap to grid. After to do this work, I can use my selection tools, and now you will see you will be able to snap to the grid. For example, I can create a grid, just snap to this area for my first rectangles. Let's create a second rectangles. I can snap to my corner point. And craft a second rectangle with a different colors. I will select again my rectangle, snap to this corner point until this area and define the green colors, just like this. Let's take another example. I will remove this one, remove this one, remove this one. If for example, I want to draw something on the backgrounds, I can use my pain tools. And on my pain tools, I can start for example to this point. Thanks to that, it can be pretty fast. I can draw horizontal lines or vertical lines respecting my grid. I can do something like this. If I want to draw just something on the backgrounds, I can just follow horizontal and vertical. You can also use this if you want to focus on aligment, distribution, even if we have a powerful aligment and distribution panels, but it is something that you can do. I can come back here, snap to this point, snap to this point, and snap to this point. After to do this type of work, here, I can change the color. If I go on the fi options, we will see these different tools in details anyway, so it's definitely not a problem if you don't master directly the tool because we'll see that in detail. And if I go on the right, I can define a color, like, for example, this type of color, as you can see. But the grid. When you go on this area, you can focus on the snapping options at any moment, you can go on view. On the view options, one more time, something that you can do, it is to deactivate if you have finished, you can deactivate show grid, just like this, I can click here and deactivate show grid. 63. Add guides: Add guide. Let's explain how to add guide. For this, I have this document, and I would like to add guide. To do this type of work, I can select view. One of the first things to do if you want to add guide, you have concretely you have two options. You can add guide from the rulers, and you can add guide with a specific dimension or percentage when you go on the guide options here. First, I'm going to show you with the rulers. I can click on show rulers and you can find a rulers here and a rulers here. By default, my document is 1,800 pixels by 1,200 pixels. It's just the size of the documents that I use for the different example, and you can see the ruler. How to pull a guide. You go on the ruler, for example, these vertical rulers and left click and you will be able to pull a guide, but you need to use your selection tool. So select the move tool, the selection tool here and left click and you can pull a guide on the directions. If you want to have more precision, if for example, I want to have this guide at 40, 400, you need to zoom. When you zoom here, You can drag and move and now you will have more precision, and I can position exactly at 400 pixels on the x axis. Let's add another one on this direction. I can pull this guide horizontally, and I would like to put ones at 200 pixels. Let's crate another one, I can pull again, and this one maybe I would like to put at 1,000. I can zoom at the same time with my scroll wheel and pull at 1,000. I display siifern guides. Other options is a crato sheps. Here I can create sps on this direction with my rectangle tools. Fell with the color of this rectangle. And I can snap here because I have the snapping option. If you don't have, you just need to go here. First, you have enable all the snapping and inside, what you can find, you can find Snap two guide. If you don't have Snap two guide, concretely, you won't be able to snap. Here, it's not possible to snap. Now I'm going to come back, click here and select again Snap two Guide. So enable snapping options, snap to guide here. After that, now I can snap directly to my different guide. Because of the snapping options, I have also here snap to snap to margin, I have snapped to bonding box, snap to keypoint. I have everything selected. So thanks to that, I can select the edge of my Canva and everything like this. So I will try and move my rectangles here, create another one rectangle tools just on this area, and I will put my rectangle just here. And apply a blue color. Something that I will do is to duplicate this one. Control left click. Control left click to duplicate, snap here, and activate Another color. Control left click, snap here. Other color, and I can snap to my guide. And click maybe on this one. Control left click, define a different color. I can resize. Just like this, and control left click, position another one on this area with another color and every time you can snap here. That's okay. Don't forget that when you have a guide at any moment, you can drag and move the guide. With your move tools, you can again dragon move the guide. If you want to deactivate the view of the guide, you just need to go on view here and you have show guides. If you just click on Show guide, you deactivate here. The guide are still here, but you didn't remove this guide. Now if I go on view and I activate again Show guide, you can see where are position your guide in the view and you can select guide options here. In the guide option here, what I can see because you can guide guide from this panel, but what I can see I can see my three guide here. I have horizontal guide vertical guide. After I we make another session about this another session about how to work with colon margins. But in this case, we're focused on horizontal guide vertical guide. As I explained, I place a guide at 200 pixel, another 11 an pixel on the horizontal axis, and vertical axis 400 pixels, so it's okays perfect correspond to what I was doing. If you want to remove the guide, you have two options. The first options is, for example, I'm going to remove the rectangle first with delete on my keyboard. The first option is just to take a guide and you can drag and move outside like this. The second option is to go on view. Slick guide, and here you can just click on remove All guide, or you can just slick the guide that you want and click on remove the vertical guide or horizontal guide just here, or I can remove all guides also. This is the two options. Something that I will do is to go on view, and I will deactivate shower. The second possibility to add guide, it's directly from this view panels, so you can view guides, and with this panels, you can add guide in percentage or in a specific location. When you click here, add a new horizontal guide, by default, it is in the model of your document, and you can change the value with double click. If I want to position, for example, guide at 200, pixels, I will apply 200. If I want to order one at 10, I can click here, and I can tape one Tsar, as you can see. If I want vertical guide, I can click here and vertically, if I want ones at 100, I will take 100. If I want another one at 107 1,700. I can position another one here. You can create this type of guy. Something that you can do also it to work in percents. If I click on percents, you will convert in percentage. If for example, you want by defot, the guide will be located in the model, but if I click plus, by de fot, I will have a guide at 50%. If I click here, I will add another guide in vertical this time in percent. You can place multiple guide in this type of process. After I can click and close just like this. As you can see, we have a series of multiple guide, for example, to organize the page, if you want to position different type of images, or if you want to create a different type of frames, it is interesting to use this guide. Don't forget that you go here. Enable snapping options, and here you have the snap to guide options appearing here to be able to snap on this area. Something that I can do if I want to remove all guide, I will come back on view Sil guide, and something that I will do it to click and remove All guide. If you want to change the color of your guide, it's possible. As you can see, you have the small option here, so you can click on this area, and if you don't like, for example, this color, you can change the color at your convenience. I'm going to kick the color with this one, but you can change if you want. Let's select remove all guides, close, and we can recuperate this document at the beginning. 64. Add columns: Add colons. We're going to see how to add colons and at the same time, how we can add rows. For this, something that we can do, it's first to select view. When you go on view, you have the possibility to go on the guide options. But you need also to validate here show colon guides. Because if you don't click on show colon guide, you won't see the different guides. Activate show colon guides and after to do this work, select guides. What we will be able to do, I will try again movely tell this window, we can focus on this area. Colon guides. Concretely, you can define a number of colons, so you can divide your document in different colons, and you can also divide in different rows as you can see. If I just focus on colon first, I can enter for example three columns, and after two define three colors, you have the gutter. What is the gutter, it is a space between the colons. By default, for example, here, I have 100, so I can reduce the space, or I can increase the space between my different colous just like this. L et's just work with 100. On the options on the right, you have the color. One more time if you want to change the color of your colors, it's possible using here. After you can also complete with a margins. You have the margin options on this area. Here, my document is in pixels. I can increase the margins. By default, your margin will be perfectly proportional on its side. For example, I can put 100 also. But if I bridge the proportionality just here and on the right, I wanted 200, I can tape 200 on the right. I on the left, I wanted 200, I can tape also 200 on the left just like this. Let's just come back with 100 here and let's just come back with 100 here. I created multiple colons and just one rows. After to do this work, I can click for example on cloths. Why it is useful, you have something with organization. Again for example, Cilic rectangle tools, and create a rectangle on this area and fill with a color like the blue color. I will deselect everything. Select my artistic text tool, go inside the rectangle and left click, stay left click to create the first element. I can tape title. I will select title number one, change the color for the white color, and put title number one in the medl. I can define a size for my text like 20 and put in the medl with a smart guide. I will select this text options, pre shift the rectangles, and I will duplicate with control left click and duplicate here, and control left click duplicate again on this area. Double click to edit the content, Title two, and here, title. You can organize in a varias the way your page just like that. Here if I wanted to add a directgle with maybe some content inside. I can create an directgle. Just like this, define another color, like for example, this one. I can press control, left click here, control, left click here. And as you can see, you can perfect perfectly master the display of your different element on your page, just like that. After to do this type of work. Here, don't forget that you need to activate also in these options, we have the snapping options. In the snapping option, you have Snap to guide, so you need also to activate Snap to guide, and you can also activate the Snap two margin options when you craft margins. If I just come back on view, I can select guide one more times. If I select guide one more times and you don't want to have your guide, you can click on Remove guide just like this. As you can see, the guide is still here for a simple reason that you need to go on view. And you need to deactivate show column guides. In this case, now we have deactivated the show column guides. It's also useful for multiple type of auctions. If I remove that, you can cry to complete grid. What does it mean? You can click here, click guides. You can repeat the same thing for example with row. First. Here, I don't see anything because I need to go on view and show column guide. You can do the same type of thing with the rows, and for example, I can keep these parameters. As you can see, we have now s rows. Once here, I can snap Control left click and control left click. You can organize your page in a very easy way using the column and ross. My last example is if you want to display like a grid to fill with, for example, multiple image or something like this. You can go and view one more time guide, and something that I will do it is to increase the colons and the rows. For example, I can display four colons, maybe three rows, just like this. I can reduce little bit the gutter between the different element like 60, and I can also reduce on this area the margins. Let's apply something like maybe 60. Some things that I will do here, we will have some maybe I have the cutters, number of columns, and rose four. Maybe I will do something like that, and I will validate. If I want to place the image, I will go and file, select file place. I will select one of the image that I have here. As an example. Maybe I can select this one because the ratio is not too bad for what I want to do. I can display my image just inside. Something that I can do after to place my image. Just here, I have the possibility to use the crop tools. But if I use a crop tools, I'm going to crop all the elements at the same time. It's definitely not extremely convenient. Something that I need to do is to create a mask. To do this type of work, I will crate a rectangle with exactly the size of my colons and rows here. I crit rectangles. And the image on the layer panels, I will put the image just inside just like this. Now the image is located inside, and automatically you create a mask like this. It's not exactly what I want to do. I'm going to come back just here at this moment. Something that you need to do is to select the image just here, and you need to drag and move a little bit on the right at the level of your rectangles, little bit on the right here. After if I move the image, concretely, she will be inside the rectangle. The image will be inside the rectangle. I can increase the size, and as you can see, the image will stay inside the rectangle. It's useful because you don't need to crop the image because it's not extremely convenient to crop on your layers, and this is why you need to process with this type of mask and I can for example position this way here. And now that I have this. You can repeat the process for all the image that you are going to import. It can be little along in this case, so we just duplicate this one just to show you and you can duplicate this. But you need to duplicate the element with the rectangle. You need to take the rectangle here, Alt left click and duplicate this one. Alt left click here. I can select the images, Alt left click Alt left click and alt. Oops. It's not working properly. Let's select again this one, this one and this one, Alt left click here. So I just repeated the same image to make something a little faster, but you can repeat this process and inside each rectangle, you place the image that you want. That's it. After you can go on view, and if you're satisfied, you deactivate show column guide, and you will have your different images inside a grid just like this. 65. Adjustment levels: We are going to see the adjustment levers. To see this adjustment, first, I have these layers, and I will go rightly duplicate the layers. After to do this work, let's take a look first on this picture. Where are the at lights and where are the shadows because it is important. So concretely, we have the at lights on the sky here. And we can find the shadows on all the rocks area. And above the share, it is more mid tones and little atlets. So it's important to understand that because when we use this type of adjustment, we will focus on atlt shadows and work with the controls. For this, I will go on here, we have information ab channels. Here, we have the adjustment transformation, and I place so adjustment panels here. It's not for nothing because we have access to all the adjustment, and I will seek the first one. It is a liver adjustment. We can have predefined predefined adjustment. So first, if clic darken concretely, I will have the black level at 20% and a se level 100%, just like this. And if clic lighten, I will have this adjustment, but it's not what I want to do. So me, I will use default concretely. And after to use default, we can see the histogram appearing here. Totally on the left part of this histogram, this is the shadows. And this is why we have a curve here because it corresponding to the work area. Here totally on the right, we have the at lights on this part, and this is why we have a curve here because it corresponding to the sky. And here this part is between the mid ton and the at lights and it corresponding to the ocean. Totally on the left, we have the white point, totally on the right, we have the black point. The wise point, here we have shadows, mid turns at lights wise point. After to do this type of work, if I zoom little bit on my pictures and you have the black lever. So concretely, you will change the black lever. It is like to darken already your shadows. So you will increase the black levers, so you have the thing to darken the shadows. If you select the wise lever, it is the opposite process. You will lighten. You will change the position of the wise levels, and because you change the position of the Y level, it will lighten at lights just like this. And you can make your adjustment with gama gamtes just to move the mid tons if you want to have the mid tons more close to the shadows or close to the at lights. Here's the little specific output black level and output wise lever. So concretely, if I want to reinforce the contrast, I can move my black level here, and I can move my is level on this direction. And thanks to that, you will reinforce the contrast. And this is the type of things that you can do with this type of adjustment. If you work with the gamma correction here, you can go more in this direction or more in this direction. So it is interesting because, if for example, I put the black level here, and I put the waist level here, I can move my gamma correction to maybe decrease little here on the sky and maybe to have a better render like this and to reinforce again the black level and reinforce again the waist level. It is a way really to work with the contrast at lights and shadows. If I just select this pictures. Something that I will do also, it's to duplicate the layers. So layers, right click duplicate. So Here what we can see on this picture. We have the at lights on the sky, all this part, and also little on this part. And as you can see on all this part with the river, and also the accommodation here, it is dark so that means it is the shadows. And if I sic adjustment levers. I can click here, and I can work with the black levers. So here, you can really see what's happened on the shadows and here's the white lever, what's happened in the atlet it meets on the sky. So one more time with a gamma, you can drag and move like this. So if I do this and do this, I will rain for the contrast. But in this type of picture, it's not extremely convenient because I would like to make a correction in the shadows and in the atlet, so I would like to lighten the shadows. And I won't have the possibility to really alight the shadow in this type of case. So my only possibility will be if you double click, you can resit the parameters, it is to work with the output wise level and maybe to focus little bit like this on the output black level, but can try to make adjustment like this. And maybe I can make yes with a wise level, little correction, but it won't be pretty good in this type of example, just like this. And my last example will be this one, and we will go on right click and duplicate the layer one more time. If I select adjustment, livers. Click on this one. So here we have many parts with lights, many parted with shadows on these pictures. We only have little shadows more on this area with a tree, little this house and little on the leg just here. And if I put the black liver, you can see the difference here, and the white liver, you can see the difference here. So one more time, it is another way to work maybe with a contrast here and to do something like this. And you can make a grama correction on this direction on this direction. This example, I will go on the left. Little bit. After you can also adjust here maybe with the output black level, 8% and the output white level. If I go on this area, layers, you can see the difference before and after. He just show you one adjustment like this, but after we'll make different trainings about how we can mix different adjustments to make complete pics on the pictures. Here adjust we see the adjustment in a and deeper way. So it's okay for this adjustment, and I'm going to remove this one. 66. Adjustment color balance: We are going to see the adjustment color balance. To see this adjustment, I selected this picture first. And when I go on the right, one more time, I will duplicate the layers. After that lege select adjustment, and we can define the color balance just here. You won't have any preset with the color balance. Let's just click on this area. I will zoom on my image. And something important to understand is the tonal range because concretely what you will be able to do, you will be able to work on the different level here, so you can change the color on the red green blue. And you can activate this effect whether on the shadows the midtones or the atlts. So you need first to define on your pictures where are the shadows and where are the at lights. Here as explained before the shadows are located in this rock area. So atlts are located in the sky and the midtones are located more in the Ocean area. If I select, for example, first shadows, and I define to move this cursor, as you can see it will impact only the shadows. If I define here, same shadows and the shadows. For example on this area, let's put more yellow here, focus on magenta and red on this area. Now, what happened if I change the tonal range, and the toll en range, I would lie this impact the at lights. So will select at lights. Take a look on the sky because if I make some transformation like ion red, the ion red ar maagenta green yellow blue, so I can start here. On this direction, maybe I can reinforce this type of color, reinforce this one, and reinforce this one to create more contrast. This is the type of thing that you will be able to do. Now if I wanted to focus on the midtones, I can click on midtones, take a look more about this area. It is same I can impact this area, but I have also little mid tones here. So I need to be careful when I dragon move this curser. I don't want to impact too much this area. That's it, you won't have more things to know about this. You just need to select your tunnel range, at lights, shadows or mid turns, and after you make adjustment with the different cursors depending of the render that you want. And I will come back to my layers and you can create different type of effect on your image using the color balance adjustment. Something that you can do also with the color balance because here it's too much. You can just make very minor adjustments. So for example, if I sit my cursor, or I can sit all the elements. Can just select shadows. On the shadows, I would like to only put little warm colors. I just drag and move my yellow color little bit. I will select at lights, and on the at lights, I want also to create little fix, so I will put this little bit on the right, just little bit, and I will put this little bit on the left. Maybe this one little bit on the magenta also. So I want I will apply just this little effect. Click here, and you can see deferent before, after, before and after. Let's li to second example. I will duplicate my layer first, right click duplicate layers, adjustment, color balance. After to say color balance, as has explained before, you have at lights in different parts. On this image, you have also shadow some different parts. Something that I will do to select at lights this time first, and take a look. Here we will focus on the atlight only. On the different purser. Something that I will do, for example, maybe on the at lights, I can make something more yellow, a little bit more effect with the red and magenta. I will same the shadows. On the shadows depending on the render that I want, I can maybe crate this type of effect. It means you can drag and move this cursor here, this cursor here, and this one, I will you can make definitely many interesting things. Maybe 26, this one, minus ten, and this one -20%. You can also impact the mid turns using this one. That's it. I can tell bit. Click here sitting my layers, and you can find the type of renders that we can do on the pictures, if you want to focus on the tlight shadow metters and work with three different per cels. 67. Adjustment black and white: We're going to see the adjustment black and white. For this, I have these pictures. First, I will go on the right and right click duplicate the layers. After to do this type of work, you will use the adjustment black and wise. So concretely, what you will be able to do, you will be able to convert to image in plac and wise to layer in black and wise. But you have the possibility to work with a different type of channels. So let's just select Black and hse here. First, you have two presets. The first preset is the ct preset. So concretely, the cut preset is going to put some element at 200% just like this. And if you select the one preset, he will put some element at 200 200% just like this. This is the first things to understand. Something that I will use its default. When I'm using default, you can find 100% here, here, here, here, and here. So we have so different channels with this type of percentage. And it's not exactly channels. It's more range of color. So concreta will show you after with another example. You can also click on the picker, and you can define a picure here. If you define a picure here, you will have the possibility to drag and move the pickers and to crato adjustment on the picker selected. So for example, if I say the picker, I go this area left click, stay left click, he is going to move the cursor concern by the color picker, and here in this type of case, it is yellow. And after that, in this range of color, you can lighten, or you can darken. So you can lighten or you can darken your percentage in the black and white render. So if I able click here, come back to everything at 100%. Concretely, if I move the red inside the rend range of color, I will have the possibility to lighten or to darken a little bit more in yellow lightn or darken in the green lightn or darken. For example, if I just sing this picture, I'm going to show you something. And I will come back to layers and here we'll remove these layers. You can see here on the left we have a green area. So we have little vegetation, vegetation with green area here. So what happen if I apply directly my hoops, drag and move these panels? Yes, just like that. So what happen if I come back with my adjustment here, and I drag and move the green channel, not the green channel, the green range. If I go on the left, I will be able to darken. If I go here to lighten and really, you can see the difference. So you can focus on these different things if I work on the san like this, it will conserve the sky, and I can drag and move also and we can drag and move the blue. Depending on what you want to do, you can craft more contrast between your black and white. So it's okay for that, for this first example. I will define a second example with this one. First, I will click here and remove the adjustment. So second example, it is this one and right click duplicate the layer. If I is a little bit, you can see where are located the range of color. He it is interesting. You can take a look where the p is in red, where the roof here on the house in red. We can find also some green area with the trees on the backgrounds. We can find also blue area on the sky. So let's just put the adjustment adjustment, black and white, default. So everything is at 100%. If you wanted to put everything at 200%, for example, you will turn this type of render as you can see, a 200%. If I put everything at -200%, so I will drag and move, everything will be so much darken just like this. So now, something that I'm going to do is to click on sit to sit everything at 100%. If clic the red, let's take a look about the Bo here on the roof and this area. As you can see you can lighten or you can darken this type of area depending on what you want to do. By salic green, you can take a look about the tree on the backgrounds and darken lighten also. So depending on what you want to do, you can also add more contrast. For example, this one, I can here, red, maybe I can do something like this, here something like this, and here, if I drag and move the green, I can create more contrast in my lain ways. So after I adjust a choice about what you want to do, and depending on what you want to do, you will be able to adjust this different sir. 68. Adjustment color: We are going to see the adjustment recolor. To see this adjustment, I selected this picture first, and I will duplicate the layer. So right click duplicate the layer. After to do this trap off work, I will go on adjustment, and here you can find recolor. What you will be able to do concretely, you'll be able to make an effect of crustation with the color that you will choose, and you will apply this directly on your layers. What you can use, you have this preset first that you can use, and you have the U at 30 degrees. Here, you can find the saturation 42%. Other option that you have is fire, 40 degrees for the U, and 100% for the saturation. One more time, you just to present we don't use this too much. Just something that proposed to you just to have an ID, but nothing more. So I will define recolor. And after to define recolor, concretely, you can define the u here. So it is the u, but just like if you had a color on the front of your pictures, and this color was a blend effect like a blend mode directly on your layers. So here you can select what you want, for example, I can define red. And after you have the saturation. So if you put the saturation here, you won't see any effect. It is like a desaturate. So you can dry and move the saturation, and you have also the lightness just like this. So if you want to make a strong effect, you can do, for example, something like this. But if you just want small effect like vantage effect, you can create a vantage effect just using, for example, a saturation with a low value like maybe 20%, and here increase it little bit the lightness, but not too much, maybe I will decrease the lightness, may be minus ten here. Saturation around 28. Here you can change the U, and maybe I can put something in orange. And take a look, we can make this type of render with using the recolor adjustment. If you want to decrease your flick, one more time, you can work also with the bland mode and you can also work with the opacity. Let's select this picture as a second example. I will go right click one more time, and I will duplicate the layers. Exelit adjustment, recolor again. We have this one. And we have this one. L just select default, and I just need to select the main range of colors that I want to apply, let's try to change in these pictures and to make something a little more like maybe blue, just like this. After I can decrease my saturation, increase or decrease, maybe I can do something like this, 54%, and then I can focus on the lightness, increase or decrease the lightness. If I want to see better my different details, I think it's better to decrease little bit the lightness. And that's it. If I just go here, I will obtain this render. So it's just the type of effects that you can realize that you can product using this recolor adjustment. And you can try different color after I just up to you what you want to create. So it's not only one way to process, it just what you want to create with the color that you want. You can also do something maybe like this. Saturate a little bit more like around 30%. And about the lightness, one more time I can work also like this. And maybe I can focus around -10%. This is a recolor adjustment. One more times, if I just remove this adjustment. As explained, here we use most of the time the panels. But as as explained, if you don't have this panel, if you don't want to position your panels here, you just need to go below the layer and just below the layer, you can find also adjustment. So difference is you won't have the preset here. These are difference. For the rest, it is exactly the same. And I can have access also to recolor, one more times. I can select the main range of color that I want, so it can be this one. I can use the saturation that I want. It can be for example this one and the lightness, and I will decrease also. It will be the lightness to ten for example this render. So it's okay with this adjustment. I will remove this. 69. Adjustment posterize: We're going to see the adjustment posterize. To use this adjustment, first, I selected this picture. Let's select the layers, right click, duplicate the layers. After to do this work, we can find the posterize adjustment in adjustment, and we will select posterize. With this adjustment, what you will be able to do concretely, you will be able to divide to convert in different levels your pictures. He will select a range of pixels and he will convert different levels of color depending on the number that you will choose. Concretely, first, you have this preset. This is arg preset, and in the posterized level, you only have three posterized levels. Why it is useful, it is most useful if you want to create different type of effect defect of posterization, posterization. If I slic soft here, you have a posturized level of 17, and you can see the difference. So now let's take a look more in details. I will just select default, Zoom a little bit on my pictures. And this one, something that we can do to select a posterized level. So you need to understand if you select the minimum, like, for example two. You won't have a lot of levels, so this is why you will obtain this render. And the most posturize level you will have, the more you will come back to your initial pictures. So if I go like this and I come back to 256, my pictures will come back with exactly the same render because we have the maximum level of posterization. So now I've to understand that, what type of effect you can do. For example, you have the posturize level here to. So if I increase here, for example, si, you can see we have a more different type of level, five, six, eight, and take a look. If example, I use six. If we take a look in the sky, we have one nevel here. After we'll have a transition with another level here for this part of the sky because at the beginning, we have two or three different type of blues. And here we can find the clothes on this area or the clothes here with a different color. It is the same if I'm some here, they will separate different range of color to have different level of posterization. If you take a look on the tree, you can have different type of effect just like this. Take acal of the lake, it is like we have one nevel here, another level here, another level here, another level here. But if I increase my level of posterization, just like this, I will have more levels on this area. This is just what you will be able to do when you have more posterization vel. Take a glans about this clod. At the beginning, we have this white color different values of colors on this clothes. This is the reason for which if I go here, you can see the difference just like this depending of the posterization levels. I put something like 24, we'll have more levels, for example, on the clothes and on all the element of our pictures. This is the type of thing that we can do. If I select this picture, let's sum tele bit one more times and we'll go right click duplicate, select adjustment, posterize. So if I go in the maximum, I'll come back to my initial picture. If I go here, I just have two level of posterization, and you can define a number, just like this. I can have multiple type of render depending on the number. If now I zoom a little bit on this tiger head, as you can see, I can change my level of posterization, and if I silic for example, I can zoom again. You can see here, and I can change the levels of posterization. If I arrive here, I have ten levels, but I can increase to have more difference, take a look for example here. On this area, the painting of the level of posterization that we choose will have more level of range of colors. And if I come back to the maximum, I will come back to my initial pictures. This is the type of thing that we can do with this. We can have different range of effect, for example on the lake this element depending of the levels of posterization. If here, for example, I define ten to create this type of effect, I can just click here, validate my posterization, and we can see the difference. This was the picture before and this was after, depending on the level of posterization that we choose. 70. Adjustment vibrance: We're going to see the adjustment vibrance. And for this, I selected these pictures. I have these layers and just go right click first to duplicate the layers. Let's take a look about the vibrance adjustment. I will select First, my adjustment panel, so you can find the adjustment panels here, and you can see the vibrance adjustment on this area. After two car vibrance adjustment, you have two preset. The first proct is simplify, and we will have -50% for the vibrance and 0% for the saturation. The second option is complicate, and we will have 50% for the vibrant and 0% for the saturation. So now if I just click on default, what you can do. You can work with two cursor, the vibrant and the saturation. Concretely, if I see for the saturation, it's pretty simple. The aim is to increase all the colors. So if you want to have better colors on your pictures, you will increase the saturation, and thanks to that when you have some picture, you don't see too much the color, you can increase little bit the saturation and atorly or better render. So if I increase the saturation, take a look about all the colors will be improved, just like this. There you need to be careful because if it's too much, It's not realistic. If you decrease the saturation at the opposite, you will desaturate your image, and if the saturation a -100%, as you can see, you will have your image in black and white. Double click to change that. If I is a little bit, take a look about the PO or just this element here, if I increase the saturation, you can really see the difference. A the vibrant. The vibrant, it's a little bit different. The M is also to have better color in your pictures, but it's apply already of some colors already saturated. So not totally on everything. If I increase the saturation, I will obtain this render. But if I increase the vibrance, as you can see, you have the feeling that you have less things because it's apply already saturated color. So let's take a glance. Already this color is saturated, this color is saturated. If I increase the vibrance, this one will be concerned, but you have a dar part less concerned. So the m is what? If you decrease the vibrance here, you will be able to see what is the most saturated and less saturated. If you decrease the vibrance to 100. For example, you realize that we can see that again, it's not too much in black and white, so it means it's already saturated color that we will use. If I lit out, what will be the? The M is to work with the two cursor. So you need to work with saturation in vibrance at the same time and try to find a good deal between the two cursor. In this case, maybe I can increase the lib my thing 24% and maybe around 40% here. I will click on this area, slick my layers and take a glance we can have so much better color extremely useful on this image. Four and after, four and after. So It's okay for this first example. Let's take a look with this second example. It will be also perfect to reinforce the color on these pictures and also to have better colors on the temple s Pagodas. I will duplicate first my pictures. Then I will select adjustment and one more time this one. Or something that you can do also. You can click on this area and adjustment and select also vibrans. So one more time here, increase the saturation. But as you can see it's definitely too much if you put 100 and de saturate to come back in black and white. D will click, somethings that I can do also with the brands, increase the vibrans. And decrease the brands, just like this. So even if you decrease the vibrans, you can see again colors on the temple pagodas because it's already saturated color, just like this. So reduce the vibrant will have less impact on this area. So now what I can do I can double click, and I would like to increase the saturation in the vibrant, so will silic saturation, and I will increase maybe 20%, and I will work with the V brands, and I will increase also maybe around 60%. I will click here. Zoom little out and as you can see it so much better for this area, we can release the difference before, after, before, after. We can see also on this green area, it's better also to read for the color. But we can do more. We can select this. We can increase 28%. Here can put maybe 24%. If we see the difference, maybe it's a little too much, but s to that we can release the difference before after. And when you make the vibrance adjustment with something like, for example, a light shadow, reinforce the contrast, all these type of adjustment, you can really make amazing things on the images. 71. Adjustment exposure: We are going to see the adjustment exposure. To see this adjustment, I selected this picture first. After to select the pictures, I will go in this area, and right click duplicate the layer. So Let's see this adjustment exposure. First, I will go on adjustment here, and we can find exposure. When we click here, we have different type of presets. The first preset is just one stop, so concretely, you have your exposure here, and one stop is just minus one on this value. After you have this one, it is p one stop. If you click here, you decrease little beats to exposure, here you increase little beats the exposure. If I silic here minus two stop, you decrease, the exposure a little bit more. And if you click here plus two stop, it is to increase, the exposure a little bit more. So after to do this type of work, something that we will select here. It is to k and default. So concretely, it is a simple adjustment. We don't have many things to do. It is just about the exposure. So if you go totally on the right, you will increase the exposure. If you increase with the maximum concretely, your image will be almost in wise because you increase too much the exposure. And if you go on the left, you will decrease the exposure. If you do this at the maximum, your image will be almost in black because you decrease with the maximum value, the exposure. After to understand that, if you want to res it, double click. One more time, it is to mix with different adjustment. I'll explain one more time after how to improve this type of picture with a series of adjustment. Here we can decrease or here we can increase. Something that I can do. You can also work with selection mask. If you want to work, I will explain also this. Here, I just increase, for example, it'll lead the exposure just around this area just here. That's it. If I just come back to the layer, we have just exposure adjustment here. So this is the type of thing that we can do. Let's select a second example. This is this one. I have my layers. I will duplicate these layers, and I will go on adjustment. On adjustment, one more time, I can select some predefined models. One of the problem, for example, on this picture, I I only work with the exposure, it won't be pretty good. I will have probably to work first with the Atlts and shadows adjustment to make something better, so it means why I'm going to click here. I will work first with the Atlts and shadows adjustment to readjust this area. So to lighten this area and to darken this area. And after that, if we want to add something like exposure, we'll be able to do. After that, we'll be able to do this. But if I just use this adjustment independently I'll go adjustment, the fat, and here I can increase the exposure value, so just increase the exposure here. And on the left, I will decrease the exposure. And this will be apply on all the picture. It can be the shadows, it can be the at lights. All the type of tons that you have on the picture, you can change the exposure. So here I can decrease. On this area, I can increase the exposure. So in this type of case, I don't have many things to do. I need to mix with an order adjustment. So if for example, I decide to increase the exposure just with this value, so it's good because on this area I can lighten, but I can also lighten the sky, and because of this, it's not good on this area. So this is why we need to use this adjustment with the older one. Okay. So for the rest, not more things to do about this address, so I will click here and remove this address, and I will click here and remove also this addressment. 72. Adjustment shadows highlights: We are going to see the adjustment at light shadows. Extremely useful adjustment that you can use, and first I selected this picture, right click duplicate the layers. To use this adjustment, first, you need to define where are the shadows and where are the tlight on your image. In my case, the at lights are on the sky. The shadows are on the rock area here, and the ocean needs more mid turns mix with at lights. Concretely, you need to define this first. After that, you can go on adjustment and you can find shadows at lights. You have multiple type of preset. One of the first preset is extreme. Concretely, they put the shadows at -200%, at lights at 200% to create the maximum of contrast in your pictures. Second preset is soft shadows, -50%, 50%, so you can create more contrast also, but a little bit less. Here it is dumb shadows, so concretely, you don't touch to the at lights and you dice the shadows at the maximum. And here is the blow at lights, concretely, you don't touch to the shadows, and you increase the at lights to the maximum with 200%. So now let's click on default. After to click on default, I can focus on this two person. So if you click on the shadows, will have impact only on the shadows. So concordly, if I dragon moves this, take a look about what happened on this area because the shadows are located here. I will lighten the shadows. It's not exactly lighten, but it is in the same way and you will work like this on the shadows. If I go on the left, you will darken the shadows like this, but you won't impact the at lights. If you're selling the at lights, you can lighten the at lights just like this. And here you can darken the at lights, and take a look at supply only on the at lights. If you want to add more contrast, you can for example, decrease the shadows here and increase the at lights and you will have more contrast. But most of the time where we use shadows alight not to create contrast to make adjustment because for example, the shadows are too dark, or the at lights are too light. So something that we can do too bright. Something that we can do. For example, it's to click on the shadows and in this case, I can just reduce the talbt, and about the at lights, I can maybe increase the target. Here to create a little bit more contrast, but in the most of the case, we will work differently, I'm going to show you. So if I just click here, just create a little bit more contrast on this example with this adjustment. So now let's see another very interesting example this one. Be first I will duplicate the layers. As I explained before, all this area is too dark. So between the river and between the accommodation, it's definitely too dark, and we don't see too much this area. And it's too much contrast with the at lights on the sky. This is why if I want to adjust this, I will use adjustment, shadows, at lights, and I will click here. After to do this type of work, take a look about the shadows if I go this direction. I will darken all this area. This is not what I want to do. I just want to lighten. This is the reason for which I will go to right. But if I go too much, it will be pretty good. I will try to find interesting value, like, for example, maybe around 60% here to lighten this area. A about the at light at the opposite, I don't want to have more tlight. This is why I will go on the left, and I will reduce the at lights. Not too much, but I think I can reduce around -20%. So on the pictures, I think 60%, -20% can be interesting and after we'll have to complete with maybe a exposure contrast or something like this. I will just click on this area, and you can now see the difference on my layers, and this is the pictures before and after. So concretely, we have very interesting adjustment to readjust all this area in comparison of this area. Concretely, we can readjust in this way. And now it's pretty better because I have a good base if I want to make more adjustment. So on this picture, the first adjustment that I would use, it is a shadow alights. So now let's slick my last example. This is this example. On many pictures where you won't have a big problem on the shadows at light, you can repeat this type of process to automatically have a better render. Will click here and click duplicate. What you can do when you have a picture with different color like this, not too much big probe shadow at lights, something that you will be able to do in the adjustment. Shadow at light. Is concretely, you will increase the shadows little bit, and you will increase the atlight little bit, but most of the time you will increase the shadows. So here concretely, I have the shadows and to reinforce automatically I can increase. Not too much, but value like, for example, here t percent can be interesting, but the at light just little bit maybe only 10% will be great. And on mini perture, when you want to have big problem, just to do this can have a better base to add more adjustment after. So here we'll select shadows. At light may be 30%, 10%. If you increase too much your we have this, decrease your re have so that you can see it's not pretty good, so around 30% will be great and here and here. So In my case, 30%, 10%, just come back layers, and we can see the difference before and after. The most of the time the shadows at lights adjustment will be used at the beginning of the process to improve an image. So you need to use this as a base the most of the time in the first adjustment. A 73. Adjustment threshold: We are going to see the adjustment Si hold. To see this adjustment, I selected this picture first. After to select this pictures, I will go right click and I will duplicate the layers. Let's select adjustment, and here you will be able to see S Hold. You have two presets with the S hole adjustment. The first preset is Faver light. And you will be able to see your histogram. Here you have value of S hole with 25%. The second option is favor dark, and you will have a value of S Hole of 75%. Why to use this, you can have different type of ewe. This type of few, I'm going to show you that it can be interesting, for example, in separate in white and black, and for example, to crat some selection. So I would select the food first. So the M, he's going to take the atlts, and all the atlet he will convert to s, and he will take all the shadows and all the shadows, he will convert to black. But depending on the s hole, you will be able to put, for example, submit tons in the atlts, or submins in the shadows. Depending on the site hole, you can extend the atlets or you can extend the shadows to have different render. So here clic again at present. By default were 50%, you can see your histogram. Here this is the histogram representing this picture. As explained, we have a curve here for a simple reason that this is a shadows area with the rocks here. We have a curve here corresponding to the atletes area with the sky, and we have an der curve here, a little bit smaller corresponding to the ocean between the mitts and the atlets. After that, what I will be able to do. Concretely, if I put this on the left, 0%, I will have everything in wise because I will drag and move the atlets at the maximum and all my picture will be wise. If I drag and move on the right, all my picture will be black because we drag and move the shadows totally to be on the atletes, and will have 100% and everything will be in black. So concretely, the aim is to mix with this value. Depending on the render that you want to have. For example, I want to create a selection of the sky on the line of horizon. Something that I will do if I'm at 50%, as you can see, the ocean area won't be take in the black. Won't be taken in the shadow. This is why I can draw a and move this on the right, and I can mix until to see my line of horizon. For example, this line of horizon. Maybe I can put around 70 70%, think it's a little too much, so I will reduce a little bit and try to work around maybe 66. After to do this work, I can validate my adjustment and we can see the contrast between this wise area and this black area. If I select my background layer here, the second background layers. I can select this tool, the foot selection tools, and I can create a selection of the sky here. I can define it runs just to run 20, it will be pretty good. If I just create a selection here, as you can see, you can select this part. Now I can deactivate the view of my adjustment. If for example, I want to delete the sky, I can press delete on my keyboard. But if I press delete, I need also to hide the visibility of this. If Icilic taco glans we have very interesting selection here or remove this on the transparent because the contrast sank to the Swill adjustment. After that, your swole adjustment, if you don't need anymore, you can just continue to hide, or you have the possibility to only remove the layers because it is adjustment layer. It's okay for that. I'm going to show you a second example with this one, and we are going to repeat the same process. We can have different views, but the most of the time for selection is pretty good. I will call right click and I will duplicate my layers. After to duplicate my layers, it is same. I think if I use the section to here, normally, it's pretty good because we have already contrast, but in some cases, it can be interesting to use this addressment. Addressment, click here. S hole. And as you can see if we put here, we have a part on the sky here. Concern as the shadows because it is in black. It's not concerned as the shadows, but it is in black. So it's a little strange. We can we go here, everything in black, here, everything in white. Something I tend to do, it's to maybe dragon move on the left until to not see this area. Maybe dragon move here. I can reinforce dragon move in this area. But as you can see, it's not extremely pretty good. So I can go here, for example, do this type of work. Come back to my layers. We have this. If I select my section, tool kick on the back rounds. Just go here. We can have this type of selection. I just want to see, and this looks pretty nice if I focus on this area, just like that. If I deactivate the view, the visibility of this adjustment and the visibility on this back room layer, and I just press delete on my keyboard, I will turn this render on the transparent back rounds, as you can see. I can deactivate my selections and I will turn this render. But in this case, it's not extremely good to work like this because we don't have too much contrast. But just to show you an example about what you can do with the three hold adjustment. 74. Adjustment curves: We are going to see the curves adjustment. And for this, I selected this picture first, and just go right click duplicate the layer. After to do this work, we will go to surg this adjustment, so adjustment here, and we can find the curves adjustment. In this curve adjustment, you don't have any preset. Let's just click on this adjustment, Zoom a little bit on the pictures. Why it is useful to use this adjustment. It is useful because you can focus on what. You can focus on the tlight, on the shadows, you can create contrast. You can work with the exposure. But all these type of things, you can have more precision because you are using a curves, and you can add multiple points on this curves. First, let's take a look about how it is displayed. Concretely, you your histogram on the back room. Corresponding to my image. On this histogram, totally on the left, I have the black point. Totally on the right, I have the wise point. Here on this first part on the left, this is the shadows. Here on the second part on the right, this is the atletes. And in the miter, it is just the mettere. As I explained before, this is the curve corresponding to this image, so the rock area is the shadows, so we have the curves. The ocean is moreton atlets, so we have the surves, and the sky is concerning about the atlet, so we have the curves on the right. M is to position point on the curves. For example, you can add a point first in the midle. After to add this point on this model, if you drag and move your curve on this area, you will lighten your image. If you drag and move the curves on this area, you will darken all your image. If your point is located in the model, you will lighten or darken all your image. Now, what happen if I decide to at 2.1 here on the at light, and another point on the shadows just here. Something that we will able to do its to something that will be hoops. I have one more point, I will press delete. This point, I will click here, delete. I'm going to show you again. I will click on this area adjustment curves and add the first point here, second point here, third point here. So Gly, if you drag and move this point on this direction, you will lighten the at lights, and if you drag and move this point on this direction, you will darken the shadows. This is the typical curve that you can do if you want to increase the contrast. Take a look, we have more contrast on this picture. You put this here and you put this here and you will have more contrast. You need to decrease the contrast, you can do the opposite process. Concretely, the curve will had to go here, and the curve will have to go here and you decrease the contrast creating this type of curves. But why it is also useful for a simple reason that you can add more points. For example, if I want to work maybe on the shadows with more precision, I can add a point here at a point here, and I can act more I can darken more shadow parts only on this area with to impact another part of the shadows here. For example, I can use my curve just like this. And this point, I can extend a little bit to darken only specific part already dark here. This is the type of things that you can do when you use these tools. You can have more local adjustment because you can create multiple point as you can see. Here it is the same found to add more point in the atlts, I can create more point, and you can make more correction. If for example, I take a look about the ocean. Between this point and this point, we can see on the curves, the curve corresponding to the ocean. Comparative for adrian move here, you can see a difference on this area, and I can make more adjustment only on this specific area if I need. This is why the curve can be useful. And that's it. I can click, come back on my layer s panel, and is the difference with before and after. First slick the second picture, these pictures. Something that I will do first is to duplicate the layer. Right click, duplicate the layer and go on adjustment. After two go adjustment, I will slick curves. In this type, we have a difference between the shadows and the at lights, shadows on the river and accommodation and at lights on the sky. This is why we have a big curves here, and we have a big curve here. If I click just one point, I will lighten all my image, darken all my image. In this case, it is not what I want to do. In this case, I can place one point here, one point here. If I dragon move my curve like this, I will increase the contrast. Let me what I would like to do. So you can do this after a door adjustment. But if I use only this adjustment, I just want to lighten this dark area. Something that I can do is to at the opposite, I will take this one and just go little bit on this area, and I will take this print and go litle bit on this area. And thanks to that, I can make my adjustment on my pictures, just like this. So this type of curve on this picture will be great. Click here, Layers, can find the difference before after and before after. So I can make corrections on the at lights and shadows using this adjustment. But I can make more local things one more time, I can add, for example, MrePoint, and here I can work with more specific area as you can see dragging and moving this point. You can also even create more point if you need. This is just the entras to create more point. Now I can come back here layers and see the difference before, after before and after. 75. Adjustment channel mixer: We're going to see the adjustment channel mixer. For this, first, I selected these pictures, and I will go on this a, and I will select adjustment, and here you can find the channel mixer. After you define the channel mixer, you don't have any preset. You can click here, and you can open and Zoom on your picture. So after to do this work concretely, the first things to understand, we are working in R GP. So we have red, green, blue, but alpha also Alpha and offset. Concretely, here you need to silic the channel concern. If you silic red, you will have 100% on the red channel by default. If you silic green, you will have 100% for the green, blue 100% for the blue, and Alpha 100% for the Alpha. I'll just come back to the red. Concretely, you have 100% of red in these channels. So you can drag and move this if you want to reduce or increase the red. In the red channels. But something that you can do is inside the red channels. Concretely, what you will be able to do, we'll be able to do in the different channels, to create values interesting effect, just dragging and moving the odor value. We need to be careful to not put too much value because for example, I slic green, too much, I will obtain this render or reduce, I will obtain this render. So the am depending of the render that you want to have, is to drag and move tb the cursor. For example, here, we'll have more coal color, here more red, and if I slic the blue, what I want to have. And also for the Alpha, just like this. In this type of case, in the red channel, maybe I can increase the litle beat the green, five, and increase litle beat the blue also to create this type of render on the sky and here. And for the blue, if I want to increase my effect, I will be able to put a value, and you can also create offset. So offset will allow you to more dragon move, for example, with a percentage here, so increase your effect or decrease little your effect depending on these different channels. And I can continue. I can sack the cream. And if I sick the crea, I will have 100% for the cream. And inside the green, I can put less red or more red, but depending on the percentage, you can have different type of render. So here, if I decrease, I can create this type of effect. On the blue, I can decrease also, maybe. But after it will be too much. If I focus on blue, it is the same, we can make some adjustment. If I want to have yellow, little yellow effect, I can put the green on the left, like, for example, this one, maybe -70%, and on the red channels, I can go a little bit on the left. So after to do this work, if you are satisfied, you just click here, layers and taken with this channel mixer adjustment about the general effect product with this. So before, after, before, after. So the aim is not to directly create a correction. The aim is to create a general environment, general effect on your image, working on the different channels. If I just click here, I'm going to remove this one, I could also duplicate in this. I'm not going to duplicate. It's going to work or duplicate the layers. And you can also go here if you need adjustment and select one more times the channel mixers. I can put my picture on this area, and this is the red channels. First on the red channel, decrease or increase the value of the red by the foot to have 100%. The most of the time it will be to focus on this. So if I want to have more coal color, I can change the green here, I can change that. Put, for example, the alpha here. I can see you can create this type of render for your image. But if I want to warm little bit, maybe I can put a little bit more value on the green. On the blue, I can also increase. Alpha value, but I'm not going to touch to the Alpha value. If I take a look about the green channels, maybe I can stay here at zero, and the blue move little bit at 12, just like this. For the Alpha channel, maybe I can put minus five, and I will work with the blue, and with the blue, increase little bit the red value like five. Here I will change for -11. Di this value, maybe I can change for minus five. And take a gs about this render. One more time we can mix with other type of adjustment. I can also drag and move my alpha channels to create maybe a vantage, little vantage fig dus maybe around minus ten, and we can also create offset on this direction or on this direction. That's it. After to do this type of work, you can validate. If I click here on my channel mixer adjustment, I can see the difference before and after before and after. 76. Adjustment gradient map: We are going to see the adjustment gradient mamp. To see this adjustment, I selected this image and right Lk first duplicate the layer. After to do this type of work, I will zoom a little bit on my image, and I will go an adjustment, and I will select the gradient map. You can find two presets on the gradient map. The first is that they cult travot xs, and concretely you will have two colors, a set colors exactly with set print of gradient, and the second option is nuclear, and one more time you can have swat print for the gradient. So what is the. The is concretely, he will separate different tons, and these different tons like the alighted shadows mean tons and more, he will separate into a gradient, and you can define the number of points that you want for this gradient. So let's take a look, I will select default first here, and you can find this different this craton by default. Something that I'm going to do first is to select the point in the Midol. And this point in the Midol, I will delete this point. Oops, I will delete this point. I will click here, and I will slick here, you have insert copy, reverse, dealt. I will click on Dilt and I will remove this point to only have two color. Now I will slick the first color. When I click on my first point, I can define the color. For example, here, I can define the color that I want. Let's define something like blue. And I will select my second point, and I will define another color like for example red. I think for the first color, I didn't define exactly what I want. Let's just defined something to create contrast. I will put maybe the green color will be perfect to see the difference. So now we have a preset. I just created a gradient with two color. So the first one is green, the last one is red. And what we can see, we can see that the at lights are red. We can see that the shadows on this area are green. Concretely, you will separate at lights, shadows, mid tones, and you can separate in more range depending on the number of points that you will add in your gradient. Here just at two point. Because I just at two point, I just separated at lights and shadows with two different colors. I can also insert here a new point, or you can delete a new point. You can also reverse your gradient just like this. Thanks to that, we can really see what is the gradient map. Now you can add more point. If I add more point here. And I define a color for this point like blue, it will impact more of the midtones. So if my point is in the midle, it will impact the midtones, but you can drag and move the midtones more close to the atltes, or you can drag and move the midtones more close to the shadows. And you can add more points. If I had a point here, you will conserve more of the atltes. On the atlets, I can select another range of color, like, for example, this one. And on the shadows, I can define another range of blue, like for example, this one. So something that I can do. You can mix like that. You can also craft something, for example, I can sick my first point and silic some dark blue color. I can slick my second point, another type of blue color like this one, and I can sect my third point with another type of blue color like maybe this one. And here I can silic maybe 1.2 point, so I can silect this one with the red color. I can silic this one with maybe something in more orange. And then I will slick this one and something like more yellow orange just like this. I will be able to obtain this render for this image. If I just validate layers, you can see the difference, and this is just a cradan map ad, crag map adjustment. So now, something that I will do it to select an der image. I will define this one, as you can see, and we will repeat the same process. First, I will go right click duplicate the layers. You can also find the adjustment here adjustment, and some things that I will select, it just the cratent map. It is the same way. I will select this print and selected this print. As you can see, it concerns the shadows area. And I can define a color for the shadows depending on what I want to do. Maybe I can define this type of color. Here this is the atlt, so I can click on the atlights and define the color that I want for my atlts. For example, I just define something little bit orange, just like this. I have another point. If I remove this point, with delete here, I'll just separate in two colors. If I add a more point, I can add another one here, and I can add more point if I need. It means I can add a more point here and do something like this, and I can add a more point here and do something maybe like this with just a yellow color. And here crated between the shadows and atlts exactly five levels, five levels of gradient, five levels of color here. We have separated atlts and shadows exactly in five levels, and we have chose five color. After you can drag and move this color, you can drag and move this different point at your convenience. But if you want to add more, you can also add more point. If I just stick here, is a type of effects that you will be able to use with a gradient map adjustment. 77. Adjustment selective color: We're going to see the adjustment selective colors. To see this adjustment first, I will select the layers and right click, duplicate the layer. After to do this work, I will go adjustment, and I will select selective color. I will zoom on my image. You won't have any preset with this adjustment. Let just click here. And on the selective color, concretely, what you will be able to do, you can select a range of color. After you can create modification on Sion, magenta, yellow, and black. For example, here this is a range of color that you can choose. White is a great example because on this image, you can see this bridge and the base of the bridge is totally with the red color. But I also little red area, for example, when you see this grace and this area it's little red. But for the bridge, it will be the perfect example. If I select the color red, concretely, what I will be able to do. I will be able to change the different value and it will impact the red pixels on my image. Here I can work with the s, but I can work with the magenta also. The yellow, just like this and define after that a level of black if you want to lighten or darken. If I want to change the color of this bridge, I can change the yellow here. Magenta may be on this direction and take a look at change the color of this bridge for purple. And I I define here, I can lighten or darken. Let's put this image. Let's put this value. If I zomly tell out you can see the difference with the color of this bridge, just like that. But you can also it will impact little bit here. But this is why if we need, we can also create a mask or we can create a selection to impact only the bridge, and I will explain how you can work with selection with the adjustment or mask with adjustment. So that if you select another way, like for example, the green because here we have the green some green area with all the trees on the backgrounds and all the forest. What does it mean? It means that if I click here, I will impact the green area. For example, I can move the magenta to -100%, and here about the yellow I can rainforce with 100%. And for this one, maybe I can rainfce like this. As you can see, the green area can look pretty better with this different value. But for the green area, maybe it can impact also maybe phasic this one. Maybe the magenta can take a look. Not so sure, but if I go here, it won't impact directly this one. So I'm going to sit these parameters. Click here, layers, and you can see the difference with this bridge, and you can see the difference with the forest and the backgrounds and the monta. So it was before and after, before and after. This is the type of transformation that you will be able to do with a selective color adjustment. Double click and you can just work with the different modification. So now let's see a second example with this one. I will go right click first and I will duplicate the layers. Then select the adjustment this time, I will go an adjustment, and one more time, I will define this adjustment let just select selective color. If I zoom little bit, let's take again the example about the red area. Be on this pagodas, you can see different red pixels and also here, but also on the tiger head. It means if I drag and move here, take a glans, we can make this type of transformation. And I can also move here if I need, or again move here. If I take a look at the pagodas and this post, just like this, you can make some transformation just using this value. So one more time if I want to change the color, it's also possible like that. But it will impact also, for example, this area, because also on this area, we have some red pixels, as you can see, just like that. You can also mix with the black color. And take a look, I reinforce this red part. By the metal bit, let's take a look about the tiger head. We have some green color. It is the same. If I sic, for example, greens, and I drag and move my cursor, I will be able to make transformation. We move my cursor to 100% here. Magenta, I will reinforce with 100%, and on this area, it depends about what I want to do, but I will reinforce with 100%. Just like that. You can see what you can impact. We can try also another one, maybe you can even work with the ys. If you focus with the y, take a, we can have an impact directly on the sky and create some effect using this value. Fample can put this one here, this one here, and maybe this one around these directions, and you can see the effect product on the sky. I can use my black color just like this. What I will be able to do it just to validate and we can find the different, so it is the pictures. The image before and after, before and after. So concretely, you just select a range of pig cells depending of a color and after you can make transformation with the different colors, and this will impact directly the range of pix cells that you chose. 78. Adjustment white balance: We are going to see how to work with the wise balance adjustment. For this, I selected the pictures and just go right click duplicate the layers. After to duplicate the layers, we can search here on the adjustment, and we can find the wise balance. You will have 2% for the wise balance, warm or cold. Is this indication, concretely, what you can do with the is balance, you can warmer your pictures or you can color your pictures. So you have took yourself adjustment to make something warmer or make something color. Phago slick warm just here. You can see the wise balance, and you can just make transformation here and transformation here. So double click to res it first. Concretely, if I move my cursor with a wise balance on the right, I will add more warm color just like this. This is why we have little this feeling of red and yellow on the image because we add warm color. But if I go on the left, I will have more cold color. So depending on the render that you want to have, general render of your picture, you can move on the right and on the left. And yet it is same you can complete with the magenta, the warmer color, or the green here. So color color. So if I want to add more warmer color, I will move the white balance on the right. Just like this, maybe put something like 20%, and I will complete with little magenta render, like, for example, 16%. And if you just go and validate, as you can see, you can make this type of transformation on your pictures. I can go nearer, just like this. But if I want to have something more color on my pictures, I will make some transformation differently. So for example, I can see the wise balance, Dragon move little bit on the left, maybe a value around -20%, and here -10%. If I just valid it, you can see the difference, and now we have something definitely little bit with more cool color, but we can work also. It depends just about the general render that we want to give to the picture. So we can also work like this. It's definitely not a problem. So after to do this work, something that I'm going to do is to click on the wise Balance adjustment and here I can remove. I will select this one and now we have these pictures. I will duplicate these pictures with right click and duplicate. After to duplicate this one, I will apply my wise balance adjustment. You don't have only one way to have access to the adjustment here just because I display these panels. But something that you can do is also to go here, and you can find adjustment, and it is exactly in the same order, and I will select the wise balance. After to do this work, one more time, you can make something more warm color or more coal color. If this time I want to make something with call color. I will be able to drag and move, maybe put something like -37, and here, Minus maybe 26. If I go here, we have changed little to general. Aspect of this picture before after and before after. This can be extremely interesting, extremely interesting, depending on what we want to do. For example, if you take a look on the grace at the beginning, can look little maybe too much yellow, and you have this possibility to make little transformation using this adjustment just like this. But if at the opposite, you want to little reinforce, you can do the opposite process, so it means you can change the wise balance on the right, like around 20%, and you can change the tent on the right, like, for example, 40%. If you do something like this, little different general render on your pictures, and here you reinforce all this area and just add more one color on your image. This is how you can focus on the wise balance, so you don't have only one way. I can silico adjustment just here. You can also go adjustment on this area, wise balance. And in this type of case, so as explain, you are just predefined 20% here, so it's simple preset and he just -20%. Definitely, this preset is just very basic preset. We don't use this too honestly, but we can have this type of preset also when you use the adjustment. 79. Adjustment invert: We are going to see the adjustment invert. To see this adjustment, I select this image first and click on the layers, right click, duplicate the layers. Let's scenic adjustment, and you can find the adjustment invert. Inside the invert adjustment, you won't have any preset, let's just click here. So concretely, he will invert the at lights and the shadows. Something that you need to understand, click on layers. You ground this adjustment is, you won't have any transformation. I'm going to show you again. I will click here and define adjustment, default, and you won't have anything more to do. Concretely, he will define where are the at lights and where are the shadows on your image. So if I just hide this, as I explained before, we have the at lights on the sky, we have the shadows on this area. So it means if you invert, so if you slit invert, the at lights will become dark like this close to the black, and the shadows will become more right like this, close to the wise, and the midtone will be little between the two. This is just what you will be able to do with this. Can be also interesting for selection because you can cred more contrast. If I slick here my flute selection tools. I need to position my flute selection tools here, not on the invert adjustment, but on the backgrounds. But something that I need to do is to sick the invert adjustment and right click. I have the possibility to use March tone. Thanks to that, I can apply this one to my back rounds. I can go left click here, and I can define this selection. For example, I press delete on my keyboard, and I add this one here, not this one, I add this one. We can find we can remove this area and to be on a transparency back round. This is just an example. Now, let's see a second example. I will recover this visibility. Let's click this one also and invert. So this area will be in wise, almost in white, and this area will be almost in black. So I will first duplicate my layers, so right click duplicate layers, adjustment. I will select invert. Automatically, you can see the render already here, so it's pretty fast, you select invert, and you can see this difference. F to create the selection also here, it's not bad, you can first come back on layers. This layer adjustment right click merged on. In this case, as you can see it's very practical to have created other layers, and I will use my flute selection to left click on the sky depending a value of tolerance as as explained before. For example, I can press digit on the keyboard just to see the transparency. And if I just deactivate this visibility, Click here. We can have this typ offender. Just like that. That's it. So we can have this typo fender. We can remove this here. But we can also remove on this background in depend about what we want to do. So here I can recuperate my back room. And can be interesting for this type of selection. If I just come back here, I will click on this one and press delete, reactivate the backgrounds, and I will go on this area and repeat the same process. So we'll go right click and duplicate the layers adjustment invert. So if I invert, just hear this part or I V black this part in wise, as you can see it's pretty good to have some contrast between the trees and the sky. Here we have good contrast and definitely can be also one more time interesting to create the selection. So I can go on layers, right click, Merch do. And again rato selection, food selection tool crato selection here. As you can see, not everything is selected. Maybe I can increase the little beat the tolerance and try again, and I will obtain this render. It's pretty too much. Maybe I can decrease 26 here. I think I think can be pretty good, maybe not too much if I go in this area. If I go on this area, I can select this way. I think here the selection is pretty good. And something that I can do it is to for example, press delete on my keyboard. But I can also on these layers, if I need, click on this layer because here it's only this one, and click on these layers. I have the same selection press delete also. That's it. Now if I deactivate this view in the tolerance, we are in transparency backgrounds on this image. But if I activate this view, I'm also on transparency backgrounds. As you can see for this section is pretty good for this area, even if it will be interesting to refine the selection. So refine the selection here, refine the selection here and refine the section here with the tools that I explained just before. But for the rest for the sky in a general way, it's a good way to improve, for example, to have a better quality for your first selection and after you can refine. 80. Adjustment split toning: We are going to see the adjustment split tuning, and for this, I selected this picture first, and I will go right click and duplicate the layers. After to do this type of work, if we select adjustment, you can find here split tuning. You don't have any presets that will select default, and concretely what you can do with this adjustment, you can work with the U and the saturation on the atlts and on the shadows. So on this picture, we have seen where are the at lights and where are the shadows. Concretely here, if I drag and move here, It will apply a different type of colors on the plights, but I need to set at the same time the saturation. So if I put 100, as you can see the hue, so it means different type of color will be applied on the atlte. It means on the sky, a little bit on the ocean part. And you can define the colors that you want to create some effects, for example, I can define something little in red and after I can define my saturation just here. And I can do the same thing for the shadows. So I can go here. I can increase the shadow saturation. And as you can see if you change the color, it will be applied on the shadows area. Very interesting if you want to you can create contrast, for example, just like this, if you put 100%, 100%, and you can change the balance to have something more in the at lights or more in the shadows with the balance. I can just crate the sapopi fi put this little bit on yellow, not too much, maybe 70%, and here I can put this in red, but decrease with maybe around 47%. If I do something like that, you can just validate, come back on myers, and you can see this adjustment before and after. So let's hear a second example here. So I have these pictures. I already apply a split tonight adjustment. So I will remove this one, and I will go one more time on right click duplicate. And when I go on this area, adjustment split toning. Here we have atlight and shadows is more separate on this area. We have in different areas. If I just click here, first, I put my saturation to 100 and it will be applied only on the atlight. So take a look on the sky, for example, and we can just change the render. On something more in blue. I can click on this blue color, saturation 100%. If I set the shadows used, it will be applied only on the shadows. One more time I can put the saturation, 100%, and I can define something only for the shadows. F to make contrast, I can put something in orange, and we can craft this type of effect. Then you can focus also on the balance, just like that, so you can drag and move on this direction or on this direction. I can just stay to 50%. So definitely depending on what you will choose. For example, I can choose, maybe a yellow orange or red. I can create this type of render on this area, and I can put contrast with blue. But on the at light blue, I can also do something more in red or more in yellow, like this. But in this case, I would like to create contrast. This is why we put this in blue. This one around orange. After that, I can validate layers, and we can see split toning just like this. This is the type of thing that you can do. Here it was very fast to understand because we know exactly where the atlight, the shadows. You can see the contrast, so it's pretty simple. You can just change totally the general renders, for example, here I can apply something more in green to change. For the at lights, I can put something more like blue. Then I display the saturation, shadow saturation, and atlight saturation. I can craft totally a different style for my image. You can click here, and as you can see, we upturn this render. Et Sam can craft a different style, just dragging and moving the shadow and dragging and moving at lights. Use you, as you can see. 81. Adjustments with selections: We're going to see how to create adjustment with selection. Now concretely, we can create selection and add adjustment only on selection. Something that I'm going to do is to select the layers and right click duplicate for this first example. So let's just make something really simple to understand the adjustment on the selection. I will select the rectangular selection tools and just create rectangular selection only on this area. So if I apply any adjustment now, the adjustment will be inside the selection. So I can click on adjustment just here. Let's make something pretty simple. I will just use an adjustment like the exposure adjustment. I will click here, and I will increase the exposure. And as you can see the adjustment will go only on this selection. So if I go here, now you deselect, you can see the adjustment will appear only on this specific area. So it is definitely something important to understand. Now I'm going to come back, edit and do, edit and doo. If I try with another adjustment, I can sick for example another one, it can be For example, the vibrance and saturation. And if I just select this one here, default, I can increase the saturation only on the specific area and I can deselect. So here we can see the difference. Sometimes you can make interesting things here, difference between a part and another part. I will say my layers, remove the vibrant adjustment just here and remove this exposure adjustment. You can also have the possibility when you select the food selection tool, for example, to not apply contiguous and to select a range of color. If for example, I selected this, I try to selected only the element in green. I can also reduce Little beat my range and try again, if I just click here, only more the green area, specific green area. Maybe I can increase Little beat the range and try with this one. So now, what happened if I'm using a saturation adjustment, it will be applied only on the selected area. So I can click on adjustment, and I will select one more times, this saturation adjustment, it will be pretty good, so vibrant. Pick here. I will select this one, and I will increase the saturation and increase the vibrant maybe around this value and this value. I now I finish my adjustment, and I decide to deselect. As you can see, we reinforce all the green area, but only the green area, depending of the range that we choose and the tolerance with the selection tools. We can see on the right, it is a mask, and concretely, what does it mean, it means we apply only on selection. If I go here, you can see the different before after before, after. It's definitely interesting way to for example and put the saturation or maybe the exposure of only a selected part. Now, let's see another example. Go to click here and remove this one. I have this image and I just want maybe to make a transformation on the sky. I can use my food selection tools. Keep contiguous again and just create a selection here. So now as you can see the sky is well selected. Let's just go right clip date the layer first and create to adjustment. Let's select the adjustment tools, and we have different type of options. Something that I can do, something simple, is just one more time to use the exposure. And with my exposure, I will click here, and I just want to change the exposure of the sky. So if I want to lighten my sky, I can put here, if I want to darken, I can put here. So maybe in my case, I can darker little bit the sky. Here if I want to use this one, but I can also here you can see the different before after, before and after. So definitely, you can work with this. One more time if I want just to change for example, the saturation of the sky, so increase the value of the blue color. I can repeat the same thing. So I create a selection. I will go on adjustment. And I will slick one more time vibrance. I will click here and increase my saturation, and I can reinforce the saturation of the sky to have a better blue color. Let's just try with maybe 20%, 24%. And I can come back here and you can see the mask and it is before after and before after. So the render is really natural. No problem because of this, but I can reinforce this part. Just like that. So definitely it's very convenient to it's very convenient to use. I could increase a saturation vibrant maybe on the other parts, I mean I select this part and invert the selection to select this part, and create an order vibrant saturation adjustment. Adjustment, I can use also this one vibrant and saturation. But I will apply only on this area, it means I can put a different value if I need that before, like, for example, can increase the value for this area. Click here, and we apply every time like a mask. What happened if you click on the mask, let just click here, you can click on the mask, right click and delete. You will delete all the elements here. If you want to edit the adjustment, you can edit the adjustment on the mask and here we can file the mask where appear the adjustment. And let's see my last example. Last example, I can one more time, for example, use my selection brush tools and right click duplicate layers. If I slit my selection brush tools, Let's just click here. Yes, now it's going to work. I will be able to select for example this area. So I can use my brush. Oops. I think it's pretty good because the ise part is selected. I have snap to edge. Okay. Let's just try to create a selection just on the specific part. Maybe I can use also the specific part. So only on the specific part, I can increase the grace to have a better green color, or I can change to exposure or any things like this, work with the contrast, so I can go on adjustment. If I just slick one more time pers adjustment because it's pretty good to see this, I can increase, for example, the situation only on this selection, just like that. But I can also use something like the H S and click on default, select green here and define the saturation and define the U, and I will be able to change little Bat this one. I don't find maybe with my color picker, I can select here, and I will be able to change little beat the green color and work one more time with saturation. And if inside, I want to change again, maybe to add also contrast. I can see the brightness contrast default. And here we will increase the contrast only on this area. For example just like this. And I can come back on layers. Now we have three adjustment, the adjustment, apply only inside this selection. So something that I can do at the end, just to click here. As you can see, you can really apply only inside the selection, a different adjustment, and you can see the mass, so it means where is apply the adjustment. Just go rightly. Edit adjustment and you can see the adjustment. The white part, the adjustment is inside the white part, and the black part will hide the adjustment. You can also go right click, refine the mask. And if you just go and refine the mask, you have the possibility to smooth your mask, that means you can go here and you can make adjustments. You can also use the border wide if you need. So here we can also refine the mask if we need. So it's okay for that. I'm going to remove this one lite, delete and delete. 82. Adjustments with masks: We are going to see how to work with mask and focus with mask on the adjustment. So I have this image and I would like to adjustment, but I would like to adjustment on a specific area. For this, I can use a mask. First things to do, I can go right click and I can duplicate these layers. After to duplicate this layers, I have the posity to add an adjustment and then to create a mask. So if I go here, adjustment, let's take a concrete example. I will adjust use the adjustment vibrance here. I will click on this area and I will define more saturation and more vibrance. Voluntary will increase the tele bit the effect to show you with a mask. So after to do this work, as you can see the vibrance and adjustment is apply on all my pictures. I have the possibility on this vibrance and adjustment and this vibrance adjustment to cratu mask. So I can fit here. I will craft new mask layers, and concretely what I will be able to do. Exactly like when you use a normal mask, you select the paint brush tools. You define the color that you want. If for example, I select the black color here, I define my different parameter of the brush, and concretely, if for example, I use my black color here, I will remove the saturation. Go to come back. If for example, you want to remove all the effect on the mask, you click on the mask. Control, and when you use control, you can put your mask in black. Now I don't see any saturation. If I just want to have saturation, only where I will use my brush. Now the mask is in black. I will select the white color to recover some effect, and I will paint like this, and I will recover my saturation only where I'm going to use my brush, as you can see. So if for example, I zoom here, I use my brush and I will recuperate some saturation only on this specific area. It is also interesting. It's interesting to use the adjustment with the mass because you can make different things just like this. Now I put the saturation only on the temples and the pagodas just like this, you can really see the difference before, after. If I increase my saturation here to see more of the different vibrant and saturation here, you can find the difference before and after just like this. This is one of the interests using the mask. So let's just remove this. It was my first example. I'm going to show you a sell on example with this pictures and just go right click and duplicate the layers. So after to duplicate the layer, what I will be able to do. One more time it is to crate adjustment first, where we use the adjustment. I have different type of options. What I will be able to use, it is Hell saturation, click here, and I will define as an example one more times. I will click here first. So let's click on the green color picker, and I will select this area. So after to select this area, I will change as we can see the color. So for example, let's put this color. And can increase also the saturation a little bit. We can also work with the aluminosity if I need. Now to do this type of work, I put this adjustment on all my pictures. I can create a mask. Invert the mask with control and thanks to that, I can mask my adjustment. Now if I'm using my brush, pain brush tools, I can recuperate my effect only where I will use my brush. For example, I can increase, little bit the size here, and I need to use the white color. If I go in this ara, you can already see the effect on near the cursor, and you can just paint where you want to activate your effect at your convenience. It's totally non destructive. The Advantage, also, if for example, I go outside like this, it's not really good. You just need to invert, you save the black color, and I can remove again. If you wanted to use in other area, you can also, for example, use this, or any areas that you want using a brush. As you can say something convenient. Let's see a last example. I'm going to remove this one. And slate my last picture. In this example, I would like to maybe apply the adjustment only on maybe this part and this part, which, for example, a university adjustment. I will go right click first. I will duplicate the layers, and I will apply adjustment. So we click on adjustment. And what adjustment I will select here? I will silic for example, the exposure adjustment. In the exposure adjustment, I will click here and I can increase my exposure just like that. But one of the problems it will apply on all the parts. This is not what I want to do, so I will just do maybe something like this. First, after I will go ayers. And in the exposure and adjustment, I will create a mask. I will activate my mask here. I will invert the mask with control y to have my mask in black, and now in I'm using my brush tool, so I will select the pain brush tool here. I can activate the effect where I want. So I will use the white color because the mask is in black. I will increase the size of my brush, like this. And as you can see if I apply my brush here, I will be able to recuperate some effect, but only on a specific area. For example I can just make an effect on the river, if I'm using this one. But if I want more, I can also use my brush for example here. So definitely it's a very convenient way to make some correction because sometimes you need to apply correction, not on all the pictures. Sometimes it's not extremely convenient, so this is why you have the possibility to create a mask. I can use type of work here to turn this render. So now I can see the different before, after and before, after. So we apply only the effect on the part where we use the brush. If you want to do the opposite action, you slick the black color, and, for example, I can darken this area if I need. So after I just need to switch white and black depending on the render that you want. 83. Filters blur: We are going to see the filters blur. To see these filters, first, I selected this image, and I will duplicate the layers, so right click here and duplicate the layers. After to do this type of work, I will go on filters blur, and you have different type of blue that you can apply. The aim is not to see all this blue but to see about how you can work with the plu. So for example, if I just sic the first one here, you can just define average blue, and when you define an average blue, you will just up turn this type of thing. So it's just the basic blow that you can do. It's not pretty good in this type of case. You can also focus on the bland mode, and here in this area, you can focus also on the opacity. But don't forget that this type of thing, you can apply on an image, just like this, I'm going to go and edit and do. Just like that. But you can also apply on shapes if you need, so or on text. Don't forget also that you can click here and you have some filters. The difference when you go on this area, not on all the feaurs, but you will be able to add another one. If I go on filters, I can go on blow average, here you won't find this average blow here because this one it's not possible to use like like adjustment filters. It's not exactly possible, but if you select the Gacian blow, I will come back here, filters, blow gaucan blow. So the gaucan blow is one of the user most, you can crate a radius just like this. You can also see the different type of views, as you can see. And if you just click on apply, you can validate your blow. But here when you apply directly here, it is destructive. It means it's directly on the layer. Expect to come back with the undo panels. It's not possible to remove. But if you use, for example, for this one, I will go right click and I will duplicate. For example, for this one, you can use live filters, and this is a different blows that you can use. If I see Gatan brows, just here, you can work with the radius, so I can increase the radius just here. After to do this type of work, as you can see now, we just have the filters as a separate way. The filter is just separate of the layer. At any moment, we can click here. And we can increase the value or decrease the value. We can just change the blue, and at any moment, something that you can do is to click and delete, and you can just delete your filters. So in this case, it's totally non destructive. If I continue with filters, blue, so this is a gaussian blue. You have a lot of type of blues that you can use. If I silic for example, the box blue, you can increase the radius. This is another type of blue that you can use, like, for example, this one. If I select filters, let's select blue. We can do something like, for example, the radial blue. If you click on radial blue just here, you can define angles, and as you can see, because it is radial, we have a circular blue. If you ct this type of blow, so I will obtain this render, edit, do, I will go here, a silic life filters. One more time, you can see again the radial blow. Again this type of blow also, it is the same. You can also put this directly in a separate way. It's not exactly a mask. It's just a filter, but like a filter adjustment in separate to the layers. At any moment, I can click here. If I want to delete or edit, I can delete. Let's just select these pictures also. I will go right click and I will duplicate my layers. After to duplicate my layers, something that I will do it is to create a selection. I will use, for example, just my elliptical selection tools, and I will crate a selection maybe like this, and I will drag and move my selection. I think it's not pretty good. Lets do this again. I will crate a selection around the face of the woman, for example, like this. And if you invert the selection, so you select inverse selection. So now we have selected this part and I can apply the blue only on this part. I can click also on life filters just here, and I have all this list of blue, the different list of block correspond to the categories. Here is the blue category. Here we have another category, here another one. Let's silect another one like maybe Diffused glow. If I just apply the diffused glow, I can focus on the radius, the intensity, just here, swi hold, and opacity. It's a little bit specific, so this is the diffuse glow radius. I can double click here and just delete this one. Let just apply the cacan blow, so I will come back here and I will silic life filters Cacian blow. I will increase my radius. As you can see, the blow will be applied just on this area. And I will click here and de select. This is the type of render that we can do. Something interesting is we have this blue here. You have the possibility also to crate a mask. If I select the mask layers just here, I can put my mask just below, and I can put the mask here. If you put the mask just here, I'm going to show you, if you put the mask here we have a blue, Here, Goan blue, and here we have a mask. What does it mean? It means that if for example, I have my mask here, I have the possibility to select my pain brush tool, and if I select the white color, just like this, as you can see nothing happen, if I select the black color, as you can see nothing happen also. For a simple reason that the blue is located on this area. It's not pretty good, and I'm not on the right way going to come back here, and This one, I will go right click and I will just delete. Because if you apply the blow, the blow here, because it is a selection, automatically, you have the mask. So you can directly work here. As you can see, if you select the black color, you will have more power, and if you select the wise here, and you decide to click on the mask here just because the opacity is not too strong, but if I have more opacity, you can work with this. For example, here you can work like that, and if I invert, here I can reduce my effect. So here I can reduce my effect, I can go here, white color, and I can recuperate my effect. It's interesting because if you decrease the opacity. Maybe I can decrease the opacity. I can make something like a transition like this. I can invert and rise a little bit more here with just 40% of opacity. This is why it is interesting. When you have a selection, automatically, a mask will be created on your element, and you can increase after if you need. This is why it is extremely powerful. This is how to work with this type of blow. I'm going to click and delete all the elements, just go right click and duplicate again. If you go one more time on the filters, you will find a lot of type of options just here. One more time you can find a lot of type of blow options. You can try, for example, the length blow and you need you can increase the radius, just like this number of blade, you have also blade curvature. The aim is not to see on the blow, you just need to work with the different cursor and you can do this type of render. This is for example, the length blow here. 84. Filters sharpen: We are going to see the filters sharpen. To see these filters, I selected this image first and I will go the layers and just go right click duplicate the layers. After to do this work, you can have access to this filter when you go the left, filters sharpen. You have this possibility. You can also go on this area and light filters. You will find also this one. The difference will be if you want to apply this directly in a separate way of your layer or not. If I just go filters here, just select sharpen and sharp mask. Here you can define your radius, just like this. You can define a factor and a S hole. It is powerful is definitely you want to increase the level of details. But be careful because if you apply Si hole, you will decrease your effect. For example, here I'm going to come back. You can increase the radius first. But if you don't apply any factor, you won't have any effect. I can increase the factor just here just like this. If you want to make adjustment, you can use a SI lt just a little bit. If for example I apply 2%, increase the factor, this is the type of render that you can have. Don't forget that, if you want to reduce your ethic, you can then reduce the opacity when you work on the duplicate layers, or you can even change for another type of bland mod, like, for example, soft light or overlay, or you can just decrease this one. Don't forget that. If I click here, I'm going to come back with remove these filters. Right click and duplicate. You can also do this type of work directly on a separate way to your layers with light filters. And when I click on this area, I will select a sharp mask. When I go on a sharp mask, I can define a radius. One more time factor, maybe the s hole, and you can work like this in a separate way. At any moment, you can come back and reduce or increase your effect, edit your effect. You can also focus directly on the opacity of your filter here and the bland mode of your filters directly from the panels. At any moment, I can go right click, and if I want just to remove this one, I can click on delete and keep my layer, so it is totally non destructive. Let's select another one. I can go here in the live features, and you can use also on sharp mask. It is perfect one more time to increase the level of details. So Radius factors, and sw hole one more time to adjustment. Here too much, but I can just do maybe a little bit and just activate this one just here. Just like this. Another way. Another filter that you can use, let's just go right click delete, and you can click here. Life fixtures, and you can use also iPass. When you use the iPass, you have something strange here. Because when you use the pass, generally, it is, you need to work with the bland mode after. You will increase the radius first, and it is powerful if you want to reinforce the level of details also. I can put maybe around 20 pixels. After to do this type of work, if I change the bland mode just here, you can make something very interesting and can silic maybe overlay, just like this. If I silic overlay, you can see the difference before, after, before and after. But if I make something stronger because it is a live filters, I can edit again and I can just make something stronger and it is extremely powerful because you can see in real time your adjustment, just like that. We can see before, after. Let's select this image also, and I want to reinforce, I will use also the iPass features. I will go right click first, I will duplicate to have my first layers as a base, and I will focus on the second layers. I will go on the life features, and one more time, I will select iPass. We can define a radius, let just start with around 21 more times. You can also change directly the bland mode here, but in this type of case I will do after. I will work like this. Now we need to change the bland mode. And to select something, the most of the time overlay will be pretty good, but you can use also soft light, hard light can be interesting. But the most of the time when you use light, pass, the best things to do generally to use overlay. I can use overlay. I can zoom little bit, and you can see the difference before and after. It is perfect to Add more local contrast is something little like local contrast, and you can see the difference. Because it is a live filters at any moment, you can double click here and you can change the radius, you can reduce or increase the radius depending of the effect that you want to turn. Very interesting adjustment, not adjustment, it is filters that you can use if you want to increase the level of details. 85. Filters distort: We're going to see how to use the filters distort. For this, I selected this image and first things to do, I will duplicate the layers and when you go on filters, you can find distort. You have a different type of distorts, where the first thing you need to understand if you select something like, for example, deform, just like this. You can deform your image, but in this type of cage, it's not going to be very useful when you want to use this, but something that I'm going to show you. It is when you go on filters, Cilic, for example, something like perspective. It is exactly the same way that you use your perspective tools. For example, if I drag and move here, I just changed my perspective exactly like the perspective tools. If I just I add my backdrod layers, as you can see, just like to change the perspective. Don't forget also that when you go in this area, you have the live filtur, is it is dynamic filters. Thanks to the dynamic features, automatically, you will be non destructive. If you go in this area, you can find different different filters of distortion that you can use. If for example, I click this one, this is the ripple filters, and I can define the intercity that I want. If I just go here, as you can see it apply, even if I don't duplicate my layers, it's applied automatically on a separate element. It means at any moment I can edit my filters again, as you can see. At any moment, I can go right click and if I want to delete my filters, I can delete the filters. It is something extremely interesting because it is totally non destructive. I'm going to duplicate my layer, life features, and you can create something like Toal for example, and you can apply your angles, you can apply your radius and increase the radius and do this type of effect on your layers. As you can see, one more time, it is totally non destructive. It means at any moment, I can edit my features again, just like that, and it is something extremely interesting. If I just go right click, I can delete these features. So you have a list of different life filters here. This is the distortion filters. Something that I wanted to show you, I'm not going to show you all the filters, but concretely, if slick for example, the perspective filters, you can also craft the perspective filters, but using dynamic filters. Here I change the perspective, but now you can find the perspective dynamic filter here. At any moment, I here this is the render. I can go right click and delete at any moment. You have order elements, for example, if you use liquefy here. You have the possibility also on this area in the live filters to have access to liquefy. But it's a little bit different because here, for example, I'm going to show you with different pictures concretely. Here, you have the live filters. I'm going to go right click and delete. If I set this image, you have the possibility to go on liquefy persona, you can make some transformations. For example, I can make some transformation on this phase. Just like this, I can dragon move here, dragon move here and just apply. But this will be applied directly at the layers. This is the reason for which if you use these filters directly in a life fixture, so life filters liquefy and I do the same type of work. Maybe if I just using these tools, I can change a little bit the size because this image is little different and I do something like this, and I do something like this here. Can just validate, and as you can see, the filters will be applied as a dynamic filters. At any moment, I can double click and I can edit again if I need. It is something that you will be able to do. At any moment, you can go right click and you can delete the filters. So you have a list here of different filters and you can use the different option. I have also the mesh wap. It is exactly like the tools. You can make some transformation to your layers, just like this, using the mesh wap filters exactly when you use the meshw tools. But the only difference is that here, it will be for of the layers, and it is a dynamic filters. I can do something like this, maybe something like this, and just validate with done. And if I just hide my backrod layers, I will turn this render. At any moment, I can double click. If I want to it again with my different handle, it's possible. Let's just go right click and did it. You have multiple type of adjustment that you can use, but has a dynamic filters. If I just duplicate again, I can slick filters, distort here. You have more options on this area that we won't be duplicate, that it won't be a directly a dynamic filter. If I want to use pielit. I can click on pi solide just here and I can apply value of Ctesation, just like that, and I can craft this type of effect as you can see. Here it is definitely useful to have duplicated layers. If I continue with filters, let's sal distort. You can use something like mirror also, and you can define a number of mirror just like this. For example, I can define just one and you can position the mirror where you want. Input and also I will put sometimes it's useful because as you can see, you can craft something like this, you can increase your number of mirror, but they just put once and I can turn this render, as you can see. 86. Filters noise: We are going to see the filters noise. To use this type of filters, I selected this image and selected this image. First thing that I'm going to do is to go right click and duplicate these layers. After to do this type of work if I go on filters here noise. There are different type of filters that you can use. When you use de noise, here it's not going to be very useful because I don't have noise, noise what is. It is like you can find multiple points on the image generally when you have a low exposition or when the image is taking during the night. Here it is not the case, so don't have a concrete example, but concretely if you work with your different parameter, you will be able to remove some noise. If you want to add noise, you can do the opposite process, so filters, noise, add noise. Here you can work with the intensity that you want. If I put 100, you have gaussian or uniform noise. Let's see Gaussian noise, and this is the type of render that you can do. As you can see, we have multiple point appearing on the image. Sometimes it's useful if you want to create some effect. If I just continue with filters noise, you can add something like diffuse. Here I can define my intensity just like this, and it's the same, I can use this type of filters. If I just selling this image, let's just go right click and duplicate the layers. When we take a look about the life filters, it means the dynamic filters here, what we will be able to see. We can see that in this type of category, we can find D noise, add noise, D fuse, and something that I'm going to show you also as a dynamic filter, for example, its dust and scratches. Can define a radius, just like this. You can define a tolerance, and you can apply this type of work also just like that. Now, it is a dynamic filter so at any moment, you can edit your filters, just like this. Let's just go right click and delete. You can also work with a selection. For example, if I go on the left, I can use one of these tools. Let's just select the elliptical selection tools. I will craft a selection around this area, maybe this area. After that, I will oops, yes, selection around this area. I will drag and move little bit my selection. Let's crag the selection first and move little bit around this area. I will invert my selection. I will click here invert. After to invert the selection, what I will be able to do. I will be able to apply for example a dynamic filter. I can go here and I will select add noise. I can add the noise just with the intensity only on this area. I can do add noise, for example, this one, and I can click on the select. Now it is applying Exactly because it is the dynamic filters as a mask. If I want to use my brush tool, it is pretty convenient because I can silect my pain brush tools. Because it is a dynamic filters, if I silic for example, the white color, I define my different value of opacity, flu and hardness exactly like the mask. I can erase, recuperate some effect just here. Or if I invert with a black color, I can erase some effect. You can do something like this. Ifinitely, it is very interesting to edit after your element. I can also decrease opacity, so put something like, for example, 20 s, and now I can just ise a little bit with a different type of opacity just like this. It is also something important to know when you use the dynamic filters, you have the possibility if it is inside a selection to automatically create a mask like this, you can use spain bert tool if you want to erse some effect, or if you want to recuperate some effect. This is why it is important because we can go right click. If you just go and delete, you can delete ei like this. If you do the same thing, for example, you go on filters and you select noise and you select add noise. Even if you have a selection, I'm going to show you you craft again a selection, Elliptical selection tools. I can create hoops. Let's redo again. Because if you do something like this, it's not pretty good. I'm going to redo again. Yes, just like that. Dragon move my selection, ops it's pretty small again. Yes, just like this, and dragon move my selection here. If I invert the selection again, and I don't use the dynamic filters. I just use filters, noise, and noise. I apply the noise here. As you can see if I just deselect. Like this, it's not possible to edit anymore because it is not a dynamic filter. I cannot do anything. I cannot use a mask in this type of case. This is why it is useful to use a dynamic filter, but you don't have dynamic filter for all the filters. Only on specific filters. It's okay for that. I'm going to remove this one and remove this layer and it's okay for the filters. 87. Filters color: We are going to see the filters color and to use this filters, first I selected this image, and we will work with this image also. After to do this type of work, first thing that I'm going to do is to go right click duplicate. When you go on filters here, you can find colors, and you have different type of color filters. When you go on this area, you can see also live filters, and you can find color filters here, not a lot, but it is also possible. For example paclic one of these, for example vignette can be interesting. You can create a vignette effect with exposure on a direction or another directions. After to do this type of work, I can change the harness, just like that. If you put the ar net at 100%, you will have this circle effect, or you can create more something like a gradient, reducing the harness. You can also focus with the scale value and you can change little the shape ratio using shapes. This is the type of thing that you can do. It is a dynamic filter in this type of case, double click, and at any moment, I can edit again, filters. As you can see it's pretty good. I can go right click and it. When I go in these dynamic filters, you can also use something like lf ton and concretely, he will separate in two tons with white and black. But moreover, to have these two tons, you can also define cell size to ton this type of render just like this. After you can change the contrast, so it means less contrast or more contrast, and this is something that you can do. You can also change you have different type of mode because you can do the same type of things with color also. And after that, you have also round and this one. You can also change the angle depending on what you choose, as you can see it's pretty good, just like this. One more time at any moment, you can also click here. Right click, and delete. It is non destructive. If you take a look inside the filters colors, at the beginning, you have different automatic filters. For example, if I just use auto levels, you will have auto level filters, but it is exactly the same that you use this automatic element here. You have exactly the same thing here. The just continue with filters, colors here. Something that you can do, you have something little bit specific. You can use chromatic applation. Sometimes it is useful on image, differente. In this type of case, let's apply something like if you click on procedural texturity, something very specific that we're not going to see because it's more advanced features. Let's click on filters. Voronoi. Thanks to that, you can define cell size, and you can do this type of work for your image. These filters, you can use also as a dynamic filters because it is inside the dynamic filters. Here, I didn't use as a dynamic filters, but it's possible. Why it is useful because I'm going to show you something. Let's slick this image and right click duplicate. One more time I will create a selection with the elliptical selection tool of the face of the woman. Maybe I can start to around this area and dragon move my selection here. One more time as an example, I will invert the selection. I want to put my Voronoi texture outside. I will go on this area. And if you silic live filters hoops, this procedural textures is not what I want to do. I will select live filters, and I will silic Voronoi. As you can see, you can put this directly on the selection outside. Just like this. I can work with the line wide, and I can just click here. We just apply Voronoi on this area. I'm going to do this again because I think here we have something, so we'll delete this filters. We do again, and I will go yes, just here. Drag and move this invert the selection. Let's just go on this area. And as you can see, we can apply the filters. Life filters, let's silic one more time Voronoi can increase the cell size or decrease, let's do something like this line wide and validate. If I just the silic We have a mask. As explained before, at any moment, you can use the pain brush tools, and if you sing the black color, just like this. Here you can focus with the opacity, flu and harness, and if I use a black color, I will remove some effect. But if at the opposite, I invert the color for wise, I will recuperate some effect one more times. It is also something important to know. So, that's it. At any moment, you can arise, go here, right click and just delete. It's totally non destructive when you use a dynamic filters. For the rest, if we come back and we select the colors, you have a little bit more options. What you can do. You can use something like emboss, for example, Sometimes it is useful, you can craft this type of render on duplicated layers. You just apply and you have emboss effect. If you change here, sometimes you can change, slick something like overlay, and sometimes it is useful, you can craft this type of render with emboss. If I just remove this one, right click and duplicate the layers, something that we have not also on the dynamic filter, which can be interesting. It is filters. When you see color, you can use something like solarize also. You can define this effect, and one more time, you can try different type of render using, for example, screen or another type of bland layer. 88. Filters photo: We are going to see the filters astro photography, and for this, I selected this image, and I selected this image also. For things to do I thing this image and right click duplicate the layers. After we will work with this image. Not many things to know with this filter. Concretely, when you go on filters, you can find astrophotography, and you have the possibility to remove the backgrounds. You will remove the back rounds depending of the different channels. If you go on this area, you can find life filters. On the life filters, you won't have astrophotography. Concretely, it is not a dynamic filters. Something that I'm going to do is to go on filters. And I will select astrophotography, remove barons, and what you will be able to see. Concretely, when you go here, you can remove acrons, and here you can find the different channels. You can find again the red channels, the green channels, and the blue channels. Concretely if you select one of these channels and you draw and move the cursor, you will remove the color of the channels. If I select blue and I put at one, going to remove this cold color. It means like this cold channels. This is a reason for which this render will be in yellow. But if I do the opposite process, the red color is a warm color. If I put this at one, as you can see now, I have little this blue render for a simple reason that I remove the red channels. If I remove the green channels, I will obtain this render. Concretely, if you remove blue, you remove green and you remove red, you will be in black because you remove all the channels. If you remove all the channels, you won't see anything. This is why I obtain this render. But something interesting if you remove the blue and you remove the green, you can find the red channels, so you can see the red channels. If at the opposite, I put the red and the blue, you can see the green channels. If at the opposite, I put the red and the green here, I will see my blue channels for a simple reason that I remove the green and the red. You can complete also with this value, and you can also complete with output black levers to make adjustment. Concrete it is really what you need to understand. If you remove all the red channels and all the green channels, you will see the blue channels. If you do something like this, you will see the green channels. The am is just to remove a channels. You also the possibility, you have a point here, you can drag and move the print, but sometime, if you focus here, you can drag and move the point, but something not extremely useful. You have sample and position, so it means If you activate here, you can drag and move and depending on where you are, he will define your channels. But I think it's not extremely convenient to work with this, and it's better to only work with the different options that you have. That is just the principle. If I want to remove a channels, you can put an element at one and you can just remove a channels, just like this. I'm going to remove this one, just click here, silt so this image and just go right click and duplicate the layers. If I silic filters, I will one more times use astrophotography, remove backgrounds. It is a very specific filters, one more time if I remove red and green, I can see the blue channels just here. If I select the position, you can find, but it's not extremely convenient. If I select red and blue at one, I can find my green channels. If I put just like this, I can see my red channels. After I can make adjustment, reduced little bit with our output black levels, also. For example, I can do something like this for my image. That's it. This is the type of thing that you will be able to do, nothing more to know about these filters. Astrophotography, something little bit specific. But Istrom because you can definitely remove just channels. For example, I can just remove my red channels here, and here you have also the output levels. Output black levels, I can just remove in this example, the red channels. Now if I just apply this, as you can see, I will turn this render. Definitely it is a specific filters that you can use if you want to remove a channels. It is convenient. 89. Add lights: We are going to see the filter lighting. To use this filter, I selected this image, and the first thing that I'm going to do is to go right click and duplicate the layers. So we have the possibility to add a light effect exactly like we add alight on the front of the image. For this, we can select filters lighting. So after that, what I will be able to do. Concretely, you have a spot here, and you can change the position of your spot. First thing to do, you slick the first point. This is this first point will be the base of your spot, and you can drag and move this point because at the beginning, it will be in the center of your image. So you can drag and move the spot to change the location first. I just focus on this area because before to focus here. You have multiple points. Concretely, you have this point, you can extend just like this, so you can extend. It is like the outer cone, and you can extend or reduce here with a number of degrees corresponding to the outer cone. If you just click here, you can work with the inner cone, just like this. If you click on this point, you can drag and move the location of your element because when you are here, you can increase change just like this. But if you really want to change the position, you need to drag and move with this point. After you have also this point to work like that, it's little like directions, and you can change the direction like this. For example, you can drag and move here, and if you take this point and you drag and move this point in this point, you will have this type of render without any transition. This is why if you move this point, you will create a transition just like this between the outer con and the inner con, just like this. After that, we can focus also on the right. On the right, what you will have. If I zoom a little bit, you have the diffuse. Here is just how you can put your light effect with a percentage. You can find specular also inside and the shininess. First, you can regulate your effect with diffuse specular shininess. You have a specular color by default it is wise. I can apply another color like red if I want to crate this type of effect. You can also focus with ambient. If you increase ambient, you will see also your image on the backgrounds with the ambient color. It means it is the base of your image. By default, the base of your image, it is like opacity reduced to 20%. Here, this is the ambient color, so I can change, put yellow, and if f I increase. You can see also the ambient like color appearing on this area. After to do this work, you have different type spot, you can define a point. You have also the point here, and you can just change the location of the point just like this and dragon move the circle to reduce little the light. I can put the light, for example, in the midle just like this. You can also define a specific color, like, for example, if I want to have something on the line of horizon, crasun effect, I can put the light in yellow, just like that, and I can dragon move maybe the element here and put this element just like that. And after I can work with my ambient color one more time because it is in yellow, but I could change one more time for white and here for white also, just like this. And I can reduce little shininess or also my differs, and you can craft this type of render on the back. You can increase the distance also, and here it's a little specific. You can craft texture effect. Very powerful, very powerful filter that you can use. Take a look about what you can do with this type of effect. So here we have the point directional just here. Factors come back to point. You can double click to rest the effect if I'll just click on the ply. I can craft this type of render on this image. So as you can see, it's pretty good. I'm going to click here, right click and duplicate because I want to show you also something more, so I will go and filter lighting. And if I just come back to my type spot, because here you have more options. For example, I can display those things on the left here, just put here, and I can reduce. Maybe I can increase the ambient on the back just like this and increase little the specular and shininess. And here you can have the direction. So if you drag and move, it is exactly like to move the point. So if you use the different parameters, stress here, outer cone also inner cone, it is exactly like to drag and move the point as has explained before. So I can change this. You can also split the view. Just like this. You can separate in two view depending on what you want to do. But if you want to add multiple spot, it's also possible. I'm going to cancel, select this image, and just go right click duplicate. I will select my filters and one more time lighting. The extremely powerful if I want to only see the face of the woman, I can just display like spot just here and just do something like this. After that, maybe I can increase a little bit specular or not too much here. Ambient, increase a little bit ambient. Here we can set the directions just like that. An explain if I want to put multiple ln, you can click Light one, you can click on ad, and I can define a nod down line. For example, I can display my second line and my second line I can display maybe just on this area. I can add another line like S, and I can display maybe if I dragon move this plane just here, and I can add ano line. You can add multiple line and place your multiple spot on a different way. It definitely something extremely powerful. To remove a spot, you click on the lights that you want, remove. Here I have my light number S, remove, and here I have my light number two, remove. Let's just focus on one slide, and I will display this slide maybe around this area, and I can just click on a ply. Take a look about what we can do, definitely, it's pretty great to have this type of filters. 90. Remove haze: We are going to see how to remove as and for this, I selected this picture first and I will go right click and duplicate the layers. When you go on this area, you have very interesting filters, and this filters is the as removal. As you can see on these pictures, not exactly as, but definitely we have some trouble here, and this is why we can use this tool to try to improve the sky. So for this, I will select filters as removal. After that, we can work with a distance, a strengt and exposure correction. So if for example, you double click, you come back here. Here this is a distance. When I will increase, you can see the difference to improve. Maybe I can put this at the maximum in these pictures, but you need also to complete with the strength. So as you can see if you don't put too much strength, you are not going to have improvement. This is why I will increase the strength and you can increase more. But if you increase too much, you will make some transformation too much on all your image. You need to be careful about that. You need to not put too much. Maybe I can put around this area, and you have also the exposure correction just like that. As you can see, I think it's pretty good with this correction, you can find different view with a split view, and you can also use this type of view. Where you can see the difference, I think the split view is pretty good, so this is the half of my image and the order half. We can change that for that. Different pled is very interesting. I can just click on apply just here, and we will be able to see the difference before and after, before and after. As you can see the tool is definitely powerful because when I want to improve this image, the first thing that I will have to do it is to make this transformation with. L et's see a second example. I have these pictures, and I will go right click also first and duplicate the lira. It is the same. We can find this, and as you can see, it's not pretty good on this area. So some thing that I can do is to use filters as removal. So after to do this type of work one more time, I need to work with the different value like the distance, because if I reduce distance, strength, exposure correction, we'll obtain this render. So I will increase the distance just like this. After I will increase the strength. Here it's definitely too much, so definitely the render is very dark, so I just need to put but not too much, thing like this, and we can put exposure correction. So I can increase now a little bit of strain because if you increase the exposure correction, it will be okay. If your exposure correction is too low, it will be too dark. This is why you can after to put the strength, use the exposure correction. So thanks to that, you can lighten or darken your corrections, and here I can work with the strain maybe like this and try to make adjustment, but hates too much, maye like this. T it will be difficult to make better on this picture because after it will be too dark, maybe I can try a little bit more, but around this area and this area, I think it will be the best on this picture to do. So we can see the difference first before after, and it's definitely so much better, can see the difference here, and I can come back to no split view. I can click on apply. And as you can see it's pretty good about the render. We will keep a little bit here, but I think definitely it's not possible to do better on this image. But it's already a very good improvement that we can use on this image. So every time that you need to make this type of transformation, you just need to I can advise you to duplicate layers. And after to duplicate the layers, you just need to go on filters. And on filter, you have this powerful tool, and this is as removal. And definitely very, very powerful. So how to work, I think, you need to work first with the distance. After that, you need to edit this two value exposure correction and straight to try to the entire section of the two to find the best render for your image. So it depends definitely of the image you won't have to use a specific value. You just need depending on the image to work with this cursor to try to have the better under. 91. Layer effects bevel emboss: We're going to see the layer effect bevel embers. To see this layer effect, something that I'm going to do is to silt my rectangle tools, and just crate the rectangle just here. On this rectangle, I will apply a color like the red color. At the same time, I will cra the ellipse, so I will take my ellipse tools, Zoom little bit, and crat ellipse on these directions, and I will change the color for the blue color. At the same time, I will a text, so I will select my artistic text tool. After to s my artistic text tool, I will just tap something and I will just tap title on this area. A the font family, maybe I can change the font family and select an oder one like, for example, this one. I will increase, put this here, and just change the color. Let's just select this type of color. To use this effect, we can go here and you can find a layer effect. We can apply this, for example, on an object, like a shape layer, like a text layer, but it can be also on a image layer, I will show you just after. First I slic this layer. If. After to go an effect, you have the first one bevel emboss. First thing to do, you need to activate the effect. You can zoom, and after to activate the effect, you have the possibility to master the different options, where you want to have your effect inside, outside emboss and pillow. So if for example, a select inner. Here you can define the radius, I can extend the radius. Thanks to that, you can have something like it's not exactly a Swedi effect, but it is little this, so you can work with the radius, and you can soften your effect with this one. After to do this type of work, so this is inner, outer, so it will be outside embers and pillow, just like that. The most of the time we use inner embers, if I come back on embers here, you can also use soften and you can check with the radius. If I just come back to inner, I will obtain this render. You can even deactivate loc ti spec ratio to work also with the dip and the dip will be separate from the radius. After to do this structure work, you have invert, so it means you can have something like more outside effect and hear more inside effect if you go on invert. You can change the direction at any moment. This is also something enteesting to do, change the direction, just like that. After that, you can even work with at light color and you can change little bit the reflections on this area and work with the opacity. This is the type of thing that we can do. If I just take this one. I can take this one and I can go on my directions, and this is the same, I can define a direction just like this. After to do this type of work one more time, what radius I want to have, and I can use soft turn if I need. Here's this pillow, embers, Outer, faciic inner. Generally, this is what we use the most to have this type of effect. One more time, you can unlock this and you can change it a bit, and I can change the directions to have like your reflection maybe more on the top left corner, just like this. Thanks to that, we have the shadow here. And s definitely even the shadow, you can increase the value, decrease or increase the value of the shadow in percentage. If I just valid it, take a glance about the render that we can have here. At any moment, you can come back to effect, double click, and you can edit your effect. After. You can also go right click on the effect. If you press delete, just like this, you need to be careful because if you press delete, you will delete all the layer. Here we have the effect, like this. If you want to remove, you just deactivate the effect, you validate and the effect will disappear as you can see if you just click on this area. So you can also play this on a text. So you silect layer effect on this area val ambus this is same, you select what you want, Let's just go for inner again because this is something that we use the most. Work with the radius. Here you can also change like that to change a little bit, how will be the shadows, and you can soften after that if you need. One more time, you can change the position. And this is the type of things that you can do, but you can also apply this on any image, so I can go on file. It can be a image layer place and leer select image layers like, for example, this one, and I will display my image layer here. Even when you have image layer, you can use this type of effect. Layer effect, beaver embers. The only difference it, it will be applied to create like a frame. Something like this, and I can use maybe inner, and you can do something like that. It's more about your frame when you can soften here and you can change the display to create little like a frame effect on a direction or another direction with the shadows, as you can see. This is how to use this type of effect. 92. Layer effects 3D: We are going to see the layer effect Swede. To see this, something that I'm going to do, first, it's to silic the rectangle tools, and just to craft the rectangles on this area. After that, I will change the color, yo silic something like the red color for the s chaps. I will a little bit, and I will define also a circle, so I will crate a circle just on the right. Here. This circular will change the color, and ers craft also some text using the artistic text tools, and I can add some text and I will put Title. My text is in wise, I will click here. Just change the font family maybe with the proper color and we'll make adjustment, and I decided to define this font families protibtor for this different example. It's increasingly the size. If I select my rectangles, this one, I will go here, and I will select Liar effect. Here we can define Swedi, activate the Swedi options. So it's a like bevel emboss, but the render, we have different options. If I define the radius here, as you can see it looks a little same that Bf emboss, but you can have more options. If you click on this area, you can change also the dip just here. After you can make the choice to soften one more time with this one. And here you can work with Df specular shininess. Concretely with DF, you can change how the light will be reflected on the color of your layers. And here you can see also specular just like this, and then you can find shininess. As you can see are more reflex. If you just move this precursor, you can try to have different render about how the light can reflect to your layers using this value. Specular color, what color you want to have, here is wise, but if for example, I define something like orange, the render will be different. You can increase ambient also. If you increase ambient, you can also define a ambient color just like this. If I want to come back in wise, I can define wise. Just here, I can define wise again. And you have the direction of the light. Concretely, we have one point light. And this point light, you can drag and move this, the point light will arrive from the right. On here will arrive from the left, or you can put this in the center and you can see the light in the midle. One more time the light, you can define also a color for this line. If it this in yellow, you can see the different. You can even, if I just come back with it even add more point. For example, if you click on add, you can add a second point. This second point, you can put light also on the right. So for example, my first point, we have the light on the left. My second point, the light on the right, but if I continue on the right, I can put also a light below. If I add another one, I can also put a light on the top. You can add multiple light like this. If you want to remove a point, just click on remove, remove, remove, and I can remove my se point to only keep one. This is the type of thing that you can do. If I just click on this one, the circles, I'll come back on F X Swedi activate, and little bit interesting also to put this on a circles. I will define the radius one more time click here, and I can change. Soften a little bit, and how the light will reflect depending on the different value like this. After we have ambient, and choose the direction of the light here, we just have one point light, and I can make the choice to put the light maybe from the leftist one and to have the shadow here, and I can just validate. Let's select an example. You can also put this on text. I will select F X and one more times Swede activate. Define radius. I can zoom, you can see the swede effect. Soften, how the light will be reflected and put the direction exactly where I want. To crate my effect here, the light will be on the top right corner. You can also do this type of form even when you want to focus on the image. For example, I can file, and I will silic place. Layer silicon image and silque more time this image as an example, but you can do on any image, any layer image because this is a layer image, and I will define F x here, Swedi and activate the options. If you put this image, it will be on This part, you won't impact directly the image just on the outlines. One more time, I can define the radius, I can soften here, change how the light will be reflected with different value and display where will come the light. For example, here the light will be on the front, so this is why we have this render. But if I go here, the light will come maybe from a direction like the bottom left corner. And that's it. I can increase the ambient here a the light, and you can just validate. Different example, you can every time apply this type of thing on different layers, shape layers, text layers, image layers without any problems. 93. Layer effects inner shadow: We are going to see the layer effect inner shadow. To see this layer effect, first things to do, let's see the rectangle tools. Create the rectangles. I can define a color for these rectangles. And I will work with the inner shadow layer effect. For this, we can go on the right lier effect, and we can select inner shadow. I can just activate this one. What we have, it's not very difficult concretely, we can just on this layer effect. Focus here, this is opacity of the inner shadow. After we need to define a radius, we need to define a offset, and we need to define intercity. First things to do, I will put my inner shadow to 100% to see exactly where it is located. Concretely, you have the radius, so you can extend or reduce your inner shadow just like this. After you have the offset, if you increase the offset, you will have this direction here, but after you can change the intensity also. The last important things will be the color and the angles. It means I can turn the position of my inner shadow depending on the angle that I want. If for example, I define 135 degrees, the inner shadow will appear here with the black color by default. But you can change for another one of color. If I want it yellow, I can apply yellow. But generally when you change the color, you want it to match your inner shadow, so the most of the time we use the black color. After to do this type of i put 135 degrees, and here I can focus on the intensity. It is too strong. This is why I can decrease opacity to maybe obtain something like this. I can also decrease little the offset, and I can also decrease the intensity. Maybe I can put something like that, decrease little bit, the intensity, and things so that you can have inner shadow with the transition creating this type of process, just like this. So it's okay for that. You can apply this on different type of layer, so it means if I select the artistic text tools. So here I can tape titles. After to tape titles one more time. I can edit this one to see better the final render, I will change the phone family, and one more time I will select this pont familie. I will increase dettle my text, and I will change the color. I will put for example this blue color. Let' just zoom on the text, go on the right. F X just activate in a shadow. Increase the radius offset and intensity. Thanks to that we have opacity, so we can define a angle. Let's put against the example of 135 degrees. After I can reduce little bit, the opacity and the offset, little bit also, and also the intensity to have something just little bit like this, and I can apply this on my text. It works also on any type of layer. If you go and file place, you can select the image. We sect the image just as an example like this image. Try and move the image here, silt, F X, and activate the inner shadows. I will increase the radius, increase offset, increase intensity. You can find now the inner shadow located on this position. One more time you can change the position. Here this is the color. If you want to, for example, I want to apply the red color, in this type of example, it can be interesting and after offset intensity and radius of the inner shadow. If a dragon moves opacity 100%, here I can create a frame with the red color and create a frame just all around using this type of effect, all around my image. I can click on close and I can apply my inner shadow on my image inside, as you can see inside the image, thanks to this effect. This is how you can work with this effect inner shadow. One more time you can apply on different layers. So if you want to apply on image lays possible, text layers pile Shape layers, it's possible. 94. Layer effects inner glow: We are going to see the layer effect inner globe. To see this layer effect, first that I'm going to do it two crater rectangles. Just on this area, I will apply a color. Let just apply the red color. After to do this type of work, I will go on F x, here, I will select inner glow. So you have a little difference between the inner shadow and the inner globe. It's little the same type of principle, but the type of a render will be different. Because here in this case, you can find a bland mode, and by default, you has a screen bland mode. First things to do if you want to see your inner shadow, you need to increase the radius, you click on inner shadow, and you can increase the radius. And you can see what type of efic you can turn. You can work also with intercity. Because the color is in wise, concretely the rectangle is here, and we can obtain this render. Now I'm going to change the color, and I will define, for example, the yellow color. Now you can find the inner shadow located on the edge, and you can change for center, edge, center, most of the time we use edge. So I have 100%, 100%, 100%. I can decrease my radius, decrease my intensity, and decrease my opacity also. And if I just decrease all this type of thing, I can just create a little effect on the edge and we have the screen blend mode. But if you change the bland mode, you can have a different type of render. For example, hclic may be something like this one, the render can be a little different. If I just come back, you can also silic just normal. After silic normal, you can also increase the radius, the intensity and the color. One more time, you can switch center edge. That's it. Nothing more to know for this one if you create a text, artistic text tool. Let's just step one more time. Title I will zoom on this one. I will define a color for my text. Let's just apply one more time the blue color, it will be pretty good, and I will use my layer effect. F X, let's just select. This effect inner glow activate, and I can increase the radius just like that. Here in this case, if I increase at the maximum, I won't see anything. This is why I need to put just a little effect, and if you apply unitary effect, it will be like to have a little like a blue on my layers, just like this. Here, the blend mode screen, you can decrease opacity of the effect, and one more time, you can switch center and edge. In this type of case, facilic center, take a look butle what you can do can be very interesting if asilic center to create this type of render, or I can switch from edge. One more time, you can do this on multiple types of layers. This is why I will select the image, so file place, and one more time we will re use the same type of image, so it means this one with the road and dragon move the image and zoom on this. I will go in this area, select the layer effect. Switch on this and activate the inner glow effect. Define the radius just like that. Interesting, if you want to create a frame with a transition, you can increase the radius, increase the intensity, but not too much, maybe do something like this, you can do something like that on your image to create a specific frame. More time, you can also decrease with the opacity variant interesting, and this is the blend mode. You can try with different blend mode because if for example, you slick sub strike, you will have this type of render. If I slick something like reflect, I will have this type of render. You can try different type of bland mode. You can even come back to normals if you want. If I slick one more time scream, this is a color, so I can define another type of color. If I define red, just like this, we can create a frame with a transition using the inner globe. You can switch edge from center. But the most of the time we'll use edge, but if you want to craft on efect in the center, you can see lick center just like this. And here we can switch for edge one more time. When you focus on the sity, you can really see the transition, and if you put 100%, generally, it won't be pretty good because you won't craft any transition e. The most of the time we need to focus, maybe I can put here in this example, 60%. You can also work with the radius to decrease a little bit, and here the color is in black. I can also switch the color for white and because my ban round is in white, I will turn this render. If I just click on close now, this is the type of effect that you can create when you have a image layer. 95. Layer effects color: We are going to see the layer effect color overlay. To use this effect, first thing that I'm going to do is just to crater rectangles, and after that, I will define a color for this rectangles. Zoom in this area and activate color overlay. After I will show you on an image layer because it is extremely interesting on the image layers. If I just click here color overlay. Concretely, you will just add a color, so here you slick the color that you want, and after you can define a opacity and a bland mod. Concretely, you can just change the opacity and just change the bland mod. But if you do this type of wd concretely, it is exactly like if the layer you change the opacity like this, or if you go here, you change also the bland mod. The only difference is in this type of case, it is inside a layer effect. Sometimes it's more interesting because it is totally non destructive. This is why I'm going to show you this because here you can define this one. If you have the text also, you can select, for example, the artistic text tools, you can tape anything that you want. One more time I can select title. Here, the color is in blue, let's just keep the blue color and activate also the effect color overlay. When you have this type of things, you won't have too big difference, for example, a silic green, I can reduce the opacity and it will be a mix with my original blue color and the green color here. If I select any bland mode, it will be a mix between this color and the order color also. This is something interesting to know first. So now I'm going to place an image. So we're going to file slick place, and I will define a image that just slicks this road image one more time and position my image totally on my document just like this. Now, something that I can do if I sick the rectangle tools, I could craft, for example, rectangles on the front just like this, define the color that I want. I can silect the color. After that, I can change the opacity, and I can also change the bland mode. So I can do this type of work, but you can do this with a layer effect. For example, I can salic screen, and I will obtain this render on my layers. Because I change with the rectangle, I change the bland mode, and I can also go here and reduce the opacity if I need. Now, what I'm going to do it is to select this layers. Go on lier effect, and if I want to have the same type of render, but with the layer effect, I will select color overlay. After to do this type of work, if I select one more time of color, let's do again the red color. It is exactly the same type of render. You can select the bland mode that you want. For example, I can click on overlay, and I can also decrease the opacity. If I'm working with normal, I can also decrease the opacity after that. So let's s elect to blend mode like for example, overlay and here decrease the opacity like for example, 45%, and I can validate. It is exactly the same type of renders and before, but the difference is before a created lier rectangles. Here we don't have any layer on the top. We just have a layer effect. At any moment, I can click on Mayer effect, and it's non destructive, I can just make any adjustment just like this. If I want to remove Mer effect, I just need to click here and you can remove the effect and come back here. It's totally non destructive and you are focused on the same here. This is why it is interesting, and you can do this with any element, let's just come back here. As I explained, can cratertnga just like this. You can select a color, and you can change the blend mode and after work with opacity just like this. Or you can just sil your layers, F, and I can activate overlay, and after that silect to color like, for example, blue, in this type of case, change the blend mode like screen, and after work with opacity to obtain the same type of render but directly with a layer effect. 96. Layer effects gradient: We are going to see the layer effect gradient overlay. To use effect, this effect, it's working exactly like the color overlay. The only difference is you will create the gradient. If you select any shapes, for example, you can create the rectangles, you define colors. I can at the same time select my text tools, artistic text tools. And on this area, I will start to tape something and I will tape title. So if I do something like this, I can increase a little bit my size. We have this rectangles and just select this one, and I will use the gradient overlay. It is exactly the same way. If you apply just on a sap, you won't have big difference like to apply a gradient on your shapes. Completely here, you have the bland mode, you can focus on the opacity, the type of gradient that you want. After when you click on gradation, you will have all the options that you want, for example, you can select the first color, you select the second point, and you can define a second color just like this. You have also more option I'm going to show you after after it just like if you select your image, and here I can remove my gradient overlay. And it is exactly when you have a sheep layer like to click on feel and to apply a gradient. If you click here, it is exactly also like to click here and to apply a gradient. So you can go here, F X, and one more time, I can select gradient overlay, and I can define the gradient that I want. So I can click here, select first color. You can even select Mr color if you need, and I can define more colors, just like this. This is the type of things that you can do. Why it is useful, it's more useful with image layers. This is why we go on file and I will just select place. I will define the image. Let's just select this image. Zoom little out and left click to define my image just here. After to do this type of work, I have this image. As I explained before, like the color let, you can create your rectangles on the top. This rectangle on the top, you can create your gradient, go and feel gradient. Salic the first point, the colors that you want, like for example, blue, Salic the second point, the colors that you want, like for example, green. You can even make adjustment with the gradient tool, so you can click on the gradient tools, and you can just dragon move the gradient in the location that you want. So we have created our gradient. After that, if I go on the right, I can click here and silic to blend mode. Let's just sic for example, overlay, and you can also reduce with the opacity. And I obt this render, and I can do the same type of work with to create a new layers just with liar effect. So it means I can sink this rectangle and remove. And now, something that I would like to do is just to add my liar effect, and I can have the same type of render using color overlay. So I can activate color overlay. I can an color overlay, cratient overlay. And after that, I go on the right and select the gradients that I want. I can click here, gradation options, selling the first point, and sling the first color like for example blue, selling the second point, and second color like for example green. Oops, here green, let just select the second point. It was not selected concretely. Like blue, and you can reverse the gradient. You can also add a new point, so you just need to click on insert and after you can add one more point. For example, I have a gradient with exactly sweetens. You can also drag and move exactly like the gradient as has explained before. You can even change the gradient, elliptical, radial and conical. Now some things that I can do if I come back on linear. M is to click here, and you can silic the bland moon that you want. One more time I can silck overlay. And I can decrease the opacity depending on the render at Taiwan. After that, you have the offset X for your gradient offset y, and you can change also with the angle to set the position. If I just go here, it is exactly the same type of render. The only difference is now we only have a layer effect. It is non destructive on these layers. At any moment, I can click here, and if I want to remove my gradient overlay, I can just click on this area and I can remove my gradient overlay from the layer. 97. Layer effects outer shadow: We are going to see the layer effect out shadow. To see this effect, first thing that I'm going to do it is to crate the rectangle. We'll crate a rectangle just here, define a color. Let's select the re color. After to do this type of work, let's crate text also, select the artistic text tools. One more time, we will tape. Just titles, and with my selection tools, increasely tell the size of this text and define the blue color. Concretely, what we can do with this layer fit. I will slick my rectangles, and here you can find the outer shadow. We have seen how here it's possible to work with the shadow and you have outer shadow. I will zoom a little bit and the shadow will be displayed outside of your layers. Go here. First things to do you define the radius, the offset and the entersity. If I put everything at the maximum, you can find your outer shadow outside with specific colors. We have the black color, but it's not totally black for a simple reason that we have a bland mode just here and I default, we have the multiply bin mode, and you can also change the position, the location of your outside shadow. As you can see it's not pretty good for a simple reason that I need to focus also on the radius of set entersity. If you put 100% here, you can see the black color. So, something that I will choose, it's a different color. For example, I will silic green. After two silic green, I will define less radius, less offset, and bit bit less intensity to create more transition. After I will change the location, for example, to put the location here, and this is why I choose this number of decres. After to do this type of ware, you can define another color if you need, most of the time, you can use, for example, the black color, and the opacity is too strong. So I will decrease the opacity and may be put 50%. Now we can see the shadows on this area and it's pretty better. Now, the only thing that I need to do is to focus with my radius, my offset, and my intensity to try to find exactly what I want to do for my effect. If I just click here, this is the type of render that you can do. I will select my text layer also, and I will go on this type of effect select outer shadow also. One more time, let's just display everything at 100, just like this. You just change the position that you want. One more time, I will select this number of degra you can focus on the opacity, so let's decrease the radius. Let's decrease the offset and let just decrease the intensity. We'll Zoom here, we have the black colors and maybe I can extend a little bit and decrease my opacity like around 50%. You can see now the outer shadow arriving on this area. You can change the location of your outer shadow. Let's just display here and validate. Let's make a last example because you can also do this on any image layers. Let's just go and file, select one more time place. L t just select the same image that we used before, so it means this image. We can apply this image if I want to apply shadows outside. I can display my Layer effect, activate one more times the outer shadows. And I will define radius of set intensity first, everything at the maximum to just take a look about the position. So we can define the position. Let's define the position here one more times. And now I need to set my parameters with the different cursor. I can decrease also the transparency. Let's just put around 50%. And if you want to change the color, I can display another color. For example, here, we can apply the red color on this area. I just change, I will come back in black, but you can display any color and after you can change your parameters. As you can see it's pretty good if you want to apply this type of effect on any type of layer, you can do this. At any moment, you can come back and you can change the parameter, so it means the different value of your eff you can make something stronger or you can make something with less eff, you just need to focus on the different parameters, just like this. H. 98. Layer effects outer glow: We are going to see the layer effect outer glow. To use this layer effect, first thing that I'm going to do it is to create a rectangle, so I will define my rectangle just here, and I will define a color like the red color. At the same time, I will create text. I will use artistic text tools, start my text, and one more time we will tape exactly the same way. We'll just tape titles. We can focus on this font family to have a better render for the different example, and I will increase a little bit of size and put one blue color. To see this layer effect, for things to do, I will select my rectangle layers and activate the layer effect, and here you can find outer globe. Let's just activate the effect, Zoom little on the rectangles, and concretely what you will be able to do. Outside of the outline of the rectangles, you can define the radius to start the effect here and the intensity. Why I don't see anything for a simple reason that the color is in wise. But if I click here, I can define anoer color. So if for example, I define blue. One more time, you have the intensity and the radius. So if you have zero pixels and 0%, you won't see any things. So I will increase the radius, this is the radius, and this is the intensity of the effect. If the intensity that the maximum concretely, you will have no transition. So generally, we never use 100%, and you need to focus on a different intensity. Here, this is a bland mode. We have a screen blend mode. You can also change the bland mode and you have different type of options that you can use. You can even come back to a normal mode. Radius also the opacity if you need, and as you can see, we have color out glow outside, just like this. And you can select also the color that you want if you need. It can be also the black color, and you can increase the intensity or decrease just like this to up turn this render. If I select my titles here. It means my text layers. I can go on this area, and I can silic more times outer glow. After to select outer glow, I will increase the radius, the intensity, and define the color that I want. I just select the yellow color to change, and I can increase or decrease my value just like this, and something that I will be able to do just to validate. This is the principle of the outer glow. I will position an image. So I'll zoom out out and first, I will go file and just select place. After to select place, ley just go on this area, and I will define this one. And I will create these layers. After to create these layers, I will put in the center, and I will activate also this render. I will go on efic and I will select one more times these tools. So here we have the color. We have the outer glow, let just slick the Outer glow. I can define a radius intensity, and now I can define the color that I want. Like, for example, I can define the red color, more intensity or more radius. We can find it looks just like a frame. But something that you can do is to decrease the intersity to create more transition. Don't forget that one more time, you can change the bland mold. Sometimes you have different renders depending also what you have on the backgrounds. Here we are on the wise background, but if you have something different, the bland mold can change depending on the backgrounds, and one more time define the radius and one more times focus with the opacity. This is how to work with this adjustment. If you click here at any moment, you can remove also your adjustment, you deactivate outer glow like this. I just come back here, you can I can do this and cra for example rectangles, put my rectangles in the midge to show you the blend mode, the difference. And if I just go here, I silic one more time, the outer glow. I will define a color like the yellow color. Increase little bit this value. Here now you can see the outer glow. Now if I use the bland mode, as you can see the render will be different because I have something on the backgrounds. Because I have another layer on the backgrounds, here, it will change. You can change the bland mode on this area and also focus with the opacity, and I will close to add this effect. 99. Layer effects outline: We are going to see the layer effect outline. To see this layer effect, something that I'm going to do first. It is to create your shapes. I will craft a rectangle on this area, define the red color. After to do this work, I will go on the right, and here we can find layer effect. You can define outlines here. So you need to to click on, activate, and then you can go on the right and craft outline effect. Each here, you can only create a stroke on this type of shapes, and when you add a stroke here, you can do the same render. The different is here, it is on effect. You can also come back at any moment, and it is just on a layer effect. And you can select the agment also center or inside. So we can see the outline is here outside, center, and inside. After this, you can define the color, for example, if I want blue, I can define blue, and one more time, you can define the radius. So that's it, nothing more to know about this effect. You can also apply interesting. Sometimes you can apply on a text, so you can silk the artistic text tool. Just at some texts. I'm going to continue with this font family. One more time, I will tape titles here. So I can click on my text. Just change the color. Let's slick this blue color. I want to add this outline effect. So I will go on FX select outlines, just like that, and I can go on the radius to put this on my text. It is also possible. One more time center inside. Maybe it can be better inside if I want to let space between my letters, and I define then the color. For example, I want to red, I can define the red color, and then I can increase the size or the radius of the layer effect. If I just validate, and for example, I don't want my color inside. I can click here. No color or white color, but if you click on no color, nothing will happen. If you click on white, its prey better because you can see your effect. At any moment, you can come back here, double click on the effect, and if you want to edit, it's possible. If you want to change the color, it's possible also. So the interest of the layer effect, is non destructive, so it means you can double kick at any moment, and you can change, you can also add multiple layer effect on the same layer. If I have this one, I'm going to press delete. You can also apply on an image layer. I will go on file, select place. After to go on file place, let's select an image layer. L just select this one. Left click. You can just craft like a frame around, select F. And here we can define what? We can define outlines. Click here, edit panels just like that. You can also remove the effect directly from this one. If you prefer you can deactivate, but you can also remove an effect here. So if you have the effect activated, you can click here to remove the effect. T activate again, radius, and as you can see, it will just in this type of case create a frame, and I can change the color of this frame. Let's put something in orange outside center or inside one more time. Let's just select outside and here. But the field style, you have solid color, but you can also use a contour just like this. Thanks to that, you can create a gradient. So you silt first point, for example, and you can define a second point just like this. You can create with, for example, multiple color because you can also If you click on insert, you can insert a new stop, and you can work with multiple color also, as you can see. This is the type of thing that you can do with this type of tools. Field style contour, and the next step is gradient. A little different, you can reuse your gradient here. But as you can see, the gradient is not displayed in the same way. So just display on this area, you can change exactly the position that you want. Scale the value X, scale the value y, depending of what you want to have with a different color that you choose. You can create a frame using this type of effect. 100. Layer effects blur: We are going to see the lio effect, Gosh and blue. To apply this effect, I will crate a rectangle first, so I will select my rectangle tools. And I will apply just a color like this red color, I just want to apply blue on my layers. For this, you have the possibility to add a layer I fix, that means it will be directly non destructive, and you can apply on the layers. Let's just click here and you can activate on this area, Gaussian blue. After to activate the gaussian blue, you can click on this and you won't have a lot of things to do. Concretely, what you will be able to do is just to focus with the radius. As you can see, we can apply on the shape layers just a blow. So not a lot of things to do because you only have to change the radius, here I can only change the radius, just like that, and I can just click on close and validate. That's it. So if you want to apply this on a image layers, let's just go and file select place, and I will select one more time the same image layer that we use, and I can position this image here. One more time, if I want to I can increase it bit the size, put my image layers in the dels just here and activate this layer effect. Layer effect, gaussian blue. After to apply grasan blue, I will put if I put at 100, you can see the difference. Legs put around maybe this value around ten, and we can validate. If I redu, you will be able to see on So I would line of the layers here also some blow, just like that. Now is something that I would like to do is to remove my eff. I just need to click here and you need to deactivate can blow, and I will come back to this area. So you can craft multiple effect like this. I can put my image one more time on the back, and one more time, I can define rectangle that I will put around this area. This area, I will define also gaussian blow. I will click here, Gaussian blue on this rectangles, and I can focus like this. If I want to create a little effect, not too much, I can maybe put around 20 pixels in this type of case, and I can close. You can also change the opacity of your layer at the same time to create something like this. For example, if I keeps 100%, I can go here. But don't forget that you can complete your effect at any moment with the opacity of your layers. And also the blend mode of your layers. In this type of k, it can be interesting because I can also silic something like maybe darken color just like that. At the same time, we have also the opacity, so I can reduce the opacity. A darken color is not very good because here we have this type of render. I will change, I will try another one and some things that I will use, it may be overlay. If I put 100%, we can complete with this effect as you can see. It is definitely interesting. You can even put your rectangles, just put your rectangle on the front just like this, and I can come back on ethics and I can increase my value of gaucan blow. Can put the gaucan blow at the maximum. Depending on what you choose, you will have different type of render. I can syqual the soft light here 100%. If I come back to normal, I will have this type of render, but one more time, you can also decrease with the opacity. We don't have too much difference here. Only that if we craft a rectangle on the front. But because of the Gaussian blue, we have something just a little bit difference as you can see, and you can also create this type of render. Something interesting also that at any moment, you can change the color, so just go here and you can change the color at your convenience of your layers. So, let just change, I will reduce my rectangles, and I can place my rectangles in a different part. I can also center my rectangle just here. If you need to remove this effect, you just need to click on the layer effect. Here, why you need to have the plus because you have some effects that you can duplicate. It's pretty good, and you have some effect it's not possible to duplicate, it's not teresting. This is why you don't have the options plus. In this type of case, I don't have the option plus, I will just deactivate this one and it's totally non destructive. 101. Master liquify persona part 1: We're going to see how to use a liquefy persona. For this, I selected these pictures, it is perfect, if you want to edit a face, or improve a face, make transformation, but also on different type of images. But for this, it will be the perfect example. First thing that I'm going to do it's on my layers, I will go right click, I will duplicate these layers, and after that, I will enter in the liquefied persona. What you can see in this mode. First on the left, you will have the different tools of the liquefied persona mode. For example, you can use the liquefied pitch tool, the liquify, push forward tools and more. Totally on the right, you will have different type of options like the mesh option, extremely important to understand and also to set the parameter of your brush. But possibility also to work here so mesh and to focus with a mask to apply effect only on a specific area. First, let's go on the right and here you have show mese. Concretely, it is agreed to help you to make, for example, some transformation. You can change the number of subdivision just here to have bigger or smaller square, and you can also focus on the opacity and the color of your number of subdivision. If I want to set my brush because every time when you use the tools here, for example, I use the liquefied brush forward tools, I have a brush as you can see. So you can define the size of your brush just on this area. For example, I can reduce. After the harness opacity and speed, and concretely, if you focus on this sit value, you will be able to increase the power of your tool or decrease the power of your tool. If I omit all bit, and I slick this first tool, concretely, what I will be able to do, I can go left click. And when you go left click, you can just pull like this a specific part of pixels. I can go here and I can pull like this a specific part of pixels. If I want to go in this area, I can pull like this here. But I can also have more power. If you increase the spred, and you increase the harness here, you can dragon move, and you will have also more power just on this area. You can also increase the size of your brush, and for example, I have this area, and I can dragon move on these directions if I need on this area dragon move or this area dragon move. After this multiple step, something that I wanted to show you it is the wrong construct mesh. Because what you can do concretely you are at 100%. When you are at 100%, it means this is at this moment the last modification. If you click here, you can come back progressively to the different modification until to come back at the beginning. As long as you didn't apply your your validication, here, your validation, You can come back with a reconstruction mesh, and I can come back to 100%. Why you can put more than 100% for a simple reason that he will continue your effect depending on what you have done first in the history. And in this case, he will repeat the effect until 200%. If you can apply just here, nothing special will work, you need to apply here to go out. And something important to know if you want to resit totally your mesh. You have the possibility to resit the mesh, and in this case, you can drag and move now everything is a resit, so it's like to come back at the beginning. You can even, if for example, I do this, I do this, I do this, and I do this. I can go in this direction and you can find one more time. Load me save mesh concretely, you can save a mesh, load the mesh, so it means some transformation that you apply, you will be able to apply on another image. And here I can click on resit mesh one more time. This is how you can process. After you have multiple tool, if you don't want to use the grid, you can deactivate also show mese. Another type of tool, this is the liquefied push left tools. I will decrease the size, decret tells the harness to maybe 40% and also the split to come back to 50%. It is the same. If I go here, you can turn little bead like this and extend, turn little bead like this, and you can extend just like that. If I go in this direction, as you can see, turn the nose, just in this direction. This is the type of thing that you will be able to do with these tools. L et's just come back with it mesh. You can use the liquefy 12 tool. I will decrease the size of my brush and you can turn. For example, if I go to this abras, I go here and I can turn exo abro if I stay left click. If I go on the left, I will be able to turn ex this also if I stay left click and turn. You can use also the liquefying pinch tool. So when you use these tools, concretely, you can increase the size of the surface that you choose. For example, I want to increase the noise. What I can do, I can increase my size of the brush first. It's too much. Let's put around 200. After to put around 200, I can go left click here, and I will increase the size of this brush, as you can see, and I can stay left click to increase a little bit more the size. If I want to do the opposite process, here, I can increase the mouse also, so I can paint on this to increase the mouse. So now what happened if at the opposite, I want to decrease. You can select the liquefy punch tool, and with the liquefy punch tool, you can go left click, and it is the opposite, you can reduce the selected inside your brush. Every time it will apply inside your brush, and here I can decree. Another tool that you can use, it is the liquefy turbulence. When I click on these tools, for example, you can add some turbulence. If I go here, Take a look about what we will be able to do to this hair. We can just add trombulence. If I go for example on the mouse, we can add this type of turbulence. When you make a neat transformation here, I just want to make something specific. Concretely, I can resit the mesh. Something that I can do it just maybe to reduce little bit the size of the nose, so I can click here, and I can paint on this area to reduce the size of the nose. I will reduce litter the size here, the size here. Increase the size of the mouse just with left click. Just like this, I want to have a little smile on this mouse. I will click on liquefy push forward tools. Decrease little bit of size, and a small left click here and a small left click here. Just some little transformation. At the end, you can click on Apply. After to click on apply, we'll be able to see the difference before after and before after, and the result is really realistic. So this is first how to start and after I'm going to show you how you can work with the mask. Because you have also some mask options. So if I just go rightly duplicate again, when you go on this model, I can Zoom little bit, you will have a possibility to display some mask. But I will show you just after how it works. This is the main thing that you need to understand at the beginning when you start with this, how you can use the mesh, how you can construct the mesh, define the size of your brush. All these different parameters. 102. Master liquify persona part 2: We are going to continue with liquefied persona. We have this image, and I'm going to go right click again, duplicate the image, and we will enter one more time in the liquefied persona mode. So as I explained, I explain the different tools, how to work with the mesh here, how to work with the brash. We need to understand also that you have the possibility to add a mask. Here concretely, you can click on mask. When when you use a mask like this, you can use any of these tools, for example, I use the tools. It's impossible to do anything. Because when the area is in red is inside the mask, it's not possible to apply any modification, it is fixed. You have also the possibility to clear the mask and to invert the mask. So Cct you have also these tools here, and here this is the liquefy. Yes, here you have the liquefy phrase tool. So when you click on this tool, concretely, when you go left click here, you can define your area that you don't want to touch. So if, for example, I want to touch the noise, but I don't want to touch the eyes, I can put something like this to fix this area, or again to fix this area to apply only on the noise or maybe to fix this area and to fix this area. So now if I slick my brush and I define my liquefied pinch tools. I will increase the size. I can put a cursor bigger, but as you can see, it will apply only on this part. I can put a cursor again even bigger, and it will apply only on this part, and not here, not here for the simple reason that we have fixed this area. You can also invert the mask. If you invert the mask, you will have all the order area selected just like this. So you can do the opposite process. Something that I'm going to do first is to resit the mesh. You can do the opposite process. You can display your mask here, mask all, and you have also on this area, the liquefy freeze tools, and if you reduce the size, if your brush and you click here, as you can see, nothing happen. And if you click on these tools, you can do the opposite process. And for example, I can decrease little the size of my brush, and I can just open here or open here. Now if I want to make any modification, It will be applied only inside the eyes area, which is not red. But can squala tools like the turbulance tools. I can make a bigger cursor. It's definitely not a problem. It will apply only inside the eyes just like this. Only inside this one. Not outside. If you click here, nothing will happen. So it is something important to understand. I will click here and resit my view. Something important. Also, you have a liquefied mesh clone tools. It is something little specific. It's not very easy to use, not very convenient in my opinion. For example, you can just grit a modification, this type of modification. If you use the liquefy mesh tools, concretely, you can define you need to use Alt left click. For example, if you click here, click plus l to set a source. I will define a source alt left click and concretely, He will apply what you do. So for example, if I click here, Alt left click. I can define this source. And if I go here, he will define exactly the same modification that I put here or Alt left click here and I can have the dragon move. So the dragon move that I apply here, I can put on this area. But I think it's not very convenient to use in Liquify Persona. A can sit the mese. The last point is the reconstruction tools. So first, I'm going to cancel here. Just come back with my Liquify persona. And zoom again. I will make some transformation, for example, on the mouse. As things to do, click on Liquefy push, decrease the size, and one more time, pull a little bit on this direction, pull a little bit on this direction. I will increase again, this direction, this direction. Increase the mouse with liquefying pinch tools, and I will go left click here, and I will go left click here. Maybe left click also on the directions, pull and just go here and just go here, just like that. So if I writ this modification, You have also this to liquefy your construction tool. It is like to drag and move your reconstruction mesh. Completely, if I go here, you select the size and with a brush, you can reconstruct. But here you reconstruct the mesh with the brush, and here you can use a brush to if I click here, automatically, you will apply the modification. You can come back using a brush. I can also increase it a bit the size and just put here and took. If I just go one ft click, one net click, one netflick, you can reconstruct gs, and you can even if stay left click, come back to your initial to your initial position for the transformation. Concretely, this is the main thing that you need to understand when you want to focus with these tools. You can create an e modification and just to last time maybe here, maybe here, and do something like this. Increase little bit the size. Click on this area decrease, for example, the size of the nose. Decrease little bit the size of this eye, this eye, and I will use this tool again, a little bit on this direction, a little bit on this direction, this direction, and maybe this direction. You can also extend a little bit here and extend a little bit here. You can make mini transformation just like this, extremely interesting. Then if you are satisfied, you just click on apply, and you will be able to see the difference with the before and after. 103. Master develop persona part 1: Develop persona, and for this, I selected this image, and at the same time, we will work with this image. To enter in the develop persona mode, you can click here. Develop persona, first, I will go right click and duplicate this layer. After to do this type of work, we will be able to enter in the developed personal mode. First things to understand is in this interface on the left, you have different type of tools, and with this type of tools, you can one more time, for example, remove default. You can also use this one if you want to use the red eye removals, and you have also some tools like over paint tool, over ys tool or over gran tool. And thanks to this tool, concretely, you can use as a mask, and you will be able to apply transformation with mask. Totally on the right. First thing that you need to understand is you need to go on basic. Concretely, you have all the basic adjustments that you need to do to improve a picture, but to improve a picture in a fast way. It means you just need to move different type of cursor. The first things to understand a slic basics. W acyl pasi I'm going to zoom on my image. What you can do, you have first exposure, so exactly like the adjustment as explained, you can work with the exposure here. You have the black point, you can change the position of the black point. And you have the brightness. So basic adjustment to focus on the exposure. You can double click to resit your parameter to zero. After you have a parameter that we can call Ns, every time you can click here to activated the different category of parameters. And what you can do, you can focus with a contrast. It means you can add more contrast on your pictures. You can see at the same time the histogram just on the top right corner. You can work with a clarity, extremely interesting if you want to reinforce the details. But you can double click to come back to zero, work with a saturation to reinforce your color, and then the vibrans. You can also have access to the wise balance if you want to warm your pictures or if you want to call your pictures just with these two cursor, as was explained before in the adjustment, and you can have access also to the shadows and at light adjustment, and you can have access to profile. This is some basic adjustments that you can have access, but you can go more so it means. You can go in the length, and for example, you have even distortion. You can put horizontal on your image, vertical, rotation of your image, and scale of your image. You have even advanced things. We have also details turns here. If you say, for example, turns, you can have access to the curve. The curves will be located here. You can have access also to black and white adjustment, and you can have access also to split tuning adjustment to make some transformation and do something like this using the spling tunning. Something that I'm going to do is to deactivate this one. You can also add the details, and you can add the details refinement. For example, let's just improve these pictures using this mode and something that I can do first, it's to go on basics. What I will be able to do on basics, I can go on shadow at lights. First thing to do, I will increase little bit the shadows and little bit the at lights with maybe 28 and 8%. After to do this type of work, I will reinforce little the contrast, so I will go on S, and I can increase little bit the contrast like 12%. I will increase also little bit the clarity. I think it's pretty good like maybe 32%. I want to have better color on my image, so this is the reason for which I can increase the situation. Maybe 20% and 10% will be pretty good just like this. If I want to add the effect, maybe I can put a little bit temperature, not too much, maybe three here and maybe two on this area. About the lens correction, I won't do anything, but about the details, I can add a detail refinement with a radius. For example, we can increase, maybe 20% and put amount. It's pretty good about the render when you use this on man images, 21, maybe 24, and it's pretty good. About the tone and overlayer will stay like this. This is the first thing to understand. When you are satisfied of your work, you can click on develop and you have improved your image just like this. As you get it's pretty fast, and it's very fast instead to use this adjustment here. It's a little different because you won't have layer adjustment, but it's pretty good also. It was my first example. Let's see this second example. I can click here after I will explain how to use the mask, and I will go on Develop pers. After to do this type of work, as explained before about the different problems that we have in the pictures, can go on the right. Something that I will do first is to focus on the shadows and at lights. I will put the shadows like this to make a correction on this area. This is the reason for which I will put the shadows like around at least 30%. About the at lights, I will reduce tal bit like maybe -20%. To think th that, I can make something great around this area, and I can come back then to put a little bit contrast, not too much. Maybe I can put around 10% of contrast after that. Increase the clarity also. Maybe I can put around 20%. And increase a little bit the situation, not too much, but maybe 40% and 10% in this picture. But the general exposure, I can increase, but I think it's not pretty good, and maybe I can change a little bit the black point on the left, here, -4%. After to do this cycle work length, I will keep the lengths like these details. Can add a detail refinement and increase the radius six and maybe eight. If you or maybe a little bit more here, maybe ten. If you just focus on det, you have also some noise reduction. If you want to reduce the noise, you will be able to work on this. Here, we don't have noise, but it's possible to reduce when you apply a noise reduction. And you have a noise addition. It is the opposite process. You can just add noise on your image. As you can see, we can add noise like this, and you can add a percentage of noise. So after we have the details of fireman, turns, overlay, and this is how to use some basic addressment. Totally on the top right corner, you can see the histogram. When you go here, you can see a split view before, after, and you can drag and move the view. You can at the same time just use the single views, or you can use the mirror views also, and you can try and move your image at your convenience. When you click here, just some synchronization, but I'm not going to use this. And something interesting also that you can use, if you just come back here. On on your image, you can show clip alights. You can show clip shadows, and you can show clippy turns. And sometimes is some areas that we have problem about the holights and shadows. But here, I made this adjustment and think it will be okay, I can classic can develop, and I will obtain this render. I forgot to duplicate the layer to see before after this 104. Master develop persona part 2: We're going to continue with the developed persona. With this image, I'm going to come back in the developed persona, let's just first right click and duplicate. Something that I will do is to enter one more time in the developed persona. So we have seen that it's possible to add all this adjustment here. Something that you can do, you have tools to create a mask. How to create a mask concretely, It is to apply an adjustment only on a specific area. So let's take a concrete example. You need to go an overlay on the top right corner. And here you have master. What does it mean? It means that when you apply a knee adjustment, it will apply on all the image, all the layers. Now, if an overlay, you decide to for example, go here and to use the overlay paint tools. When you click on the overlay paint tools, you can select a specific area. For example, if I go here, I can decide to paint. Just this area, you can use on the top corners, top left corner, here the size of your brush, and you can define also the harness. And thanks to that, I can, for example, paint the leg area just like this. After to do this type of work, if I apply any adjustment because I'm on this brush overlay, I will apply only on this area. Let's take a look. I will go on basic here. Something that I will do is to work with pamps exposure. So now if I increase the exposure, I will replace here my area with a brush by this adjustment, and as you can see, apply only on this area, only on this area. If I select overlay here, we are on the brush overlay. If you decide to select overlay erase tool, concretely, you will erase this area. For example, I increase here, and I put my brush and I will just erase this a just like this. But if I do the opposite process, overlay pain tools, I can just put like this and apply directly. On this area, this brush overlay. It's to merch at any moment, you are still on this overlay. I can decrease my exposure to just here, I can double just put a little adjustment. Now let's see another example. I will click an overlay and I will create a new brush overlay with add brush overlay. You can also add a gradient overlay. Let's select add brush overlay. So now I have second one, and the second word will be for the saturation. But you can also make the adjustment before. For example, if you select basics here, and you put saturation and increase the saturation in vibrance at the maximum, I don't see any modification. For a simple reason that I need to yes. Check overlay, yes, for a simple reason that I need to use my brush and to paint where I want to have this adjustment. So here I just set my parameters, 5050. Now if I just zoom a little bit, go here, as you can see, I can apply with my brush, my saturation, exactly where I want. Here, I just paint and I apply my vibrant and saturation, exactly where I'm going to use my brush, like this, like this and just like this. This is why it is pretty good to use this type of tools. And concretely here, I have overlay, master, and I have this brush overlay and this brush valley, you can also decrease the effect with the opacity just here. And if it's too much, I can decrease my saturation here on my second brush overlay, can decrease my saturation and my fibrins percentage. So let's hear second example. I can click and develop just like this, and we can make some transformation just like that. If I just sing this picture, just go right click and duplicate. I will use one more time to develop person. Something that I will do it, you can also add a gradient overlay. When you click on overlay here, you can also add a gradient, or you can use these tools. Also, overlay gradient tools. You can go left click and you can do the same thing with a gradient. Here it is a gradient overlay. Like this. You can remove your overlay. If I click here, I can create a new gradient overlay again. Left click, and you can start. For example, I can create a gradient overlay on this direction, maybe I can ops, It's not what I want to do. Maybe I can put this point just here and drag and move the point on this direction. I do this type of work, I go basics, and now I can apply your adjustment. I take example about the exposure again. As you can see the exposure will be applied exactly on a gradient. I say the brightness also, it will apply only here. After you can change example your gradient overlay, just like this, and as you can see, it will be apply only on the specific area. So it will adjust to show you the gradient over. If I don't want, I'm going to remove this. So let's take an example. I will use my brush tools here, overlay ten tools, crit a new one. For example, I will crit a mask on all this area to maybe change where more times the exposure or just wants to work with the shadows. So I can paint on this area. So after to paint on this area, something that I can do is to set an adjustment. So we go on basics, and I have different type of way. I focus on the exposure as you can see I can do some signals. But I can also only use my shadows at lights just here and put the shadows and increase the shadows here with 100%. You will apply only on this area. I can come back on overlay, create a new brush overlay, and just create an effect on the river. So we'll just paint only on the river, just like this. We can also work with less harness if you need. Sometimes it is pretty convenient. And I can decide to maybe only paint this area. I want to lighten this area more. I'll come back to basics, and with the exposure panels, I can increase here. You can also work with brightness, it depends about what you want to do. Maybe in my case, the brightness will be pretty good. I can also change the black point and just move a little bit of black point on the left, just like this. As you can see you can lighten this area. If I go overlay, you can see this and after you can decrease the opacity, just like that. But the problem when you decrease opacity here is after you have a block at 10%. I think it's not really good. I need to come back 100% and take 100% per year. If I click on develop. We have our modification, and we have we brush overlay. This is how to use develop personas so very interesting for different ways when you want to improve any image in a fast way, you can use develop persona. 105. Master tone mapping persona part 1: We're going to see how to work with the tone mapping persona. To work with this, I selected this photo first and I selected this photo. First things to do, let's just duplicate the layer, so right click duplicate the layers. At the same time, I can go here and right click duplicate the layer also. After to do this type of work if I go on this area, to enter in the tone mapping persona, you can just click here, Tn mapping Persona. Concretely, what you will be able to do. You will be able to have access to different adjustment, but it is a little bit more specific because you can create high definition image using the tone mapping persona. Concretely, how you can work with this dashboard. On the top, you will find information just here about your image. Here is the information about the size of my image. At the same time on this area, I can find information about the camera and more. When you go to the left, you have different tools. The most important tools is to be able to work with mask, and this is why you can use over paint tools, overly erased tools, and overly gradient tools. When you go here, you have different presets that you can choose, and totally on the right, you can have the navigation options. You have the navigator panel sent thanks to that, you can drag and move here. You can have access also to a histogram and here you have overlays and ton map. So Overlays, you will be able to focus with the mask. I will explain this after and ton map with different adjustment. Concretely, what happened? You can select one of the high definition adjustment on the left. You have natural, you can sel details. Cool, contrast, black and white, organ dynamic. Depending up what you choose, you will have different adjustments. If for example, I see the first laura. You will have something very specific like the tone compression and the local contrast. If I slick this one, I have 100% and 0%. If I continue, I have zero, zero, and nothing more than only a ton compression of 100. But if I slick details, what I can realize, I can realize that I have a ton compression of 100%. Local contrast 40%. I if I just continue tell it, I have also more options. What I have more, I have also in n n here, I have nothing specific. But when I click on Detail refinement. I can find a radius of 50% and amount of 30%. This is why we have this level of details. If I select the last one, dramatic just like this. We can have 100% for the turn compression. Local contrast 50%, Blackpoint, 2% saturation, 30%, radius, define refinement, 50%, 30%. This is the first thing to understand. You can define a preset. For example, you can just click on apply. After to click on apply on your duplicated layers, you will have your high definition render. As you can see it's pretty good because just with the preset, you can have something very great. Now I'm going to delete this one duplicate, but here, I think I will work with the Oder picture. I will select this picture now, and I will on the duplicated layers, activate one more time the tone mapping persona. After to do this type of work, something that I can do it to select a predefined for example models. But if you just select natural, you can also work by yourself with a different adjustment. So for example here, you have the ton compression, so you can really improve with the ton compression, your image it's very very fast, but you can also focus on the local contrast. Local contrast, what is this, It is more on the edges of your image. When you have edges like this, you can increase the contrast of these edges. Here definitely it's too much, but you just put a little bit, you will have more contrast. If I just go here, it is the same, you can increase the contrast just like this. For example, why not to put around 30%, turn compression 100%. You can then have all the basic adjustments that we need. Like if kick on exposure, activate, you can work with the exposure, increase or decrease your exposure. You can change the position of the black point. It's sometimes useful to increase the contrast, and you can focus also on the brightness as you can see. If you just continue, you can find n n. One more time, you can deactivate or activate. If you activate, you can work with the contrast, decrease or increase the contrast. You can increase the saturation. Here and you can also increase the vibrance. So you can work by yourself with this different adjustment, and as you can see it's pretty powerful. If I select the wise balance, I will be able to focus on warm color or color color. If I go here, I can make different type of style for my pictures, depending on what type of color I will decide to choose. For example, if I go here, I can make more warm color using this type of adjustment. You can find also the shadows at light adjustment, even if when you just use the ton compression, generally, it's pretty good. But after you can reuse this if you want to make more adjustment. You will be able also to find a deti fiement, and if I a little bit, take a glance at deti fiement, radius, and amount. You can really increase the level of detail, but if it's too much after it's not pretty good, if definitely is too much. But you need to take a value with these two different elements, and maybe I can put something like 20 and 10% in this type of case. You can even work the curve, so you can find the curve again, activate the curves, and one more time, you can work with the lever here, you can work with your exposure, or you can put a point here, put a point here, one more time is the typical curves that you can use to increase the contrast one more time. You can find again all these adjustments that we use with a layer adjustment, but that you can use also when you work with the developed persona. But the difference is here you can add directly a high definition for a simple reason that we have something extremely powerful that the tone compression and the local contrast. If you don't use tone compression, local contrast, you can see it's not very, very good. This is why in this type of case, we use a tone compression in lotal contrast to try to create a high definition image. If you are just satisfy, you can just click on the ply. And after to click on apply, I can zoom a little bit, and you can really see the difference. This is before, after, before, after. You can really see the big difference between the image at the beginning and the image after. I think it's too much, but just to show you how to process. 106. Master tone mapping persona part 2: We are going to continue with the tone mapping persona, and to continue one more time we will use this image and right click duplicate the layer. After we use one more time this image and right click also duplicate the layer. After to do this work, let's click on this image and I want to show you how to work with a mask using the tone mapping persona. So I can click on the ton mapping persona. We have seen how to focus on the tone map here. It means ton map, it is a different adjustment with the base of a preset. Now, when you go on the left, you can find over a paint tool, over a rice tool, over g radium tool to work with a mask. For example, I can start with natural here. And something that you can do, it's to define for example overlay pain tools. But you need first to take a look about overlays. By de footwear master, when it's master, the adjustment is applied on all your photo without any mask. Now what's happened if I click on the Ony pain tools. I can click here, and I define the size of my brush first, and I define the harness. So if for example, I want to lighten this area. What I can do? I can paint here just on the lake here. This area will be in red, as you can see. Now we have a new brush overlay. If you stay on this brush overlay, you use a turn map, and you apply a near adjustment, it will apply only on the red area. Let's take a look. I can go on the right. Here, I can select exposure, maybe, and I can increase the exposure, and as you can see if you increase or decrease, it will apply only on this red area. Now you don't see the red area for a simple reason that you use the adjustment. For example, I can do something like this. But you can also use overlay as tools. If I click here, I click one more time the size of my brush harness, and if I go here, I can do the opposite process. It means I will remove my effect just like this. If I want to recuperate, I click again on the overlay pain tool. But if you click again on the overlay pain tools, you click on overlay brush overlay, you go here, and as you can see, I can recuperate my exposure effect. But you can also apply on the same brush overlay multipopi, so it means it can be the exposure, but I can put also the black point. If I want it to maybe work with the wise balance, I can also use the wi balance at the same time directly on this area. So now what happened if I want to apply another adjustment. I can click on overlay. You can also create a new brush overlay from this panel, add a brush overlay. Now I can add a second brush overlay and on the second brush overlay, what I will be able to do. I will be able to for example, paint on a specific area and apply like saturation. I will select my brush. For example, I will paint with a mask because I didn't touch any adjustment first. Automatically I will see the red mask. But if I put adjustment, you will won't see the red mask, you will see the adjustment directly. I can do something like that here, and I want to increase the saturation. If I go on the tom mac options, I can increase the saturation and now I will see the effect playing directly where I put my brush. If I click on erase here, as you can see, I can erase my effect. If I come back and just apply my brush, I can recuperate my saturation effect on the specific area. If it's too much, I can just decrease, depends about what I want to do, but I can decrease my saturation and my vibrance. I can click on the ply, and I made adjustment using a mask as you can see. Now you can do the same type of work, but also with gradient. I have this image, and I have this image, so I mean just duplicated layer of the image, and I would sic one more time, the ton making persona. After to do this type of if I go here, I can just stay on natural, and I will click on overlay. You can start overlay gradiation tools also d for these panels. I'm going to show you with the black en white. For example, I start my gradiation here. You drag a first point to drag a second point. And on the ton map options, what I will do, I will use, for example, So you can move the element here, but you can use also, for example predefined models. If I click directly on this one, this one will be applied with a gradient. It means as you can see, we have the black en white on the right, or I can invert also like this. I can have the black and white on the right and the color on the left. Because here this area is in red, will be in red with a mask, and this is why I can do this type of work. And I can also reduce to crate transition to black and wise to color. I can zoom a little bit and dragon move here. This area is in black and wise, and this area is in color. If I just click on overlay, you can see the gradient overlay. Even on the tom map features, if I want to put more contrast on the black and white part, it is possible, so I can put more contrast here if I need. I can also decrease the black point just here. As you can see the situation, t -100%, just like that. Something that I would like to do is to create an oder gradient on the left to increase the saturation. So I would click on overlay, and you can also click on add gradient overlay from these panels, and now I slick the second gradient. The first one, you can also mad the first one just to not see this gradient overlay, but just to keep the gradient over. If I slick now this one, so it means this one. Something that I can do is to start my gradient one more time, maybe on these directions just here. On this area with a gradient, I will increase the saturation. I can go on town map and now I will apply my effect on this area with a gradient. And I can put the saturation in the vibrance at the maximum to define contrast between the color and the blacken white. Now if I can overly I created this type of change using two ment, as you can see. If you want to remove, you can at any moment, remove your gradiento let or click here, remove your gradiento varlet. If I just come back to here, I'll just slick this one, and for example, apply. This is how you can focus with the tone mapping persona and how you can work with the mask. As you can see it's definitely extremely convenient because you can really see very interesting things and you have very nice difference between, for example, I selected this one, B a little too much, but when you see the image before and the image like this, it's sure it's not the same type of render. 107. Improve photo landscape 1: In this training, we are going to work with this image and in this image, we will improve with different adjustment. First, some things that I'm going to do first, it is to go right click and duplicate the layers. After to do this type of work, when I see this image, I don't have a big big problem, but concretely, as you can see, we don't have too much contrast the color are not really good, you can definitely improve the color, and we can reinforce the details. I think we can definitely have a better render for this image and to have a better quality for the final render. So this is why we would use different adjustment, and I will go the right adjustment. One of the first things that I'm going to do is to select the shadows at light. As I've explained, it is one of the adjustments that you can use first if you want to work with the shadows at light, It is to do at the beginning. So I will set default here. Something that I will do is just to increase al bit the shadows, not too much, but I will increase with around a value of maybe 35 here. Maybe a little bit more. Let's put 36. Ab the t lights here, I can increase also, but in this case, I will radio al bit with a value of -12, just like that. If I just come back, maybe I can come back to my layers, shadow at lights here. And as you can see, we have this improvement. I think something was wrong. It was not working properly. I need to check something because I'm not sure the adjustment was working properly. So let's go an adjustment default. And I will come back one more time with maybe six, and here will decrease with around -40%. Just tea. So this is the first adjustment that I'm going to do. After that, I will go on adjustment, and I will reinforce little bit the contrast. I will go on brightness contrast, just here, and I will select default, and I will increase the contrast after that. 10%, and brightness may be 4%. After to do this type of work every time can see difference before and after. After to do this type of work, adjustment, and what I need to do on these pictures, concretely, I want to increase the quality of my colors. This is the reason for which I can use vibrance. On the vibrant, I will select this one. I will increase the saturation, so here I can change the saturation. Let's put around 20%, and I will increase the vibrant. Let's put 16% just like this. I will come back on or is a different before or after. If I want to make adjustment on any specific area, I can use one more time adjustment and on this area, we can use the U saturation levels. And we can make your adjustment or any specific area. For example, if I wanted to reinfor the red here, I can set red just like this, and I can reinfor the saturation. Let's put 30%, and numinosity may be 4%. I can just validate. If I to reinforce a little bit more, maybe the green area. I can use one more time adjustment. Another saturation value, sil green. I can pick here a color. When you pick here, we realize that we have multiple colors. I think this one can be great, and I can reinforce this saturation also a little bit more. Maybe with 20%, a little bit more, and 4% for luminosity. So I think it's pretty good already with this one, if I put my backgrounds on the top hoops. Here it's inside the mask. So let's just put the backgrounds on the top first. We can see the difference before and after for this image. If I just come back on the back rooms, we can use filters. If we were to use the filters, let's come back on adjustment. I just check if I want to add more element. Maybe we can focus exposure at k black and white. The color, maybe take a look about the wise balance here. I one color, so I can change this one, and I can change this one also, just like this. Something that I will do, I will check my layer because the wise balance is located here. This is not what I want to do. So I come back on this area. Here is the HL adjustment. I'll come back on this area, and I will add ano adjustment. Wie balance, and here now it's going to work properly. I can put little bit maybe 6% here. And on this area maybe 3%. Or 4%. It's okay for that. I will just finish my work with filters, sharpen, and where the pass, lets just use the clarity, and I will increase the clarity value here to reinforce my levels of details. So I will go on here. Clarity, and I will increase the clarity value. Maybe I can put one and just click on the ply. I think it was not working properly for this one. I was not on the right layer. Let's just click on the micron layers and filters sharpen clarity. Let's just click here. Yes. Now it's going to work properly, and I can put a value like I think I can put a value at least 40% and just click on apply on this area. That's it. We can sell this picture, put this on the top, and we can see the difference before after and before after. T. 108. Improve photo landscape 2: In this training, we're going to work with this image and on this image, we're going to do improvement. What we have on this image. Concretely, we don't have it I think the thing that we need to do is to improve the quality of the color, to improve the quality of the details, and to add more contrast, maybe we can make something better definitely on this image. So something that I will do, first, is to go on the right and right click duplicate the layers. After to duplicate the layers, I will start with an adjustment. I'll click on adjustment. One of the first things that I do generally, is to use the at lights and shadows adjustment. So we can go here, select shadows at lights, default, what I will do is just to reinforce a little bit the shadows. So I can lighten the shadows with a value, not too much on this image, but I think 30% is pretty good. And the at light, maybe I can increase just with maybe 10%. Just like that. That's it, 30%, 10%. After I will continue. I will silt adjustment. What adjustment I will continue? I will use with the brightness contrast. We can focus to add more contrast after that, not too much, but 10% will be pretty good the brightness, I will reduce it bit the brightness with -6%, just like that. Already, we have this transformation, we can see the difference, it was before, and this is after. After that, we can definitely have so much more better colors and reinforce all this area. And for this, I can use adjustment and one more time, vibrance and saturation. I click here. Default, increase my saturation. Let's put percent, and increase the vibrant 10%, just like this. If I want to increase the saturation, the saturation, the exposure only on a specific area. As has explained before, we can use the adjustment, silic the adjustment per use saturation, luminosity. If for example, I want to I think about this one, it's enough. But if I want to increase for example, the green area, I can click on green or silica picker, click on this area, and I can increase the saturation a little bit more here, and I will define 20%. Can work also with luminosity maybe 6%. W to change it the color, I can go here. It is something that you can do. Depending on what you want to do, you can repeat this process. I can go one more time adjustment if I want to repeat the process acclic to another one, and if it's, for example, if I click on the sky here. I define any color picker. For example, I click on the sky. You will define this type of blue. I can just change a little bit, maybe here, increase a little bit the saturation, and have the luminosity just here. I think it's not pretty good like this. Let's just focus a little on the red a. I can click on red or picker can select this red aa, and reinforce little bet the saturation again, and here we can work darken or lighten one more time. Let's click on lighten, maybe 10%. And I will just validate. It's okay with this. If I just come back to the leaders adjustment, what we can do, I think it's pretty good like this. Maybe we can have the channel mixer, we have the curves. Maybe I can use a little color balance one more times and just click here. On one I can focus, I focus on the hot light. Just here, so it means on the sky part. We can change little bit the ratio. Maybe I can put little contrast with more cold color just here a little bit more, as you can see, blue color on the back. I can put 10% here. And Dragon move here, I think I will almost not move just 3%. Reinforce a little bit with maybe this value 20 and this one -28. So that's it. I I a little bit, we can have a little bit more contrast between the sky and all this area. It's pretty good. I will just finish with something to improve the level of detail, so as explained before, filters, sharpen clarity. Filters, sharpen clarity. And one of the problem is you need to apply this directly on the layer so I can click here, and I will define filters, sharpens, clarity. And I can zoom a little bit. Take a look at the strength, so here we can make something very powerful. And about the power, let's just apply maybe around 40. Let's apply 42, and I will click on apply. And that's it. Just select the image on the backgrounds, put this on the top to see the difference. Here if I take a look at the pagoda, it was before. So here it is after and before, after and before. After depending of the render that we want on the sky, we can change. Here I decided to work like this, but we can work in a different way for the sky depending on what we want to have. I can obtain this render. If I zoom a little bit out before after before, just like this. 109. Improve photo landscape 3: In this training, we are going to work with this image and on this image, we are going to improve with different adjustment. So first thing to do is to duplicate the layer so right click duplicate. As others explain, what is the problem of this image. Concretely, here we have the shadows, here we have the t lights, and we don't see really this part. We don't see this part with the river. We don't see the different accommodation here for a simple reason that it's too dark. This is why you need to make this correction first and after we can improve also the image. First things to do, I will go on this area and to make this correction It light shadows. So I will go on the right adjustment, and I will select shadows lights on the first adjustments that you need to do to have good to do something better first on your image. So let's click here, and I will increase my shadows just on these directions. Don't need to put too much, but I think at least 38%, and I will reduce the t lights also with maybe -20%. So thanks to that, if I go here, we can see the difference before, after, and it's already first, very good correction that we can do. Let us silic one more times adjustment. And after to do this type of work, I will silic the brightness contrast, and I will define a little bit more contrast, not too much 8%, and a little bit more brightness maybe 12%, just like this. And I will come back to shadows at lights, brightness contrast. After to do this type of work, one more time, I can select adjustment. I have multiple type of thing. Maybe if we want, we can complete with little levels to take a look because here we can change the black levels, and here we can also change the output black levels. Maybe we can put 4%. And one problem is to move the output black levels with maybe 8%. But the wise levels here, you can also change the output wise levels, and you can reduce here maybe 96, and here I can reduce with maybe 92%. I can complete also with a level adjustment. After to do this tut path work, let's continue adjustment. Apply just vibrant and saturations. I will click here, and a little bit saturation, don't need to put too much on these pictures, but we can put maybe 12 here and 10% on this area of saturation. I will go back on my adjustment one more time. Here. We have the wise balance, brightness contrast, posturize, it's okay for that curves. Eventually, the channel mixer. Something that we can do also, it's to here have a color balance. When you click on the color balance, you can apply generally flick on the shadows meton at lights. If I say, for example, the shadows, I can make little transformation on this area. This that I'm going to do maybe 5% here to add more warm color, and here I can put a little value -3%, and here maybe -3% also. Minus five, and three. Here it is for the shadows, and for the at lights, it is same because here I can reinforce the blue of the sky, but it is not exactly what I want to do so -20. Here 4%. Here on this area maybe -14%. That's it. I think it's good. It's pretty good with the different adjustment. Why not to one more time use the filters. Something that we use a lot is definitely the clarity filters. It is pretty good to improve your image. But when you use this one, you need to put on the cro ayer. So see the croyer filters, sharpens clarity. And I can apply this value and I can increase, not too much, maybe, I think 40% can be. That's it. So if I put this value layer on the top just to see the difference. It was our image before and this is our image after. So definitely it's really, really pretty better, can go this area also before after, before, after, let's take a look in a general way before and after. After maybe we can apply more adjustment, but I think definitely for this, it will be pretty good. Maybe I can add little exposure at the end. So add little bit exposure, but need to be careful when you use this because take a look about the at lights, think it's not very good. So I think I won't to use exposure adjustment. I will just stay with this value spatia. If I take a look about the adjustment again, we can focus also on the curves, but yes, I think we can stay like this for this image. Okay. 110. Improve photo landscape 4: In this training, we're going to improve this image. So on this image if I zoom, what can be the problem. Concretely, the most important problem will be the exposure because it is at the end of the day, and concretely, we don't see really the trees here. We don't see really the accommodation on the back. Here, we have a harbor, but we don't see too much the butt on the first plane here. We don't see too much the tree. Concretely, the main problem is the exposure. We'll have to try to increase the quality of the exposure of this image. So right click first and duplicate the layers. After to do this, I will zoom lit a bit, and I will go on the right adjustment. So I think one of the best things to do, it's first to make the correction one more times with the shadows at lights. I will select shadows atlight. I will click here, and we can increase the shadows just like this. Something that I will do, it is to, yes, increase the shadows with a value. But maybe around 50% can be enough, and the at lights here, as you can see, where's in trouble on this area. It's not pretty good because if you increase the at light will have something definitely wrong around this area. So I will also decrease the at lights with a value maybe -40 on this direction, 41, will be pretty good. This is my first correction. I will come back on ers and we can see the difference before, after, before, after. It's not bad, but we need to make more. So this is the reason for which I can use adjustment, and something that I will do. It's why not to complete with the curves adjustment. So I can silect the curves. We have the curves here, and I can click here. As I've explained before, here we have our histogram, and as you can see we have almost nothing on the at light so it meets on the right. So if we go here, we can lighten. If we go here, we can darken our image. We can silt a point here and silt a point here. Concretely on this area, we are in the shadow. So I can try to Increase little bit my shadows. Just drag and move on this direction. Maybe we can add more points one here and one here, and I can use this to dragon move little bit and dragon move little bit also on this area. So I can drag and move here and maybe just little bit also, but not too much on the directions, little bit here, and little bit here. And I can make this type of corrections. If I just continue, we can also continue with the levels. So we've got levels here. We can change the black levels, but the black levels need to be also with the output black levels. So I will change the output black levels with maybe ten and dragon move the black liver a little bit, maybe 6%. I think 6% is not enough maybe 8%. I will change the wise level, but the wise levels need to be changed also with the output is levels. So that will decrease 90%, and about the wise levels, think I can put 92%, just like that. So after that, I think we have interesting corrections between This was our first image after this correction, these corrections, and this correction. Maybe we can continue little bit with another adjustment, and we can use the brightness contrast. With the brightness contrast, we can increase the brightness very interesting in this type of case, as you can see. But one more time if I want to keep realistic things, I need to not put too much thing around 12 is good, and we can put little bit contrast after that, maybe 4%, or maybe a little bit more like 8%. So 12 and 8%, or maybe just 10% and 6%. As you can see, it's pretty good and we have made good correction. If we zoom a little bit now we can see accommodation on the back, we can see more of the arbor and the bots, and here it's pretty better. So after to make these interesting corrections, I can come back on my adjustment. Just put little bit saturation, so vibrance and saturation. I just want to check something first. And I just want to work with the exposure first. Maybe I can increase a little bit of exposure, but I don't like too much because it increases too much on the hot lights. So I think I'm not going to use this one. So I will use exposure adjustment, I will remove. And I just focus on the vibrance. Here we have our vibrance and increase a little bit of saturation 10%. And the vibrance also maybe let's put 12 and 10%. It will be pretty good. Let's one more time apply your filters. Little bit on this layer, so we need to slick the layers, filters, sharpens and one more time, clarity is definitely extremely useful. We can just put a value. Take a look about the clouds here, but this area if you increase the clarity, definitely it's very interesting. I'm not going to put too much, but around, let's put 42%. I think it's pretty good, and I will click on apply. That's it. I think it's enough for this image. If we want to give something little specific, we can complete with we can come back here, go on branus here. And when I continue, I can see the channel mixer. If I want to pop something is wrong, bran adjustment, I'm going to come back just here. I know what is a problem. I think I'll move something on the channels. Yes, just like this. So I will come back on my layers, so brands adjustment and yes definitely, I think it's okay. And I have my back rooms. Yes. I think it's nice for this picture. So now let's drag and move the back room layers totally on the top. And this was our image before, and this is the image after. So maybe it's a little too much, but I think definitely it's very interesting and powerful to recuperate some interesting things on this image using the different adjustment. 111. Create montage part 1: In this training, we are going to create a montage. For this, to create this montage, we will use different images. I created a new document, 1,800 pixels by 1,200 pixels, and I selected this image, this image, this image, and this image to create this montage. So first things to do is to select this image and to put this on this document. So I will click here and I will select all the layer. So we have seen that we can use edit and copy or control C to select all the layers, and we can go here, edit, and pass or control V to pass all the layers. After with the selection tools, we can craft a selection just like this, and we will increase the bit the size and put this in the center using the Smart guide. Now, something that I would like to do is to replace the sky and to replace the sky. I will use this image, and I will create a selection of the sky. So first I would slick my rectangular selection tools, create a frame of selection around this area, and I can repeat the same process, edit, copy the selection, and I will go here, edit, and just pass the selection. After that, with my move tools, I will increase the size until to arrive on the line of horizon, and then I will drag and move the element to position in the center. And when I go on the right, I will change the bland mode. So I will click here, and I will just change the bland mode for overlay. So I will just apply overlay and 100% of opacity. I can rename my layer, so here we can tape s. Here, we can tape sky just like this. After to do this type of work, I will make some more transformation. So I will select this image, and I will select all the layer in this case, edit, copy, and I will go here, edit and pass. I will pass my image. Maybe I can go around this area, reduce it little bit until to snap here. Something that I will do is to craft a mask and to add a gradient mask to craft my effect. So first, I will rename, and I will tape women. After to do this type of work, I will craft a mask with mask layers. After to craft my mask layers, I will use this tools, the gradient tools, and I will go left click to do something like this. I will start with my first point little outside. And with my dole point, I will drag and move a little bit, maybe around this area, and I will try to do something around maybe like this. Here I can go in this direction, maybe like this, and I can put little bit this point on the left to up turn this render. As you can see, it's pretty good because you can drag and move the point, select, direction. You can also drag and move this point. You can really create very interesting effect. If you want to change the opacity or to change the blade mode, it's also possible. But I think this type of case that will just stay like this. So totally on the left, you can see this image here. If I want to make some improvement, for example, you can click on opacity, and you can change the opacity, just to explain what I just told you here, and you can change the opacity at your convenience. If I just go on this area, I can click here, and you have also different type of bland mode that we can use. And if I just continue, I have strike you, have a reflection. We can one more time, see, for example, overlay. But I think if you use overlay, we don't see too this element. And screen can be interesting also sometimes add or overlay. Some things I will do will stay with normals, just here. We can see the difference before and after or with the sky before and after here or with Ocean before and after. First is a montage with only this image. After we are going to add more element. If you need to complete, as I explained, you can click on the layers. You can select the pain brush tools. If you want it to complete, for example, I select the white color. If I go here, as you can see, you can recuper tament. If you click on the black color, you will be able to rise again. It is something interesting to know focusing on this different parameter. On no time, you just to redo the explanation again, but we'll stay with this value. 112. Create montage part 2: We are going to continue with this montage. We have created this montage using a different images. I'm going to continue and select these models. Something that I will be able to do it to select create a frame of selection, and only select a part of the woman like this part, I think it will be pretty good. We'll Zoom little bit, and I think definitely this part will be great. Maybe I can dragon move, but this part will be great, and I will go on edit and copy these selections. Then I will go on this area and edit and just past this selection. As you can see the size of this image is pretty small in comparison of the oder one, but I can resize, I will increase just like this. I will put something more on the right just to keep maybe only this part with the end. I think it will be pretty good only to keep maybe this part. Here with the face. After to do this type of work, I will repeat my proceeds for the mask. So for this, first, I will click here and I will change, I will take, for example, pace, or you can take woman one, woman two, will depend Leger step pace. And I will add also a mass. I will click on the mass tool just here. And one more time, I will select gradient. So I will the left gradient tools and just go left click and start the gradient. As you can see the position is not pretty good because I need to turn the gradient. So we'll put this one here, and I will put this one here and now definitely it's so much better for what I want to do. And this one, this point, need to drag and move outside to have this type of rander, so I need to be outside. After I can drag and move this point here, I drag and move this point on this direction. Let's do, I think, something like this. It will be pretty good. And that's it. Physic, my first element with the gradient again found to redo again, maybe I can make little transformation of f I don't see enough the face of the woman. Maybe I can change little bit this one and change increase little bit, this one. Now, I think it's pretty better. That's it. We can craft this type of montage and it's pretty fast. It's it's not really difficult. We just copy and pass some selection, and we just craft two different mask, as you can see. After that, something that we can do, we can, for example, make adjustments. I can go right click here. I go right click, you can merge. For example, I can select merge visible, and I will obtain this render at the end. So even if we can hide this different element, we can see the final render on the top. And on this final render, if we want to make for example adjustment, I want to maybe decide to create an effect. I have different type of options here. So for example, if after I want to add brightness contrast, I want to add more contrast just like this, and define also a brightness level, it's possible. So I will add more contrast here to have effect on this area in this area. Some things that I can do also is cases of contrast. Maybe we can focus on why not color balance. I can go in this area, and depending on what I want to do, maybe put more yellow, more red also, and more little bit more magenta, just like this. I can even if I want to add an effect, why not to add something like a split tonight and light saturation, shadow saturation. And we can create different type of effect here. They just change for red around orange. The little too much, but I can decrease this saturation and decrease this saturation also. So work with the balance also in this area. So you can make transformation after that with a different layer. So all this one is just an option. You can keep and you can add many options just like this if you need after. If it's too much, don't hesitate to click on this one. And if it's too much, you can come back to any adjustment. You can also if you want reduce on any layer, the opacity. And if you work with opacity, we'll be able to reduce the effect. An example of what you can do to create a montage. Just select basic selection on images. After that, working with a mask, you can finish with adjustment, and you can create this type of interesting effect. 113. Change face part 1: In this training, we're going to create a montage and what is this montage concretely, so was two image. So we have this image first, and the second image will be this one. I would like to create a montage to change this face. It means to replace this face by this face. We'll keep the hairs will keep all the base, but we will replace just this area, just this area of the face by this face. So how to do this. One of the first things that I'm going to do is to select one of these tool here. We multiple tools, and I will sect the M pen tool to create a selection, because you can also create a selection with the pen tools, and I will just go here. It is a great example, and I will start around this area. I will just add multiple segment. The aim is to create multiple segment, just here around the face on this direction, maybe the directions. You just create multiple segment. And here I can finish with this point. After that, you can convert to a selection. To convert to a selection, you need to activate selection just like this. That's it. We have created this selection using the pen tool, as you can see it's convenient also to use the pen tool to create some selection in a different way. I will go on edit and I will copy this selection, and I will go here and we'll go on edit and just pass the selection. So after to do this work, the pace will appear on this area. What I need to do is to increase the face first, and here we can change for phase number one, and Here we can change for phase number two, first. I think it's pretty better for the organization. The is to decrease the opacity of this one. First, decrease the opacity around 50%, and you increase to try to find the right position. What is the, the is to position the eyes in the same way and to try to have the noise and the eyes in the same position when you want to replace this face. I think like this, it's pretty good. Maybe I can reduce it a bit the size, and here I think we are good for this one. Almost just on this area. So, you need to try to match. No need to be perfect, but to try to match about the position on the eyes of the nose and of the mouse. After to do this work, I can recuperate my transparency, just like that. So what I need to do at this moment? I need to this moment, I need to make adjustment, and something that I will be able to do to slick this face adjustment. On the adjustment, I have different type of way that I will be able to use. Concretely, I will got an adjustment, and I will slick color balance. With the color balance here, you got an adjustment. You have multiple type of adjustment, and we can slick the color balance just here color balance and activate this one. Something that I will do is to put little bit in yellow just here. Put here little bit in red, maybe around 23%, and here also around -24. So I will activate my color balance. One of the problems it's apply on all the layer below, something that you can do it to drag and move on the face number two. And here we have the adjustment only for these layers. It's pretty better. Go inside and you can see the layers. The next step is to crater to layer masks. So click on the mask layers here. And just before to work this, maybe I can add ano door adjustment, so adjustment, and I will select levers. On the liver panels, maybe I can, as you can see, make little adjustment, output black levers, and where output wise levers, maybe I can reduce. But I think it's not going to be pretty good if I focus on the black levers here. I think I will stay only with my only with my color balance adjustment. So I will create a liar mask, lion mask, and I will use my brush, so I will slick the brush here. Of the hardness, I think 30% would be pretty good, opacity 100 flow 100 to start, decrease the size of the brush, and with the edge of the brush, I will start to a rise. My face. So I need to select what type of color I need to slick. To rise, I need to select the black color. I will go just with the edge of my brush. I need to increase because I will work only with the edge of the brush, and I will go here, and I will erise just progressively this part. This is the first step to do after to position the face, just to use the edge of your brush and you can do something like this. Here. And I can position a little bit more just here. After that, I will decrease my opacity, and I will change the opacity for just 20%. After to do this type of work, I can put a little bit more on the different directions and put a little bit more here and little on the cheek also, but only with this value of 20%, just like that. Thanks to that, we can create more transition, and it is definitely interesting. J here. When I select this layer, I can come back here. We can drag and move a little bit because the brows. The location is not really good, so maybe I can increase a little bit. And it is convenient because after you can make adjustment, I just want to position this to not s to merge the brows on the back, and I think like this, it's pretty good. 114. Change face part 2: We're going to continue with this montage. What we will be able to do it is to hear where the face number one. So what I will do on this face number one, I will go right click and I will duplicate. And I will position this face number one with a copy just on the top. This face is face number one, but it is a copy, so I can just step copy just here to complete on my layer display. And I will add also a layer mask. So we'll click on mask layer here. And concretely, I will be able to erase some part to C. If I click here, and I want to erase some part. It's not exactly what I want to do. I will invert the mask with control I and with control I, I can invert the mask. Now if I go on the left, I will select my brush tools, pain brush tools, and I need to change the color for wise, and I will recuperate my first phase using a brush. And yet it's important to work with to decrease the opacity. We'll just focus with maybe 20% of opacity, nothing more, harness 30% flow 100. If I go here, I will be able to recuperate some part of the face on the background, but just with the low opacity. To mix little bit the two face. Here I think it's a little too much, I will just take a look here. Take a look on this area just here on this area also. It is a perfect way to try to mix the two different faces just using a brush. I can decrease also the size of my brush here, I can try to put little display also on this area to paint a little bit. Also here and paint a little bit on this area just like that. The render will be pretty better. When you complete with this type of render, here and also little on this area, and little on this area, just like this. I think the result can be pretty good. We can see we need to focus on the different mask. One of the problems that I have, it's a little bit again problems of color. Something that we can do it is to go right click, and when we go right click, you have the possibility to merge visible. So we click on merge visible, and if I dactivd this different view, we can see this render. And after that, we just need to apply adjustment. Some adjustment that I will be able to use, it is for example brightness contrast, and I will reinforce the contrast here about the brightness, we can increase the brightness, for example first with 20%, and contrast may be 24%. After to do this work, I will use also the exposure adjustment. And here I will reduce my exposure little bit because it's too much, just reduce little bit, the exposure with this. After something that I can do also, it's to use the vibrance adjustment, so vibrance, and here we can increase at bit the saturation to the tra to recuperate something more interesting about the general render to mix the two phase. And I think with this type of work, I think we are good for the final render, just like this. Let them a little bit. And yes, I think it's pretty good. So I can save my first phase here, around the top, and if I just eide, we can see the w we can replace this type of phase by another one. Interesting training that we can do. Don't forget that also it's possible. Sometimes we can work. We didn't work with the opacity, and we didn't work with the bland mode. But sometimes also it can be interesting. But in this type of case, we can just stabilize. So definitely, it's important to focus on the mask to just gra the selection to insert your selection, and after you can focus on the different mask. 115. Edit face part 1: In this training, we're going to edit this face. We will make multiple things. Like, for example, to remove the default, we will see how to make up the mouth, change the color of the eyes, and to work with the skin. First things to do is to select this layer, just go right click and duplicate the layers. On the duplicated layers, one of the first things that I'm going to do is I would like to remove element. For this, something that I can use we have a list of tool here and we can use the blemish removal tool. So I will zoom it a bit. As I explained before, you just need to define a wide here. And when you just go left click, you will be able to remove the default. So you just need to click here. And as you can see, the results generally pretty good, and I will use this tool even if we can use other type of tools because I think this one is extremely convenient in this type of case. So first thing to do, let's just go lef click, maybe sometime you need to click two or three times to try to have a better render, so I can click here, click here. And click here on this area also. And I will go here. Let's go left click again. Left click. So every time when you can see this type of body spot, you just go one left click. Don't hesitate to left click again. Sometime you will have an adjustment, and generally it is working good to this type of work. And I have also one just on this area. Here. It's okay for that. This is the four things that I'm going to do on this face and I will go on the right. And here we can see the difference before and after and before and after. Second things that I'm going to do, I would like to apply makeup on the mouse, and we'll see after how to change the color of the eyes, and we will work with two different type of process. So in this first process, something that I will do it just to create a new layers. And I will focus with a pixel layer. I just want to show you different type of process. So first here, we just add a new layer just like this. So here, it's backgrounds background layer on this one, we can just check remove because I remove the default, and here we can just tape mouse. After to do this type of work, I will just use my brush tools. Here you can see the paint brush tools. We can also create selection of the mouse to fill with the color, makes improvement, but in this type of case, I will just use this process. We'll define a color on the right, maybe around a pink color, like maybe around this one. Don't hesitate to double click if you want to have access to more color, and I will just paint opacity here, and I will just paint like that. If you paint like that, you will turn this render. So here I have different type of opacity. I will paint with 100%, but the harness I will only put 30%, and here we can paint like that. Let's just change bots wide a little bit, and I will go in these directions and do something like this on all the mouse, just like that. After to do this work, something that I will do is to maybe I can completely little bit on this direction and on these directions, and I will change the bland mode first. Something that we can use the loft of the time it is soft light. After that, I need to erase and I will use my eraser tools. And I will de select the rise brush tools just here. And with my erase brush tools, I will put the hardness 30% and just increase the wide, and I just want to hear it a little too much. I just want to ise with the edge of my brush just a little bit here. Like this, and left click again on these directions. Left click again on these directions. As you can see it's pretty good, you can make this type of render to make up, for example, the mouse. After I will make adjustment with the opacity, and I will decrease the opacity to make something more interesting, maybe 41%. If I see the render before, after, before, after. Depending on the effect that you want, you can reduce the opacity of the layer. Most of the types of life definitely very great when you want to do this type of work. This is the first step, so we can already take a look about the mouse or here it was before. This is our image at the beginning, and this is the image with the two adjustment. So first, we'll remove the default like this. And second, we will make up the mouse. After we'll change the ye color and I will show you that exactly like the mouse, you can do this type of work, but this time, we will use a mask to do this type of work. 116. Edit face part 2: We're going to continue to edit this face and something that I will do is to change the ice color. I would like to have more blue color. So how I can process first things to do add these layers with remove. I will duplicate again. After to duplicate this layer with remove, we will change and we will make just yes. So after to do this type of work, I will apply adjustment. So here we have different types of adjustment that we can apply. Something that I can use, definitely, I can use the U saturation luminans can be interesting. We can use also, we have the recolor adjustment. We can use multiple type of adjustment here. If I just Cilic U SL adjustment here, can just work with the U shift so here we can change just the value like that. But one of the problems is this is apply on all the pictures. This is why we need to create a mask. I will go here, and I will use mask layers directly applying to the adjustment. So now what I will do. I'm going to invert the mask. So I will click on the mask and I will press control eye to invert the mask. Now the mask will hide my effect. If I want to recuperate the effect or near the eyes, I just need to take a brush. And because everything is in black now, if I select the white color, I will be able to recuperate my effect. I s the white color. I decrease the wide of my brush just here, opacity through harness, and I just need to paint like that where I want to recuperate the effect. As you can see it's convenient. After that, the am just to try to paint in a good way all around this area, maybe this area. I can zoom it a bit more. And do something like this. If it's too much, you can just invert, so you go here, and you can here silic the black color, and if you want to erase, you can do the opposite process. If I just go on the right, I will use one more time the white color and it is same I will paint. On the eyes expect in the medal, here, for example, it's too much, I invert, black color, and again erase this part. Invert again and recuperate here. That's it, we can change the color of the eye. Something interesting is after that, you can put the colors that you want. So you go into HSL shift adjustment, and you can just drag and move here to change for the color that you want. I can slick for example this one to have more blue colors. You can even increase the saturation, but if you increase too much, the render will be pretty good, we just increase a little bit more and luminosity also, but if it's too much, it won't be pretty good also. Maybe I can just focus around 40% here and just change the color just like this. Now we have this blue color and we can see the difference before and after. Something that I would like to do also is to make up little of the cheeks. How I can do? I can do. It'll be the same type of work. But I think the best thing to do is to select these layers and right click, and we can duplicate the layers. If I duplicate these layers just here. I will be able on this layer to change and to make, for example, It's not skin color I will make. I just te color here. And after to do this type of work, I will sil my paint brush tools, and with my paint brush tool, I will paint. I'll define the color. Double click select around this color. And I will paint. I will use my paint brush tool here, increase 100 100 Rs 100, Rs 30%, and I will increase the size of my brush and I will just paint glass. Here, it's not really good, but we are going to make improvement. You will understand how and I can paint here, and I can do the same process on this area at the beginning. After to do this type of work, here I can create a mask again. I can create another mask here, and I will use my pain brush tools because the mask is in white, I will select the black color to erase, and I will increase the size of my brush, and First things to do with the edge of the brush, I can erase the little bit like this. Here, I just a little bit, but not too much. If I want to pert I just need to invert here. But if I invert, here it's not really good for a simple reason that Theodor color need to be wise, just like that. Here I can recuper it with this color. Something that we can do, it's to will decrease the opacity, but first before to do this. I can go on this area, and I will change the bland mode. Here we can change the bland mode. One of the problems if you change the bland mode, it won't be pretty good for a simple reason that we're on this layer and everything will be applied just below. This is why I will click just if you click on the layer here, change the bland mode, it won't be pretty good. Just focus on the mask, just click on the mask, and silic the black color decrease the opacity with maybe 20%. With my brush, I will rise just progressively. Just like that. I will repeat the same thing on the left. So you need to apply multiple times the left click to repeat the process multiple times. The aim is just to create little makeup like this, not too much, just a little bit, et little too much. I can put 20% again, little bit again here, and we have a little incrustation effect, and as you can see, I think it's pretty good like this. Just little makeup, not too much on this area, just like that. I can go here, res little bit more, and I think it's pretty good like this. As you can see, just a little bit. But in comparison of V four, yes, you can put little makeup on this area. 117. Edit face part 3: We're going to continue to edit this face. After to do this type of work, something that I will do, I would like to make an improvement on the skin, so concretely, what type of improvement just to smooth the skin? We will use a process. First things to do if I want this work, I don't have a choice here, I have a mask, and something that I will do is to go right click here. We have the mask here. I will go right click on the layers, and I will merge these layers with just the layer below. So thanks to that, I can now use these layers just here. I will go right click and I will duplicate these layers, and I will just rename and I will tape skin. After to do this work, I will zoom a little bit. Something that I will be able to do it is to add a filters. So we'll go on filters blur and what type of blue I will use I will use the Gauchan blu. After to apply the gauchan blue, I need to define a value. What value I can define, I can define a round may be four, not too much, think a round four will be good, and I will click on apply. So after to do this type of work here, we can craft here a mask. So one of the problem is, if you just apply the blow from filters, I'm going to show you something. Automatically, it will be applied on the layers. But if you go here, you have on this area filters also, and you have a list of type of filters that you can use, and I think it's pretty good for a simple reason that if I slick the gaussian blow here. Automatically, you will be able to edit the value after. This is why it's pretty better to do this type of work, and I will put 4.2. And I will create a mask then. So just after that, I will create the mask layers. And this mask layer need to be just below. So I need to put the mask here after also the filters. And I will just invert the mask. I will press control, and thanks to that, I can invert the mask, and I will hide my blow effect. Now what I can do is to just lick my paint brush tool and recuperate the blow effect on the skin, just painting with a white color. And I will keep here you can put 100%, 100% Harness worth 30%. And I'll just reduce the Harness again, maybe 20%. And after to do this work, I will paint like this. Where I'm going to paint, I will just add my blue. After we'll be able to make adjustment if we want to reduce the effect, going to show you how we can make adjustment. But first, let's just paint on different part of the skin. You just need to avoid to go where you have too much details like, for example, the noise, so eyes or the mouth. Don't forget that you can reduce the wide of your brush. Thanks to that, if I want to go more on this direction, it's also possible. Definitely it's too much. The blow is too strong, but we can make adjustment after. For things to do, let's just continue to focus on this. Let's just continue to focus on this, just like that. I think it's pretty good. I can zoom a little bit, just put on this area, zoom here and go on the right, and I can also make something like this. That's it. After to do this type of form, can see the difference before after, it's a little too strong. If it's too strong, you have different way, you can double click on the blue, and as you can see, you can increase or you can decrease. This is definitely I think one of the best things to do. For example, I can reduce to 3.2. You can also just on the general layer decrease the opacity and you can also decrease your effect like this. You can can improve this image. We have seen here we are going to sit to come back, and we have seen how to improve this image step by step, so you can remove the default, you can make up the mouse, you can edit, the eyes, you can make up on the cheeks, you can smooth also using this type of process and after increase the effect or decrease the effect at any moment. 118. Create drawing part 1: In this training, we are going to create drawing. It is an interesting training because we can use the pin tool. We can use how to add shapes. It is interesting because you can also use affinity photo if you want to draw, you have different options, and this is what we are going to see. First things to do, I'm going to cratotngle, to crat the background of my drawing. It's going to be a landscape drawing just with simple shapes using the pin tool and simple shapes. First, I crater rectangle on the backgrounds just here. This rectangle, I can define a blue color, but something that I would like is to define a gradient. I will use the gradation tools and with my gradation tool, I can start a gradient here from this point to this print, and I will change the color on this area. So it's thing my first point. On this first point, I will define a first color like a round maybe this blue, and I will define my second point, and I will define the color like maybe something like this. Maybe I can change for my first point. L something little bit darker. Things like this will be pretty better, and I can just validate my gradient. Just like that. This will be my backroom. After I would like to create something like mountain. I will use my pen tools, and I will start around this area and define first element just like this. Then a second element may be here, and then last element may be around this area. I can come back here even if I could go outside just snap to my document point, and I will define a first Icilck here, I don't have a stroke. If I slick this element, I will define a color. Best things to do just click here and search a color like a gray color, not too dark like around this area. And I will use my stroke options and remove the stroke. Maybe I will be able to adjust a little bit on this direction. After to do this type of work, let's just double click, you can drag and move the point so it means you can make adjustment on any point at your convenience. Something that I will do also is to double click here. Sylx this point, Cra convert to this type of curve, sylx this one convert, syngs one convert, sylx this one convert, and synagis one convert, just like that. I will be able to double click and dragon movely tell me this point. Move little bit this one here and move little bit this one maybe on this direction. Now, what I will do, I will use my pain tools, so you can select the pain tools, and you can start around this area, and you can create a small curve just on the directions like this, like this, and you can continue and just convert the mis to add a little shadow. I will do something like this, use my selection tools, and about the color, we can select a gray color, little bit darker, just like this. Can double click because I want to pull a little bit my handle just here. Something that I will do it to select this element, shift, select this element, so the two elements and just go right click. Geometry, divide. Thanks to divide, if you click on this area, you can cut and just keep this part. Now, let's just continue. I will select my pen tools and redo the same type of action. I can do something like this again, like this, like this, like this, or here. And do something like that. I can click on my selection tools, Hopper tools, Dragon move, sed, this element, and click here. Double click again. If I want to make adjustment to the point here, for example, I have a handle, I don't like too much, so I can make some adjustment. And this one, I can also click on this point and extend on this direction. Let's do something like this. I will repeat my process. With my selection tool, I will say this right tangle, shift the saps, the sheps and the sheps. It means the mountain and the new shapes with the pent tools and right click geometry, divide. Thanks to that, I can click here and delete. I will repeat the same process one more time. One more time I will use one of these tools and I will select my pain tools. Thanks to that, we can work with the pain tools, and I will start around this area. Oops. Let's redo again. I will start around here, C to small curves. Just like this. I will come back on the directions just here. I will go outside and do something like that. I will activate also this color just like this. And something that I will do it to slick this element, shift, select this element, and right click. This is interesting also to use the persan bleen is what I wanted to show you also and click and divide. Thanks to that, I can only take this part, so it means this part on this area and I can deal it. Perfect. After to do this type of work, I will also use my rectangle tools and just create first I will create something on the sky. To create something on the sky. I will select my ellip tools, and I will do something like that. Here I will activate the white color, just like this, to create two clothes, and I will press control, left click here. Control left click here, and control left click like this. I will select these different circles. Here we have our different circles, and something that will do is to sick the different circles and right click. Geometry add. After I will create the rectangles to subtract the crat rectangle around this area, Click on this rectangle, put on the frog ground and select this element, shift this element and right click range, right click, geometry, substrate. Thanks to that, I have this element. I can now reduce little bit, put a clothes around this area, press control, left click and increase little bit the size. Control left click. Reduce little bit and control left click maybe reduce the little bit on this area. I will use my circle tools to create a circles just on the left, maybe I can put a circle around this area and put something like a yellow orange color, as you can see. Maybe I can drag and move the element here, here I can increase my size, and do something like that. This is the type of thing that we can do. After that, I will cratod rectangles. I will say my rectangle tools, and crate a rectangle here and just display with a green color. I can put a green color maybe more like this here, and I can go right click, convert to curves, and I can define a point. For example, after to convert to curve, you can just go on this line and add may be one point here, and add may be one point here. If I slick this point, as you can see, you can drag and move and convert to smooth. Click on this point, dragon move, convert to smooth. Maybe I can drag and move the point here, and this one on these directions, dragging these handles and do something like this, just here. I will extend a little bit on this direction. 119. Create drawing part 2: We are going to continue with this drawing. Some thing that I'm going to do is to click here and I will select my circle tools. After to select my circle tools, I will draw a circle around this area. And I will put my circle with the color and we will make something little bit darker, like for example, this one. I will put my circle here, change little bit, the ratio of the circles. Reduce little bit to something like that. I will press control left click to duplicate, control left click to duplicate, and just do something like this. After I will select all these type of sheps just here and right click. I will select these different shapes here and right click arrange, right click geometry, and we will select ad. After to do this type of work, I will duplicate on this area again and duplicate again here. I will press out left click to duplicate again around this area and duplicate just here. After to do this type of work, I have to select this one and to duplicate also. Control left click, we can duplicate. As you can see, we can put another color just to see the difference and put this just here. While I do this type of work, you are going to understand, select this one shift, this one, this one, this one. This one and this one. Select all the curves like that, and shift select also this yellow one. When you go right click, you can apply a geometry and you can use Divide. After to use divide, I can just click here Press Delete and click here Press Delete. Click here Press Delete. Click here, Press Delete, click here Press Delete. Delete, delete, delete all this type of elements that we use for Divide. Now you can also click here and remove. This is the type of thing that you can do. If I use my selection tools now, as you can see, we will be able to remove this one. One of the problems is, I think we have the problems, going to come back, maybe a the duplication process. I need to come back a little bit here, and yes, I have my green element just here. I need to see the yellow element just like that, and press delete on my keyboard to only keep this type of element. Now, what I will be able to do, I will be able to click here. And to cratono dtangles first. So I'll cratonodtngles on these directions here. I will change it a bit the color. Maybe I can put this color. Africa will change this one first. I can change maybe for this type of color. Then sect this one and define maybe this type of color, and table click to add a point here. First, I need to convert to C to curve, right click, convert to curves, add a point here, and add a point here. I can click on this one, Crato curves. Click on this one, Convert not to curve and convert to smooth, and do again something maybe a little bit different, but following the same type of pass. Maybe I can do something here. Maybe I can do something like that. That's it. This is the type of thing that I can do. If I double click here on this one, I think I can make some adjustment about the curves just like this. I will select my ellipse tools, crat ellipse just on these directions. I will define this type of color. Put this one here, and left click to duplicate again and put an der one. Maybe I can select this one, make something a little bit darker, and click on this one, make something like this. I will select these two elements. Control, left click, go in these directions, and right click then, apply a transformation arrange. Not arrange, I think it's better to use transform and flip horizontal. So Let's just slick this element to drag and move around this position, and something that I will do it to add a tree. How to craft my tree, I will craft the rectangles. Just a rectangle like this with a brown color. I will duplicate this element. Control left click duplicate here, reduce bit the size and put a darker brown color, just like that. After to do this type of work, I will extend a little bit, select my circle tool. First, I will select this one and this one, right click create a group. I will define the circle tools. Let's select the circle tools, create a circle on these directions, and put the circle in the middle of the group with your smart guide, define a color like this one, and right click convert to curves. After to convert to curve, I can select this point, and just drag and move we shift to keep the proportionality just like that. After to do this work, I will duplicate this one just like this, make something a little darker. And I have the possibility to G right not to go right click to double click and to drag and move this point on these directions just here. After that, I can drag and move this handle on these directions, just like that. T I can drag and move the handle around here, and I can drag and move the handle also around these directions. But maybe I can also take these handles and drag and move we shift to keep these directions just like that. And I can create this type of shadow here. Maybe it's too much. I can reduce little bit. Here, I can move little bit on these directions, and yes, I think we'll be perfect like this. After to do this type of work, let's just rato group. So click here. Click here. Click here and just krato group, so right click rato group. After to do this type of work, I have a group, and I can place my group, for example, first here. I can increase the size, and I will press out left click to position another one maybe around this area. After that, the M is to reduce little bit the size when you go more on the back, so you can duplicate. But you need to reduce little bit the size when you will go on the back. For example, I can do something like this. Start to reduce little bit more, press control, and reduce a little bit more when you arrive on the back, just like this. So every time when you go on the back, you can reduce more your t. Here I can increase a little bit. This one I can increase a little bit more. And yes, something like this, it's not bad. We can repeat this process multiple time if we need. Depends really about what we want to do. So I can put this one here. This one may be reduced a little bit more on this direction. Put anoder one may be just here, and put anoder one, maybe on these directions, and another one may be a little bit here. It's okay for that. The last thing that I'm going to do, it is to select my pen tools. With my pen tools, I will go on these directions. I will start in this area, we will do just something like this, and you will understand what we are going to do. I can come back here, activate the white color, so here I can double click, define the white color, and you can click on this element, this element and this element and right click. Geometry divide. And thanks to that, I can remove only this part. I can repeat the process with my pen tools, just starting from this area and just create small curves just here. I will go back on this area, activate the color, so I can go here, work with the color. Click on this sw element, this one, this one, and this one, right click. Geometry divide. And I will click here and remove. And I will finish to repeat the same thing on this area, so I will use my pen tools. And I will start from this one to this one. Let's start a curves. Another curves. Another curves, A oder curves, and just go here. And I will click on this area. Define the wise color. Click on this one, this one, and this one, and right click. I will define a geometry divide. And I will click here and remove. I think we're going to stop here. It is a perfect example about a basic drawing that you can create using affinity photo. And I wanted just to show you some options about how to use the Bolan operation, how you can create a group, how you can use the pen tools, and definitely it's very interesting training to use. 120. Create post part 1: In this training, we are going to create a post. It is interesting training because we will work with the guide. We will add images, and we'll see how to use the images with the shapes, and we will also add text. First thing to do, it is to display the guide. Here, I have a document first with the value of 1,800 pixels by 1,400 pixels. I will select first view and something that I will use, it is show guide, so you can activate show guide, after you can just click on guide. Here we have seen that it's possible to add horizontal guide and vertical guide. I'm going to move little bits here. I will create a new horizontal guide. Here we have percentage, you are not going to work in percentage just in pixels, and I will craft the first guide here, and my first guide will be located at 680 pixels. The midel is at 700 pixels, and I will add another one at 7:20 720 pixels. The guide at 700 pixels we can remove. If I craft a vertical guide, vertical guide here, He will be located at 900 pixels. I will double click. And I will craft something 880 pixels, and here's in my Midol guide, and I will craft another one with 920 pixels. After that, I will slick this one and I will remove. We need to create something like this. Thanks to that, if I close, we have this guide and we have the same space here, here, here, and here. Now the aim is to create four rectangles and you will understand why after. You can snap to the corner point and snap to the guide here, and you can change the color like the red or any color that you want. You will duplicate with control left click to duplicate, Control left click to duplicate, and control left click to duplicate. Now we can obt this render. Why I display this rectangle to put image inside and have exactly the right size. First, that will go on file, and we can place different images. What images we will sect, as you can see, I have multiple images with temples. I will silk the first one, the second one, the third one and the last one. It means temple one, two, three, and four, and I will click on open and display the temple here. After to play the temple, we will go left click to display the first one. Left click the second one, left click the third one, and left click the last one. I will go here close. Why it is useful because yes, you can do something like this, so go in this corner, extend. But as you can see, it's not pretty good or go here and go outside, but it's not possible to adjust your size of your image. This is why it is useful to create mask. You will dragon move. The temple number one, we can rename here for frame. If it's better, you can rename for you frame number one. Here you can change for frame number two. Here you can change for frame number three, and here you can change for frame number four. After to do this work, you can sect the temple number one, and you can just draw again move inside the frame number one. Thanks to that, the frame number one, the rectangle will be used to display the image inside. We have the image if I increase the image. As you can see the image is inside the rectangle. And you can click here. You can find the image inside the rectangle. It is perfect because I can adjust the size of the image and I can center my image if I need to release the temple. I will repeat the process temple two inside the frame number two, like this. Now, The temple two is inside the frame number two, and I can adjust at my convenience. After you can adjust a little bit as you want ops, I think something is wrong. Yes, just like this. I can select here, double click to slic the image inside. One click, you dragon move the rectangle with the image and double click, you edit the image inside just like this. I will select the temple sue and dragon move inside the frame number S, just like this. Here, double click. I have my image number S, and I can dragon move inside the rectangles. Maybe you can reduce the le bit and put this here. Here on this area, I can double click also. Increase the size, and dragon move the temple four inside the frame number four. Thanks to that, I can up turn this render, so I can double kick and put this inside the rectangle. As you can see, it's pretty good because if I just extend, you can see each image is inside each rectangle. It's definitely extremely powerful. You don't have to crop your layer, you don't have to try to do something difficult. You just need to put the image inside the shapes, and definitely it's pretty convenient to obtain this render, just like that. Now if I'm satisfied, I can just go and view and deactivate here we have the guide. If I know that I'm not going to move, I can deactivate the guide just here. So I can click on this one, this one and click on this one, this one, and I can close and just keep my element like this. 121. Create post part 2: We are going to continue with this post. Something that we are going to do, we have display the different images inside the different frames. So I need to go on the left, and I will silect my rectangle tools just like this, and I will create rectangles. These rectangles, I can dragon move and display on the front with a color, will sil like a blue color, just like this, and I can use my transformation tunnel to display a specific size for this rectangle. So I will reduce the little bit, and I will change the size so here we can tape something, and I will tape a value of 800 pixels for the wide. For the eight, I can tape 500 pixels. I will dry and move my rectangle and just put in the center using the smart guides, just like that. After to do this type of work, I can come back to Malia. If you want to see the display, come back with these tools, and you can find the display. I will select my text tools, artistic text tool, and I will create a text just like this. And I will tape something like travel Japan, for example, I will select this one, dragon move for the white color. I will change here we have the phone size, and I will use maybe 20 for the value, and I can change the phone family. So if I's go here, I have multiple font family that I can choose and some things that I will silic maybe I can silic this one. I can change, I have an oder one, maybe this one, maybe I can try another one again. We have multiple phone family, as you can see. You have multiple type of options. For example, I can select this one just here, and I can put this one on this area. Travel Japan, and I can click on my element of and control left click Duplicate. I will reduce the bit and edit the content with double click. And I will take discover temples. I will put this here. This one, we have a value, let's just change. Maybe I can put 20 s. This one for the size, I will put maybe 17. I can put travel Japan around this one, discover temple around this one. And maybe I can reduce 16, will be pretty better, and I will add different stars. So due here, and we can use the star tools, and with the star tool, I can zoom a little bit, craft my first stars on this area and define the white color for these stars. I would like to craft five stars. I will At the first one and press control left click to duplicate, Control left click to duplicate and duplicate five times. After to do this type of work, we need to position the first stars, and we need to position the last star where we want. Thanks to that, if I select my different stars pressing shift, and left click, I will be able to go to my ligan panels. So first, I can check the ligment, like lg Midls, and I will use the distribution space horizontally, just like this. I can continue with a group. So you select all the stars like this and right click Crato group or Control G. Thanks to that, if you just go one click here, you have a group. You can also scale your group at your convenience with left click and you can scale if you need. I will put this around this area. So I say travel Japer, maybe I can display here, discover temple here, and this one around this area. I will select this element. The two text element and my group, and I will sling my distribution panels space vertically. And also an center just like this. So the last thing that I'm going to do is to select my rectangles. I want to add a stroke to make something better, so I can click on stroke here, and I will be able to apply a stroke. But this struck need to be in y. I click on stroke here, define the y color, and we need to display value. If I display this one is too much, I think around eight will be pretty good to match with here we are 40 pixels. Height is in print. I think with eight point, it will be pretty good, and I can Zoom little I to upturn this render. You can click here. This is a perfect example about the type of posts that you can create with affinity photo. As you can see, the most important thing when you create this type of graphic document is to ask to you how to work and, what, what will be the best to run time, and what will be the best to have the right eligment, the right disposition, the right position of the different element, to have something with a nice structure. 122. Create card part 1: In this training, we are going to create a visit card. For this, something that I'm going to do is to create a new document, 1350 pixels by 650 pixels. At the same time, I selected this image, and at the same time, I selected this image. We have this two image to work with this. Something that I'm going to do, first, it is on this document to include this image. I will go and edit and I will copy all the image, so it means all the layers, and then I will go here, and I will go and edit and pass all the layers. With my selection tools, I will try and move, I will increase little bit the size to be little bit outside. After I will be able to center my element. If it's too big, first things to do, I think you can just snap here. You can reduce until to snap on this area, and after you can just center the image in the medl. After to do this type of work, I will select here, the rectangle tool just crater rectangles on this area. These rectangles, I can put in the midle make little maybe adjustment here and adjustment here. When I go on the right, I will change the opacity of this rectangle to put a value of 80%. Maybe I can adjust a little bit, but I think it's pretty good like this using this value. After to do this type of work, I will put some text. I will say my text tool, artistic text tool. I will start to tape something. And I will tape nature garden first. After to do this type of work, I will define a color like this type of green color. And I can select a different font family I need. Here, I have different types of font family that I can use. And I will just use the font family in bold, this one, Font clan got heavy. I will put Natural garden just here, and I will press Control left click to duplicate and double click to edit the content for conception. Then I will put conception just below here, and I think it's a little too big so I will reduce maybe 26. This one I will put also 26, and I will press out left click to duplicate dut. And I will take garden maintenance by professionals. After to do this type of work, I will put this one here. I can extend Little bit, put conception around this area, Natural garden around this area, need to let little space here because I'm going to create a logo. To crate this logo, I will select my ellip tools, Zoom Little bit, create a circles, and this circle need to have this green color, so you can re per the green color with the Hper tools, and you can click here to activate this green color here. I can center just like this and select my ellip tool again. I will craft the first circle with the white color. Just here, increase. I will craft like a small tree, and I will press control left click, just like this, and control left click may be around this area. Something that I will do, I can extend a little bit. It is to create the rectangles. I will create the rectangles starting from this area. I will define the white color for this rectangle. If you don't see the white color it is because it is on the back room, so you can go right click, arrange, move to front. Now I can see my rectangles and change a little bit the size and put may be just like this. I think it's pretty good, I can just select these four shapes, and after that, I will go right click. Geometry add. Thanks to that, I just have one entity now. Again, with my selection tool pressing shift, I can resize proportionally and put in the model of my circle just like this. I will select this two entity just here, and I will go right click cyto group or Control G. And now we have this group. I can click on this area, reduce a little bit, the size, and put this around the dels. I define my last element here, my first element here. If I select all the elements just like that, I can use my ligan panels. First, I can use a link center to check, and I can use also the space vertically, just like this. That's it, it's perfect. We have the front of the car. This is the front of the cart and after we'll be able to crack the back of the car, again click here to see the render. 123. Create card part 2: We are going to continue with the creation of this car. For the creation of this card, as explain we have created the front of the car, and we will craft the back of the card. Just create a new document with exactly the same size, 1250 pixels by 650 pixels, and you craft a document with exactly the same size. In affinity photo, it's not possible to work with different like boards. It means you cannot have in the same document, different boards and it is not possible in affinity photo. Sometimes it's possible to create different boards and we will have exactly the front end of the back on the same document, it's not possible, so you need to create a new document. On the back of the card, I will use my rectangle tools, and I will just snap to this corner point, crater rectangles. We need to have the same green color if we are not sure, we just need to use the dropper tools and recuperate the green color on one of these elements. If I go here, I can activate my green color on the rectangles. So now I have another image to use. The order image is this one. Now we just edit, copy all the layers, so edit, copy all the layers, and just go here and edit and past all the layers. I will reduce my layers just like this, and then drag and move the layers on this area around this place. After to do this type of work, I will activate some text. We'll use my text tool, artistic text tool, normally, if we do something like this here. I will take contact. S. I will use my selection tools. I will reduce a little bit, put the white color. One of the problem is, I don't have the same font family, so if I click here, we can check again the font family Franklin Gotti HV, we'll go this document and I will apply the same font family. I need to change. And I will sedict Frankln Got AV also. Hops just like this. I can put contact us around this area. Zoom little bit, control, left click, reduces the text, and add some content also. I can take something like address Street. Let's just tap anything for this one. Can red it just like this. Maybe I can click on Contact us so here we can put 21, and here we can put eight. I will go out a control left click and I will change the content. Just like this. We let little space. It's okay for that and control left click just here. I will duplicate again, control, left click and change the content. So that's okay. After to do this type of work, maybe I can take my image, increase a bit the size, put the image in the. So Here, if I'm not sure about the Midol, you can click on your ligan panels and you can select alig Midols. After I will put place contactors around this area and garden design around this area, and I want to define the same space. I will select all the elements just here, all the elements of text, and I will use the Aligan panels. I will define first ling left to be sure to ing on the elements the most of the left, and I will use also space vertically. Perfect. Now I can all my elements, I think around this area, it will be pretty good. I can move just like this. That's it. I don't have more things to do. I can use just my tools here to see the render, but yes, one of the problem is something is wrong because here it is upper case. I need to change that. Yes, it's pretty better. It's okay for that. That's it. We don't have more things to do for the creation of this card. As you can see, it's pretty fast to do this type of work when you use affinity photo. You just need to copy and pant some layers. You can add some texts, work with the transparency, and it's pretty fast to create this type of graphic document. Don't forget that in affinity photo, you need to create one document for the front of the car and one document for the back of the car because it's not possible to work with board in affinity photo. 124. Transformations part 1: We're going to see how to rise selections. And for this, I selected this image, and I selected this image. After to do this type of work, if I select this image, first, we can go on the left here and you have different way to erase. You can use ERS brush tool, you can use backgrounds ERs brush, and you can use a food ERS tool. In this case, I'm not going to duplicate the layers because if I duplicate the layers, I'm not going to see really the render. First to rise, you can also use a selection. For example, I will define selection. I will use the selection brush tools, and I will select the flowers. I will click on these tools. I will go on ad and I will just go, for example, left click here, and I will select the flowers as you can see, just like that. And after that, I would like to remove the background. So I will invert the selection, I will press Shift Control A, and with Shift Control A, I can invert the selection. And then you can press Delete on the keyboard, or you can also go on this area. You have some pixels options, and in the pixel selection, you can also find different type of possibility and you can deselect. You can select all invert. The best thing to do is to press Delete on the keyboard. And when you press delete, automatically, you will be able, don't forget to select the layers. And if you press delete, you will be on the transparency backgrounds just like this. And then I will press Escape. And as you can see, I'll just remove these selections. So this is a first process. After if you need, you can, for example, create a new layers, pixel layers. You can put these layers on the bottom, so it means on the backgrounds. And if I select a tool like the field tools, I can define colors and automatically fill my layers, and I can adjust the colors as well. So here I didn't refine selections, but we could refine selections. Oh, I just come back with the history panels, and with the history panels, I will come back at this moment just before to delete, and I will press escape. Now you can find other type of tools. When we go on this area, you have rise brush tools. So as brush tools will just allow you to erase as you can see, so you can rise, and you just rise using a brush. So you set the parameter of the brush like the transparency. You can define the flow and the harness, and you can just erase like this. But something interesting is also you can just define any type of area and you can remove. You can also remove on a selection. For example, I can select this image, these layers. We can define a selection like the flood selections tools, and I will go left click to select the part outside. Now if I select this tool, it means I just go on the RS brush tools because I created a selection, we can just erase, as you can see, and we know that we cannot go outside the selection. I know that I cannot go outside the selection. Sometime you can use this tool, you can just press delete on the keyboard. But if you want only to delete some specific area, you can also use these tools with selections. So just come back, edit undo and edit undo. Another type of tool that we can use, it is backgrounds as brush. So with the Bros as brush, what we can do, we can select these tools, and automatically, you will define some contrast between object on the foreground and element on the backgrounds. And concretely, this will depend on the tolerance of the brush. So let's take a look, we'll reduce it to be the size. And here we have a tolerance of 10%. So if I arrive here, as you can see, even if I'm on the flowers, I cannot erase the flower because the tolerance is a 10%. If, for example, I increase, maybe I will obtain this render and now I will erase some part. So he will just define some contrast between some area on the foreground and some area on the backgrounds depending on the percentage value. So honestly, we don't use this too much for simple reasons that I think we don't have very high precision, but sometimes it is a tool that we can use. We have also some area sample continuously or we have contigrs or we have also the wet edge. So depending on what you choose, the render can be a little bit different, as you can see. You can also deactivate these different options. And one of the last possibility when you click here, it is to use the fluid AI tools. And when you click on the food AI tools, automatically, you can erase a complete background without to create a selection. So it can be something extremely fast. You just need to select the layers. You just need to define a percentage of tolerance, and you can erase backgrounds. If I start, for example, with 10%, left click, automatically, he will erase this area. Now if I change the percentage value, so for example, I define something like 40%, and I will go left click here as you can see the percentage is little too high, and in this case, he will Arise all this area. This is why it's important to define a percentage value. If I apply 20, we can have this. But you can also complete after with the ARs brush tools. If you want to complete with a specific area, it's possible to complete also with these tools, as you can see. And if I show you on the example, we will click on this image, and I will use also these tools. So one more time, we will use the fluid as tools. And if I want to erase the background, I define my tolerance value, if I start with 10%, I can go left click here and I can erase this part. As you can see, the result is pretty decent. And the fact is, if I zoom here, even on this area, I think it's not bad. And if we use the selection, I think we'll have the same type of render. So if I just come back here and I change the percentage value and I make something higher like 40%, and I will just go left click here. As you can see, we can rise this area just like this. And definitely it's too much. It's too much because percentage value is too high. Now we'll go back and I will put let's try with 20% and 20% left click here, as you can see, it's too high as well. In this case, the first option around 10% was, I think the best. If I go left click here with 10% value, as you can see, we can erase this area. 125. Photo landscape 6: In this training, we are going to improve this image. For this, I will go on the right, I will select the layers and right click duplicate the layers. What problems we have on this image on this image? Concretely, we have problems between the sky area. So in this area, this is the atlights. We have this area on the right on the sky, it is too bright. At the same time, we have problems with all this area, it is too dark. And for example, if I take a look here, it is very dark. We don't really see all the buildings on this area. We have a lake here, and concretely, it is too dark for the shadow. All this area is too dark. This area is too bright. We don't see too much, some detail, some colors as well. So we can really improve this image. We first, I will go on the right, and I will select adjustment and the first adjustment that I would use will be the adjustment curves. And thanks to that, I can make corrections. With this, I will play sweprit first in the Mdals, second on the right in the Mdals and on the left in the Mdals on the left. Here we focus on the at lights area, and here we focus on the shadows area in these intervals. What does it mean if I set this one, I will lighten my at lights or I will darken my shadows. So in this case, take a look but here, I will be able to dragging and moving this point to adjust this area and I will move this point around maybe here. So thanks to that, we can make this type of corrections. But this one can darken the shadows or I can lighten the shadows on this direction. So in this case, I will take my point I will move the point here to lighten the shadows, and I will move the point around maybe this area just like that. And as you can see, it's convenient. So after that, I will get out and take a look about this strong improvement just using the curves. So now we can complete and we can complete with what we can complete with levers. So one more time, you have the output black levers. So here we can work with hoops. I think I need to activate this one, yes. So we have the output black levers. I can put little bit, maybe 2%. Here's the output wise levers, we put something like maybe 96. And with the gamma, I can try to move the gamma on the left. And maybe we can put something like 0.82. Then it's too much. Let's just address 0.86. So now we have a very, very strong improvement on all this. At this moment, if I want to put little bit contrast, it's possible. I can click here and I can define little bit contrast, brightness, contrast, and I will put again little bit contrast, but not too much, maybe just eight, and I will reinforce little bits of brightness, maybe six, and for the contrast, maybe ten, ten and six. Let's take a look before and after. I think it's definitely convenient with this improvement that we have here. Now at this moment, something that we will do it to be able when you go in the adjustment here. You can, for example, improve a little bit the general exposure. And I don't need to put too much, but maybe I can try with 0.2. Let's try increase a little bit more, maybe 0.4, just like that, and it's going to be good. I will improve all the colors with the vibrance and saturation adjustment. We'll put the vibrant on the right. Let's put at least ten and the saturation, let's put something like maybe 30. And the vibrant may be 60%. Yes, 16%. So as you can see, we can reinforce with vibrant adjustment just like this. And if you want to make something stronger, don't hesitate to increase the vibrant or to increase, also, for example, the value of the saturation. Just like that. After to do this type of work, if I just continue, let's focus with the wise balance. So more cold color or more warm color depending on what we want to do. We can also generate some contrast as well, just like that. I think in this case, I will put a little bit more warm color, not too much, but I can create a small effect maybe around 10%. And for the tint is the same. I will move little bits of tint like maybe let's try with 12, and here, let's try with maybe we have ten it's too much. Let's put 12 and 6%. Let's take a look before and after. I will complete also this adjustment, so I will go here again with as I explained, the color balance is also very interesting because you can focus on the shadows, midtones, or atlights. If I define the atlight I can change the color of the atlat. Let's take a look on the sky area, and you can adjust the color of the sky using this one, magenta, green, and more. I will put a little bit more magenta, Minus ten. Maybe I will put a little bit more yellow as well, -12 and a little bit more red on this area like maybe 6%. I will be able to switch for the shadows and impact the shadow areas, the shadows area of your original image because here it's less shadows but of the original image. And for this, we can put more red or more sound depending on what I want to do or more magenta or more green or more yellow or more blue. So what I will do in this case, I will put a little bit more magenta. So here we put maybe minus hoops is definitely too strong. Let's put Minus two. On this area, I will put maybe two. And here we have the yellow area and the blue area. Definitely, it depends maybe minus two, and we can maybe work like this. I think maybe the magenta is not pretty convenient here. I will adjust I would put a little bit more green like something like this. Here. So that's it. At this moment, I think we can almost finish this. We just need to reinforce the details, and to reinforce the details, I will click here. I will select clarity, and I will improve the strength, just like that. I will improve the strength, and I will put something like 30%. We can stop here. We can take a look with the background layers, and we'll put the background layers on the top just here. So at this moment, is the image before and this is after before and after. Let's zoom maybe on this area before, after. Before, after. Let's take a look here, before and after. Let's take a look on this area before or after, and this one before. After. Let's take a look here, before and after. Let's take a look here as well. And before, after. So we're going to come back here and it's okay for the improvement on this image. 126. Photo landscape 2: In this training, we're going to improve this image. And for this, it will be to be able to see how to process with the different adjustment. So first, what problem we have on this image, we don't have big problem of exposure even if we can make betters, and we can really definitely improve the colors, and we'll be able to reinforce some area and also to improve the details. For things to do, we are going to make correction at lights and shadows, even if we don't use too much. And as I explained before, you have different way to process. And generally we start with the liver adjustment or the curves adjustment. In this case, I will start with the levers adjustment. And what I will do, I will focus with output black levers, and with output black levers, I will just lighten little bit the shadows with 6%, and I will decrease little bit output wise levers to darken little bit of sky with 90%. And I will just validate this first adjustment. Then we will create another one, and after to do this one, I can reinforce with some brightness contrast. We'll use some brightness contrast here and we will define more contrast. I don't need to put too much, but I think we can focus around 20% for the contrast, and we can also work with the brightness. I will put just a value of 6% for the brightness because I will focus after with a general exposition. Beyond this image, we can put again more contrast. And in this image, maybe contrast, I think it's powerful between the pagodas and this area. So we'll put 30%. So after to do this work, what we will do we will define another adjustment and we can work with a general exposure. So I will say the general exposure, we increase a little bit. We don't need to put too much. I think I can put only a value like maybe, I think I will put only 0.2. So I will tap zero here and we will tap 0.2. Then we can get out to increase a little bit this exposure, and you can see the difference here with this one. So now we have to have better colors and the simple adjustment to make better colors is just to use the vibrants. As you can see, it's pretty simple. You increase the saturation of your image just like this. I think here's too much. Maybe we can work around 30 and you can mix with the vibrant as well. Maybe you can work with 30 and in this case, maybe 26 or maybe you can increase a little bit more 36 and 26. Yeah let's just step 36 and 26, just like this. As you can see, it's quite powerful to really reinforce the different color. So now if you want to reinforce some specific colors, you can use saturation luminosity. But as I explained as well, you can use also the selective colors. In this case, let's just change for selective colors. And if I define, for example, in this case, I will define maybe the green, define, for example, the red. I will zoo little bit, and as you can see, I can adjust little bit the red area here. And maybe we can put a little bit more yellow. I will put a little bit more yellow, a little bit more magenta, just like this. And for the show, maybe we can increase a little bit. And I will just click out and you can see the small difference that well. It's not a lot, but it was just to use this adjustment again. And we will repeat this adjustment a second time adjustment. We've seen before the satuation luminosity. You can work a little bit on the same process using selective color, but here you cannot select directly a range of color is a color picker, but you can just choose a range of color here. Let's apply the green, and we can take a look about this area, and I will focus with the magenta value. And I will reduce the magenta value -40 for the yellow, I will increase a little bit like maybe 60%. And here this is the son value and what we can do. I think with the son value, we can increase as well, like 40% also. Go to keep the black to zero, and we have a small adjustment, not too much, but as you can see, it's pretty decent, just like that. Now, something that I will do, I will click on this area and we can use directly we can use directly on order adjustment, the channel mixers. So I think the channel mixer. The channel mixer can be convenient, and we can select a range of pixels here. So for example, if I work inside the red, I can adjust the value of green and we can create different effect. So it depends about the channels that we choose. If I select the blue channels, I can make more red colors. So here I'm going to put a little bit more red color like 10%. And for the green, maybe we can keep 0%. And I think I can stay like this. Inside So green, we can put a little bit less here. I think it's not extremely convenient. Let's just apply only 6% for the red here, and for the blue, we can maybe create a small effect on the sky if we reduce -10%, just like that. And if I select the blue, you have make adjustment, and if I select the red, maybe we can work with the blue and put little bit more blue like six and minus four. So here there is not only one way to process for this. Now at this moment, we can, for example, stop here, and I put two times the channel's mixer adjustment. So here, this is the first one, and on this one, I don't want, so I'm going to remove. And just to finish my work, we can apply filters. So I'll say filters as I explained before, the clarity factors can be pretty good to reinforce the level of details. So if we take a look on the sky, you can see the difference with a clarity. And if I take a look here also, you can see the difference with clarity. Let's improve a lot. With the clarity, I will put maybe 80%. I think it's too much for the sky, so I will reduce 60% and I will just validate. So to see my difference before, after, I will select the background layers and I will go right click, I will duplicate. Then I will put these background layers on the top. And after to do this one, we can see the difference before and after. I can zoom little bit before before, now and after. If I zoom on the pagoda, we can see also before and after. This is a way to process. If you are satisfied, you can just click on your background layer just like this, and you can just delete. We can also place all the adjustment inside these layers, even if you only have one layer here, so it's not extremely important if we don't do this. 127. Post part 2: We're going to continue with the trainings. We have seen how to place different images inside frame with the structure using the columns and rows. What we're going to do, we are going to add content. So for this first, I will create a rectangle, so we'll selex the rectangle tools, and I will generate rectangles around this area and we will change the color of these rectangles. I will go here we define some orange color like maybe around this one, and I will put my rectangles first in the center. Maybe I will adjust a little bit the size on the wide just like this or the eight. Let's work around this area. Maybe I can extend just a little bit, and I will place my rectangles around here. What I would like to do for these rectangles, I would like to maybe I will reduce scale little bit and scale little bit here. I will add directly a stroke. So we'll go on the options here and on the options, we'll define the white color or the strokes, and we can increase the size. So here we can increase the size, as you can see, we have 40 pixels here. So if we work with white for this one, I think in the convenience, we can work around ten, but maybe ten is a little too much. Let's just try, I will just tap ten, just like this. I think ten will be a little too big. So let's just reduce, I will tap only eight. And after that, I can check that. Maybe we can scale again a little bit on the direction in the direction, and I will put perfectly my rectangle in the center with aligment center and center. After that, I can tap some text inside. And for this, we'll select artistic text tools and left click and I will just tape Travel Japan. So we'll tape Travel, Japan, we will switch the color or wise and I will change the font family on this area. You have multiple element for font family, and I will use the font family frank lane heavy to have strong font family like this. I will scale a little bit, place in the center, and then we can duplicate, edit, duplicate layers, and I will put this one here and I will reduce a little bit. And I will change and I will tap this covert pulse. I need to have trouble jabon a little bigger but the white, first I will scale, and I will place around here, and this one I will reduce just like that, maybe here. If you want to have specific dimensions, maybe this one, if I go on the top, we can put this one at maybe 22, just like that. And this one maybe we can adjust with a value of 14, just like that. And now we place discover temple around here. We'll adjust the position after more in details. Maybe this one we can switch at 16. Let's take a look if the why is convenient and I think it's a little too big, I will come back to, or maybe we can scale this 124 like this, and I can put maybe a little bit more wide for my element. Maybe this image, I can adjust a little bit of position on the left, see the temples here, and I think like this is convenient. Let's take this rectangle center again, center center here. I'll create different stars. I'll see the star tools, and we go on the left, we define the star tools here. And I will press shift to generate my stars, why it is like this because I need to remove the stroke, so I will remove the stroke, and for the stars colors, we put the white color. Then after to do this work, I will change the inner radius will increase a little bit with 46, and I will place my stars around here for the size I think it's convenient and I will duplicate. So I did duplicate layers and I will place one on the right, and di duplicate layers and another one here. Then we'll select this one, edit duplicate layers, and we'll place another one on the left, Edit duplicate layers, and we'll place another one plus here. I think like this, it's convenient. Let's just adjust the distribution of the stars and the alignment. Let's select all the stars with shift, and I will go on the alignment panels. On the alignment panels, we can use haliged midals and we can also use distribute space horizontally. Then we can generate a group, group stars just like this and you can show hging and moving the stars. Now we just need to place the element where we want. I don't want specific if I want to have the same space here and here, we can place travel Japan where we want, discover temples where we want, and a group of stars. And if we select the sue element, this, we can go alignment. Plus I can check adding center alignment. Oops, I think it was not working properly. Let's select again. So we can check in center alignment, and we can check a space vertically, sis. And with this content, we can generate another groups. So I will two groups again, just this. And we can dragging and moving the text to perfectly center. If it was not center, you can check the alignment panels and line center ling midls just like this. It's important to have the right legment and the right distribution between the different element. And for this, how you can do, you can use a guide. You can use columns and rows, you can use alignment panels. You can use also some different indications that you have when you move the different elements. I will go on the right. Here we can rename. We just tap the rectangle, so I can just tape rectangle for this one. Here we have a group so I can just rename some group for content just like that. And inside, we can even rename maybe I can tape something like titles number one. So here we can tape titles number one. This one I will t double click and I will tape titles number two. And here we can double click and we will tap maybe stars and that's all. This is how we can create this post, I just click here to activate the preview even if here we don't have frame text, so it's going to be okay. But in some case, you can activate the preview. It can be pretty better to activate the render. 128. Selections part 1: We're going to see how to work with selection. For this, we're going to see how we can copy past selection, how we can delete a selection, how we can refine selection. First, I have this image with this document, and at the same time, I selected this image and at the same time, I selected this image. Well, the first thing that I want to show you is, for example, when you go on the options on the top here, pixels, pixel selection, you have all the options here. Select the select, select, invert, and more option. And here you will be able to adjust the selection. The first thing that I'm going to do is if you want to select all, for example, all the layers, you can all the element. You can just go on layers, select on layers, not on layers, go on pixels. Pixel selection, select here. And thanks to that, you can select all the layers. And if you press Escape, you can diselct even if you can also delect when you go on the panels, it means pixels. Pixel selection diselct just like that. So this is the first things to understand. You can also use shortcut Control A, if you wanted to select all the layers. Not on a selection, but just to select all the layer, you can also press Control A. So now what I wanted to show you, I'm going to use one of these tools to select the face of the woman. So I will click here. I will select the fluid selection tools, and I will define a tolerance like 12, and I will click on the background. I will select the layers first, and I will click on the background. So thanks to that, I can select this background. How you can delete what you have in a selection. To delete what you have to the selection, you have two options. The first option is just to press delete on the keyboard and when you press Delete on the keyboard, you can delete what you have in your selection as you can see, and I will be on the transparency backgrounds. If I undo the second option, just to go and edit. Here, you don't need to go in pixels. You can directly go and edit and you have directly delete and it will delete what you have selected. Concretely, here the selection. You can also find on this area Control A, and Diselt Control D. Even if to deselt generally, you can just press escape or click outside. It's pretty more descent. If you want to delete, you just click on delete and you can delete, as you can see what you have selected. And if you press Escape or click outside, you can just deselect. Now if you want to copy and past, this one is pretty simple as I explained, but before to see how to copy and past, we're going to see how to invert the selection. We invert the selection, you can press Shift Control A, or you go in pixels, you define pixel selection and you can define invert, Control, Shift A, Control Shift A. And when I click here, I can invert the selection. I'm going to show you again, Control, Shift A, I invert. Now the background is selected, and if I want to select the face of the woman, Control Shift A, and I can invert again. Then we will go and edit, I will copy the selections, and I will go here, and I will pass the selection as well. I will go and edit, and I will pass the selections. Then I will reduce. I will go here. And I will pass the selection just like that. And that's it. So we'll pass the selection just on this area. Now you can refine selections. Before to see exactly how to refine selections, we'll click here, will press Scape and I will select this image. I will use another type of tools. I will use, for example, the object, not the object section to the selection Brush tool. And I would like to go left click to select the flower just like this. I will stay left click to be able to select the flower. After to define this, I can adjust the selection. We will be able to click on refine. I will show you after how exactly you can refine. But first of all, I will go in pixels. And when you go in Pixel selection, you can have more options here. Grow Shing fizzers, smooth, refined edges or hotlines. One of the first things that you can do it is grow shings. So when I click here, I can, for example, extend my selection with pixels. And if I define ten pixels, I will just click on Apply. And as you can see, I extended my selection from ten pixels, and sometimes it can be useful. Or I can define because maybe I'm not going to have good precision, I can reduce my selection. And for this, I will go one more time in pixels. I will select pixel selections, growing, and this time, I will enter a negative value with Minus, and I will enter maybe Minus two. I will just click on apply, and if I zoom here, as you can see, we can reduce from two pixels this selection. And in some case, it can be pretty decent to have more precision just like this. Now if I don't want that, I can just undo this raa. Now, if I just continue when I go on pixels, if I select pixel selection, I can use also smooth. And if you click on Smooth, you will lose precision. But you can smooth your selection. You can define your radius just like and as you can see, you can see the preview option here. So if I apply smooth value, maybe I apply this one. As you can see, it's not really to reduce the section, it just to smooth the selection. And in this case, you will lose quality, not lose quality, you will lose precision. But in a few case, it can be convenient to use this one. In my case, I don't want to use this one, but it was just to show you. I want to copy and pass the selection, I will press Control C, and I will copy the selection. Don't forget to select the layer and it's not going to work properly. So I will press Control C. Now the selection is realized, and I will click here and I will press Control V, and I will pass the selection on this. Yeah. So it's important to understand these different way of selection and how to refine. And if you want to have access to all the opportunity to refine, because we work in the Pixel studio. You can go and pixels. You can select Pixel selection, and all the option will be here. You have also some different shortcut. Don't forget that here it's only for pixels. It's only for pixels and don't forget you can also use this one to copy and past a selection. So you can copy past the selection. You can also duplicate layers or a selection here, and you have also the possibility to delete or you press delete on the keyboard if you want to delete a selection. 129. Selections with colors part 1: We're going to see how to make selections, and for this, we're going to use. In this case, different selection. It is selection with more precision that you can do. And first, you have the object selection tool. Here the selection brush tool and the flute selection tool. So for this, I selected this image, and I selected this image. First tool that we are going to see in the selection, it is object selection tools. So as I explained before, you need when you select these selection tools to download the features in the preferences. And after when you can do, you can just click on the layers. You just need to go left click just one left click and automatically is going to recognize the object on the foreground and the object on the background. So after to wait for a while, as you can see if you go outside here, as you can see, defines the backgrounds. And if you go here, you will define the forgroo. And if I just go left click here, automatically, he will create the selection depending on what you choose. And we can have this one or we can have this one. As you can see, the selection is pretty good, definitely, even if we just don't have all the element here, but the selection is pretty good. And after that, if I go and edit, I decide to copy the selection, and I will go on this area and I will pass the selection. And I will go here and I will pass the selection just like that. Then I will reduce and after to reduce here, I will pass my selection around this area, and I will just validate with left click here. I want to scale, I can scale little bit more. And if I zoom here, you can see the selection is pretty decent. So this is the type of selection that we can do. Just press a scape, I can do this also in this area. And for this, I can use Object Selection tool. Don't forget to click on the layers, and you just need to wait and automatically, you will recognize on the layer an element on the forerun and element on the background. Now, as you can see, he can define this one and he can define this one as well. So if I want to have the flower, I can just go left click and automatically, the flower will be selected. After it depends here on this area, we have this part selected. Maybe we can adjust, but if we don't want, we can just validate this type of selection. I can press Control E and hoops, not control E, I can press Shift Control E and I can invert and if I press delete, this will be, as you can see, my selection, I can just click outside with the selection tool just like this. So let's just come back on this area. So this is what we can do. So after to do this type of work, I will come back on this area just like this, and we will change the tool. The second tool is a selection brush tool. With the selection brush tool, what you can do, you can use add or subtract and you define a size of a brush. You define the size of the brush I will increase little bit of size and you select your layer and you can just go you can just go one left click to select some area. But if you want to make something faster, you can just stay left click and you can just select like this and you can stay like left click. Automatically he will recognize area with contrast. And automatically, we can create also this selection in a very fast way using these tools. If you want to remove Area, you click on substract and you can remove Area, as you can see. And if you click on ad, you go, for example, inside and I can add selection again. Or it is another way to process. You have Snap two. Generally, it's pretty decent to keep when you work with this. You can also refine selections, but I will explain in a different sessions how you can refine selections. Oops, I will subtract little bit here, and I will come back on hard and maybe, we'll select this area. So after to do this work, I will go and hit it, and I will copy the selection, and I will go here. And I could pass the selection again, but on this area, we have already this image. So in this case, I'm not going to copy and paste. So if, for example, I invert the selection, I can press Shift Control E and I can invert the selection if I press delete, as you can see, I can delete the background. Then I can press escape. I could, for example, craft new layers and put these pixel layers on the back. And when I go on the right, I can select the fruit field tools, define colors. I will define this blue color, and I will fill this. As you can see, I can change the backgrounds using this way, for example. Just an example to what you can do. If I want to come back, I will click here, and I think I will come back with a history panel. It's pretty more decent in my case to just recuperate this view, and I will press Escape like this. Now if I go on this area, we're going to select the flower using the same tool. I will click here. I will select the selection brush tool. We define a size. I will reduce bit the size in this case, and after that, I think it's too big. And after that, I can just go inside and left click and I can stay Left click if I want to make something faster, but I can also stop the left click and left click again to continue my selections. So after to do this type of work, as you can see, it's pretty fast. You can have contrast between the flower and the backgrounds, and the selection is pretty decent. I will copy and pass the selection. I will go and edit this time, and I will click on Copy. Don't forget to select the layer or it's not going to work properly. Edit, copy the selection, and I will go here, edit and pass the selection. I will pass the selection here will reduce the size, and I will just click and validate these selections. So as you can see, we have these different tools. So Object Selection tool, this is how to work very powerful. You can also use the selection brush tools. And after I will explain how to use the fruit selection tools to work with colors. And in this case, it will be also interesting. So all this type of selection with this image, you can use the Swiss selection tools to obtain the same type of renters. 130. Photo landscape 3: In this training, we're going to improve this image. Ps will go on the right and first thing to do is to duplicate the layers. We'll go right click and duplicate the layer. What problems we have on this image. So concretely, we have this area on the atlights area, it is too bright. And on this area, it is too dark. Concretely, we are problems between the atlights and the shadows. So we need to adjust the atlights here, and we need to adjust the shadows because it is too dark on the river area and the different buildings area here. Then we will improve the colors, will change a little bit general colors, and we can also improve the details. So first adjustment that I would use, I will go in the adjustment here, and what we will use first, we will use levers. So I will select my lever adjustment. I will zoom a little bit. And what we can do, we can work on the output. So here I can change the output. If I move the output black levers, I can a little bit lighten the shadow, so it means this area. I need to be careful to not put too much. I'm just going to put maybe six. We have the output wise levers, and this one will allow you to darken a little bit at light. So it means more the sky area, and we can decrease a little bit. Maybe I can put something like 90. After what can be interesting in this image, it is to use the Gamma correction. And with the gamma correction, you can impact more and offset. And if I go on the left, as you can see, you can lighten all this area just moving the Gamma correction on the left. And in this case, maybe I can put around 0.82. So thanks to that, I can make this type of correction. Or the black levers and the white leval I'm not going to touch and I will get out here. So now let's take a look about the deference before and after. If I zoom at this area, you can see the difference before and after. So this is the type of correction that we can do. After to make this type of corrections, I will adjust little bit general contrast. So I will see brightness contrast here, and this is a general brightness and this is a contrast. So first I will put a little bit contrast, not too much, I will just put something like maybe 12, and this is a general brightness and we'll reduce a little bit of general brightness at minus two. And I can put again, little bit contrast after that. After to do this type of work, I can improve all the different colors. So we'll select Vbnds here. And in the vibrans I will improve the colors. I will increase the vibrance value like maybe 20%, and I will increase also the saturation value like maybe around 30%. And I will obtain this no. Maybe you can come back to the brightness contrast, and I will put little bit more contrast like 16, and I can reduce brightness, but minus two will be pretty convenient. Now because we have headlight area and more shadow area here, something interesting can be to work with different colors. So first, I will select on this area the white balance. So thanks to the while balance, we can put more warm color or more cold color. If I go here, more warm color or here, more clclor. Depends a little bit about the render that we want to define. In this case, I will t I will change a little bit general render of my image, and I will put more warm color with yellow. And on this area, we can put more green or more magenta, and I will define more magenta with maybe 24 just like that. And using the wise balance, as you can see, we can make a little bit more warm colors. And I think on this image definitely can be convenient. If I just continue here, something that we can use also is on this area, we have the color balance. Why is the color balance? It's interesting because you can change color on the shadows, Mtons or at lights. For example, on the atlight it means the sky area, you can make more red or more blue colors or more magenta or green or more yellow or blue. So in this case, I will visit the parameters first, yes. And I will put a little bit more yellow just like this. Meten, I will put a little bit more magenta as well, just like this. A little bit more red color also maybe ten. I will work also on the shadows. And on the shadows the same I will put a little bit more magenta, a little bit more yellow, but really not too much, maybe just minus two. Magenta maybe minus six or something like this or minus four. And for the red area, we can also improve. So maybe I will put value of ten and for the magenta, maybe -400, maybe -4%, just like that. We increase little bit, minus six, and I will obtain this winds here. Now after to do all this type of work, we have the possibility at this moment after this correction to maybe work a little bit with exposure. So it means we can see the exposure and decrease or increase a little bit to exposure. And in this case, I will increase, but with just a very small value like 0.2. I think the render is convenient. I can maybe increase the level of details. And for this we will use two options. First, I will define filters. So this time we'll go on filters, and we can use clarity. And with clarity, I will zoom little bit, we can increase strength, just like this, and I will put something like maybe 30 and after that, I will use also filters, and we will select texture. And we get texture, will increase a little bit of strength, just like this so you can see the difference, and I will put maybe 30 or the radius around 40%. We can eventually adjust a little bit with a compression, just put ten, and I think it will be convenient with the texture as well. So now what we will do we put the backgroun layers, totally on the back, put on the top to see the difference. This is the image before. And if I click here, I can see the render after Zoom all bit on this area. This is the image before, and this is the image after just like this. Image before and image after here. 131. Styles part 2: We are going to continue with the styles. We have seen how to add different elements on this area, and we have seen how to create a character style. For this one you go write, you have text tile here, and we have created a style Title one and style title two. Now we'll create paragraph style. Write a paragraph style, you can not select anything and just create your paragraph style. The interest to select an element is just to have the preview. So I can select to element, and here you can find paragraph style on this area. So it is the same principle. The only difference that instead to have on character with typography, all the parameters of the paragraph as well. So first, I will select style here, I will change and I will tape style graph, or maybe I will change just type style content Number one. And based on no styles type paragraph, and I will go into character features first, and I will select maybe I will use yes. I will use Candaads here. I will use font style, just keep regular. I will select a font style, and I will put maybe ten just like this. Then you have some color and decoration. I will keep the font color with black position and transform, so we can adjust. We can even adjust the baseline if we need a language typography as well. And now you have all the paragraph option. So you can select a paragraph option. And for example, the first option is adjustment. So I can select, for example, justify left just like this. And I can apply a left indent. So I will apply you can apply your left indent for example, and I will apply maybe six, and I will apply a right indent also in this example. Here you have the spacing, tap stop so spacing also left intent justification, you can change a little bit of justification value. Let's put 90% and you can have access to all the other option if you need some decoration or anything like this. Let's just make these basic things, validate and I created these options. Now I will create another paragraph style. So we'll click again on create a new paragraph styles. We'll go Style here, Bd 40 based on the last style. But if you want to come back with just no style, and I will change for style. And I will rename for content. Number two, content, number two. After that, we'll go in the character features, and we have also the font families here. But we change the font family. Water we use in this case, the change for maybe Hebrma after we have the font style, I would select regular font size as well. And what we will use we will use maybe ten as well. And then you have the color and decoration, I will keep maybe the font color, I will stay in black, position and transforms. Maybe I will apply a little bit horizontal scale. Let's put 100 tens. And after I have all the paragraph options, and I will apply just first line indent, first line indent on the paragraph, just like this with a value maybe of 12. And for the spacing tap top after I will keep this tification and I will just validate just like that. So now on this paragraph here, I will come back to no style just like this. Now why it is useful? How to apply a style to apply your style, you select the elements that you need. You set the style that you want. And for example, I can place style one or I can play my style title one, just like this. But you can place on multiple elements. If you press Shift, for example, and I select all the title content with shift just like this, as you can see on the layer panels, and I select textile, I can apply the Title one on all of this. But maybe select, I can select we shift all this one and select the Title two. Now something that I will do, I will select the suit first title content, put title one and the Sui order and put title number two, just. Now I will select the Sui paragraph here, the Sui text frame paragraph here, and I will apply style content number one. And I will slick this paragraph shift, this one, this one, this sweep text frame with a paragraph, and I will apply style content too. Now why it is useful? Because if I want to edit edit the parameters, I don't need to edit on each element. If for example, you have 100 titles with the same parameters. You don't have to edit the 100 text frame. You only need to edit the style one times and it will apply on the 100 text frame. This is why it is useful. Sure, if you only have one page, it's not extremely useful, but if you have multiple page, multiple titles or multiple paragraph with the same parameter, it is useful. For example, you can sell title number one when you go on the right here, can have access to these options, and you can go on dit dit style title number one. And when you go and edit, what you can do, I can make the choice to maybe change the font, and maybe I can change the size and I can finally put 20. I can go in color, and finally, I don't want the orange color, and I want some green color. So I will put some green color, and I will just validate. And as you can see the change is apply on my suite text title friend here at the at my convenience. If I select this one, we have the title number two. Even if you don't select, you don't select anything, you can click on the style, edit here, edit the style number two, and in the color and decoration, maybe this one, I want to change the color for orange, and I would like to change the font as well. So I will change the font, I would select another one like maybe this one, and I will just validate. And as you can see, I apply the change on this sweet title. It works also for the paragraph. So it means I can select my title content one. And as you can see, I have offset on the left and on the right. And I would like to edit this. So I will click here. I will edit start content number one here. And what I will do, I will just go on the paragraph option spacing, and I will remove my left indent and my right indent as well. And I will just valid it and that's it. The transformation will be applied here. And I can select the style content number two, and I will go on the options here, I will edit, and on the edit option in the style content two, I would like to remove the first line indent that we have here. So we will go on the spacing options, paragraph spacing, and we have a first line indent and I will remove. And as you can see, the change will be applied here. So this is why it is useful. If never you remove a style, you can click on the Style, you can go right click and you can delete a style. If you delete a style, automatically, your element with a style will come back at the beginning with no style. If I sedict example, Sitlet Title two, I'm going to click on delete or I'm going to click delete here and the Style content, I'm going to click on delete and we'll come back with just this original edge, as you can see. This is how we can work with the staff. So definitely, it is very convenient to use, and it works a little like the base when you work with a master page. When you work with a master page, you can apply some parameters to different pages at the same time. Here, it's a little bit like the master page, but for the text, and you can apply parameters on multiple text frames at the same time. 132. Photo landscape 5: In this training, we are going to improve this image. For this first, I will go on the right, I will select the layers and right click, I will duplicate the layers. After that, what problems we have on this image? Concretely, we have an area here it is too bright. So on the sky area, we have the atlight and on this area, it is too bright. And it is too much difference between this area. Concretely on this area, as you can see, it's totally too dark. So we don't really see the park on the backgrounds. We don't really see as well some different buildings, and it is too dark on this area. So we need to make adjustment at light shadows, and then we can also make correction about the colors and then improve little bit the details. So first I would go on the right, and the first adjustment that I would use in this case will be the curves adjustment. As I explained with the curves adjustment, you can place different points. I can press first point in the midles. On the right area, we focus on the shadows on the atlight and on the left area on the shadows. I can put a point here and put a point here to define interval from here to here and another one from here to here. Onusly I can take this point and I want to darken the heat light, I need to move the point little bit on this area and we can also adjust on little specific direction. So I will reduce my headlight just like this. Now, if I move this point, I will focus on the shadows area and I can lighten if I dragging and moving little bit on the top, just like this. Here we can make a very interesting correction just using the curves adjustment, as you can see. You can take a look very strong correction with this adjustment. Now I will complete. I will select levers. I'm not going to move too much the levers, but concretely the output black levers, maybe I can increase only 2%. Wood put wise levers, I will reduce maybe 90%. And for the gamma correction, something that we will do is to go a little bit on the left to improve more as well. So here we go a little bit more on the left, maybe 0.86. And at this moment, we have these corrections. So now after to make the right correction between the at lights and shadows, if I want to put little bit contrast, I can do this now. I will select adjustment, I would say brightness contrast, and I can put again a little bit control, but don't put too much or you will have again troubles between the at lights and shadows. So we can put little contrast again, but don't put too much. And for the brightness, maybe we can put little bit brightness as well, maybe only six, and I will just validate. Thanks to that, we can put a little bit more contrast after that with the brightness, contrast adjustment. So at this moment, we can, for example, stay like this. But also the possibility adjustment here to maybe at this moment, increase all the general exposure, and I can increase it bit to general exposure. Maybe I can put zero point. Let's take a look with four, so 0.4, and I will trust validate. On the adjustment, I will reinforce the colors. I will sleck for these vibrant. We improve little bits of vibrant and we improve little bits of saturation as well. Maybe I will put 26 here, and for the vibrant, I will put a value of 12. You can see the difference on all these area with the different trees using the vibrant adjustment, as you can see. Now what we can do if we take a look on the adjustment, we can use a wise balance, and depends about what we want to do. In this case, in this case, what I can do, I can maybe put the wise balance to the sky a little bit more blue, even if we can craft a yellow effect, but maybe in this case, I will put the wise balance on the left here, and for the tint, I will put the ten little bit on the right, maybe 6%. So minus ten and 6% just like that. And I will complete this adjustment with, I will complete this adjustment with color balance. And thanks to that, I can impact at light min shadows. If I go on hat light here, you can impact more the sky area. So I will reduce to have so here, and I will put -12%. After that, we will put a little bit more magenta as well. -20. And here we can put yellow or more blue. So if I want to make a little bit more blue, I can again make some blue area like maybe 10%. And if I just go here, we can see the transformation with color band just a little bit. But I can also here the shadows at light. I can focus also on the shadows. And on the shadows at the opposite, I can add a little bit more red, a little bit more magenta, but I think it's difficult to put too much or maybe a little bit more green in this case. It's difficult to really adjust too much here. Maybe I can put two 8% just like that. I think it's convenient with this type of transformation, we have also very strong improvement on this image. I can just finish my work with little bit details. I will go filters. I can use clarity or texture or the tool. I will just use the clarity in this case, and I will increase the strength just like that. Take a look also about the clothes area here if we increase the strength here. Maybe I will put 40%. And that's it. I think it's convenient for this image. I will go on the bottom, I will see the background layers. I will place the background layers on the top, just here. After to place the background layer, we can see the image. So this is the image before and after, before and after. So as you can see a very strong improvement. So if we take a look just here. So before and after, I take a look here before and after. I take a look maybe on this area, so before and after. So as you can see very interesting improvement on this image. 133. Photo landscape 1: In this training, we're going to improve this image and we will be able to see the process to use different adjustment step by step. So for this, when we take a look on this image, what problems we have? We don't have big problem about the exposure, even if we can increase a little bit. Concretely, we can improve a lot of colors on this image. We can reinforce also different area and we can make something better on this image. So for things to do, I'm going to zoom a little bit here and one of the first adjustments that we will use in the process, as I explained before, when we click on adjustment, if you want to make correction at lights shadows, you can focus on levers, and you have also the possibility to focus on levers and to focus on the curves. Here, in this case, I will use levers. I will play the levers adjustment here. You can see the histogram on the back and I will focus with the output. So here with the output, we will work with little bit with output wise lever, we will reduce a little bit, and the output black lever will increase a little bit. Not too much, maybe we can put a value of six and 90. Here we have also the black levers and the wise lever, but I'm not going to change that because I will put little bit contrast after. We just adjust in this way. We have also the Gamma corrections just here. I think we can put the Gamma correction a little bit on the left, but in this case, we just keep a value of, we just keep a value of one in this case. So second adjustment that I'm going to use for this image, we can put the layer adjustment inside, but because we only have one layer, we can just let outside. So I will just click here and another one that I will use it is the brightness contrast. So we'll selling the brightness contrast. We'll put the little bit contrast just like this. And we have also the general brightness, and I will put maybe eight. I think the brightness is too much just 6% and the contrast I will put 12. At this moment, just after that, if you want to make a correction on exposure, you can use exposure adjustment. Even if you can use also at the end. I will use the exposure here at this moment. As you can see it's pretty fast about the exposure, so I can just put maybe very little value like 0.2 or something like this, maybe around. And even the exposure, I think it's not extremely convenient in this case, maybe just 0.2. After to do this type of work, interesting way it is to improve the colors. So to improve the colors, I will go on adjustment. And the basic adjustment that you can use is a vibrance and saturation. So I will increase the saturation here on all the image. Let's make something maybe a little stronger with 60, and we can use also the vibrant and I will use 20. Even if I can also reduce a little bit, maybe I can use 20 and 40 and you can take a look before, after and before and after as well, just like this. This one is a vibrant adjustment. Now if I want to reinforce a specific area, I can use adjustment and use saturation luminosity. With a U saturation luminosity, as I explained before, you can select a range of colors and you can click on the pictures. And for example, if I define this area, I can just increase the saturation more only on this area. And maybe I can put 16 to reinforce this one. We can use also with the luminosity or change little bit the U as well. And maybe I will change a little bit the U on the right, just here. And if I just click outside, you can see the difference and we can increase in this way, little bits. I could also repeat maybe this process or second time for the blue area. So for this, we will go on adjustment one more time, and we will select saturation value. We'll click on one of these, select the color pictures and define this color here. Then we can one more time adjust little bit of color depending on what we want to obtain. Maybe I can go a little bit on the left, just here, and we can increase the saturation as well as you can see. You can see we have better saturation on this area, but on this area as well. We can also focus with the luminosity di increase. In this case, I will just keep zero. At any moment, you can come back, so it means if I want to increase the vibrant adjustment, I can increase again. If I want to increase the saturation and the vibrant, we can just make some change. Just like this. So I think like this, it's pretty decent. Maybe you can make a small adjustment of temperature. We can go with the wise balance, and with a wise balance, I can put maybe something more. I think in this case, I will go a little bit on the left, and I will put maybe -6%. And for the tent, we will go a little bit on the right with maybe 6%, just like this, not too much. Okay. As you can see, I think it's pretty decent different correction here. I can't stop here, but we can reinforce little bits of detail this time with filters. And as I explained before, when you click on the filters option here, you can use, for example, clarity. And if I select clarity here, it can be powerful to use at the end if you want to reinforce the details. Will zoom a little bit, and I will increase the strength. Here's the strength, it's at 100%. Maybe it's too much. Let's zoom little out to see the difference, just like this. Yeah, I think it's quite powerful. And in this image, I can put at least 60%, and I will just click here, just like that. If you want to see the render of your image at the end, you click on the first layers. You just double click, you duplicate the layers. You play these first layers, for example, on the top, and thanks to that, you can see your image before. This one is the image before and you just add the layers and you can see the image after. And thanks to that, if you want to reinforce more, for example, if I want to increase the quarity again, I can increase if I want to improve with the wise balance, I want to adjust again, maybe I can put Minuten, and in this case, I will put maybe ten, I can adjust as well. And thanks to that, you can see the difference before, after and before and after. If you are satisfied, you can just remove these duplicated layers, just like this. We have only one layers, but if you have multiple layers, you can put this inside so layers just like this. 134. Text part 1: We're going to see how to add text. For this, we're going to work with the layout mode because in the layout mode, this is a mode where you will use the most text with the most features. So first to add a text when you go on this area, you have two options. The first option is a frame text tools and the second option, the artistic text tools. So before to see the frame text tool, we see the artistic text tool because it is the most simple. And I will just go left click. You can drag and move letters. And after to drag and move letters, you can tape your text. So for example, I can tape something inside and I will just tape title example. So after to do this type of work, something that we can do, we can place the text, you can when you use the section tool dragging and moving, and it works like an object. And when you have this text, you can just scale, and as you can see, the frame will fit perfectly your content automatically. So this is artistic text tools. So the frame will perfectly fit the content. Now what option you have the basic options will be on the top here, and the basic option is to change the font family. So first, you can change with any font family here. You have different type of option. I'm not going to make all the option, but you have many types of options and font family that you can use in this list as you can see. So you can define many types of font family. So after to do this work, if I just come back to the original font family, here in this area, we have areas. You can depending on the font change, you have different options. You can put narrow, you can put bold, you can put Italic. So you have different type of option, bold, Italic or again black. So this one is a different option. I'm going to come back to regular in this case. Can change the size here so you can define the size. Even if with your Section two, you can also just scale like this and it will change automatically the size. You can also click to increase the font size with a fast way or decrease the font size here. On this area, you can change, and sometimes you can put the letter directly lowercase or uppercase or sentence case with the first letter, uppercase or title case just like this. So sometimes it is useful as well because at the beginning, I was uppercase. Even if you have the different option, you can put again in bold, Italic, you can put underline as well. You can put strikeout also, and here you have superscript also, and you can use subscribe. So you have a lot of type of options. On this area, you can change the color, so you can change the color of the text. And if you have something like rderline you can also change the frame just on the back. The der line you can change, but in a type of way, we'll explain before. So here you can have at light color around your text, you can define at light color as well. Here is the justification, so it's not useful in this case, and in this case, it is a space also between different elements. So here, it's not useful as well. When you go on the right, you can have information about the style. I will explain the style in a different way. But first, when you go in this character panel, you can have multiple type of options as well. So I will explain after the paragraph when we will work with the text tools. Here we can focus on the character. So as I explained, when you go in Window here, text, we put the character panels, paragraph panels, and textile panels to have advanced features. So first, I will change, and I will come back to the black colors, and I will selck one more time a artistic text tools, and I will just dragging and moving, and I will tape something like example, content Tutorial. I will tape something like this, and then I will scale, so I will scale my element. Just like that, I will place my element around here, and then I will double click at the end, and I will press Enter, and I will tape the same type of thing. I will press Enter again, and I will tape one more time the same type of thing, just like this. Andama can make a mistake. Let's tape Content tutorials and I will continue with again example content tutorials. So now after to do this type of work, as you can see, I will go on the right in the character options. But we can find again the basic option that we have here on this area. O correctly, you can change again the font family for these panels. You can also change again the size for these panels if you need, and you can find again the decoration option. But you have even more option here, like two underline, for example, and it is same you can apply two stroke options. And here you can change. For example, you can select underline, and you can define a color for the underline value, as you can see. And it is same. Here, I'm going to deactivate this one so you can underline this. And it is same, you can also if I deactivate this one, I can use, for example, this, and I can also define a color, as you can see. But here you have more advanced options and you can come back with nod for the colors. Here on this area, you can also change the color just like this. And this one, you need to apply a wide, and as you can see, you can apply on the letters directly a stroke. Youm going to deactivate strike out and you can apply stroke directly on the letters with a color and you can extend or reduce it'll be the size. Just like that, and you can also tap exactly the size that you want. Here I'm going to have two. Here I'm going to have one, for example. So more and more options. If I just click here, I can come back to none. After if I take a look, you have different type of transformation. For example, what you can do. After this error here, it is the present I'm going to show you this one. And this one, as you can see, you can put your text in Italy but using angle value in degrees. You can also define the space between your different element of content. So this is the tracking just like this. And you can change the space as you can see between your letters, just like that. You can also use horizontal scale, so you increase the size of the letters horizontally. And here this is vertical scale. You increase the size of the letters vertically. And just on the left, you can define the space between the line. Not the space between lies the offset between the first line or the last line, and here you can define the space between the different lines, just like this. Here after that, you have the language, some alignment, and sometime it can be useful. I will show you after in the paragraph the justification because in this case, it's not extremely useful in this case. So this is how we can work with these tools, artistic text tools. It's more useful when you work, for example, with title or just one sentence content, you can use more these tools. After if you want to add more content, you will use the frame text tool. It will be better. But when you have something like a title or anything like this, these tools can be totally enough and you will focus to the character options. 135. Wrap text part 1: Going to see how to work with wrap text. So for this to work with rap text, the first thing that we're going to do it is to see first, what is the principle, and after that, we will make concrete example. So ap text, what is this? It is to wrap the text around, for example, a frame like image, and it can be extremely useful. The first thing that I'm going to do it is to select the frame text tools. And with the frame text tools, we'll go left click here, we'll generate a frame just like that, and I will go right click to insert a filler text. Now what I will do, I will select all these filler text. We can adjust here with, for example, a side will take with 12. And at this moment, I'm going to I'm not going to justify. We just play the text around here. Now I would select a text frame. I would say the picture frame rectangle tools, and I will create the text frame around here. And what I will do I will use replace image. And I replace the image, I replace the image with the road as an example, just like this. And something that I will do at the same time, it is to select also these tools, and it works for any type of shape. It can be just a shape like rectangles or it can be image frame, but it can be also image frame convert on any type of shapes, and it works in the same way. I will press shift to keep the proportion just like that, and I will replace the image, and I will define another image like for example, this one inside, and I will just scale little bit and move inside just here. So let's first see with the first image like this. Oops, I think I move on. So I will reduce bit the size of the picture frame. So after to do this type of work, let's see the basic of the wrap text. To have access to the options, you click on the object that you want. You go on the text options, and what you can find you can find text wrap. And here you have short text wrap settings, just like that. Now you have these panels, very interesting panels by default were known. So it means the text is on the back of the image, not around on the back. If you click here jump, the text will be on the top and on the bottom, but not on the left and not on the right, as you can see. So this one in jump, you can see the symbol here and the text with a line on the top and on the bottom. If you click on square, the text will be on the top, bottom, left and right. And if you're dragging and moving the image, you can see that the text will follow the rules that we displayed here. I see jump, as you can see, it's going to be in the same way. Odor points is tight, so it will be perfectly around. But here, it's useful when you have something circular, so in this case, it's not going to change anything. Inside the text is inside the image. How you can check that? You can just go on if I move here, you can go on your layers and you can decrease the transparency value to get out of this window, as you can see the text is inside. Sometimes you can decrease the transparency and generate ef. This is where you can use this edge, it will be inside and outside. So if, for example, I decrease, again, the transparency, you can see the text is inside and outside as well. This is all the different options. If I just click on node here, as you can see, the text is perfectly on the back, just like that. This is why we can use this one. So in this case, maybe I can use chum depending on what I want to do or square, for example. Just like that. But if, for example, you use something like square and I display here, you need to understand that it will be more interesting if you justify your text. So for example, I can scale little bit my image, and if you justify your text, you select your text here and you decide to justify, for example, left, as you can see, it will fit better now around the image. The problem is, if I go here, the problem is the space. So we don't have any space between the image and the element. This is why you have distance from text. First you can wrap to both sides or sometimes a larger side. Sometimes it is also a possibility. And you can work with a distance on the left. So you can define, for example, six millimeter on the left, and this is why it's important to justify your text. On the right, I can define six as well. So we have the space here, six here, and you can do the same thing on the top. And if I just want from the top, I can display four, and if I want form the bottom, I can display four. And now as you can see, it's pretty better and you can drag in and moving like this, I'm going to show you and I keep perfectly this ratio. I could also go on the top left corner and do something like this or place by element here with these properties. As you can see it can be pretty convenient, and as you can see it fit perfectly in this case. Now if I select my second image, I will just scale little bit of image and dragging and moving here. So in this case, we will use also these wrap features. We'll go into text here, text wrap, and we'll define edit short text wrap settings. And when I go short text wrap settings, I can define jumps on the top square. And if you have a square, as you can see it will keep something rectangular, but in this case, tight can be interesting. So if we select tight, as you can see, it will fit perfectly the circular shapes. And you can see the larger size or both sides, and one more time, here the distance can be interesting. And here's the distance you can lock edge to have the same ratio. And you can define your distance. For example, I can define four, and now if I move, I can stay around my circle with 4 millimeters and I can move at my convenience. As you can see it pretty interesting to use these features just like that. Here. So this is how you can use this type of tools. Now, you need to understand that you can also adjust more. What does it mean? It means that if you go into Edit options here, you go on the text options here. You see the text wrap, you have Edit wrap hotlines. And if you select Edit wrap hotlines, concretely, you can adjust and shop point. And what does it mean? It means that I can, for example, adjust so point here. It's not really adjust entra point to adjust ensure point of the outlines, and you can adjust on the outline with to adjust the shape. So here I'm focus on the outlines, and you can make something little bit different just like this. But you can also adjust on your shapes. So it means on your frame shapes. If on your frame shapes, you just go right click here, you convert to cures. You have the possibility after to convert to curves, too, as you can see, you can move. The problem is, as you can see, if you convert to cures, you keep your image, but here it's not going to work properly in this case. So if I just come back before to convert to cars just like this, if you select your prime here and you define the node tools. As you can see, you can not directly use the nodes. So in this case, yes, you need to go on the text feature text wrap, and you can see Edit wrap online. And in this case, you can, for example adjust, but depending on the value that you put. So in this case, it's not extremely interesting in this case. So we are going to remove this different element and after we're going to make a structure page and concrete example about how you can use this one. 136. Sections part 2: We're going to continue with page numbers and how you can add elements. So for this, we have created one masters, and we're going to create a second masters. So on this area, I will add another masters just like this. We can keep the same parameter for the margins that we used before, and we can change the name. It will be master number two, just like this, and I will validate. So on this master number two, I will be able to select my first content, and I will select all the content. I could also duplicate this master and right click copy the content, and I will go here and right click and just past the contents. I'll just replace the image or will select this image, replace image. And on the image we select the image or shares. So now I have two master. So what we will do we will first apply the master, I will click on the page here, right click Apply Masters, and I will place the master one on the hot pages, just like this, alidate I will go right click Apply Masters, and I will place the Master two on the Avan pages, just like this. So now if I go on the page, we can obtain this render. So now what we will do we will switch with a double page. So I will go in the document setups. We will switch with a double page. How to switch that, we will just click here facing page and it just work on the left, just like this. So now to apply your page number on Double page, you slick the Master number one. And this one is on the left, so I need to go on the left corner. It depends about what you want to do, but in this case, I will work on the left corner. I will say the IFrame text tool, I will start frame around this area, and I will go right click insert field, and I will use the page number just like that, and I will use the page number. And we'll set the parameters here we have 16. Let just keep 16 center horizontal and vertical, and I will be able to obtain this rendow. And what I can do, I can go right click, I can copy this element, then go on the Master two, and I will go right click and pass the element. And on the Master two, I will pass just on the right, just like that. So we'll pass this on the right. So after to do this type of work, if I get out, you can see the number of pages. While, two, three, four, and if we continue, as you can see 39 40. Perfect. Now, if I just come back to we'll go into document setup. And in the document setup, what we will do, we'll come back just with one page, slide. You have the possibility. Now, because I have this, I will select the Master one. And in the master one, we will recuperate this and we will go on the right, just like that. Now, if you want to add sections, you need to understand that when you go on So pages here, you can find section managers. Section manager, you can separate in different sections. When I click here, I have only one section by default corresponding to my number of page. And what you can do, you can add sections just like this. And for example, I can work with four sections. And for example, my section number four, I will start on the page just 31. So my section number four, we can start to the page 31 to 40. My section number three, I will start to the page 21 30, so it means ten pages. My section number two, I will start to the page 11 until 12, and by default, my section number one will arrive here. I think it's better to start from the end because if you start from the beginning, it's going to be difficult after to manage to start from the end. And now I have four section one, page one to ten, two, 11, 12, three, 213-04-3140. Maybe you can ask why it is useful. It is also because you can play section names here and I'm going to show you. Concretely, I go into Master one. And in the master one, what I can do, I can just create a frame text here, and I will generate a frame text around this area. I will scale a little bit here. I will put this in the center. And if I double click, I will go right click here insert field. And what you can find you can find section name. So you will apply Section name, and as you can see, we have the section name appearing here. One more time, you can set the different parameters that you need, just put 16 again. And the colors or anythings like this. So font as well. So if now I go back and I see the key, as you can see, nothing is displayed. And why nothing is displayed? I need first to do the same thing I will come back to the Master one. I need first to click here, right click Copy, and I will go on the Master two and right click pass to have the same thing on the Master two. So I will go here, right click and pass as well at the same position. So on the page, nothing is displayed. For a simple reason, I didn't give any name to the sections. Now you can go in sections. You can select the section one and you can give a section name. For example, I can say Chapter one. Here, I can define Chapter number two. Section three, I can define maybe Chapter number three, and Section four maybe Chapter number four, just like that. And now, if I just close here, as you can see, we have rename. So if I go to the page one to ten, we have Chapter number one, just like this. And now if I arrive at page 11, we have Chapter number two, as you can see. If I arrive at page 21, we have now chapter number three, and that's it. And if I go at the end, I have chapter number four. So as you can see, it's pretty decent. You have even the possibility when you go into sections to change the number of styles, which means you can give different number of styles like ABCD if you need. So you can change that as well. It will be useful for different way. In this case, it's not extremely useful because I show you only the sections. But in some case, it will be interesting. So you can instead to have the section with just a number, you will be able to rename here with another type of symbols, just like that. So this is how you can work with this type of element that you can add. And you can repeat this process for any type of symbol that you want to add. You just need to understand really very important to work every time on the masters. Every time you need to work on the masters, if you want that it works. And if now I want to remove, you just need to click in your element, just like that. So I can just click here. Can also just click here as well on the master, and on the Master, you can just delete what you need, just like that. So this is how we can process with this. So that's it. This is how you can work with these different type of options. So as you can see, it's convenient. You can add page number. You can add a number of page, you can have a first page. You can you can add a last page, you can work with section. So you have definitely multiple types of options that you can use. When you go on the page here, because I change the section, you can see the letters here on the section one, for example, on my page here, you can see the section here on the section manager. So if I change that, I, this one, you can see, it's going to change in front of the page as well. If I want to come back, I will come back just with a page number. This is also an indication that you can find here. Section is also interesting thing. First you can manage this, but it's also another way to add, for example, titles here or your different section for eventually different chapters or anything like this. 137. Selections with colors part 2: We're going to continue with the selection tools. For this, I have this image, and as I explained, I selected this image, and I selected this image as well. So if I come back to this image, as I explained, we have used the object selection tools and we have used the selection brush tools. Now I'm going to show you the fluid selection tools, and I will select this image again. So the flood selections tools, just like this, you can just create a selection by colors, and for this, you can use a tolerance value. For example, if I want to select the face here, it will be difficult. It will be more descent to select the backgrounds and to invert the selection. But I can try to create a new selection. I have a tolerance of ten, and if you go left click, for example, on the front here, as you can see, I can create this selection. Here, we have the contiguous area. What is the difference between contiguous and non contiguous? If you deactivate, I can just go Left click. As you can see, I can have multiple a, even if it's not contiguous. Even if it's not contiguous, you can find multiple area. If I click here, as you can see this area is selected, but also this one, this one, this one, and this one by same color. But if I apply contiguous and I go left click here, as you can see this area, this area, this ara, this area are not selected because we apply contiguous. Now you need to understand the tolerance. If you have a low tolerance, you will have big precision, but you can only take a very specific part. Now if I increase the tolerance and I go left click again, you can see the selection will be expand, and I could continue. If for example, I select something like 60 and I go left click on part of the skin, I will obtain this render as you can see. So this is the tolerance value. If I just come back, for example, to ten, and this time I want to select the backgrounds, I can go left, click on the back just here, and I can select the backgrounds. Even with a value of ten, it's pretty decent, but even if I increase the tolerance value, I think it's going to work properly with only one left click. And, I think it's too much it's not working properly, so I need to reduce. Let's try with maybe 12, and I will go left, click on the backgrounds. And as you can see, we have this selection. Now if I want to select the face, I need to invert the selection. For this, we can go on pixels. We can select Pixel selection and we can go on invert, or you can click Control Shift E. And I can just click here invert the selection and copy and pass the selection, edit, copy the selection, and then we will go on this image just here, and I will pass the selection as well. I will go edit and I will pass the selection. Then I will click on the move tools. I will just go here with dragging and moving, and we will scale at the same time, and I will place this base around here, and I will just go left click to validate. So after to understand that, we will click on this image and we will do the same type of work. It is the same. I can select the flood selections tools. If I want to select the flower, it will be pretty more decent to select the bagon because I just use one left click with these tolerance, as you can see, we have big precision. If you deactivate contiguous, just like this, you can select multiple area, as you can see, even if it's not contiguous. I'll just come back contiguous, I will define this. Now if I increase the tolerance, I will expand my selection with the left click just like this, and I can extend my selection. But I think it will be a little bit difficult to select really pretty decently the flowers. And for this reason, I can select the backgrounds. So I can click on the backgrounds to select this array. I can click here, select the backgrounds, and I can try. If it's not enough, I can just reduce and I can obtain this render. So now why it is interesting? Because if I select the story runs, as you can see, we have some array here, not taking cons. And for this reason, I can select Add. And when I click on ad, I can go left click here. And as you can see, we can select, we can also select this area. I can go left click here, and I think we are going to rejut. So maybe it's not pretty decent. If I go left click here with rejut maybe I can decrease the tolerance. I can decrease the tolerance value just like this. And if I go left click, now, I think it's going to work properly. And I can go left click here and left click here. As you can see now, it's going to work properly, and you can zoom and focus on specific pixels area just like this. So now I think the selection is pretty better. We can take a look. We can delete the background, for example, and I can delete here. If you want to make example about how to change the backgrounds, you create new layers, and after these new layers, you select the fruit fill tools. We define a color, will define this green color. And if I just press escape, we can replace the background by a color if we work like this. I can even just click on this area. Then here we could fill totally all the layers if we need. Which means we can also click here. We can create new layers, and we can just fill all the layers with colors just like this. So now if I just come back, I'm going to come back to the state where we add the selections, so we'll come back in the historic panels with the state where we add the selection. So yes, I'm going to come back here. So now what we have selected, we have selected the backgrounds. So what I will do, I will invert the selections. So I will press Shift Control E to hoops. I will come back to my tools just here, and I will press Shift Control E. I can invert the selection, and now I can copy and pass. I will press Control C. Then we will go on this area and we will press Control V, and I can pass the selection, put the selection around here, and I'm going to pass the flower around this area, as you can see. Then I will go left click and I will validate. This is a selection with more features that you can do. If you want to make more difficult things, you will be able to use the tool. So this one has basic selection tools, and this one is more precision selection tools when you need to make something more difficult. 138. Photo landscape 4: In this training, we are going to improve this image. Pros when I go on the right first, I will duplicate the layers. I'll select these layers, right click and duplicate. After that, what we can have on this image. So concretely, we have area on this area with too much exposure. So it means it is too bright on this area. We have some few area like for example, this one, it is too dark. After about the color, as you can see, we don't see too much the color. It's not extremely extremely gray. Take a look about the red area of the bridge or the green area of the forest, and definitely we can improve that as well, and we will be able to reinforce the details also. So for things to do, I will go on the adjustment and the first one will be levers. I will select the levers and we'll focus first on the output wise levers and black levers. Here, I can lighten little bit of shadows moving the output black levers, just like that, and I will just put maybe here 4%. In the output wise levers, I will just decrease little bit this one, and I will decrease until maybe around 40 84. Now we can adjust the gamma and we can dragging and moving the gamma on the left, as you can see. We can move the gamma maybe around 86, just like that. And we can adjust little bit with black levers. I would put two. And here we will put white levers, maybe 26, just like that. And I will obtain this one down. So let's take a look before, after before, after. To make these corrections, I will go into adjustment and I can put brightness contrast. We'll put some contrast after like this and about the value here, we improve a little bit more, 30%, the general brightness, and I will increase a little bit of brightness with two. But the fact is we will use around, yes, maybe the contrast is too much. I put something like 26, and I will put little bit contrast just like that. After to do this type of, we can improve just here the general saturation. On this area, we have the vibrans and we can improve the general vibrant just like this and the general saturation on all the colors. But we are not going to put too much because after that, I will work with more specific area. And to work with more specific area, what we can use, we can use, for example, the saturation luminosity, but we have also the color, the selective color. Let's use the two. For example, I will use saturation value. And I would use this one maybe for something like the red area. But can click here. And with a color picker tool, you can pick an area in red range of pixel on the bridge, left click, just like this. You will define this area. And after I can improve the saturation only on the red range of pixels. And in this case, let's put maybe something like 40, we can also use a shift if we want to adjust, but in this case, I will stay at zero, and we can adjust little bit the luminosity. So I will reduce a little bit my luminosity. I will reduce at minus six, just like that. And thanks to that, we can reinforce this red area. After that, you can see the low before and after. We take the adjustment, and we use another one like selective colors. And for the selective color, we'll try to focus on the forest area with the green and little bit yellow colors. So here we can select a range of colors. That will select green first. And if we take a look, we can adjust the value of green. So he's not going to change too much with the sun value. But if I just, for example, the yellow, as you can see, we can make some transformation. So we'll add yellow here, I will add yellow like maybe 60%. And we can also reduce the magenta value. I will reduce -60%. And here for the e, I will put 26 just like that. And thanks to that, we can reinforce a little bit of green area using this way. You can see the different before and after. But on the selective color, we can also work with this, maybe try with the yellow area, and as you can see, it will impact also my forest area. So maybe for the green area, I will put something like 40 for yellow or the magenta, we can maybe reduce the magenta also -20%, and for the CR value, I will reinforce also. Let's put something like 30%. And I will upturn this render and I will just click on this area. So now what we will do we go into adjustment here, and maybe we can work with some wise balance, and I can change a little bit the size of the cursor of the wise balance here. So what I will do I will decrease a little bit of tint and I will increase little bits of yellow value just like that. But not too much, maybe I can put around six here, and for the tint, maybe we can reduce around 10%, just like this. Here. So at this moment, I think it's not bad. Maybe we can reinforce the details. As I explained before, to reinforce the details, you need to use the filters. When you go on filters. You can select. You can have clarity and texture can be interesting. I will use some clarity. I just put something like around 30%. And at the same time, I will click also on filters, and we reduce texture. I will do a little bit. Let's increase the strength, just like that. We can see the difference. Maybe it's too much. Let's put around maybe let's try with around 26. We decrease a little bit of radius and the compression value. Let's put around maybe 20 or maybe a little bit more. Let's put 24, just like that. And here, this is a strength. Maybe in this image, we can increase a little bit more. And definitely we can reinforce the details like this. And if we take a look before and after before and after with this one and before and after. So that's it. Now something that I will do, I will selt the last backroom layers. I will put this on the front just to see the difference. So this is the image before, this is the image before and this is the image after before, after. Let's take a look here or before and then after before and then after. Let's take a look here. Before and after. 139. Wrap text part 2: We're going to continue with the wrap text. We have seen how to work with wrap text. We're going to make a concrete example. So first, what I will do, I will go on view here and I will select margins and guides. The margin and guides, I will define a margins with 10 millimeters and at the same time a gutter of ten and separate in three columns and one rows. We'll just validate just here, and I will select directly the frame text tools, and I will snap to this corner until this area, and I will go right click here, insert a filler text. After to do this type of work, I will click on this area and I will justify my text. I would justify left and I will duplicate, edit and duplicate layers who play the layer here and it, duplicate again the layers to place also on this area. Now we'll add image frame. I will select the picture frame rectangle tools and I will start rectangles around here and I will replace the image. Replace the image, I will select an image, I will select the image with a rod just like this and I will stay like that. Then I will select another image frame will go around maybe this area, and I will create an image frame around here. I will select replace image, and I will define the image with the ocean, like this. I will dragging and moving little bit on the top, maybe around here, here. Around this area and this one maybe around here. And maybe this one on the corner point. Now what I will do, I will select the picture frame tools. I will go around here, press shift to keep the proportions and replace image. And I will select the image with the models, slide this scale little bit. Put the image inside, and that's it. So now we'll work with the wrap text. I'll take this image, and I would like to wrap on the top here. I will place my image here. I will select text. I will define text wrap, show text rhapity. In this case, because I have a space here, here and here, I only want to work on this area, so I can only use Jam. And use jump will be enough, so I can only use jump here. And after that, I can bring the proportion here and I can define a space, and in this case, only the bottom will be interesting. I can define the space on the bottom. And in this case, depending also on the line you can put two millimeter can be enough here. And if for example, I was moving my image, as you can see, we have space here and just space space below as well. But in this case, I'm going to stay in the top left corner. I will select this image, and I will go in the text options also and I will set text wrap, show text wrap setting. In this case, I don't have anything on the right and nothing on the left because I have the gutters. So it's not useful to use square. I can only use jump. So I will set jump, and I would just need to define something on the top and on the bottom. So if I define here, this one is a space on the top, so maybe we can reduce, maybe four can be enough. And this one is a space on the bottoms. And in this case, maybe I will here it's only two, so it depends. I will put a thing four, and I can let space of four here. And if I move, you can see the space will continue all around as you can see, just like that. And maybe I can place my image around. Let's do something maybe like this here. If it depends about what we want to I can put this also on the top. It depends. So yes, maybe I'm going to put this one here. After we six, this image will drag and moving a little bit around this area. And I would like to use a text features as well. So I will call text, text wrap, show text wrap setting. And in this case, I will use tight. If I use tight, as I explained, you can change the value. But generally, when you use something circular with tight, generally, you keep the proportions. And if you keep the proportion, I can define a value. Maybe if I define four, maybe it's too much. It depends. I can only define two. It depends about the render. Two can be convenient in this case. But if I want a little bit more, I can go into text options and I can increase more I need. But two can be enough, for example. If I want more, I will come back here. I will define text wrap features and I can increase more, for example, put for like this. If I move a little bit, you can see the text will perfectly fit around here. So this is a type of things that we can do. I wanted to show you also if you have something not like image frame, it can be also a pass. You can use a pen tools and create a multi lines or just crate curves as well. If I just create a multi lines, I can just, for example, go around here and snap to a point, snap here, snap here as well, and I will define something with multiple, just line like this. And I will define colors just like that, and I will define maybe some blue colors here. At the same time, what I will do, I will go in the view options, and in the view options, we will select one more time margin same guide, and we will decrease the margins to zero and two colons to one. So now I have this element and it is same. Even if I have a polyline or if it was a curves, you can do the same type of thing. So you can go on text, text wrap, and you can hit it show text wrap settings. And it is same I can use jump or square or anything like this or even tight. If I use jump, it will fit perfectly like this. But something that I can do if I just double click here, I can define maybe remove this print. Just keep a point here, maybe I will remove this print. And I will make something more like curve. I will convert these to curves, maybe convert these to curves, and maybe convert these to curves. And I can adjust just a little bit here, and maybe this one we can adjust on this area as well. So if I have a curve like this and I'm using I click on now these curves, I think I have a stroke, let just remove the stroke. I will click here. Yes, I will just deactivate the stroke. I have a curve like this, so I can come back to my text options, sedit one more time the text wrap settings. On this area, you can select tight and tight can be interesting. As you can see, the text will fit perfectly depending also that the value that we give. Here we have zero, here we have two. So maybe I can try with four game. And as you can see never I double click and I use my not tools, and we adjust, as you can see the text, is going to perfectly follow and fit. So this is why it can be interesting. At the same I can do something like that, and the text will perfectly follow as well as you can see. Or you can do this type of work, and as you can see, it can be pretty convenient as well. Even if it's more difficult to perfectly adjust the text, you can also work with this, as you can see. So this is how to work with text wrap. So as you can see, interesting features, and you can perfectly fit your text to create a complete structure for your page. 140. Transformations part 2: We're going to continue on how to delete selections. So for this, I selected this image, and I have this image. So the first thing that we're going to do it is to create a selection of this image. So for this, I will go on the left, and I will select the flood selections tools. With the flood selections tools, I will select my layers first. We will use this mode, so it means a new mode, and we will define a tolerance around ten, 12% will be descent on this image. And I will go left click outside to define this type of selection. Then I need to invert the selection. To invert the selection, we can press Shift Control A, and after to press Shift Control A, I will copy and pass the selection. I will go and edit. I will copy the selection or Control C, and we will go on this image and we will pass the selection with edit and pass or Control V. Edit and past and we will use a selection tool to scale the layers and to place the layers, for example, around this area. I will reduce a little bit more and I will place my layers around here. And I will just validate Oops, here press Enter to make some transformation, but in this case, I will just validate. So after to understand that, you can use the eraser tools if you want to create blend effect. As I explained, the best things to do if you want to create blend effect and to erase. In this type of case, it will be to use the layer mask because the layer mask is non destructive. I'm going to show you this process. Even if this process as I explained because it is destructive, it's definitely not the best. It's better to use the layer mask. When I go on the left here first, as explained before, we have different type of tools to rise, and you can just use RS brush tools. With the RS brush tools, I can define some parameters. And if, for example, I define hardness at 100% and also transparency value of 100. As you can see, if you go select your layer, you just go left click, as you can see, you just erase. But because it's not only your mask, it's not possible expect with the history panels to undo. So you can only use the history panels. You can also make the choice to decrease the transparency value. For example, I decrease, but not the transparency harness value, and thanks to that, if you use the edge of the brush, you can just erase a little bit like this. And as you can see, sometimes it can be convenient if you want to create some effect. You have also the possibility to decrease the transparency value. For example, I will decrease at 30%, and if I'm using my brush, as you can see, I can try to erase a little bit. I can stop the left click and left click again to apply one more time. You can see you can crat this type of incrustation effect. The problem is because we don't work on the layer mask is totally destructive. So it means if I want to edit or if I want to cancel the option, the only thing that I can do it to work with the history panels. So I can go back here and do and do, and I can only use history panels. So definitely, it's not the best way to use. After to understand that, as I explained also before you can use one more time these different type of tools. So I will go back on this area. We presses cap and we will see this type of tools again. So the first one is rise brush tools. So I define my different parameters one more time. Here, I will define maybe 100%, one more time, and harness 40%. Maybe you can increase again the size. And if you just go Left click, you can just erase on your layers. Here I can just rise on the layers. The second option tools, it is backgrounds AIs tools. And as I explained before, you can select a percentage of Therance value, and this percentage will define some element on the contrast between backgrounds and foreground. Here we have 10%. I will reduce little bit the size first around this size. And if I zoom here, even if my brush is mix to this area, as you can see, I'm not going to erase this area because of the tolerance. And if I increase too much tolerance like 60%, as you can see, I will have less precision, and maybe it's going to be too difficult or I will erase like this. So this is why this tolerance value can be convenient to use. And depending on what you choose, you will be able to erase what you need or to not erase what you need. So in this case, I will come back, maybe I will come back to 40%. As you can see, automatically, he can find contrast just like this. So he can find contrast and I can try to erase all around using these tools, and automatically, as you can see, can define some contrast. So we don't use this too much honestly, but sometimes it can be a process to use for a different type of reason. Now I can come back and I will go back to this area because I don't work on duplicated layers to see the result with the transparency backgrounds, and this is why we don't duplicate, in this case, the layers. The last tools is food eraser tools, and thanks to that, we can just go left click and we can erase some area. So if I click here, we can just define one more time percentage value. If I define ten, I will go left click here and I can errise in a fast way. Now, if the percentage is different, so for example, I increase percentage value like 60% just like this, and I will go left click here, as you can see, the result will be less convenient in this case. So in this case, what I can do I can reduce and maybe I will put a value like I can try 12% and I will go left click here and I will errize this area. I can now fill this transparency backgrounds. For this, I have two options. I can use the field tools. And if I use the field tools, context fill, I can just define colors, and here it's going to fill all the area just like this. But from simple reasons that we have some didn't duplicate the layers. So now if I undo here and I define to create a new layer, so we can create new pixel layers and put these pixel layers on the back, I can now fill with a color. So I can use the fruit field tools, and I can just go left click here and I can adjust with the color just like that. Can adjust with one of the colors. So we can define the foot field tools. We can define colors. We can define a tolerance, but in this case, it's not extremely important because we just have a complete transparency backgrounds and you just need to select a color and you can fill with a color. And as you can see, we can obtain this render. If I wanted to have a better render, we could maybe refine selections. Here, as you can see, it's not extremely convenient, but to address this, we need to refine potentially the selections. 141. Selections part 2: We are going to continue with the selections. For this, something that we are going to do it is to see how to refine selection. And for this, as I explained, I selected this image and I selected this image as well. When you use one of these tools like the Object section two, the section two, the flute selection tools, you have the option to refine here. But you can also go on pixels. And when you go on pixel selection, you can use refine as well, just like this. So the first thing I am going to do it is to craft a selection. I will select the fruit selection tools. I will use New will work with the tolerance around 12, and I will click on the background just like this. After to click on the backgrounds, I can inn the selection with Shift Control A, and the woman is selected. Now, if I want to refine and maybe to improve a little bit what we have on this area, I can refine the selection. For this, you can click on refine. After two click on Refine selection, you enter in this view. Concretely, you can change the preview overlay, Black made, wise made, black and white, transparent and overlay. As you can see, if I zoom here, as you can see, it's not pretty decent on this area. And we can improve the selection here to make something a little bit more descent. Concretely, you need to understand to use mat. You select a brush, and you define the size of the brush here. And if you don't touch to anything, you just need to on where you want to refine, you just go left click. And when you go left click, automatically, he will refine the area. And as you can see, it's pretty more decent. If you don't touch anything about the parameter, you just define mat, you select the size of the brush, and that's it. You can just define here. After I really you want to have more options, you can increase with a smooth value. But concretely, it just to smooth as well, and you will lose little bit precision. Or you can also apply a fisser. But you need to be careful because if you apply a fisser just to create a transition and you can see the transition like this. Maybe you don't see that in overlay, but if you sel it black, you can see the fissor will appear here. And in this case, I don't want fizzer. So in this case, I will come back and I will come back to zero, and I will just apply overlay just like this. And so I will don't activate smooth and fizzer and the rump is how you can adjust to extend, for example, little bit, you can extend just like that, or you can try to reduce here. So in this case, if you just want to have the basic adjustment, you just keep a value of zero. Something that you need to understand as well is if you select, for example, foregroun, you will just remove some selection just like that. And if you select at the opposite backgrounds, just like this, you will, as you can see, deactivate some area just here. So this one will be backgrounds, and you can also even use fier as well. But it's not extremely useful. If I just come back to mat, I can just use my brush here. And as you can see, I can refine again. And in this case, what I will have to do, in this case, I will have to use my brush and just to put the brush on the edge of the hair on all my image, but even with this part. So on all the edge, I can just put my brush to refine the selection just like this. After to validate, you just need to click on apply. You have the output. It can be a selection. Sometimes you can use mass, but in this case, I will use selection, and I will just validate. As you can see, we have refined ile bit the selection here. Here, it will be extremely difficult to use this here for a simple reason that the quality is not pretty decent. So I will go and edit and I will click on copy, and then I will go here on this image, and I will pass my selection. I will go and edit and I will pass this selection here. I will reduce a little bit. I will reduce here, I will reduce here, and one more time I will pass this image time on this area. I'll just click here. I will use the same process, but before to use the same process, I wanted to I'm going to click on one of the selection tools. I can click on the selection Brush tool this time. And as I explained, I can define a size just like this, and I will go left click here and I will create a selection. I will stay Left click or apply multiple Left click. Then I will go and edit and I will copy the selection. Then I will go on so you can refine directly here. But if you click on these panels, you can also go on Pixel selection, and you can use refine edges, and it is exactly the same. Now one more time, we have the same thing. So if I want to refine this selection, what I can do, I can, for example, just keep this element and I can just use my brush on the edge of the flower just like that. I can just use my brush and put my brush just here. Here I have a value, but you can change the value of the brush and I can just define my brush, as you can see on all the edges to try to refine and to improve a little bit my selections. If I'm just satisfied, I can just click on apply, and now I have this selection. By invert the selection with Shift Control A, I can just press delete and we will obtain this type of selection. Now if I just come back here, edit and undo the last action to come back here. I'll press Shift Control A to select the flower. Now what I will do, I will go on pixels because you have more options one more time. In the pixel selection, you can also use hotlines. Hootlines we don't use this too much, but concretely, it will convert the edge of your selection to hotlines. I'll just click on hotlines. You can just define the radius, as you can see, you can define a radius here and I will define a radius maybe I will apply 40. You can have the ligment from center or outside of the selection or inside of the original selection. Or if I just select outside, I can define something like maybe can also apply circular, but here it's not changed little bit. And if I just apply, I can create the outline selections, just like that. And it can be a different size. So for example, you can come back on layers, selections. And it's a select not layer selection, pixels, pixel selection, and hotlines. And you can just make something smaller, can just be like ten or you can just reduce as you want. And I will put, for example, outside, I will just click on Apply just like this. We can create a selection outside here. If I wanted to fill the selection, I can use the food selection tools. I can define the colors, and hoops I will select these tools, fruit fill tools and I will go left click and I can fill this area, for example. So just an example about what you can do, to come back here, press a Scape, and this is how you can work with the selections. Yes. 142. Photo landscape 1: In this training, we're going to improve this image and we will be able to see the process to use different adjustment step by step. So for this, when we take a look on this image, what problems we have? We don't have big problem about the exposure, even if we can increase a little bit. Concretely, we can improve a lot of colors on this image. We can reinforce also different area and we can make something better on this image. So for things to do, I'm going to zoom a little bit here, and one of the first adjustments that we will use in the process, as I explained before, when we click on adjustment, if you want to make correction at lights shadows, you can focus on levers, and you have also the possibility to focus on levers and to focus on the curves. Here, in this case, I will use levers. I will play the levers adjustment here. You can see the histogram on the back and I will focus with the output. So here with the output, we will work with little bit with output wise lever, we will reduce a little bit, and the output black lever will increase a little bit. Not too much, maybe we can put a value of six and 90. Here we have also the black levers and the wise lever, but I'm not going to change that because I will put little bit contrast after. We just adjust in this way. We have also the Gamma corrections just here. I think we can put the Gamma correction a little bit on the left, but in this case, we just keep a value of, we just keep a value of one in this case. So second adjustment that I'm going to use for this image, we can put the layer adjustment inside, but because we only have one layer, we can just let outside. So I will just click here and another one that I will use it is the brightness contrast. So we selling the brightness contrast. We'll put them little bit contrast just like this. And we have also the general brightness, and I will put maybe eight. I think the brightness is too much just 6% and the contrast I will put 12. At this moment, just after that, if you want to make a correction on exposure, you can use exposure adjustment. Even if you can use also at the end. I will use the exposure here at this moment. As you can see it's pretty fast about the exposure, so I can just put maybe very little value like 0.2 or something like this, maybe around. And even the exposure, I think it's not extremely convenient in this case, maybe just 0.2. After to do this type of work, interesting way it is to improve the colors. To improve the colors, I will go on adjustment. And the basic adjustment that you can use is a vibrance and saturation. So I will increase the saturation here on all the image. And let's make something maybe a little stronger with 60, and we can use also the vibrant and I will use 20. Even if I can also reduce it bit, maybe I can use 20 and 40, and you can take a look before, after and before and after as well, just like this. This one is a vibrant adjustment. Now if I want to reinforce a specific area, I can use adjustment and use saturation luminosity. With a U saturation luminosity, as I explained before, you can select a range of colors and you can click on the pictures. And for example, if I define this area, I can just increase the saturation more only on this area. And maybe I can put 16 to reinforce this one. We can use also with the luminosity or change little bit the U as well. And maybe I will change a little bit the U on the right, just here. If I just click outside, you can see the difference and we can increase in this way, little bits. I could also repeat maybe this process or second time for the blue area. So for this, we will go on adjustment one more time, and we will select saturation value. We'll click on one of these, select the color pictures and define this color here. Then we can one more time adjust little bits of color depending on what we want to obtain. Maybe I can go a little bit on the left, just here, and we can increase the saturation as well as you can see. You can see we have better saturation on this area, but on this area as well. We can also focus with the luminosity, dit increase. In this case, I will just keep zero. At any moment, you can come back, so it means if I want to increase the vibrant adjustment, I can increase again. If I want to increase the saturation and the vibrant, we can just make some change. Just like this. So I think like this, it's pretty decent. Maybe you can make a small adjustment of temperature. We can go with the wise balance, and with a wise balance, I can put maybe something more. I think in this case, I will go a little bit on the left, and I will put maybe -6%. And for the tent, we will go a little bit on the right with maybe 6%, just like this, not too much. Okay. As you can see, I think it's pretty decent to different correction here. I can't stop here, but we can reinforce little bits of detail this time with filters. And as I explained before, when you click on the filters option here, you can use, for example, clarity. And if I select clarity here, it can be powerful to use at the end if you want to reinforce the details. Will zoom a little bit, and I will increase the strength. Here's the strength, it's at 100%. Maybe it's too much. Let's zoom little out to see the difference, just like this. Yeah, I think it's quite powerful. And in this image, I can put at least 60%, and I will just click here, just like that. If you want to see the render of your image at the end, you click on the first layers. You just double click, you duplicate the layers. You play these first layers, for example, on the top, and thanks to that, you can see your image before. This one is the image before and you just add the layers and you can see the image after. And thanks to that, if you want to reinforce more, for example, if I want to increase the quarity again, I can increase if I want to improve with the wise balance, I want to adjust again, maybe I can put Minuten, and in this case, I will put maybe ten, I can adjust as well. And thanks to that, you can see the difference before, after and before and after. If you are satisfied, you can just remove these duplicated layers, just like this. We have only one layers, but if you have multiple layers, you can put this inside so layers just like this. 143. Text part 1: We're going to see how to add text. For this, we're going to work with the layout mode because in the layout mode, this is a mode where you will use the most text with the most features. So first to add a text when you go on this area, you have two options. The first option is a frame text tools and the second option, the artistic text tools. So before to see the frame text tool, we see the artistic text tool because it is the most simple. And I will just go left click. You can drag and move the letters. And after to drag and move letters, you can tape your text. So for example, I can tape something inside and I will just tape title example. So after to do this type of work, something that we can do, we can place the text, you can when you use the section tool dragging and moving, and it works like an object. And when you have this text, you can just scale, and as you can see, the frame will fit perfectly your content automatically. So this is artistic text tools. So the frame will perfectly fit the content. Now what option you have the basic options will be on the top here, and the basic option is to change the font family. So first, you can change with any font family here. You have different type of option. I'm not going to make all the option, but you have many types of options and font family that you can use in this list as you can see. So you can define many types of font family. So after to do this work, if I just come back to the original font family here in this area, we have areas. You can depending on the font change, you have different options. You can put narrow, you can put bold, you can put Italic. So you have different type of option, bold, Italic or again black. So this one is a different option. I'm going to come back to regular in this case. Can change the size here so you can define the size. Even if with your Section two, you can also just scale like this and it will change automatically the size. You can also click to increase the font size with a fast way or decrease the font size here. On this area, you can change, and sometimes you can put the letter directly lowercase or uppercase or sentence case with the first letter, uppercase or title case just like this. So sometimes it is useful as well because at the beginning, I was uppercase. Even if you have the different option, you can put again in bold, Italic, you can put underline as well. You can put strikeout also, and here you have superscript also, and you can use subscribe. So you have a lot of type of options. On this area, you can change the color, so you can change the color of the text. And if you have something like derline you can also change the frame just on the back. The der line you can change, but in a door type of way, we'll explain before. So here you can have at light color. So around your text, you can define at light color as well. Here is the justification, so it's not useful in this case, and in this case, it is a space also between different elements. So here, it's not useful as well. When you go on the right, you can have information about the style. I will explain the style in a different way. But first, when you go in this character panel, you can have multiple type of options as well. So I will explain after the paragraph when we will work with the text tools. Here we can focus on the character. So as I explained, when you go in Window here, text, we put the character panels, paragraph panels and textile panels to have advanced features. So first, I will change, and I will come back to the black colors, and I will selt one more time a artistic text tools, and I will just dragging and moving, and I will tape something like example content Tutorial. I will tape something like this, and then I will scale, so I will scale my element. Just like that, I will place my element around here, and then I will double click at the end, and I will press Enter, and I will tape the same type of thing. I will press Enter again, and I will tape one more time the same type of thing, just like this. Andale can make a mistake. Let's tape Content tutorials, and I will continue with again example content tutorials. So now after to do this type of work, as you can see, I will go on the right in the character options. But we can find again the basic options that we have here on this area. O correctly, you can change again the font family for these panels. You can also change again the size for these panels if you need, and you can find again the decoration option. But you have even more option here, like two underline, for example, and it is same you can apply two stroke options. And here you can change. For example, you can select underline, and you can define a color for the underline value, as you can see. And it is same. Here, I'm going to deactivate this one so you can underline this. And it is same, you can also if I deactivate this one, I can use, for example, this, and I can also define a color, as you can see. But here you have more advanced options and you can come back with nod for the colors. Here on this area, you can also change the color just like this. And this one, you need to apply a wide, and as you can see, you can apply on the letters directly a stroke. Youm going to deactivate the strikeo and you can apply stroke directly on the letters with a color and you can extend or reduce it'll be the size. Just like that, and you can also tap exactly the size that you want. Here I'm going to have two. Here I'm going to have one, for example. So more and more options. If I just click here, I can come back to none. After if I take a look, you have different type of transformation. For example, what you can do. After this here it is present. I'm going to show you this one. And this one, as you can see, you can put your text in Italy but using angle value in degrees. You can also define the space between your different element of content. So this is the tracking just like this. And you can change the space as you can see between your letters, just like that. You can also use horizontal scale, so you increase the size of the letters horizontally. And here this is vertical scale. You increase the size of the letters vertically. And just on the left, you can define the space between the line. Not the space between lies the offset between the first line or the last line, and here you can define the space between the different lines, just like this. Here after that, you have the language, some alignment, and sometime it can be useful. I will show you after in the paragraph the justification because in this case, it's not extremely useful in this case. So this is how we can work with these tools, artistic text tools. It's more useful when you work, for example, with title or just one sentence content, you can use more these tools. After if you want to add more content, you will use the frame text tool. It will be better. But when you have something like a title or anything like this, these tools can be totally enough and you will focus to the character options. 144. Selections with shapes part 1: We're going to see how to work with selection with shapes and for this something that we can do. We can go on this area and we have different type of tools with shapes like rectangular, ellipticals, but we can use also colons, rows, and we have the freehand selection tools. For this, I have this document 1,600 by 1,200 pixels, and I have also this image as an example and this image as an example. So the first things to understand, this is the basic of the selection, how to process. So first, you select one of the tools. Let's start with the rectangular selection tools. And in the option of the tools here, you have different type of possibilities. First, it is to create a new selection. So if you create a new selection, you just need to stay left click and we stay Left click, you can just create a rectangle of selection. If you keep this mode and you stay left click again, you can create and replace the existing selection. And if you go on your selection, you can also dragging and moving the selection like this just like that. So if you go left click, you replace, and if you go inside, you can move. Now, you can complete your selection with AD. When you click on Ad, you can add another rectangle of selection on your existing selection, as you can see. If you click on substract, you can subtract a rectangle from the existing selection. And then if you click on Intersect, you can define intersection area between the new selection and the old one. So this different mode, you need to understand. Onetly we don't use too much really intersection, but we focus on you and sometimes you can use add and substract it can be useful. Don't forget that you can mix, add, subtract all the option with a different selection tools as well as other type of selection tool, more advanced that we have here, and I will explain after. So you can mix this between the different selection tools. So this is some bicycle to understand. To deselect, you just click outside and you can deselect selections. Now I'm going to select one of this image, and I would like to select the Ocean, for example. First, if I click on my section tool, I can create a rectangle of selection. After I can move my selection if I need. If I create another rectangle again, I can do something here. But as you can see, I can use, for example, subtract and I can subtract an a just like this. Or if I want to come back, I can click on ad and I can start here and I can add another a. So you can adjust at your convenience. In this case, I can just click on you, and if I start from here, generally it's simple and I can stop on this area. Now when you have a selection, I will explain more in detail that how you can manage perfectly your selection. But if you want to copy and pass the selection, you go on edit here and you can copy a selection. So you can go and edit here and you can copy the selection. If you cannot have access, it's because you forgot to select the layer, you need to select the layer and now you can go and edit and you can copy the selection or shortcut Control C. And I will go on this area and I will pass the selection. So edit, and I will click on past here, and I will select past or Control V, and I can pass my selection. Will be redirected to the move tool. You can go to the move tool. You have a new pixels layers, and then you can scale your selection. You can also rotate if you need pressing shift using some constraint, as you can see, so you can rotate also like this. And if you want to scale, you can, for example, place with a base, and if I move here, the base will be this print. If I move here, the base will be this print at the opposite each time. I can maybe scale like this and I will click outside to validate. Well you can see a created copy and Pazzi selection. Don't forget that you have all the selection option in pixels here. Pixel selection, and you can use, I will explain in a different session, select all diselect re select invert the selection. You have all these type of option and you can adjust the selection also with crushing, fzer, smooth, refined edges, and outlines as well. So after to understand that, I will click on this image as well. Another type of selection that we can do, it is the circular selection tools. It is ellipticals market tool, and it works in the same way. So it means you can just go left click and you can select the layers. Click on these tools, and you can just go left click to start a selection. Why nothing appear because I'm on intersection. So I need to come back on you and left click and you can create a new selection. The selection will start from the center. This is what you need to understand. You press shift, you can keep the proportion. So if you press shift, you can keep if you press not shift, if you press control, you can keep the proportion. So for example, I select, I start here, I press control, and I can create a circle with the same wide N eight as you can see. If I just want a simple ellipse, I can do something here, I can start from the center. You can also complete one more time with art so you can complete with another rea, just like this. You can click on substrate, you can substract an element, or you can click on intersect and intersect an element as well, just like this. This is the circle a, just like that. So I can, for example, create ellipse. I will click here. I will come back to these tools. And I can create another ellipse or I can start again a selection. Something that I will do, I will invert the selection with Control E, or you can go directly on pixels, selection here and you can invert not control shift control E. If I invert, I selected the part outside of the circle. If I press delete on the keyboard, you can press delete on the keyboard, you will be able to remove your background. I'm going to show you again. If I come back here, I can delete on the keyboard or go on layers. Go on pixels pixel selections. And we can also, if you want to delete from this panel, it's not extremely useful. If you go edit, you will find delete. And I can delete also as well. I can press Escape to deselect. So this is another way to process. So now I'm going to come back here and just press Escape to deselect All. So if I come back to my rectangle of selections, I would like to select a part of the sky. I will select this rectangular selection tools, and I will create a selection just like this maybe this area. Then I will copy and pass, and this time, I will use the shortcut. I will press Control C. Don't forget to select the layer first, and I will go here. And I will press Control V, so I will press Control V, and I can pass inside a new layers automatically. Then we'll be redirected with the selection tool. We can move the selection. We can also extend. If for example, I want to adjust, I can put this point, I can move and put this point on the other layers just like this. And now I can, for example, scale with this one, and this point will be fixed if I'm using, for example, this one, and maybe we can do something like that. I'm satisfied, I will hoops If you press Enter, don't forget you will be redirected to the move duplicate options. You just need to click here and you can validate. So this is how we can create with rectangles and the ellipse section tools. And after I will explain the options. 145. Styles part 1: We're going to see how to crack sides. And for these two crat style, we are going to work in the layout mode. And in the layout mode, we can crat style. So we have different features. When we go on the right, we have these panels. And in these panels, as I explained, we place textiles here. So what does it mean when you go on Windows, you select text, and we play the textile panels to generate stats, and we are going to see that. First thing to do, we'll go into document setup. I have a four page, and I will switch the orientation of the page to landscape. So this is A four page and I will switch to anscae. After to do this type of work, we'll go on view we select margins and guides, and in margins and guy will define margins just like this. With a value, let's put 10 millimeters and I will separate in columns. In columns we separate in three columns and rows. Three columns two rows, and we replace the gutter with 10 millimeters. So after to do this work, I will select the frame text tools, and I will start with a frame around this area just like that. And I will tape a title. So we just tape tighter content, tighter content uppercase. And I would select my text. I will first align my text with center here and in vertical position center vertically. And we just increase the orbit size and we will keep the font by default. I will put, for example, 20 here. Now I will put my content here and I will select also the frame text tool. I will snap here on this area until this text frames, and I will go right click here, insert a filler text, and we insert with a filler text just like that. Now what we do, I will select the first text frame, ship the second text frame, and we will duplicate. Edit, duplicate layers, and we'll place just here and we'll go edit, duplicate layers, and we can repeat the same process. Now I will deselect and I will select all this element just like this. Edit, duplicate layers, and we will place the layers, just like this. Now what we will do we'll see first how to crat character styles, and after we'll see how to create a paragraph styles and why it is useful. So concretely, you can create a style, and then you can apply a style on multiple elements on a page or on multiple pages. And if after you edit the style, the transformation will be applied on all the elements where you apply the style. And this is why it is useful. So first, I would select this text frame here, and to create a style, you have different options. The best option will be to use the textile panels. And in the textile panel because you have the text here, and when you have the text, you have textile here and you can create a character style from these panels. You can also create a paragraph style from this panel. So you can also do this type of work. But if you place the textile here, you can just use these panels. When you scroll down below, you can find Crato character styles or Create paragraph style. We'll click on character styles. These panels will be open. You can rename your style we tap style Title one. After to do this work, you can base on a specific style. So it means you have different predefined style. Here I'm going to click on no style and you can just selecto type paragraph character, you are also group group is a little bit specific. We are going to see character in paragraph and now you can enter in characters and you can define what you want for this style. For example, I define font family first, Sedcbe as first font family will Sedc maybe Yes, fun clan go ti heavy, so I will silt this one. Then you have the phone style. You can slick to phone style. You can also define the size. And I will put, for example, 24 just like this. After in the character, you can work with all these options. So the font, then the color and decoration. So you can select the color of your title. Let's put some ten. You can even put a background color as you can see if you need. I'm not going to use background color, but you can, and you can use also underline track root outlines also if you need. Then you have position and transform, that means you can change some element. For example, you can work with a vertical scale and I can use a vertical scale as long as a horizontal scale as well. For example, I make some transformation like this, language optical alignment. So after you have more option, but you are going to focus with this, and I will just baggy day. And as you can see, I have this element. I have created the ties. So now I will click on I can click on this one and create a second style from this base. So I can create another character styles, and I will create Style titles, and I will use Title two here. And I will come back to the style. So I will change the name Style Title two. Here I have already set. And you can base on the style that we have here or you can come back to Nostyle and I can come back to nos style, for example. And after to come back to no style, I can define what I need, so I define the font. Let's just change the font. I will define maybe calibre in this case. Font style, I will define bold, and I will use the color. For the font, I, color and decoration, so I select the phone color. Let's put, for example, the blue color just like this. Or maybe to change that, let's just put some blue colors. Position and transform, about the font here, we have the style. You have the character calibre, and here you have the font size. I forgot to change the font size, and I will put, for example, 30 in this case. But the color and decoration will keep this parameter position. Maybe we can keep this parameter as well, and I will just validate. So now I created two style for the character, two style from the character. And when you go in the text style here, when I go on the right, you can find my style title number one and style title number two here. So when I select element, you can apply one of the style on your selection. You have also predefined style, as you can see, multiple predefined style. And if I want to come back this one with base or no style, I can just not base with no style, I can just click on no style here. First I will click on style. I will just come back with this one to the ling Center, for example, and this one to the center vertically. I will come back with a size at 20 to just keep these parameters. And after we do the same type of things with paragraph. And when you work with paragraph, you can have more options for the paragraph. And after I will show you why it is useful. Generally, I think when you work with a layout mode, it is convenient to keep the textiles, have these panels here every time because it can definitely be useful. So thanks to that, you have the layers, character options, paragraph options, textile options. And in the layout mode, I think it's worth to work like this. 146. Pictures part 1: We're going to see how to work with image frames. For this, something that we can do, we're going to work with image frames when we work in the layout mode. And concretely, you can insert directly images inside frame, and in the layout mode, it is extremely useful. So for this, I'm going to zoom a little bit on this page. And when you go on the left here, you have these tools. This is a picture frame rectangle tools. I will click on these tools, and you can just drag a rectangle frame just like this. And because it is a frame, you can find two diagonal line inside. And you can see on the layer panel, this is a picture frames, layers. So to insert an image inside, you can go in the tool options on the top, and you can find replace image. When I click on Replace image, if I just scroll on what I will be able to do, I will be able to use one of these. So for example, I can use my rod image and place the Rd image inside. When you have the image, you can adjust the image inside the frame. First, you can click here to dragging and moving to scale the image inside. If you scale, you can also move with a cursor inside your image frame. So you can select to selected parts, just dragging and moving inside, and you can even cret rotation just like this and you can press shift to constraint every 15 degrees as well. If you use the properties here, you need to understand that most of the time you will just use this. You can use a property, you have scaled to maximum fit and it will scale directly to the maximum. You can use scale to minimum fit and you can see the image at the minimum in comparison in the frame and you have stretch to fit. You need to be careful because when you use stretch to fit here, the proportion is broken. So here, the proportion is broken, so definitely, it's not very good. And if you come back unknown, it's not possible to recuperate. So be extremely careful when you use this. So in this case, because the propulsion is broken, I'm going to remove this and create another frame just like this, replace the image with the same image, so I will see the road image. And most of the time you will just use, you can replace the image again at any moment with replace the image inside. And at this moment, I will go in the properties and I will just activate no, and I will be able to reduce or scale again, just like this. So after to understand that, your image, I'm going to place this one here. You can do the same type of things with a picture frame ellipse too. After that, I will show you that you can select any frame, convert any shapes, convert this shape to any frame image, and that's useful as well. But here, I just focus with this one. I will select this. You can just generate ellipse or if you press Shift, you can just keep the proportion and you can make multiple frame just like this as you can see. If I select for example, the picture frames. The aim is to go on replace image one more time, and I will select another one. I will select, for example, this image. And as you can see, it is outside. It is too small, so I can scale the image inside my frame just like this. After you need to understand that if you use your selection tools, one left click, you can move all the picture frame, all the picture frames. And if you click inside, you can scale your image inside your frame. Can also, if you, for example, select the image inside because you can on the layer panels, click on the image inside and you can also drag in the image inside just like this. Now, what happened if you scale the frame? You selt the frame and you scale. You can scale the frame, but as you can see, the image is not going to follow the frame. So if you scale the frame just like this, you need to adjust the image in consequences after so you can scale the image inside. You can also dragging and moving the image inside with this cursor, or you can also click on the image inside the picture frame on these panels and you can drag in and moving as well. This is how you can add image. I can select this one, replace image. We will select another one, for example, the Ocean image, and then I can scale a little bit as well or reduce. Or I can select this one and I can use the replace image tools. We will try another one, like for example, this one, and then I can scale or I can reduce the image as well. So as you can see, this is how you can place image frame inside a frame. And after I will show you a concrete example about why it is extremely useful. Don't forget that on the image, you can find also some properties like, for example, a shapes. Here you can define a color, but the color is not useful because you have the image inside. So you can choose a color, it's not useful in this case. But you can add a stroke, so it means you can click on the stroke here and you can add a stroke. I will define the red color. And in the properties, as you can see, you can generate something like a stroke around with a different properties and also the properties of the stroke that you can adjust in the stroke properties as well. In this case, because it is a frame like your rectangle, you can even change also the corner. So you can change for rounded corner. You can define some value. You can even deactivate the single radius and have access to all the radios. If you double click here, you select the not tools. Can see if you see the not tools, you can also have axis exactly like rectangle shapes to all the different options. And as you can see the image is going to stay inside. So here I can adjust also as well just like this. So you can adjust your frame exactly like a shape, but inside, you can have the image. I can come back to because here, you have more options on this area for each corners, or I can come back to a single radius as well. And if I don't want that, I can come back to non you can work with straight, concave, cutout or anything like this. So as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. Even on this one, it is the same. If I want to add a stroke, I can define colors, and then we can go here. We can define a stroke size. Just like that, define stroke size. And we can do this also on ellipse or on any shapes, just like that. So this is the first thing that we're going to see and after I'm going to show you how you can convert a shape to a frame, and we will make a concrete example as well. 147. Shapes part 2: We're going to continue with the shapes. So we have seen how to create shapes. We have seen that we can go on this area and we can create rectangles, we can create ellipse, and we have all these type of options. So what we will do we continue. We'll select, for example, if you want to create something like a diamond, you just click on the Diamond tool. And it is same. I can define a color. You can also define a color first. And if you press Shift, you can create a diamond, just like a square, but you can just adjust a little bit. If you double click, you will have access to these handles, and in this case, as you can see the difference that a square because you can dragging and moving this one. And this one correspond to the midpoint. You can also adjust the midpoint on this area. Depending on the shape, every time you can click on the preset and you have automatically this preset or you can define this preset with a midpoint at 75%, just like that. Also use mirror if you need to invert, as you can see. Now I'm going to remove this one. If you need to create a polygon, you can select the polygon tools. When I click on the polygon tool, the first thing that you can do it is to define a number of side. I apply eight side, you press Shift and you can keep the proportion. You can generate your polygon just like this. Define another color. As I explained before, you can also define a stroke at any moment, and you can just change the size of the stroke using this one. If I want to remove the stroke, I will just click on this area and I will remove the stroke. So after this type of work, in this case, if I double click, as you can see, you have handles here, and these handles correspond to the curves that we have on this area. You cannot any moment change the number of side as well when you go here. And this one correspond to the curves or you can click on these handles as well. Now if I just go on the preset here because you have also some preset, you can automatically create a hexagon, heptagon, you can create octagon. You have also a rounded element like this, like a triangle, rounded triangles, and you can adjust the curve value. So you have all these different type of options, as you can see. Now something that I'm going to do it is to remove this one, and let's just continue. If you want to create a star, you have to type of star first, the basic stars, and one more time, you can define a number of point and you can press shift if you want to keep the proportion, and you have all the different radios that you can have here. And you can just dragging and moving also directly this point, and sometimes it's more convenient to use. Can at any moment click on the preset and you have multiple type of elements that you can create. And for this, you can convert with these different type of options as you can see. If I just continue here and you can create to double stars as well. So I will select the double stars here and I can press shift. And the fact is I will just change the color with a double stars. You have this point, so we can change this point value. And this point value is one of the first point just like this. This is a point radice, and you have also the inner radius. So you can focus on the point radice and the inner radius if you want to adjust. You can also change the number of points here, we have five and we can change the number of points as well just like this. You can also break the proportion if you need at any moment. So if I just continue here, if I just continue here, if you want to create something like arrow, you can select arrow tools. I will just define a color. I will select the blue colors, and I will start my arrow, and you can also press shift to keep the proportion. You have multiple types of models of arrows that you can select, and for this, you can go on this area. If you want a simple arrow, you can, for example, click here. But if you want to double arrow, you can maybe select the first one. After that, you have the end and on the end, you can select what you need, and you have also the beginning, and you can just have the same thing or you can just change as well with another one. You can also activate nod at any moment. So you can change the end and you can change the beginning in a pretty fast way using the different type of options. Then you have the lane, so you can adjust the lane here. You can adjust the Chevron lane as well, and you can also just click on the different point if you prefer to adjust using this one. Sometimes it's pretty faster and more convenient. So if I just click on this arrow, I will press the lit. And if we continue, you have a lot of type of options. Sometimes you have more advancings, you have one more time, the donut tools. If you want to create something like a cog, you can select the coctol, you can press shift to keep the proportion. If you want to keep the same ratio, you also center your element just in the midle just like. And you have all these type of options. One more time, you have a preset and one more time, different type of options that we can use. If I want to come back to the normal presets, I will click on this one. You can also double click and have access to the different red point, and thanks to this different red point, you can adjust all the options that we have here. Inner radius, the tooth size and the not size as well, and also the curvatures. You can also work with inner radius just here. So let's click on this one and press delete. And if we continue we have again more options, if you want to create something like a color as you can see, you have these options just like this. You have another type of options like also this one, and each time you can adjust with the different value just here. Oops, I think I created another one, and you can adjust with a different value on this area or with the different values that we have here. If I just delete this one and I continue, you have the spiral tool, the spiral tool is a little bit different. Why this one is a little bit different Because if you just create a spiral, I'm going to create a spiral here. The only difference is when you want to fill because if you fill, for example, the spiral, you will obtain this render. Generally, when you work with a spiral, most of the time, you are not going to apply a color, but you are going to apply a stroke. So you will apply just a stroke here. You will define the size of the stroke, and generally, with a spiral tool, you will use a stroke. You double click, you will be redirected also with not tools, and here one more time, it's a little bit different. It means you can take, for example, a point like this, but here I move all the elements. So the best things to do, you can invert. Just like that, you can change the number of term here. You can define arc angles, and you can increase the number of points, but you can also make something as you can see non regular we can also focus with the inner radios. So every time it is exactly the same principle depending on one another shapes, you can focus on the vector mode, but you can also apply this on the pixels and layout mode. This is how we can create shapes. 148. Pictures part 2: We're going to continue with image frames. We have seen that we can create image frames and we are going to continue. So something that we will do here, we have seen that we can just add any picture frame just like this and we can generate a frame. Here I still have the strokes like the order frames. So I can deactivate, for example, the stroke, and you can just place image inside. So we can use replace image, you select image, you can place your image, you can adjust the image inside, and you can dragging and moving the image. And you can do the same type of things with ellipse, for example, and you can replace the image as well, and you can activate image and do the same type of thing. You need to understand that it works also for any type of shapes. So concretely, I'm going to select this one, delete, and let's just take an example with any shapes here. I'm going to select one of these shapes like, for example, let's just select the polygon tools, and with a polygon tools, I will change for eight sides. After to change for eight side, I will generate a polygon with shift, and I will just place my polygon just here. And this polygon, it works for any shapes. You can define any colors here and you can convert this polygon to image frame. For this, you just need to go right click. And when you go right click, you have convert and you can convert to picture frames, convert to picture frames. And after to do this work, you can see, even if you have a color, the two lines appearing here. And now it is exactly like a picture frame. You can use or replace image tools, and you can define image. Maybe I will define inside maybe this image just like this. And after that, it works exactly in the same way. You can scale or increase the size, and you can also dragging and moving inside, as you can see. So as you can see, it's convenient. And you can also have the possibility to adjust some sharp points if you need. And it works not only to convert shapes, but it works also when you create a pass. So it means you can use a pen tools, and you can create polylines, or you can create two curves. I'm going to show you. You can do left click here, left click here and maybe generate the curves just like this, generate oar curves and left click again, left click and left click here. Something that I will do it is to deactivate here is value of the field and the stroke value. So here, as you can see, we have curves layers, and I can convert also curves layer so I can go right click here, convert to picture frames. And now I can replace the image, and I can place another image inside. Let's see, for example, this one, just like this. And that's it. So after that, you can scale, you can adjust the image inside, and you can also adjust your picture frame. So I can set on the picture frame, selt the not tools, and I can have access to again my so point. And as you can see the image will stay perfectly inside, and you can also convert any polyline or any curves just like this. So it is another way to process. You can select your shapes, then select the not tools, and you can add more points. If you need, you can also convert the points. I added a new point. This one can address the curve. So you can do a lot of things as you can see. Now, let's your last example. I will delete this one and delete this one. And just create a structure page. To create a structure page, I will go on view here, and we will select margins and guides. And after to select margins and guides, what we will do we will define margins. So I will define a margin with a value of ten, and at the same time, we'll define two columns and three rows. So ten for the margins, two columns, three rows, and gutters at 10 millimeters, and I will just close. And now hoops I think I make some mistake, I will come back to margin and guides and we'll apply for both. So now what I will do, I will zoom a little bit here and we'll select the picture frame rectangle tools and we'll create a picture frame around this area, and we will replace the image. And we replace by what we replace the image. I have four temples images Temple one, two, three, and four. And I will select the temple once then I will hoops. Then I will scale the image inside just like this and that's it. Then we'll add some content on the right. And for this, I will select the frame text tool will snap here and we'll create text frames on the right, and I will go right click here in sort of filler text. This filler text, I will select the filler text I will go on the option of justification and we will use justify left. And I will keep the size with two points. Now we'll select the image shift, and we'll select the text frames, and I will duplicate with edit duplicate layers, and we can just snap here. You need to have the snapping options activated here, and in the snapping option, you need to add Snap to guide or snap to spread for example, in margins, all the elements activated to be able to snap on this area. Then I will select all this not on these two element, I will select these two element again, and I will go and edit duplicate layers, and I will try again moving here. And if I duplicate again, I will repeat the last transformations, and I can repeat with exactly the same properties. So now I can obtain this winder. I can just change the image on each frame. So it means you can click here and replace the image. And if I scroll down, I have the image with temple number two, and I will play this one and I can just adjust inside if I need. I will select this image, replace the image, and we will define temple number three, and I can zoom little bit, I can scale the image inside if I need. And I will stick my last image, replace image, and I will define temple number four, and I will increase a little bit of size, and that's it. You can try to struct your page just like this. So now what we can do, we can, for example, deactivate the view, and in the margin guide options, we can deactivate the columns, we can deactivate the ros as well, and we can also deactivate margin just like this. And if you want to activate the preview, you can click here because here, we can still have the frame of the text frame appearing just as an appearance. But if we want to have the preview option, you can just click here and we have the right structure with the image frame, the text frames, and also the right distribution and alignment thanks to the columns and margins. So this is how we can work with image frames. 149. Recipe journal part 2: We are going to continue with these recipe journals. So for this to continue with these Tip journals, what we are going to do, we're going to add dash lines. So for this, I will select the pen tool see, and we'll just crack lines I will start around this area and left click until this ones, and I will press Shift and left click again. I will press escape and I will change the type of dashline. So first, we'll go on the options, and on the options, we will use dashline styles, and I will decrease the size, maybe we can decrease to 0.4. And here we can change the sequence. So maybe we can change. Let's try with four and four. I think four and four can be pretty convenient. So 44, 0.4 as well, and we have a line to use. And I will extend a little bit to line this one around here. So this one first one will be for the receipt. That, maybe you can reduce a little bit. The recipe maybe just keep this side is going to be okay. This one will be the name of the recipe. We can adjust little bit the position of the line. Then we can duplicate, edit, duplicate layers, and we will place another one here around this area and we can move cooking times on the right, difficulty on the right as well, just like this. And we can place preparation time around here and duplicate, edit, duplicate layers, and duplicate to have this also just and I will just place my position, maybe this one a little bit more on the top, just like this. After I will duplicate this one, edit, duplicate layers, and I will place an order one maybe here on the same alignment, and on difficulty, I will place different stars. I will select the stars tool with the star tools here. We define here, you can define the number of points as you can see, and we'll define five point. After to define five point, I will increase the orbit so inner radius maybe 42. And I will generate my stars, my small stars. We just need to change the stats on the options. So on the option, we need to come back with solid line just here, and here we can change and we put one point. And we'll place first stars around this area. We reduce a little bit, just here, and I will duplicate these stars. So to duplicate these stars, I will just go on it, duplicate layers, and I will place one here, edit, duplicate layers, edit, duplicate layers, and then edit duplicate layers. I will see cooking time and difficulty dragging and moving a little bit on the left, just like this. Then four stars, move a little bit on the right, just here, and maybe you can dragging and moving a little bit more. I feel these two lines, move a little bit on the left again. I will select this one and this one move a little bit on the left again. And now I think we have some nice space for the stars just like this. So I would select the four stars. I will use aligment panels and the aligment panels will use haline milders and would use the distribution space horizontal, just like that. After to do this work, I will duplicate, for example, this line, edit, duplicate layers, and I will place another line around maybe here. I can adjust maybe this frame and this frame, can adjust just like that, and I can play this line around here. I will extend on the right, and I will duplicate to edit. Duplicate layers, and we'll duplicate around maybe here, and I will edit duplicate layers, edit, duplicate layers, edit, duplicate layers, edit, duplicate layers, edit, duplicate layers. One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, edit, duplicate layers. Maybe we can play ten here. And yes, I can place ten just like that. So ten lines one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. I can select all the line. We can check that with alignment, align left distribution space vertical. And I will duplicate edit duplicate layers will duplicate on the right around here. Just like that. I think it's better to create a group in this case. I will select all this element, right click and generate a group and then duplicate the group just like this. I will duplicate the groups, and I can just try to stay in front or you can press shift to stay on the same axis, and I will align to preparation just like that. And now we can scale hoops we shift to just scale on on the right, just like this. This is how we can work. We can also press shift and we can scale to alg just here. Now I will ungroup, right click ungroup this one and click here, right click and ungroup this one. I will set four lines here, four lines, and I will go and edit, duplicate layers, and I will play these four lines here. Maybe maybe it's going to be we can more space so I can move notes here, and maybe we can scale a little bit this one and change little bit to position and seltPhoto inside and put this one like this. Yeah. Maybe we can also select all the element just like this. Dragging and moving a little bit here to let a little bit more space, Selic ingredient in preparation, put maybe this one here. Thanks to that, we have more space and I can put note around this area. I need to check. Yes, we can snap here. This one maybe you can reduce a little bit. And this one maybe in the midls. Yes, just like that. And that's it. So we have created, as you can see this page, and you can take a look. So we see preparation time, cooking time, number of persons, then difficulty ingredient, preparations, notes and photos as well. Like that. Maybe we can click on this one. We can extend little bit this one on the left, just like this. So after to do this type of work, you can apply this master on multiple pages. So you can select the page number one at page, and you can select the master journals here. And you can define the page that you want. So for example, if I want 60 page, I can apply 60 page after the page one journals, and I can just craft my journals like this here, as you can see. On the first page, we're not going to make this in details, but you can enter what you want, it means you can select the artistic text tools, for example, and you can just tap something like recip here. We can change the font family and use the same caliber font family. And I will scale a little bit. I will place recipe here, and I will duplicate duplicate layers, and we will just change that. We'll tape journals here. So recip journals. Maybe we can increase recip. Let's just put a thing the same size. So I'm going to come back. Yes, just like this. So recip journals, and I will duplicate, edit, duplicate layers. We'll go here, and I will scale little bit, and I will tap, for example, 60 receipts to fill or anything like this, 60 blank receipt or 60 blank receipts. You can just type anything. Let just type 60 blank receipts. Just like that. So we can place receipt journals around here, 60 blank receipt, we can reduce place around here. If, for example, we add maybe something like an illustration, we can place an illustration on the top on the bottom. Here don't tap but just to show you the principle of work. And we can just tape. I think 60 bnkRcipt will be okay, just like this. So it's okay for that. I can activate the preview. And as you can see, we can repeat this. And the positive point is, at any moment, I can come back to this. And if I want to adjust anything, for example, I add receive just to show you you add, for example, letters. As you can see, you go on the page and everything will be modified as well. So you just need to click on the masters and you can adjust anything on the masters, and it will be applied. So every time that you need to create the interior, something like this with just few element titles, line frames, anything like this, you need to work with the masters. 150. Symbols part 2: We are going to continue with symbols. We have seen how to craft symbols, and we are going to see how you can integrate symbols and how it can be useful. So first, something that we can do, we are going to come back to open the symbol panels. So for this, as I explained before, you can go on Window. You can select vectors and you can use symbols just like that. Even if you have the element here, as long as it self inside the symbol, you can, for example, remove this one in the layer panels. So for example, I can decide to remove this one from layer panels or remove this one from layer panel. It's not a problem. We can keep this directly on the symbol area just like that. So now what we can do also, we can integrate a symbol. So to integrate a symbol, what we can do, you can just dragging and moving the symbols, and you can play the symbol here. I can dragging and moving another one. Let's just play multiple tie the symbols. I can place here, then we can place here. We can place this one here and we can place also this one here. I think it's going to be a little bit outside, so maybe I can move my symbol on this area, this one on this area, and we still have little space and I can zoom little bit and move the symbol a little bit here. Then we will see the symbol number two, and the symbol number two we can just place here. We can integrate another times, then we can integrate another times again and we can integrate another times one more time. So I can integrate my symbols multiple times as you can see. Now, it can be useful for the simple reason that if you click on symbols just like this, you can, for example, change some properties. So if I select, for example, this one and I decide to change the color, the color of all the sample will change as well, not only here, but on the layer panels also. As you can see, I can change the colors. If I decide to apply a stroke, we can click on the stroke options. Just here define the size of the stroke, and as you can see the properties of the stroke will appear also here. This is one of the first interest. You can, for example, change the color, change the properties of the stroke here, and definitely it is useful. So this is one of the first interests. So now what I'm going to do we will just remove the stroke so I will click on this area, and I will just remove the stroke just like this. If you scale element, for example, you scale like this, you decide to scale, it's not going to impact. So the scale value is something different. Now, if I click on this one, double click, you can enter inside the symbol, and you can edit the plyine. And if I decide to edit the polyline, as you can see, it's going to apply on all the symbol as well. And if I click here, I dragging and moving, as you can see impact all the symbols, just like this, if I select this one and I adjust, it will be adjusted also. So in this case, it is useful. It is same for the tree. If I select, for example, this one, I can double click Enter inside this group, and inside this group or the curve, I can adjust the color, and the change will be apply on all the elements, as you can see. And at the same time, I can double click and I can enter inside to have the curves. And as you can see, you can adjust the curves, and it will impact directly on my element. Now you have also the possibility to detach. Concretely, when you have a symbol, you can click on a symbol. When you go right click, you won't have directly the options here, and you need to understand that when you go on vector on this area, you have crated new symbol, but you won't have more options. So here you have detach. And if I detach this instant symbol, this one when you take a look on the layer panels, now this one don't have the orange light on the front. The orange line indicates that you have a symbol and that the element are linked together. And this one now don't have the orange line, so I need this one. So if I select this one and I change the color, as you can see, this one is now totally independent. If I select this one, double click and maybe I can ops, double click again, and I reduce the size just like this. As you can see, this one is totally independent. If I click on one of these, for example, the last one. The last one, I will use detach. Now if I edit any of these, for example, this one, and I decide to change a little bit, color, this one is not going to be impacted because this one is now just like a normal element. It means a group concretely. And because we have something different, even this one, if I adjust, I can adjust this one in a different way. I can maybe scale or I can change the ho point, but this one is totally independent. We need to understand after it's not possible to attach again because here now, this one is totally independent. So it is something also important to understand possibility to detach or to create a game. So this is why symbol can be useful. You can integrate the symbol, and if after you edit the properties of one of the symbol, it will change the properties of all the symbols, and this is why it is useful. When you go on the layer panels, if you select one symbol, and you just go right click here. As you can see, you won't have directly the possibility to, for example, adjust if you ungroup a symbols, for example, you ungroup a symbols. Automatically it is like to detail the symbol. So now I ungroup these symbols. What does it mean? It means if, for example, I change the color of this one, this one is not anymore symbol. So you can also ungroup a symbol. If you click on a symbol, you go right click, ungroup or you have more option, you can also group for these panels or right click on group. Automatically, you won't have the element on the front, and this one will be separate. So concretely, you won't have, again, a symbol when you do something here, as you can see, this one won't be impacted because we won't have symbols anymore, just like this. So this is how we can work with symbols, as you can see, it's pretty convenient. And for this vector mode, concretely, when you work with one to draw element, you want to insert multiple elements with possibility to change the same properties, the symbols are interesting. So we're going to delete this different element. If you just come back on the window here vector symbols, you want to delete a symbol, you go right click here and you delete from these panels and right click and delete from this panel. Even if you delete here, it's not going to delete symbols directly on this area, but just convert groups just like this. So this is how we can work with symbols. 151. Tables part 2: We're going to continue with the tables. We have seen how to crack tables, we have seen how to add contents on tables, how we can work with rows and columns, and how we can adjust these rows and columns. Now what we're going to see it is how to work with the strokes and the background color. So when you click on your tables, just see you can apply if you double click, you can select some specific areas like that. In some specific area, for example, if I select all the sales, you can go in the sales color here, so you can change the sales color. But you can also apply different color depending on what you select. For example, I can select the sales on the top only and I can apply a different colons only for this one. So you can change the color like this. You have also the possibility to change the stroke, and if I selt all the cells, you can find here and you can define for a specific area or for all. If you use all just here, you can define stroke maybe colors so you can change the color. You can define even some options. It means you can have all the options here, and as you can see, you can adjust with a different option. But you can also apply this only on the right and on the right, I can, for example, apply more size just like this, or I can define maybe on the left, and if I select the left, I can increase the size more. You can have a lot of options. And if I come back to maybe, I can select all and I can adjust again to size color with a black here, just like that. But as you can see, you can adjust really your tables. Now if I select this, I can come back, I can select all, and I can go on the options, and now I can come back just like this to define space. If you want to have more options, you can click on your table just here. You go on the top, you select window, you select tables, and you can find tables here. Thanks to that, you can find again this type of options. So one more time, you can find fills and you can just feel like that. But here, it's filled for the frame concretely. So you need to selt the frame. So if I selt all the frame here and I adjust, as you can see, it's not going to work because here it's about struck and filled. Here it's only for the frame. So it is if we don't have any content. If I go in struck, it is same. It is strong, but it struck only for the frame. So it means only on the outside part as you can see. It's a little bit different and you can also create inset just like this and create inset in a negative way. But negative way, in this case, it's not working properly. So you can work like this for only the frame. Now you can work for the struck and fill, as I explained, and here I select it depends about what you select. If you select, you can fill your tables with all colors just like this, if you select to cells, just here. And you can apply also the field borders on specific area. And as you can see, if you selic for example, on inside horizontal and you change the size, you will work on the size only on inside horizontal bounders. If you want to apply your, you select, here, you click on, and you can just adjust on all the way just like this of your element here. This is how we can process. You can also even create some inset here for the cell. So what does it mean concretely? You can select the cells just like this. And you can adjust the white one more time, or you can also adjust the eight of your cells just like this. So you can adjust eight and the white just here. Um, so if you select, for example, this one, you can change the wide and I can also reduce the why just like this. And as I explained before, we can select all this, and we can go right click even distribute and right click, even distributors if we want to combine. I want to come back with a white color on the back, I will select all my cells, and I will click on fill and we will come back to the white color. So this is how to work with these panels. The last thing that I wanted to show you, it is also that you can merge cells. Concretely what you can do, if you select all the first one just here, it means all these cells, you can go right click here and you have merged cells. In this case, all the content will be in just one cell. But we keep the content as well. Same if I define this and right click merge cells, all content this time horizontally. So this is the type of thing that we can do. And if you select the cells just like this. So if I select these cells, right click, you can then separate cells again. The problem is if you separate the cells, you can fit like this. I'm going to try to select this one, so you can go right click separate cells. So you can separate like this. But the content we stay in white cells. You need to be careful about this. So now if I just come back, at these levels. I can come back just at the moment where I was like this. Why it is useful because you can, for example, still, right click merge cells. And after you can just change, and I can take title content example and just change example with tables, for example, you can adjust your content like this. So as you can see, merge cells can be also pretty convenient. Let's just come back at the moment where I have only one just like this. And that's it. So after you select the move tools, so the selection tools, just like that, you need to be careful that if you feel here, as you can see with only the selection tool, you will feel directly all the colors on the content. So I can fill all the color with the content. So this one is for this. But if you double click here and you select, for example, all the cells, can see here now it will be for the background. So it means now we have cells. So if you just use your selection tool, you click here. Here this is the color change for the content. But if you double click and you select all the cells, now it is a sales color. So it is a little bit different. So we need to be careful about this. So tables is pretty convenient. You just need to be careful where to apply, for example, the strokes, where to apply the colors. You need to understand also how to add rows and decrease and change the number of colors or how you can merge at columns and at cells as well. It's definitely extremely convenient to crat a table with affinity. And if I want, I can take here and change Crato selections, and I will change for the black color just exist. So that's it. This is how we can generate tables and how you can manage tables as well. Something that we are going to do it is to select all the element here, and I will just press digit on the keyboard here. And this is how to create tables. Y. 152. Tables part 1: We're going to see how to craft tables. And for this, we're going to work in the layout mode because this is in the layout mode that you can have access to the table tools, and this is in this mode that we use the tables. So concretely to start table, how you can do, you go on this area and you can find the table tools. When you click on the table Tools, I'm going to zoom a little bit on my page. You can just start a frame for your table. So left click and you can start a frame. Depending on how you will dragging and moving, you can first define a number of rows and a number of columns. So you can stop the left click, and as you can see, your tables will appears here. To adjust the number of columns and the number of rows, you can just click on each corners just here, and here I can reduce or increase the number of rows, as you can see, the number of columns here. And on this area can increase or decrease the number of rows just like that. If for example, I want something like if I want something like for example, four columns, I will just stop to ABCD, and if I want something like six rows, I will stop to six here. That's it, and I created this table, and now if I come back to my selection tools, a table is created on the layer panels and I can go left click here, and as you can see, you can just dragging and moving and now you still have the number that you want, just like that. As you can see, we don't see too much the table, I will show you after how you can edit the different parameters of your tables. What does it mean? It means how you can work with concretely how you can extend the line because here in this area, if I want to extend the line, when you go on the options here, you have window and you have tables, and you have the tables and table format. And concretely, if you click on tables here. We'll be able to adjust you have. You can fill your table. And in this case, I'm going to use stroke and fill. And you can use, for example, outside here, and you can, yes, use the stroke here and we have 0.2. And as you can see, it's not enough. So I'm going to increase at the beginning to start with something bigger like maybe we can start with 1.6, and I will just validate. After I will explain these panels more in details. So first, we'll focus with this. So after to do this type for, I will zoom little bit out, and I will extend a little bit my table here and extend a little bit my table here as well. And what I will do, I will add content. So to add content, you can add content inside. You can double click. And when you double click, you can select all the table and tape your content. For example, I will tape content here, and I will tape content here as well. Here, we will tape content, and here we will tape content. To adjust the size, you can just select all the cells. And when you select all the sales, uh, not select all the cell. To select a cell, you go left click, you stay left click and you dragging and moving, and you can select cells like this. And after if you go on the option, the option of the text will apply directly on what you create here. So for example, I can put my text in 24. If I wanted to center, you can use ALN center here, and here vertical is also useful. So you can use Center vertical. Now I'm going to click here and I'm going to tape some content. So I will type, for example, different number 24. So I will tape just different type of numbers here. L just tape any type of things. I will change whoops just a little bit, I'm going to come back. Yes, I will change and just put another value. Okay. Okay, so we can tap some content like this. If I want to adjust this content, I will go left click. I will stay left click and I will select these different sales just like this. And I can adjust also the size, I will put, for example, 20, and I will use the same. I will click on Centers and I will click on center vertically and horizontally. But you can change also the property, so it means you can adjust the text. But the problem if you adjust the text here, it will be the sales colors. So here we have the sales color so you can adjust the sales color on, for example, the tables. You click here and you can adjust on all the table. And you can also address substract. I will show you this after. So first, I'm not going to put here. And if you select this one, you can also change the text color, just clicking on this area, and I can change to say the text color. So now if I just come back to the black color, something that I wanted to show you is how you can add, for example, more cells. So to add cells, you can just as I explained, you can just extend here, for example, or you can reduce just like this. But you can adult cells also on specific area. If, for example, I just select these cells just like this, or I'll select this one just here. When you go on this area, you can select this small arrow and you can insert a colon or dente colon. For example, I can insert a colon just before. It is same if I go, for example, here, you don't need to set reduce the cell. You can also just go on a, for example, here, you click on the small arrow, and you can insert rows as well. So I can insert a rose and I can insert colons. If I want to delete, I click here and I can just go on delete rose just like this. Or I can click here and I will go on the small arrows and I will delete the columns as well. So it is a way to process. You have also the possibility to adjust the size of the column. So for example, you can just click here and you can dragging and moving just like this. When you are on this error, you can also dragging and moving here. So you can change directly the ratio of each line and each columns. Now, if you want to readjust, you can, for example, select all arrows like this. And when you go right click, you have now evenly distribute columns. So you can come back with evenly distribute columns just like that. And if I just come back here, I can go right click and you have evenly distribute ros. And I can come back at the beginning. So you can just dragging hoops you can share like this. So you can just dragging column like this. You can also maybe dragging like that. If you select all the element, you can go right click. You have also autofit row to content. Sometimes it's useful here, it's not very useful, but you have also autofit rows to columns, just like this. As as I explained before, when you go on the top, on the top area just like this, you can find some options, and this one is a text option and you can find table. You can find again, insert column, delete column insert radio laws, and you also evenly distribute columns evenly distribute rows. So I can come back to evenly here and I can go on text. I can select tables and evenly distribute rows. And I can come back to this area. Now we'll click outside and I will adjust the size of my table here. So this is how to start with the tables. And after I'm going to show you how you can manage the colors and the strokes and even how you can merge, how you can merge cells. 153. Shapes part 1: We're going to see how to create shapes. And for this, we will work with the vector mode. You have the possibility to crack shapes also in the different mode, but we will see the vector mode because this is the mode where we will use the most. So to crack shapes, you will find these tools here, and with these tools, you have a lot of type of shapes that you can create. I'm not going to see all the shape, but to understand the principle of work. So first, I will see the rectangle tools. When you click on the rectangle tool, you can also directly have the different tools appearing here. So it means all the tools can appear here. But if you see the rectangle tools, all the shapes will appear on this area as well. So for things to do to create a rectangle, for example, you go left click and you start to rectangles. And when you stop the left click, you can just generate here. On the layer panels, you will have object layers. To fill this rectangle, you can go on the top, and directly, you can find these panels. And from this, you can apply a color. You have also the possibility if you put the color panels on the right to just display a color also on your shape directly from these panels, and as you can see, it's pretty fast. Now if you want to add a stroke, you can activate a stroke here. So first, you can define stroke colors, and when you go on this area, you have the possibility to define the size of the stroke as you can see. If you want to adjust more, you can click on this point and you can also change the type of rectangle that you want. If I just come back on the option, you have the stroke while features. And when you click here, you have more options to adjust the stroke, but I will explain this more in details after. If you want to remove the color inside, you can just click here and you can click on No and deactivate the color inside. If you want to recuperate to color, you can click here and recuperate to color. If you don't want to stroke, you can click on this area and you can deactivate the stroke one more time. On each shape that you will create, you will have different predefined models. So for example, if I select the rectangle, I can adjust with some rounded rectangle so you can define rounded rectangles. And when I go on this area, I have also strength. I can select concave, and I can select cutout just like that. You have also the possibility if you define rounded to deactivate absolute size or to activate absolute size. Deactivate single radius, you have also more options again, and you can work on each corner independently as you can see, and it is also something to understand. I can work on each corner independently now using this one. You need to understand that when you are with your selection tool or just you keep your shapes, you will be switched with different handles. This one has the red handles, and the red handles will allow you to adjust the parameter that you have here. If you select the selection tools, as you can see, you can just dragging and moving your shape. But if you double click, you will be redirected to the not tools, and as long you don't convert the shape to pass, you will be able to have access to these red handles and to adjust your rectangle with this type of properties. I just click here, I can come back to single radios. I can also go in these options and we have multiple types of options or more times. If I sel, for example, these options, you can also adjust and this one is just the corner value, as you can see. So if I just want to come back, I can click here, select the rectangle and I can extend on this area. Now let's see how to create a circle. So we'll remove this one and we will select the ellipse tools. So if you create ellipse, you just need to go left click and you can create ellipse. Then if you click on the selection tool, you can scale the ellipse on the different size tracking and moving. You can also click here to crater rotation and you can press shift to constraint every 15 degrees. Now if I just remove this ellipse and you want to create a perfect circle, you just need to press shift. And when you press shift, you can keep the proportion. If you press shift and control with control, you can start with the center of your cursor as you can see. So where you are located your cursor, you can adjust with control to stay in the center. If you're presif, you just keep the propusion just like that. One more time, you can use a different properties. If you want to add a stroke, for example, you can add a stroke. You can one more time define the size of the stroke here. And if I want to remove again the stroke, I will just click here. Let's just change the color and I will go with this green color. Now if you select the selection tool and double click, you will be redirected to the note tools. And in this case, I cannot have access to different red angles. Expect if I convert to donut or convert to P. If, for example, I convert to donut, just here, I have now access to these options, and I can work with options. For example, I have the start angles. I can define a start angles and this one is angles. You can work with the parameter here. You have also total angles. So you can work with the parameter here, you can also invert. But if you want to make something faster because you use the not tools, you can have access to these handles. And these angles are just the correspondence to the different value. So for example, this one correspond to the total angles and move the start angles. This one correspond total angles and moves angles as well. And this one is just the L radius and you can adjust the radius using this one also. But it is also something important to know. If I just remove these circles and a create one, I just press shift here and a created one, you can also convert to P. And after to do this type of work, you can define one more time the different options. You can create, for example, like this, or you can just focus on start angles, or you can just focus on end angles, and you have the tental angles as well. You can also invert angles if you need just clicking here. If you select the not tools, after you can also move these different values in a pretty fast way just using the different rectangle just like that. Again dragging and moving the different rectangles just here as you can see. And dragging and moving the different rectangles on this area. And after to understand this type of process, you can repeat with any shapes. If for example, you want to have directly a wounded rectangle, you just create directly the rounded rectangle, and automatically, as you can see, you have wounded corner. And you can adjust this wounded corner or you can adjust here. And it is exactly the same way. I just that automatically, you have wounded rectangles. If you want to create something like a triangle, you just click on the triangle tools, and you can press shift if you want to keep the proportion, you can dragging and move in this one, if you want to create triangle rectangles, or if you want to move the summit, you can also use a mirror to, as you can see, move this. You can also adjust with a top point as well. So we're going to remove that and after we'll explain the different order type of shape because you have multiple types of options as well. 154. Symbols part 1: Create symbols. We are going to see how to create symbols. For this, the first thing that I'm going to do is to create an element here, and then we will convert these to symbols. I will select the rectangle tools, and we will zoom a little bit on this area, and we will create rectangles around here, and I will convert these rectangles. I will use the red color just like that. And I will deactivate the stroke as well. Then I will zoom a little bit. I will see the triangle tools, will create the triangles around this area, and we will put these triangles on the top, we extend a little bit more and we will do something like this. Maybe I can reduce it little bit this one. Then I will select directly the three angle in these rectangles and reduce the Bolan operation ad, just like that. After to do this type of work, I will generate another rectangles, and I will snap here. I will create another small rectangles with a different color like the blue colors. We can play this one here, and I will create another small rectangles again, and we will create another one, and I will extend little bit here, and I will place in the center. We will select this polyline, shift these blue rectangles, and we will use substract. Then we'll select this polyline and these blue rectangles, and we'll use substract. I created this first element, as you can see. Then we'll create another element like a basic tree just below. I'll see the rectangle tools just here, and I will create small rectangles just on this area, and I will define some brand colors. Then I will place the element here, I will go and edit, duplicate the layers, and I will place another one here, scale a little bit, make something a little bit darker. And I will select my two rectangles and I will go right click generator groups. Then we'll select ellipse tools. I will generate ellipse, just like this. This ellipse, I will use color like this type of green colors, just like that. And something that we will do is to go right click here, and I will convert to curs. So thanks to that, I can see this point and this point we shift, and we will draw little bit on this area. And I will just validate, we duplicate these curves. I will go right click and I will select duplicate I will go here, edit duplicate the layers, and I will just keep these layers in the same location. I will adjust with a little brighter green color and double click to select this anchor point and hoops and I will dragging and moving little bit nodes inside just like that. Then we will select these two elements, right click Generate two groups, and I will place I will select my two groups just like this. And selected the two groups, I can go on aliment panels, and I will define center to the last selected or the first selected or the selection boom as well, it's going to work. So now I sedict all the elements here and I will ungroup. We understand after why. I'm going to click on Ungroup A. How to generate a symbol. To generate a symbol, first, you need to open the panels. The panels is located in Windows, and in Windows, you can find panels here. And in the vector mode, you can find symbols, and we can open these symbol panels. You can create a symbol for a selection. For example, I can click on this element, and I can just create a symbol. And automatically my symbol is created just like this. Then you can go right click and you can delete or rename the symbol. If I rename the symbol, I will just change For this, we are just going to tape symbol number one, just like this, and I will validate. Now, if you have multiple element and you create a selection here, we have two curves and two rectangles. Two curves two rectangles and I generate a symbol. The problem is we have all this symbol created. Each time if you just selict one element or multiple element, as you can see, he will generate multiple symbol. It's not extremely convenient in this case. If for example, you sel, you generate an ellipse, you create another one, or you create another one. If you select this multiple element and you want to create a symbol, automatically, you can see, he will generate all these elements. Each element will create a symbol independently. So in this case, this is not what I want to do. So I'm going to remove this one. You can remove element, the symbol we stay here and you can go right click, delete here and you can validate, right click and delete here, and I will go on this one, right click delete. A, this one, right click, delete also. This one, right click, delete also. This one, right click, delete also. Yes, delete also and this one right click, delete also. So if at the opposite a generator group, concretely, here, they convert the curse to the group in this case. But if you create a complete group, you can go right click and create a complete groups. And because we have a complete groups, if you generate a group for the different entity, now if you click on Create, automatically, the group will be converted to symbols. So if you have multiple objects, multiple element and you want to create a group, you need to put this multiple element inside a group first and then generate a symbol. Now I can go right click, I can, for example, rename and I will rename for symbol number two. So as I explained, right click, you can rename a symbol and you can delete a symbol as well. Here you can use detach detach, I will explain after why it is useful, and this is the first things to understand. So after that, Ah, first, we're going to close these panels to close these panels. When we go here, as you can see when you have symbols, you can see what you have inside this symbol. Here for example, we have this symbol, even if we can change in the layer panels. Even here I could change the name and I could rename for symbol number two. But just for my layer, you can put a different name for the layer panels. It is a different way. And this one I can put symbol number one. I can see what I have inside each element. What does it mean? It means that after that we'll be able to edit element if we. And here you can see the small icon here on the top and the small color like what we were using symbols, just like this. This is the first things to understand where you start after, I'm going to show you why it is useful to work with symbols. 155. Montage part 2: We're going to continue with this montage. We have seen how to work with different selections concretely, we have used this image, we have used this image, we have used this image, and we have used this image. Each time we have created different selection to copy and pass the selection here. At the same time on this area, the layer panels we change the name of the layers, and we apply also some adjustment inside the ocean layers and the sky layers. Now we want to create a blend effect on woman one and woman two. So concretely, we will use the layer mask because you can just work like this, change and select a blend mode, as you can see, something like overlay. The problem is it's not pretty good on this area, as you can see, it's not pretty good. This is why we need to make something differently. You can also, if you come back to normal, just decrease the transparency, but we'll have the same trouble here. So what we need to do we need to recuperate the value. Here we'll put 100%, and I will create a layer mask. We click here and we will use layer mask. Mask is in is. We just need to crate the gradient for this we'll select the gradient tools. I will go on the left here and we have the field tools. With the field tools, I need to change the type, and I will switch for linear. After to switch for linear, first, I will click to define black to is will click on the first point and the first point will define black. Then I will click on the second point and the second point will define is. Now I have this black color and white color, so I can go to rise. So if I go left click here, I can dragging and moving. So we need to place concretely. I don't want to create this effect, so I need to invert, so I will place the why point around here and the black point around here. After depending on the render, we can adjust put this one maybe more outside. And this one if you put on this area, as you can see, you will find the border of the layers. And this is not what we want to do. So we need to place the Black point little bit inside, just like this. After we can change also the midpoint, depending on the render that we want, and you can dragging and moving more this is point. As you can see, we can create a blend effect using this one. The interesting thing is to have a transition here. So now if I do this type of work, I will repeat the process on the right. So we'll click on the woman number two layers, and we will define mask layers. Repeat this process. First, we will use the field tools will change the type and we'll define linear. After to define linear, I will switch my two colors. The first one, I will define black and I will define the second colors and the second colors will be wise. Now I can go left click to dragging and moving my gradient. It is same I will need to play the right direction. The wise point in this case on the right. This black point, so the wise point maybe we can put little bit outside. Black point, as you can see if you are here, you can see the border of the layers. You need to put this one little bit inside. And then we can final this one and you can change address with a point just like this. So I think like this it's pretty decent. So as you can see, we can create a very interesting blend effect using the gradient. Now what we can do, you can also select the layers, and you can complete decreasing the opacity or just adjusting with another blend mode and you have multiple type of blend mode. For example, in this case, I will use overlay. So I will switch the blend mode of this one for overlay, and I will select the er one and I will switch also for overlay to complete my structure. At any moment, we'll have the possibility to adjust the mask so you can just click on the mask, and if you want to adjust the gradient or if you want to complete with a brush, it's definitely possible. So in this case, I will zoom little out and you can see the mask inside our different layers here. Now what we can do, we have the possibility to merge the layers to create only one layers, and why not to apply directly some adjustment on all the layers below. But we can also apply some adjustment just on the top. For example, you can do adjustment. And if after you want to change, you want to make something like, for example, you want to apply some vibrant saturation, you can put some vibrant saturation just like this. And because it stay on the top, or if I go on adjustment, I can use also something like one more time, brightness contrast. It will be applied directly on the top, as you can see. So it will apply on all the layers. So we can eventually work like this. Something that you can do also, it is to merge all the layers. So if I select the layers on the top to merge all the layers as I explained, we can go right click and you have merged on or merge visible. If you click on merge visible just like this, you can merge all Z leyers and you can keep Zolers with different type of options. What does it mean we have our final layers here and you can, for example, rename and I will rename and I will dup for example, project just here. And even on these layers that we have merged, we can also apply some adjustment. For example, I can use one more time, some brightness contrast. Let put a little bit more contrast, and we can decrease or increase the brightness. I will decrease little bits of brightness and I will put this one inside the project layers. At the same time, we will use one more times adjustment and we will use one more time wise balance. And I will adjust little bit and we make something with more warm color. I will put ten around ten. And on this area, we put little bit purple color, and I will put maybe a value of 20 just here, and we can obtain this render. And then I will dragging and moving this inside project just like that. Oh thanks to that, we can see this one at the end, and this one is the merge layers. It's non destructive because we keep all the layers just below as well. To know if I just click on this area, we can find the right structure with the different layers, copy and pass the selections and also the merge layers with two adjustment, as you can see. 156. Post part 1: In this training, we're going to create a post, and it will be interesting training to see different features. And for this, I created a new document, 1,600 pixels wide and 1,200 pixels eight. Create a new document, 1,600 pixels wide, 1,200 pixels eight. Thanks to that, what we will do, will separate in different columns and rows. Then we will place image frames and place images inside to have a right structure alignment and distribution. Then we'll add a rectangles and we will put some content inside this rectangle to create this post. First thing that we are going to do is to create our structure, and to create our structure, I will go on view here and on view we select margins and guides. And I will separate here my page between two columns and two rows. Thanks to that, we can have four element to place our friends, and I just need to define a gutter as well. Here the gutter is too big, we'll reduce the gutter in pixels, and I will reduce the gutter until 40 pixels. And after to do this work, we will click on close, and as you can see, we have the place for four frames, one, two, three, and four. This is the first thing that we are going to do. At the same time, we'll go on the right. You can check the snapping option enble snapping options and we have the different option like snap two guides and some object snapping as well here. So you can also snap to the spread. So we have all these type of snapping options activated. I will the image frame. We'll click here picture frame rectangle tools, and I will snap to the corners until this area. But you can see it's convenient. Then we can, for example, replace the image, or I can just duplicate and replace after. For example, I can go and edit, duplicate the layers, and place another frames on the right, just here, and then I will go edit, duplicate layers, and I will duplicate to have another one just here. Then I will deselect to remove the last transformation and I will click here again, edit duplicate layers, and we will place another one here. As you can see, we have the right structure, it's convenient. We just need to replace each frame by an image. So we'll select the first frame. And with the first frame, we reduce replace image here. And what image we will use, I will select the image temples number one. So we'll select the image temple number one. Here I have four images with temple, and then we can, for example, scale little bit of image, and we can dragging and moving the image to take exactly the part that I need. For example, I can take this part. I will repeat this process for each image, so I can select this frame here. I can use replace image again. And what we will do, we will select one more time, the temples number two. Then we can scale little bit image inside and after we can drag in and move in to select a specific area on the image. After that, we'll select the other one, this one, I will select replace image and on replace image, I will select another one. And I will select the temple number sui, then we can just scale just like this, and then I can dragging and moving the image just on this area. And we can repeat this process with the last image, so we'll select these frames. We will go on replace image, and I have another temples image. This one. I will select temples number four, then we will scale little bit of image just like this. And I will place the image around here. And as you can see, we have placed our four images on this area. Oh, after to do this type of work, what we can do, we don't need anymore the guide or the columns and rows. So for this, we can just come back to the panels on the top of you. We can use margins and guides, and we just need to come back to W columns and to come back to Wows as well. C let guitar exist. It's not very important. After that, if I go on the right, I think in this training we will rename the layers because we don't have too many layers, too many contents. In this case, they just rename the layers. This is a picture frame number one, we will rename and we will rename by temples number one just here. This one I will rename and I will rename by temples number two. This one I will rename and we will rename by temples number three, and this one I will rename by temples number four. Each time if you just scroll down, you can see each image, each images inside each image frame. We have the image frame inside we have the images. So here I select the image frame, and here I select the images inside that I can dragging and moving as well. If we click here, we can deactivate. No deactivate, we can just come back and not see the image inside. 157. Master transparency: We are going to see how to work with transparency. And for this to work with transparency, we will be able to use this tool. This is the transparency tools. And it is an interesting tool that you can use in the layout mode as you can see. So concretely, something that we are going to do in this layout mode, first, I will create a frame image frame, and I will generate image frame around this area, and I will replace the image. I will replace the image and we will define the image with the rod just like this, and then I will zoom here. We can adjust little bits of image inside and select. Select rectangle tools just here, and I will create rectangles on the left area just like this, and we will define a red color just like that. We can use transparency. The transparency is little bit close to the gradient tools, but instead to use two colors, we use two point with transparency levers or more point with transparency levers. You can click on the shapes that you want or the object layers that you want, transparency tools, and you can just go left click and dragging and moving the two points. Then you can focus also on linear electrical radial conicals and you can see the option here. And instead to select color, you select level of transparency. For example, I select the first point and my opacity is 100%. And if I click on the seven point, my opacity is 0%. And then you can just change the transparency value just like this. You can also reduce if you want to create less transition or extend a little bit outside. So as you can see, you can drag in moving the point and the Midal point. But if you go on the option, for example, the seven point, you can increase the transparency. You can put on the seven maybe 40% as well. And the first one, if you don't want 100, you can also reduce just like this. So as you can see, it is interesting. You can also insert more point to have different level of transparency. For example, this one, I can reduce to 20, and then I can insert another one and this one I can increase to maybe 82, and the last one I can decrease to maybe zero again. And you can create also different levels exactly like the gradient, but here we work with transparency. To remove a point, you dragging and moving the point outside or you click on the point and delete as well. You can also reverse just like this. As you can see, this is the way to process just here. It works for any type of shape. For example, I will just show you with ellipse I can press shift here and you can also have the possibility if you selt these transparency tools that can go left click, dragging and moving. But in the options here, you can also switch linear for elliptical, and in this case, you will work with elliptical. I can address the gradient with another one as well. After you can click here and you can select, and you need to sometimes redo again. So for example, in this case, I can click on no, and I need to select my shapes and to address the colors. And now if I come back to my transparency tools and I'll go left click again, now I can have access to the blue colors. I can switch for elliptical, just like this and you can work with ellipticals and exactly like a gradient. You can also switch here for radial and you can switch for conicals as well. And if I just come back to linear, you can also adjust if I select elliptical, you can also adjust the level of transparency of the print and you can do something like this, as you can see. So this is why it can be convenient. I'm going to delete this one and delete this one. It works also. You can create transparency effect, for example, on text, and for this, I can select the frame text tools. Create a frame text around here, and I will go right click and I will insert a filler text. So this text is located here. We can increase here, we can keep two point. And for example, on this frame text, maybe I can justify left just like this. This text, I can add also transparency. You click on the text on the text layers. You select not the filter, you select the transparency tools and left click and you can also do something like this and you can work with the properties. And for example, the first, I can put 100%, and the last instead to be at 0%, maybe I can put something like just 60%, just like that. Then I can select my Midl point, and thanks to that, we can adjust as you can see the transparency directly on the text. So as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. So you can create transparency effect on the text as well. The last thing that I wanted to show you is you can also add another image and create this transparency, but not with the image frame. So if you create the image frame just like this and you replace the image, and I will define another one, like, for example, this one, and you want on this image frame, so you can click on this image frame and you want to create a transparency effect. You can see, it's not working and nothing happened because it's not working on a picture frame because here we are on the picture frame, as you can see. So to work like this, you are not going to apply a frame just like that. You will apply a complete image. And for this, you can select the place tools. And when you click on the Place tools, I will select the same image. So it means this one. But this time, I will just play the image with left click and I will dragging and moving the image here. I will play the image around here maybe until this area, and now because I just have an image and not a image frame, I can apply directly my transparency tools, and I can use the transparency tools here. I will go Left click and as you can see, even if you are in the layout mode, you can create this transparency effect to use a pixels mode or the vector mode. You can directly stay on the layout mode, and as you can see, you can create this type of transparency. And if I zoom here, as you can see, you have the border of the image, so you can put this one little bit inside, and maybe this one let's work horizontally in this case, but it depends about what you want to do. And as you can see, I can train and moving these dal points as well. And on the options here we focus on the linear, you can also, if you want to switch, you have the elliptical radial conicals. And if I come back to linear here, we can select the first point and instead to a 100%, we can also reduce the first point. And the last point we have 0%. I can do more, but I can stay on 0% in this case. And if I do something like this, as you can see, we have a perfect blend of the image with the image frame on the baroms just like that. Here we have the picture frames. And here we have these layers with image on the top, and thanks to these transparency tools, we can do this. We don't need, in this case, to use, for example, the pixel mode to create this type of effect for our layout document. You can just stay in the layout, and as you can see, it's pretty powerful as well. So this is an interesting tool only available only available for the layout mode for different reasons, and you can apply some transparency gradient to different objects or different layers if you prefer. So it's okay for that with these tools. We're going to select this one and delete on the keyboard. It's okay with this transparency. 158. Start with dashboard: Wearing to see the dashboard. One of the first thing that we can do it is to see the dashboard how to manage the different element. And thanks to that, after you will be able to directly go on specific As when you are going to work with the software. So first, you need to understand that when you work with affinity, here, you have different type of studio, and by default, here you have vector studio, Pixel Studio, layout studio, and you can complete also with Canva here, and you have also a color grading. We're going to focus on the swim in studio and the swim in studio are vectors. So when you click on Vctor, you can see a list of different tools here. You can find also different panels that you can edit on the right and different type of toolbar. In the vector studio, you will be able to focus with vector format. Second studio, very important. It is a pixel studio, and you will have different pixels tools, and you will be able to work with vector more, for example, drawings or if you want to create symbols or anything like this. In pixels, you will focus on photo adjustment, but also photo montage. But you can also create graphic document, and you can draw because you have multiple options using the brush. And the last possibility is layout. And in the layout mode, you will be able to work with layout. So it means you can focus on pages. You can focus on masters as well, and you can create, for example, interior book, you can create different type of layout with multiple pages. You can find another studio. This is a Canvas studio here with different specific tools that you can use, and you have also color grading studio. And the color grading studio, you can use adjustment in a very fast way and you have also more options. Definitely, you have a lot of studio and we will focus on the swim and studio vector pixels and layout. Don't forget that you can find more studio as well. When you go on file here, you can see studios. So you can find again vector Pixel layout. But you can use more Studio. For example, you have a touching studio, and when you click on this area, you can find different tools that you have in the Pixel studio, but here it focus only on these specific tools. If you want to switch for another one, you can use something like compositing. And when you click on compositing, one more time, you have different type of option, and here we can focus with image adjustment as well in a different way. So this is the different things to understand first when you start, you have multiple studio, and you need to understand what studio to choose depending of the work that you have to do. Depending on the studio, you will have the toolbar will change. So if I select vector, you can see this tool bar on the right with different options and you can see the toolbar on the left for the vectors studio. If you click on pixels, as you can see, we have information about the image. So it means I have information about the size of the image and information about the color profile as well. And when I go on the left, as you can see, the toolbar is a little different. When I click on layout, it is same. The toolbar will be different and we can have different options on this area. When we go on the bottom left corner, in all the case, you will have the color, the colors of the field colors, and you will have also the stroke color and you can invert the colors at any moment just like this. When you go totally on the right, you can define different windows. I will explain after how you can edit this window. I adjust these different windows depending on the use that I want to do depending on the studio. For example, in vector, I define color stroke navigator story, layers, quick, ethics style and transforms. But if I go on pixels, I define color brushes, navigatory story, layers, channels, adjustment and transforms. If I select layer Woot, I define color, strog navigator, story, layer, character, paragraph, textile. And all these options will be able to edit in Window, and here you can find panels, and on this area, you can adjust and select the panels that you want, and I will explain after how you can adjust the panels. In the top, you have a tab that concern all the studios. It means file, you can create a new document, open, save export, place image or anything like this for all the document. Here, edit, you can copy and past. You can duplicate selection. You can have access also to the setting, you have undo and radio action for all the studio. Document here, it is also available for all the studio for the document option. Text option, you have different type of option in the text here and you can adjust. It's more for the layout mode, but you can use also for different layouts. And after you have different features concern the main studio. For example, when you are in the vector studio, you can focus on symbol here. You can work with hardboard. You have also geometry, you can drain curve, merge curve, separate curves, and more for the vector studio. For the Pixel studio, you can have access, for example, to selection, but selection only for the Pixel studio this time. You can also focus on adjustment layers. You can focus on mask, field layers, and more. When you click on layers just here, you can focus on different options about the layers. And on the bottom right corner, we'll find this layer panels that it's extremely useful for all the different studios. When you click on View, you will be able to display for all the studios, for example, Mari margins, guides, grid and axis, baseline grid, and you can also change the views just like this. You can also change some toolbars with the top toolbar, context toolbars, and the different tools here. On the Window panels, you can adjust the different panels on the right, as I explained, but you can also put these panels on the left here help options. So it is how we can start with a software so extremely important to understand this system with a different studios. 159. Montage part 1: In this training, we're going to create a montage and it will be interesting training to see different features. For this, I created a new document 1,800 pixels wide and 1,200 pixels eight, as you can see, 1,800 pixels wide and 1,200 pixels eight. At the same time, we use four images, we do this one. We will do this one. We will use this one and we will use this one. The aim will be to create different simple selection to play this simple selection on this image, and then we will work also with the mask and we will add also adjustment. F things to do, let's create a simple selection on this image. For this, I will go on the left and we select the basic selection again, copy and past. I will select the rectangular selection tools, and we will go left click here, and I will create a rectangle of selection close to the line of horizon. Then we can go on edit and select the layer first, edit and copy the selection or Control C, and then we will go here, edit and pass the selection or Control V. We can with a selection tool scale and resize, so I will resize my selection around here. Maybe I can scale a little bit more and I will place in the midle and I will snap to the edge of my page. Maybe we can scale a little bit more just like this. So after let's work with the second selection. So for this, we'll select this image. First, you can deselect on this one, and we'll select this image. On this image, we use one more time rectangular selection tools and left click on this area. And I will go on Edit and copy the selection one more time. Don't forget to select the layers, edit and copy the selection or Control C. Let's go on this image, edit and pass the selection or Control V. Then we'll scale a little bit and we'll snap directly on the raya just here, and I will validate. Maybe we can increase it depends about how we want to place this one. So after to do this work, we have these two layers. The first thing that I'm going to do is to make is these to rename the layers. So we will go right click here and we will rename the layers. I will just tap Ocean on this one, and this one I will just tap for sky. After to do this type of work, I will click on this area and we will make a small adjustment. I will click onto adjustment, and what we will use, will reinforce little bits of contrast. So I will increase little bits of contrast here, and I will put maybe 40%. And here we have the brightness, and I will make something a little bit darker. And I will put this one inside Ocean, just like this. At the same time will use another adjustment. So I will click on adjustment and I will select the wise balance. And with the wie balance, we will make something little bit warmer. I will increase the temperature, as you can see, with a wie balance, and we will focus also with a tint value. And we will put the tint also with maybe 60% and 30% here. And I will put the wise balance inside Ocean. So now what we will do we will also repeat the process with the sky layers. So with the sky layers, what we will do we define adjustment also, and I will put a little bit more brightness contrast. So we'll define contrast here, and I will put maybe around 60. We need to focus only on the sky area first, and I will reduce the brightness as well. And I think I will reduce the brightness at -20. Now, this one is apply on all the layers below. I just want to put on the sky area just like this. And I will click again on these layers, I will define adjustment, and we will apply also little bit wise balance. First, if I move here, it will apply on all the layers. So let's put the wise balance inside the sky area, double click then, and as you can see, we can put something more in yellow with 10%, and we can also increase the tint maybe 30%. After to do this type of work, we have these two layers, and inside we have adjustment. Now what we will do we continue. And for this, here I will deselect, I will select this image. I want to select all the layers here. So I just need to click on all the layers. No need to create a selection, and I can go on edit and copy or Control C, we go here, edit and past or Control V. And then we can drag and moving the layer. We'll play this one around the left here and see the Mdels. So maybe I can scale a little bit on these directions and place little bit more on the left, not too much, so I need to have a little bit more space here. And after that, I will define last selections, this one. And for this, we'll click on the layers. Define the rectangle selection tools. We can zoom and we can create a rectangle selection around maybe this area. We can change a little bit the position of this rectangle of selection here. And I think this area will be pretty good, and now I will copy and paste. We can also use the times of shortcut, so I can press Control C on the keyboard. Then we will go here and we will press Control V. The image is pretty small here. We will resize. So first, we'll resize, little bit bigger, and the Mdels is on this area. So we need to put a little bit more on the right, maybe like this. Maybe you can increase and just put here we have the eyes. I'm not going to put maybe or maybe I can put little bits and not too much around this area. Things like this is pretty decent. And if I'm satisfied, I can just go left click here. We can one more time rename the layer. So here I will rename and I will tape woman number one. And here we rename these layers as well, and we will tape woman number two. So if I take a look about the organization, at this moment, we have four layers with renames Ocean, sky, woman number one, and woman number two. At the same time, inside Ocean, we have two adjustment layers, and inside sky, we have also two adjustment layers. And what we will do after, after concretely, we will use a mask layer to create blend effect of these two woman layers with the background. So it means with the sky area and with ocean area. And for this, we will use layer mask and mortals. A 160. Masters part 2: We're going to continue with masters. So for this, we have seen how to work with master, how we can craft master, how we can apply masters on pages. Now what we are going to see is why it is useful and how you can apply on a double page. So first, what I will do, I have my two master here. What I will do, I will select the page number one and right click, we will apply Masters on Odd pages. So on all the odd pages, I will apply my Master number one. At this moment, I have 26 pages. I will apply the Master number one, and I will validate, just like that. So as you can see, I have my Master one on all the odd pages. Now, what I will do, I will go right click on any page and add pages and not add pages because if you add pages, you will add pages with, for example, Masters. In this case, I will go right click and I will apply Masters one more time. And this time, I will apply on all the event pages, and I will use Master number two. And what I will do, I will just validate like this. So now I have 26 pages, and on the 26 pages, I have on even pages Master one and hot pages Master two. Now why it is useful. It is useful because if, for example, I want to edit the image here and I want to change the image, I don't need to change on all the pages. I only need to change on the master. So I click on the Master one, I click on this image, and I will replace the image. And what image I would use, I will use the image with Ocean. And I will select the Master number two. I will click on this image, and I will replace the image as well. And I will select the image. I have image with landscape, this one, and I will click on this one, and I will just scale little bit like this. Now what happened? If you select the first page, as you can see, the image have changed. The image have changed all of this. And for example, I'm not satisfied to the position here. I will come back to my page number two, double click, and I will try haging and moving the image, maybe just like this. Yeah. And I can also scan the image again or reduce the size just like this. And if I go on my pages, as you can see, we have changed the image just like that. You can also even add elements. So I can select the Master one, maybe create rectangle. But here, I show you with object, but it can be text. You can put titles that you want to repeat on 100 pages on 200 pages, and you can add title on 100 or 200 pages. Here we just create a rectangle and on the Master too, I will maybe create an or one with different colors just like that. You can create, for example, interior book with title line, title line and for this. Oh, after that, if I just get out, you can select the pages, and you can see the change on all the pages. So this is why it is convenient. For example, you want to make same elements, same title, same line, same image on 100 pages, create masters. Because after you want to make change and you need to change 100 pages, it is definitely too much, so you need to only change the masters. After on each Master, you can add content. For example, I'm here if I want to add content or I just want to add, for example, some text. I can create a frame text. I will just go here and I will address some basic content insert with a filler text. I will click on my text tools, and we'll increase little bit of size, put some text on this area. I will duplicate the text, edit, and duplicate layers, and I will put the text also just here, as you can see on this area, just like that. So this is the type of thing that we can do. So here, you need to understand when you select a page here, you will find on the layer panels the element that you have in the masters. So here we can see the master number one, and we can find the element to link to the masters. So you cannot touch this different element for simple reason that it is part of the master, so it is a lock, as you can see, you cannot do anything because it is a master, and outside, you can create different element. And any type of content that you add on your master, just to create the content on your pages. So now if you maybe I can duplicate again and edit, duplicate and put this one just maybe here and edit and duplicate layers and put this one here. So now what I wanted to show you if you or with a double page. You can create also when you have a double page, you can create directly double page with the masters. But you can also just work like this. So it means you can select the document setups. And in the document setups, you can switch for facing pages. And you can start from the right, for example, at the beginning, so you can start like this. But if I change that, I can go into Document Setup and I can start from the left as well. And as you can see, we just have our Master number one on the left and Master number two on the right. But if you create, for example, masters, just like that, you can create a master with the page. So if you create with a page, you will have a master with this. But because we work in a double page, if you create a master with a spread, just like this, automatically, you can also have the master D, just like this because here we focus on one page. But it's not a problem because you can just do exactly the same thing. So what does it mean? You can go right click, apply Masters, and you can repeat exactly the same process even if when you have a double page because you still have the number page one, two, three, four, and more. So you can dragging and moving on the left on the right or you can apply the master exactly in the same way. So I'm going to select this to this master or we delete. And this one I will delete as well. So here, if I just come back, double click. We can just come back here. I'm going to delete the content just like that going to delete this content. Using my selection tools here. I now I want to come back to a double page, I will come on the document setup to one page, and I will deactivate facing page slices and I will come back to one page. If, for example, I go on the master one and I decide to remove the rectangles, I remove. If I go on the Master two and I decide to remove the rectangles, I remove like this as well. And now if I just come back here, as you can see, the rectangle is removed on all the pages. And you don't need to repeat this on all the pages. You just work on the master. This is why when you work in the layout mode, the masters is extremely useful because you just crat to document one page, it's not useful. If you just crad maybe three or four pages is not useful. But when you start to have a lot of pages with elements that you want to repeat, it's definitely extremely powerful, and you need to use the masters. So this is how to work with the masters. 161. Pages part 2: We're going to continue with the pages. We have seen how to work with pages, so it means how we can add pages, how we can place pages, how we can select and change the position of pages, how we can duplicate pages and delete pages directly from these panels. So this is the way to process. So now you can have the possibility to switch your setup document. So first, when you create a document, as I explained before, you have the possibility to create a double page or just a simple page. But you can create a double page, switch for simple page or create a simple page and switch for double page after in the document setup here. So when I click on the document setup here, you can see the world document and selected spread. A spread, what is this? It is when you have only when you work with only one page. You will have one spread is equal to one page. When you work with a double page, one spread is equal to a double page. So here if you say, Well document, you apply the change to all the documents. It's not possible to deck, so you apply the change on all the document. And when you go on the right, the first thing that you can do is just to switch the size of your document. Here, for example, you have a page preset. I started my document with A three. So if I click, for example, on A four, just like that or if I put here, this one is A four, so you can just reduce size. If I put, for example, A four, and I just validate. As you can see, my content will be bigger than the element just like that. So here we have the content and we have the page on the back. If I just come back and I select, for example, one more time, A suite, just like this. And I increase the size. I'm going to show you I will increase the size with 340 and just like that, I will put maybe 460 just here. And if I just validate, as you can see, my page is bigger and because my page is bigger, as you can see, the content is not perfectly fit just like that. So you can change the size of the page after it's not possible. It's possible. And if you want to come back, you can select suppress it a three, and I can come back like this. So first, you can change the size in the dimension for the word document. You can even change the orientation if you need at any moment. Now you can apply this only on a selected spread also. So you can select what you want. For example, I can select only specific pages, and here at the same, you can press Control or shift to select specific pages. And for example, here with shift or control, I can select my first four pages. And I can say maybe for the first one, I will change the size, and I will put maybe 360 and here 480. And you are going to see that we are going to apply this only on the four pages. And after that, we come back to A three. So even inside the same document, you can have multiple size on multiple pages. It's definitely possible. You can have pages on a four, pages on A three, pages on predefined size, or pages on specific size. And for this, you can just put on the document setter. If I want to come back, I can use selected spread or can come back to the World document, and to the World document, I will come back to a suite like this. So now how to switch to a double page. To switch to a double page, go in the document setup. And when you scroll down below, you can see models facing pages, and you can activate facing pages here. By default, arranged horizontally, you can work vertically, as you can see in the preview. Most of the time work horizontally, but you can work vertically as well. And the fact is you start on the right by default. So why we start on the right, if we zoom out, you can see that. We start on the right because if we create a book, for example, and you after the cover, the first content will arrive on the right. So this is why ID fault, we can start on the right, but you can start on the left. It's not a problem. I'm going to show you document setups. And in the document setups, you can here use facing pages, and you start on the left. Just like this. You can also arrange vertically one more time. So if you start on the left, just like this, as you can see, you have a double page and you can start on the left. And it is same. If now you add pages, it's going to work in the same way. You can add pages. If I add ten pages, I can add ten pages after the page maybe 26 here, and I will just validate. As you can see, I added ten pages and until 36. So here you will add double pages, and it works in the same way. You can select multiple pages with shift or with control, also depending on what you want to choose. But the display is a double page, just like that. You have also the possibility when you work here too, if you just continue, you can add a margins and a bleed. So first, before to see that, if you just want to come back because here we are Facing page. So if I just want to come back, you can just deactivate Facing Page, and you will just come back with a display of one page slices. As you can see, it's not extremely difficult to understand. A is on the document setter. You can also on the document setup when you manage the pages, you can activate the margins on the World document or the selected spread. Even if after that, you have the possibility when you go on the view to add a margin on the page, but here it concerns the World document or selected spread. If I select the World document, just like this, I just want to show you if you apply a facing page, just like that. And you select selected spread, here I'm going to show you. You just apply a double page, for example, document setups, and we come back to facing page. Just like this, you need to understand that when you work with a facing page in the document setup, a spread is a double page. As you can see, a spread is a double page. So when you have only one page, display one page. One spread is one page. And when you display double page, one spread correspond to double page, just like this. Now I will deactivate facing page. And the last thing that I wanted to show you in the document setup so you can scroll down. And for example, on the World document, you can apply the margins and you can tap the margins that you want. Just like this. For example, I can apply 20, and here you apply the margins. And you can also, if I just scroll on the top, you can apply also a bleed, document setups. And in the document setup for scroller. You can also apply a bleed. Let's apply maybe I will apply 26. You can also break the proportion if you need, or if you don't need, you just tap and you go left click and you can apply here the bleed. And as you can see, now we can find the margin on each pages and a bled to be able to put element outside of the page. And this is how we can work. To deactivate this, you go in the document setup and you can just scroll down. And here what we will do, I will deactivate the margins, and I will deactivate the bled and we'll keep just on one page and we can come back on this direction just like this. This is how we can manage pages. You need to understand how to work with these panels and you need to understand how to work with a document setup. This is the most important things to do. After I will explain how you can work with MasterPage why it is useful and you will be able to complete your page management using the Master pages as well. 162. Master masks: We are going to see how to place images inside shapes. And for this we will use the vector mode. And in this mode, we can place images inside shapes, and it can be useful for different reasons. The first thing that I'm going to do is to see the basics. I will go here and I will generate a rectangle just like that, and we'll create a rectangle around this area. And at the same time, I will define a color just like this. Something that I will do also, it is to create a circle. So I'll take the Ellipstols and I will create a circle here. Let just change little bits of colors. Now I will integrate the image. So I will click here and we have the place tools in the vector mode to integrate directly image. I will click on this area and I have some image and I will generate the image with the road first, and I will go left click to place my image just like this. And then I will select the place tools. I will select another one. I have the image with the models just here, and I will place with left click my image here, dragging and moving. So when you work in the layout mode, you can directly place image frame and to place directly a image inside this image frame, and it is convenient. And in the vector mode, you can sometimes work with image as well to create a graphic document. And in some case, if you use, for example, this one, as you can see the image if I want to make something like to crop, I can just, for example, place my image here, and I will put the rectangle on the top, just like that. Now with my rectangle, I will define the area of the image that I want. For example, I can reduce and define this one. What I need to do, I just need to in the layer panels, click on the image and dragging and moving the image inside the shape that I want. In this case, inside the red rectangle. So if I drag the red image inside the red rectangle, you need to go on the layers, little bit on the right, and you can play the image inside. And now the rectangle will work as a mask. So we have here. If I click on this area, we can dragging and moving the rectangle with the image inside with the selection tools. We can also scale if we need, but if you scale, you need to be careful to keep the proportion if you want to keep the proportion of the image with shift, and you can do something like this, and the image is inside the rectangles. Something interesting also is you can click on the image and you can drag and moving the image. And as you can see, the rectangle will serve as a mask. If you double click, you can directly select the image. You have your selection tools. One click, you select the rectangles with what you have inside. So in this case, the image. Double click, you can select the image inside the rectangles, just like this, as you can see, it works as a mask. Now, if I select this one, it's going to be same. For example, I place my image here, and I will put the circle just on the front, just like this. Oops, it is inside, so it's not what I want to do, yes, just like that. So I will set the circle. I want to take a part of the face, so I will place maybe my circle here. And then I would slick the image and play the image inside the circle. Now as you can see, one left click, I move the circle with the image inside. I can even scale and pressing shift to keep the proportions. And if I double click, I can drag and moving the image inside the circle and the circle will work as a mask. And it works for any shape, so you can select any of these shapes. It's going to be exactly the same thing. Here I show you with a rectangle and a circle, but you can use another one. To put the image outside, you just need to click on the image and you go outside and you can remove the image directly from your shapes, and you can recuperate as you can see, your image and your original shapes. So now why it can be useful, I'm going to show you a concrete example. I'm going to import four images at the same time. Do the place tools, and in my images, I have four images with temple, one, two, three, and four. I will select with control or shift this four image at the same time because we can place multiple images at the same time. I will click on Open and here this is the listing of the image that I have, I will go left click to play the first one, left click to play the second one, the third one, and the fourth one just like this. The problem is all these image don't have the same ratio. And if, for example, I want to place all these different images, and to perfectly have the right element and distribution, if I focus in the layout mode with the image frame, it's going to work. But here, it's not going to work for the simple reason that the image don't have the same size. So what I need to use, I need to use a mask. So first, I will move my image here, and I will create rectangles which says the rectangle tools just like this will generate rectangles like maybe this one. First, a can scale a little bit. And I will place my first rectangle here, and I will duplicate. Edit duplicate so layers, and I will place little bits here. Edit duplicate so layers, and I will move a little bit here, here and here, and edit duplicate so layers again. And I will selling my four rectangles. I will go into alignment panels. I will use, for example, alien Midals with the last selected, and I will use space horizontal, and I will place just like this. And as you can see, all the rectangle have exactly the same size, the same ratio, the same alignment, and the same distribution. And I know I just need to put the image inside. So I slip for example, my first image, I can drag in moving around here, this one around here, this one around here, and this one around here. So maybe I can scale a little bit this one, just like that. So what I need to do I need to select each image and place the image inside. So I'll select the Temple one and put inside the first rectangles, just like this. And then I can scale the image and I can adjust inside taking the parts that I want. I sell by temple two, I put inside the second rectangles. The image is now inside. I can scale and I can drag in and move in if I need. Then I can select the temple number three, and I can place inside my third rectangles just like this. And I can scale the image if I need and change the position of the image depending on what I want to keep. And I will sing my temples for dragging and moving inside my last rectangle. I can scale if I need the image and take the path that I want just here. Now it's convenient because it is like each image has the same size, it's not each image has the same size, it's just that each rectangle has the same size and the rectangle is used to work as a frame or to be work as a mask if you prefer. And now I have all the distribution. I can select all, move the rectangle with image inside. I can even scale shift just like this. And as you can see, the image stay perfectly inside. And in the vector mode, this is how you can work with the image if you want to keep a specific size inside element like a frame. And all the images are inside as you can see. If you want to remove, you can just play the image outside and you can just put the image outside just like this. And you can just release the image directly from the rectangle just like that, as you can see. So this is the process to work. So as you can see, it's convenient when you work in the vector format to use this process. 163. Recipe journal part 1: In this training, we are going to create recip journals, and it will be interesting trainings to see different features. Create the recipe journals, I created a new document. It is a four document. And in the A four document pages, we will go first on the top option view here, we define margins and guide to change the margin and guide, but we will work on the Master page. I will click here. I will create Masters and I will just rename We tape just journals here, and I will just validate. After that, we'll double click and work on the master because we'll crowd the masters and apply the change on all the pages after. So I will define you here with sic margins and guide and what we will use will draw margins. So first, I use a margin at here 20 millimeters on this area. So here we have 20 millimeters, and I'm not going to define any colons and rows, only a margin just like this. And we'll start our conception. First, we'll define different titles, we'll place these titles in different positions, and then we'll be able to add different lines. So let's separate our text frames it frame text just like this. And what we do we crat first frame just like that, and we tap something with tape first recipe. So we'll work uppercase. We will work with the font family. We sell the font family ca libri, just like this. We'll work in regular and first, I will increase the size for this one, and I will increase with at least 48 and we'll adjust the frame just like this. We'll work with the alignment on the left here, vertical and horizontal here. After to do this type of work, we'll take this one and we will duplicate. So I will go and edit. I will duplicate the layers, and I will place the layer here. And we will reduce little bit the size of the content like 24, and I will extend a little bit, and we will tape preparation time, just like this. Is a little too big, we can reduce the size. I will put something like 20, and I will adjust little bit my frame on these directions, just like that, and I will duplicate as well. Edit duplicate layers, and we'll double click and we will tape cooking time. Just like that. Its same I can address my frame on the right, just like this and place cooking time around here. Then we'll duplicate, edit, duplicate layers, and we'll play this one around this area as well. And we change the content, we'll tape number of persons, just like this, and I will extend a little bit. And I will duplicate as well, Ed duplicate the layers, we'll play this one here, and we will double click and I will tape D faculty. So we'll tape difficulty, we'll adjust also little bits of frame just like this and we'll place around here. So we can continue. I will duplicate, for example, number of persons. I will duplicate these layers, place these layers here. And what we will tape will tape ingredient. So here we tape ingredient. And we'll adjust little bit. I think we can scale for ingredient, maybe something like 30, just like that. And we will be able to duplicate again, so we'll go and edit, duplicate layers, and we'll double click and we'll type reactions. I think it's a little bit. It just adjust a little bit. I will put a value like maybe 24 and here maybe 24 as well. Just like this. After that, we click here and we'll duplicate, edit, duplicate layers, and we'll place the layer here, we'll reduce little bit to size, 20, and I will change for nodes just like this. And we'll adjust little bit to element and place node here, and we'll create also a frame. So for this, I would select the rectangle tools. We will generate a frame. I will tap value of one. And here for the color, we put no colors. And we'll start with this corner. Here, I can snap to this corner and just generate a frame just like this around this area. And I will click on note. I will duplicate, edit, and duplicate the layers, and I replace the layer here and we will replace by photo just like that. And for photo, we can place photo here. We can maybe adjust a little bit of color with some gray color just like that. The last thing that I'm going to do is to crat a line, I will stick the pen tools. We can keep this mode. The pen mode is going to work. I will snap around here and crack first point, then a second point around here. And I will define a space. Here we have one. Maybe one is not enough for the separation. So I will change with a value of two, just like that. And I will put this one around this area, just like that. So I would click on my lines, and I will place the lines around yes here. So after that, we are going to be good with this. I think I can change a little bit of position. Maybe we can select ingredient and preparation, put this little bit more on the top. These two element around maybe here. And I think for the rest, the disposition is nice. And after what we will do after we add some lines dash lines, and we'll be able to apply the master to multiple pages. 164. Masks part 2: We're going to continue with a mask. And for this something that we're going to do, I selected this image, and I selected this image. And in this case, we will work on this image and we will create a selection first. To create a selection of the face of the woman, I will go on the left here and I will select the flood selections tools. We will work with the tolerance. Let's start with 12, for example, the new mode, and I will go select my layers and left click on the backgrounds. After two select the backgrounds, we can invert the selection with Shift Control A, and I can invert the selection to select this area. And we can copy and pass the selection, edit, copy the selection, then we will go on this area, and I will pass the selection as well. So we'll click here and we will pass the selection. So edit past the selection. Then we will reduce on this area, and I will scale my layers with the selection tools, and I will place my layers around here. And then we'll just click outside to validate. So we have seen the principle of the mask. Concretely, you can select the layers. You can just click here, create a mask layers. We have seen that when you use a mask layer, you can use a paintbrush tools. If, for example, the mask is in white, you can erase with a black color. So you can select the black color, you define your different parameters of the brush. Generally, it's more convenient to reduce the hardness of the brush. And as I explained, we can just erase some area like this. And at the opposite, if I invert, I can recuperate some area. So it's perfectly nondestructive, and you can create different type of effect like this. At the opposite, when you go right click, you have multiple types of option to edit the mask, refine the mask, release the mask, clear the mask, fill the mask, invert the mask. If for example, I clear the mask, I will come back with a black mask just like this. So I'm going to add oil. Let's just remove the mask. Now you can invert the process so you can create a mask and this mask you can invert. Process you can press Control A or right click invert the mask. After to invert the mask, you can recuperate some area because the mask is in black, you have the possibility to select the white color, and when you use the paintbrush tool, you can just recuperate some area. So one more time, you define your different parameters, and you can recuperate some area on any specific area just using your brush. And as you can see, it's perfectly nondestructive because we work on this area. So now something interesting also that you can use is you can create a mask black two we using, for example, a Gratiant. So it's also possible. I will click on the mask first and I will delete the mask. I will scale my layers. So we'll use the move tools, and we will scale the layers and place the layers around maybe here. And I will create encrustation effect using I will reduce the little bit. I will create encrustation effect using a gradient. So I will click on the layers, and first, I will generate mass layers. Instead, this case to use the brush tools, I will use the field tools. So we'll click on the field tools and we will change the type, and we will select linear. But you can use all these type of gradient on the right. You can do the same type of work with elliptical gradient, radial gradient, or conical gradient. So we'll activate linear. I will show you with linear. And as you can see, you have the two points here. And you can work with not the white color, but the transparency will be the most important. So concretely, the best things to do is to define, for example, the first color has a black and the second color has the white. So now you have black to why. So if I select my gradient tools, as you can see, for example, I put the black color here, the black color will mask and the wie color will allow me to keep my gradient just like this. And you can create the effect. For example, I can put this one here, and if I zoom a little bit, I can extend the black color just like this, so we can increase or we can decrease depending on the effect that we want to create. And if I just move here, we can create this type of render. So as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. And then you can adjust also with this point. And we can do also this type of work using the mask with a gradient. We can then do the opposite process. For example, I will click on the mask and I will delete. Then we'll recover all the layers. We'll create 01, and this time, I will invert the mask. So we'll go right click, we will invert the mask and after to invert the mask, I can hide all these layers. After that, what we will do we use one more time the gradient tools. We'll use the field tool first, we'll change the type and we'll create linear. I can also start directly with the colors. We can click here, and this time, I will use maybe the white color on the left, and on the right, we switch for the black colors. And now I can place my different points just that we invert because here we have white to black, but it is exactly the same process. I can also create a gradient maybe from top to bottom, and it depends about what we want to do. I will zoom a little bit. We can, for example, apply the black color more here. And if I don't want to see the edge here, I can just play the black color more inside. And the white color depending on what effect I want to do, I can place more outside or inside. And here you can adjust also with this Midal point, as you can see. So definitely, it's pretty convenient and you can create this type of incrustation effect using the mask, just like that. If you have created this gradient and you invert the mask, you will just change the location. It's also possible to invert the mask using this way, you will keep the gradient, but you will invert the position black to white color, just inverted the mask. Don't forget that you can also complete with a brush tool. So you can create a gradient, but after that, you can complete also with the brush tools. So here, for example, I have a white color and I can complete with the brush tools. So you can not only the gradient, you can mix with the brush tools as well. Or I can invert the colors, and in this case, I will rise a little bit more. So you can complete your gradient with the brush tools as well, and you can mix gradient and paintbrush tools. If I'm satisfied, I can stay like this. So it's perfectly nondestructive. You can at the end, here, you can see the different brush that you use, and it's perfectly nondestructive. So what does it mean? I can go right click, delete the mask or I can delete here as well. And thanks to that, we can recuperate all the layers, as you can see. 165. Pages part 1: We're going to see how to work with pages. So for this, we can work with pages in the layout mode. And with this mode, it is possible to work with a lot of features to manage the pages. So for this at the beginning, you can find panels on the left. This is the page panels. And you can work with the master pages. I will explain this in details after, and you can work with pages here. You have also the possibility when you go on the top document pages, and you can find different features to add new pages and delete pages or to go to the first or preview pages and more options. So first to select a page, you just click here, you will have a blue frame around, and it means the page is selected. To add a page, you can click on this one, add pages. When you click here, you can define a Master page. So here I don't have Master page where going to stay unknown and you can define the number of page that you want. For example, I can decide to add ten pages and I can insert after I just have only one page, after the page number one, and I will just validate and as you can see on the left, you can scroll down and you can see your 11 pages. And here you can see all the pages as well. To go to a specific pages, you just double click here, and if I click on the page four, I will be redirected to the page four on this area. So this is how to add a page. Now, let's add content on the first page. So I can double click. This one is my first page. And on the first page, I will, for example, create a rectangle on the background, so I will select the rectangle tool. Create a rectangles on the backgrounds and define colors like the blue colors. And then we'll select the picture frame tools and we'll create a picture frame around this area just like this. And inside, I will put an image. I will use replace image. On my images, I will select the images as an example with a rod and I will put the image inside and I can scale little bit just like this. So now I have this page with, for example, this content. If I want to add pages before this time, I can click on add page and instead to use after I will use before, and I can use before. Sometime it can be a specific pages. Here I'm going to stay on one, but you can define the page that you want also you can see I will define before the page one and before the page one, I will insert a number of page. And I will insert, for example, five pages before the page one, and I will validate. Now you can see we have five pages before. I think I forgot to switch before. Let's do this again. I will click on before. I will put again five pages before the page number one and I will validate. Now it's going to work. We can find five pages here on this a, you can zoom out and you can find five pages between the page number one. You can also insert a page after any page, so it means I can decide maybe to insert maybe let's try six page after and after the page number maybe six, it means this page, and I can add six page after. So now I have a total, for example, when I go on the left, I scrolled on, I have a total of 23 pages, in this case, 23 pages. So this is how you can drag and move a page. To drag and move a page, you can click on the page here on these page panels, and you can just scroll down and you can move the page on another position. For example, I can drag and move my page and I can scroll down, and I can put this page maybe on the first position just like this. So here, as you can see, we place the page in the first position. But you can also move multiple pages at the same time. I'm going to show you first on the page number two. We'll add a little bit content as well. I will do the same type of things. We'll create rectangles here, I will define colors, and I will select the picture frame tools. I will create another picture frames on this area as well, and I will insert an image, replace image. And what image I will insert, I will insert this image with the models, and I will scale little bit and do this type of work. So to select multiple image, you can click on the image. And if you press Control, you can select multiple image. And for example, I selected one, the two, but if I press Control, I can select six. If I continue with control, I can select seven, and I selected four images at the same time. And now when you go right click here, you can duplicate four pages or delete four pages, for example, and as you can see, it's convenient. But you can also move the pages as well. So here I selected four pages. And if you want to select all the pages, you can select the first one and you go in the last one and you press Shift, and I selected all the pages, and right click Duplicate 23 pages, delete 23 pages. What does it mean? It means I can select my page number one, press Control, select my page two. And when I go right click here, I can, for example, decide to move copy pages, and here he defines the page one and two, and I can move maybe after a page or before a page, and I'm going to move after the page number ten, for example. I will click and validate. Now if I go here, as you can see, I move here and now I'm located on this area because I put before the page number ten. So now I have these two element just here. But I can also select this one and dragging and moving again, and I can again change the position, stroll down the page and dragging and moving maybe on the front at the beginning, just like this. So to duplicate pages, how you can. You select, for example, the pages that you want. I selected the one and the two, and you can click on duplicate selected pages or you can go right click duplicate pages. And here I duplicated these two pages at the same time. And I could repeat the process. I could maybe select the page one, shift the page four. And if I go right click, I will have duplicate this time these four pages, and I can duplicate as well. And now I have eight pages, as you can see on this area with the same type of content. You have also the possibility to delete pages and to delete pages, you have delete selected pages here or right click and delete pages. For example, here, I have a total of 29 pages. If I want to maybe remove the si last pages, I will select with control or shift the 29 page 28 and 27th. And whether I can click here, delete selected pages, or I can go right click here and you can define, for example, delete pages, delete sweet pages. And when I click here, as you can see, I deleted the three pages, and now I have a total of 26 pages just like that. So when you go on the top here, you can find also document pages. You can grab new pages, add delete, but it's not extremely convenient to work from these panels. I can advise you to manage your pages directly from these panels. It's definitely the best. So we're going to keep this 26 pages with this content at the beginning with eight pages like this. And after we show you how you can switch to a double page and how you can manage double page as well. 166. Masters part 1: We're going to see how to work with masters. So for this to work with masters, we are going to work with the layout mode. And in a layout mode, it is extremely useful to work with masters. You can find this in the page features here. So we have the panel with a page. You can manage the pages here, as I explained, and we can manage the master pages. MasterPage what is this? It is different element that you can apply on multiple pages at the same time just using the Master page. And after that, if you edit the Master page, the modification will be apply on all the pages where you apply this master page. Well, first things to understand it is here, I have different type of pages. If I want, I'm going to add few pages first. So I will create few pages. I will add, for example, maybe ten pages after the page number one, and I will just validate like this. Now, to create a MasterPage, you can go on the top here, add masters, and you can create your first masters. First, you can rename your master. I'm just going to tap master one, but you can tap anything that you want. You can also define a tag value if you need, and by default, the size of the master page will be the same that your document. Here, I created A sue document, and this is why we have the same size, A sue. You can even create a Master page with a different size at the page, but generally we don't use this too much. Generally, we keep the same size. So I'm going to keep the example with the same size. You can also apply directly on the master page margins as well. I'm just going to click here and start my first Master page just like that. On this matter, here you double click, you work on the Masters, here double click, you work on the page. So be careful. Here I'm going to click on the Master page, and I'm just going to apply some element, so I will select the rectangle tools, and I would like to apply on multiple pages, color backgrounds and image. So I will define a rectangle will define some colors just like this. And after that, I will select the frame tool to keep this example again. And I will replace the image. And what image I will use? I will use the image with a rod and I will scale little bit just like this. This one will be my first masters. To create another Masters, you can just click on plus here, or you can also duplicate selected masters. If I create another one, I will click on Ad Masters again, and I will rename the masters and I will tape Masters number two. And after to do this type of work, I will validate and I will create content on the second master double click, and one more time I will select rectangle tools, and I will create a rectangle tools to define some color backgrounds. Maybe I will put some red colors. And I will define also picture frame just like this, will place the picture frame, scale and snap to the different corner just like this, and I will replace the image, and I will replace the image with, for example, this one, and I will scale it bit image inside. So now we have created two masters. So first, if you want to when you go right click on the Masters, you can insert a new master, duplicate dit. So for example, if I insert Masters, just like this, as you can see, you can insert a new master. If I click here, right click insert or duplicate a master, I can select the Master to, duplicate and I can duplicate my master too. So when you go right click, you can insert duplicate a master or delete also. So what I will do, I will click on the Master, this one, and I will go right click and delete because I don't want. And this one right click and delete as well, just like that. Well, it is how you can add a master duplicate, or you can create any masters, put a master after, or you can get a master again. Let's say this 21 and you can also did it on this area, just like that. So now to apply your masters, the first possibility is something simple but not very convenient. You can just drag and move the master on a page, just like that. And the master will be on the page. Facil my page one after I put the master on the page too. So you can just drag and moving a masters on a page, just like this. So this is the first possibility. Now, the other possibility, it's when you go right click on the page, you have Apply Masters, just like this. But you can also click on the Masters and right click, you can find Apply Masters, as well. It is exactly the same thing. And here if you click on Applied Master, you can click Apply Master number one. The problem is when you click here, it is on the selective pages. So if, for example, I select my four pages here, and I go right click on the Masters and apply the masters for example, one, just like this, as you can see, it's not convenient to work like that. I can advise you to apply the master directly from the pages. So you can select a page here, right click. And apply masters, and now you have more option. It's so much more convenient. You can select here the masters that you want. For example, I will sex the Master one and I will put the master one on all the pages, replacing the existing masters, and I will just validate like that. Now the masters is on all my pages, as you can see, just like this. Now if I want to apply Master two on all the pages to replace this one, I will go right click Apply Masters, and I will click on Master number two on all the pages, and I will just validate and now the Master number two will be on all the pages. You can also go right click, and when you click on Clear Master, you can also clear Master on the existing pages. So here I click the master on the page one. But if I select the page one, I will press shift select 11 and right click Clear Master, I can clear the master for all the pages to come back with a blank page, as you can see. You can have more options. What more options you can have, you can go right click here. And when you go right click, you have the possibility to apply Masters on pages, even pages, even specific pages. On specifying, you can just put a comma just like this. And I can put, for example, my master number one on the four pages, just like this. And as you can see, it works on the four pages, just like that. So when you go right click here, apply masters, I can put maybe the Master two, and here I can define maybe 5-8. So five comma eight. And I will just validate. And as you can see, my master will arrive on the five to eight. So now what we will do we apply I will create new pages because something that you can do, I will clear all the master first. I will select all the pages and clear Master. Something that you can do as well, it is to add pages with master. So concretely, you can select, for example, the page number 11, and you can go rightly, you can add pages and directly select a selected master. For example, I see create, for example, ten pages after with the Master number one, and I will just validate. And as you can see, at the end, I have ten pages with a Master number one. Or I can go right click. I can add pages, and I will add maybe five pages with Master number two, and I will apply this as you can see. And the last thing that I wanted to show you is that you can also go right click Apply Masters and you can apply, for example, the Master one on the hot pages, just like this. So Master one on all the hot pages, as you can see. And you can maybe click on mini page, right click and apply Masters on even pages, and this time the Master. Number two, just like that. So one more time, it is convenient. Moreover, when you work with a double page, you can use this type of process just like that. So now we select the page number one, we select the page 26, we'll go right click. We will clear the master first on all the pages. We will keep this 26 pages. And after we show you how to work with a double page and why it is very useful. 167. Masks part 1: We're going to see how to work with mask. And for this, I selected this image, and I selected this image. And to work with mask, the first thing that we're going to do is to create a selection on this image, and we'll create a selection of the flower. So first, I will click on the layers, then we will go on this area, and I can use in this case, the selection brush tools. With the selection brush tool, we can use the mod ad. We can define your size. We can stay around this size and just left click here and you can stay left click. You can just paint like this, and you can also stop Left click and apply Left click again on different area and you can generate these selections. After that, we will copy and pass the selection. I will go and edit. I will copy the selections. We will go here, and I will go and edit and pass the selection. We can use and place the flowers around this area. So now we are going to see how to work with the mass. So the mask will be extremely useful when you focus on the pixel mode. So on the pixel mode, the mask can be extremely powerful. When I want the right here to generate a mask first, you select the layers. And when you go on this area, you can find mask layers. When you go right click here, you have also different option and you don't have directly here, properly the mask, but if you just scroll down below, you can have more options as well. So you can scroll down below and you can create some new layers. You have also new continar layers and different options. But the best thing to do is just click on the layers and you can activate directly mask layers. After that, the mask will be placed on the right or if you scroll down, the mask we will place just inside these layers. What is the principle of mask? Principle of mask is you can erase or recuperate some area using a brush and it's totally non destructive. Concretely, I can select the paintbrush tools. And when I click on the paintbrush tools, you can select black or white. Here the mask is in white, so I can see my layers. I define some parameters. First, I define on the brush, the size of the brush. And first, I will define the harness at 100% to show you the difference. So 100%, 100, 100 and I define a size. And concretely, when the mask is in white and you use the black color, you can just erase like this and you can erase. And as you can see, you can find the black area. And where we paint with a brush in black, we can erase the different pixels. At the opposite, if now I switch for why, so you can switch for the white color on the fore groom and you arrive here left click, you can just recuperate some area, and this is the principle of the mask layers. So now after to understand this principle, something that we can do also, it is to change, for example, the hardness of the brush. And if I change the hardness of the brush, I define something like 30. Now if I just use the edge of my brush and I just switch for the black color, I can arise, just with the edge of my brush, as you can see, surrender is different. And this is how we can create, for example, some incrustation effect using a mask. Now something that I can do it is to go on this area. I can also decrease the transparency value on my brush. If I decrease the transparency value and I go left click, I will just remove with 28% of transparency. And if I just stop here and left click again, I will add again, 28% of transparency. And thanks to that, we can create various types of effect, as you can see, and this is why it is descent. The interest of the mask is totally nondestructive. So you can deactivate the preview of the mask. You can also click here and you can see what type of brush you have used as you can see. So all the type of brush that you have used multiple time will be in summary here. And when you go right click on the mask, you have different upshots. What you can do, you can edit the mask and you can see the mask just like this, and you can edit also using this one. You can also refine the mask potentially, and you can also adjust more advanced features, but you can you can refine the mask. And when you go right click, you can even release the mask and you can get the mask out of the layers. So it's perfectly nondestructive. You can go also right click and you can just release the mask and you can put the mask outside, just like this. Now if I put the mask again inside, you can also go to right click and you can just delete the mask, just like that. Now you can do the opposite process. So the opposite process, you create a mask and you invert the mask. To invert the mask, you can go right click, you have invert mask, or you can also press Control A. When you press Control A, you can invert the mask and put the mask in black, or you can go right click invert my skin wise or right click invert, my skin black. If the mask is in black, it means that concretely, we are going to hide the layers, and you can recuperate the view some view of part of the layer using the pain Brush tool one more time. And because the mask is in black, you can use the white color. So I can use the white color. I define all the parameter of my brush, and as you can see, you can just recuperate some area just using the brush just like this. So this is how you can invert the mask, right click Invert, or you can press Control A. You can also fill the mask with some existing colors. So here's the inyeO you can clear the mask. If, for example, I select the black color and I decide to erase some area, I can go right click and if you click on Clear Mask, automatically, you will just clear to come back with original colors. And here, in this case, it was in black. As you can see, it's pretty interesting to use a mask for this reason. And if I just get the mask out, you can also delete the mask. You can choose, for example, to use eraser tool, but if you use the erasor tool, it will be destructive so concretely. You can erase, for example, using the razor tool and you can erase your element like this, or you can also erase just a little bit with less percentage. But the problem is you work directly on the layers. And because you work directly on the layer, if you make a lot of step after, it's not possible to undo instead to use history panels. And it won't be convenient. So this is the reason for which we need to use a mask because here, in this case, I can just only use the undo panels. So I can only use undo panels. And it is destructive. So this is the reason for which we need to use the mask. 168. Master colors: We're going to see how to work with colors. And for this, we are going to work with a vector mode, and we can apply this also on the pixel mode and on the layout mode. So first things to do, we are in the vector mode, and I will create a shape, so I will select the rectangle tools and we will create shapes on this area. So after to do this work, as I explained before, when you create something like a shape, you have two options. The first option is to go on the options of the tools, and you can directly apply a color just like this. So here by default, you have what we call RGB slider. With RGB slider, what you can do, you can select a range of color. For example, I can select the blue color here, and after to select the blue color, you can adjust each channel. So it means the red channels with a value of zero to 255, the green channels and the blue channel to adjust the color. You can choose any color and adjust with the red, green, blue channels. You can adjust the transparency of your color as well here. But you can work in a different way. Generally, the RGB slider is pretty convenient, but you can work with something different. You have this RGB as well, just like this. And with this one, you can, for example, copy and pass color code and it can be useful. And you have more options. You have, for example, this one, and with this one, you can define a color and you can work with the so you can change the U, you can change the saturation value and the luminosity value. Or you can also select the CMY ca slider. In this case, you will work with the CM, Y and K colors, or you can even work with the lab slider, and in this case, you have the luminosity. You can change little bit the type of colors and here as well with slider. So it is just another way to process. And finally, you can use HSL color wheel that we use a lot in different graphic software. And with this one, you can pass a color code on this area. And you can just define a range of color that you want on the circles. And after that, you can select exactly with different value darker or lighter, here you have the white, here you have the black, here we have our red color, and we can select various red color on this area. So you can just select and you have also more option, but we are going to keep the different options here. So if we come back to the RGB slider, this is what we use by default. It's convenient, but you can also use another one. The second process is to go on the right, and here we put colors. When we go on window on this area, we can define some panels and general panels. I decided to put color on each mode. So it means not only on the vector mode, but also on the pixels and layout mode. Now if I just go on the right, you have exactly this color wheel that I explained before. These correspond to the color wheel here, and you can work with this one as well. So as long as you create shapes or for example, if I create ano example just below, you can also change the color just here, and you can define a range of color, for example, some red color and here can address with what we want. On these color panel, what you can have you can have a list of the different colors that we use just before history. If I continue I define ellipse, I can create ellipse. I will define something like yellows here, and I will put this yellow color and I will create another ellipse as well, and I can go on the right. I can define some colors. Here you have the color code, here information about the use saturation luminosity, and here you see the transparency of your color, the levers of your color. And this is how you can work with this. When you have the color panels, you go on the top right corners. Here, you have the wheel and you can also change for slider, boxes, and this is different way to work one more time. Oh, here you have different type of options, as you can see. If I just come back to a select, for example, my rectangle again, and I decide to come back here, I will go hoops. No here, I decide to come back to these options. You can also use swatches. Swatches, what is this? It is a different color palettes that you can use. And by default, we use color. But for example, in color, you can also have various palette of gradients. But if we just come back to color, you can have a list of basic colors just here and you can select any basic color with this one. You have different palettes. For example, I can select the first one, and it is a palette with many color propose, and you have different types of palettes that you can use as you can see. You have also this one or you have also this one. So they propose to you different types of palette. And if you want to come back, you come back to the basic color palette. So this one is what is. And when you go on window here, and you define general here. You can find also swatches as well. And if you want to put swatches, for example, on the right, you can. We use this list because generally the color panel, and what we have here for the shapes is convenient, but sometimes you can also use this one. The last point to know, so here you can select last color that we use, as you can see. And the last point is the color pickers. You can also find this tool here, you have the color picker tools. And with the color picker tools, you can recuperate to color. For example, I can select the rectangles, and I define the color picker and you can just dragging and moving, and you can recap it to color. For example, if I go here, automatically, you will recognize this green color and apply directly to this one. But if you don't select anything, you can use the color picker. It's just that the color are not going to be applied to anything, but you can recupre the color. Now if I select this one, as you can see, I can, for example, also rep this color, and that's it. You can recup discolor as well. And it works exactly like when you click on this area, color pickers. And when you go left click, you can recop color, and the color will be applied here as a foreground color, and you will see that on the colorway. Definitely, I think it's interesting to have this color palette on the right. Even if if you work with pixels and layout, pixels because you can paint and layout because you can feel shape or colors using the color wheels as well. So this is how we can work with the color palettes. 169. Master navigation: We're going to see the navigation, how you can navigate in your space of work. So here, I have this document 1,600 pixels and 1,200 pixels. And to work with a navigation when you use any type of studio, first, when you go on the tool bars on the bottom left corner, you can click here and you can have two tools, the View tools, and the ZooTms. After we'll explain that you can use the moose wheel if for example, you work with computer and it can be pretty convenient. So here when you click on the Zoom tool, concretely, you can just go left click and you can zoom. If you want to zoom more on this corner, you place your cursor here, and you can just go left click. To zoom out, you just need to switch with Alt on the keyboard and left click and you can zoom out. Have also the possibility to have access to the option of the tool here and you can define a percentage value for your Zoom just like this. 100%, 150, 200, or I can come back just 25% or 10%. You can also click here and you can drag in and moving to enter a specific percentage. You can also change the unit. So Bd faults is a unit that you use when you create a new document and you can change after I can work in print. I can work in centimeter, millimeter, you have also fit. You can find itches meter, so you can select what you want on this area. So I'm going to come back in pixels, for example, for this document. The second options when, for example, I zoom here, you have a second tools, and second tools here, this is a view tool. So when you click on the view tools, you can also define a percentage value as well. And you can also define the percentage here. But something that you can do, you can just go left click, you have end appearing here, and with left click, you can move. So for example, if I zoom here and I want, I can go left click and I can change the I can just move inside my document just like this. So this is the second tools. Now, you need to understand that these things you can do this just with a mouse wheel. For example, I select any type of tools. For example, working with a pen tool, and I don't need to click on these tools, come back here, click on another tools come back here or using the shortcut. You can use the mouse wheel. With a mouse wheel to Zoom, you can use Control and dragging and moving the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out. So dragging the moves wheel to zoom in and zoom out. You can also click on the Mouse wheel. And when you click on the Mouse wheel, you can move like the hand tools. So here I click on the Mouse wheel, and it is exactly like if I have the end tool, but I don't get out of my tool. So this is why it is useful. You click on the tool and you click on the Mouse wheel and you can just move like this as you can see. This is why it is convenient. So when you move the mouse wheel with Control, you can zoom in Zoom out. And when you click on the Mouse wheel, you can move in your space of work. Something that you can do also, it is to go on the right, and here you can find the vertical tap to move vertically. Here the vertical tap to move horizontally as well, and you can also use the scroll wheel. If you just drag and move the scroll wheel without anything on the keyboard, you can move vertically. And if you press Shift and you move the scroll wheel, you can move horizontally in your document just like that. This is also the other options to know. After to understand that. This is all the basics that you need to know, so you can select any type of tools so you can zoom in with Control and the scroll wheel to zoom in Zoom out. You can also dragging and moving this area, dragging and moving this area or using the scroll wheel or using Shift and the scroll wheel. If you want to move, you just click on the scroll wheel and you can dragging and moving like this. After to understand that, you have also some options on the top. When you go on the top, you can find view Zoom here and you can find all these different options here. But the more option you can use, you can use also, for example, two fit. When you click on To fit, you can have access to that. And when you go right click, for example, on one of these tool, you have the option of the tools. But if, for example, you are in the Zoom tools, Right Click, you can find one more time to fit, to wide or rotate anything like this, so I can use to fit, for example, or click to wide just like this. If I'm using the Vwtool it is the same. I can go right click and I can have access to these different options as well. If I come back to these tools, if you go right click here now it is option of the selection tools. When I go on view, so you can click on Zoom and you can have some different type of option. You can zoom also directly to all the document just like that. You can define also a percentage value. You can also rotate your document. For example, left, sometimes it's useful if you want to draw something, maybe you can rotate and you can rotate your document like this. You can also rotate right, and then you can sit to come back to the original position like this. Sometimes when you draw something, it can be interesting to rotate your document. And for this, you can select rotate here. You have also the mode preview here where in vector, you can change, but you have different options. You can see your conception in wire frame, gray scale, airlines split view as well. So you have different options here. And when you click on Show here, it's a little bit different. I will explain more in detail just to show when you create some grid. You can display the grid. When you add a margin, you can display the margins, and then you have the preview mode. The preview mode, it is when you work, for example, with the layout mode and you want to have access to the preview, you can click on the preview mode. So this is how we can start with the navigation. 170. Master distribution: We're going to see how to work with distributions. This we'll select the rectangles and we'll create first rectangles around here and we'll define color. I'll click on this area. We'll define some red colors, and I'm not going to put a stroke. So we're going to see how to work with distribution. First, we have seen alignment, and we can use also the distribution distribution. What is this is to have the right space between the different element. So first, I will duplicate, I will go edit, duplicate my layers, and I will duplicate here. I will go edit, duplicate the layers, and I will repeat. Maybe we can move a little bit to rectangle here, and I will go edit, duplicate the layers, and I will move here as well. Edit duplicate the layers and move here, and edit duplicate the layers and move here. So if you just activate the snapping option, when you arrive close, you can see the blue arrow, the blue arrow can give indication about the space between your different element. And you can use this one to work with this distribution. But the most convenient will be to use the aligment panels on the top right corner. So here you can find the ligment panels just like that. So concretely, if I select all my rectangles, I can select all the rectangles here, and I will go on the ligment panels just here. And I will align. I will align vertically on the top, just like that. I'm on the first selected, but I will select, for example, selection bonds to be directly around the selections. And now if I want to have the right space between each element, what you can do, you can place your first rectangle where you want, your last rectangle wherever you want. And after that, if you select all the rectangles and you define these panels, you have this option space horizontally. And when I click here, I have the same space here, here, here, here and here. Also the possibility by default is auto distribute, what we use the most. But if you deactivate, all the objects will be snapped together without any space, and you can define the space that you want after by yourself. So sometimes it's also convenient to use. If you don't want that, you just need to use auto distribute, just like that. Now it works with the same way if, for example, you create multiple rectangles and you work on this area. So this time we are going to work vertically. So you can place, for example, the first rectangle where you wound vertically, your last rectangle where you wound vertically, then you can select all the object. You will use directly the alignment panels, and first you will haline. I will use haline left on, for example, the last selected in this case, it's going to work. And I will complete this time with vertically space. I will use Allen vertically, and here you can find space vertically and you have the same same space here, here, here, here and here. So this one is fixed, this one is fixed, and after you define the space. If you don't want to distribute, all the elements will be close together, snap together. And then after that, you can, for example, define. You can also use a negative value and you can define the space that you want, just like this. So this is the type of things that we can so it is useful if you want to create any type of structure. Let's just remove this 11 more time, and I will select again the rectangle two. We'll create a small rectangle here. I will remove the color, and I will define a stroke. I will create a stroke here and we define a stroke with a value of two. And the small rectangles I will place around here and I will duplicate. I will go and edit, duplicate layers. We'll duplicate here, edit, duplicate layers. Maybe we can select all this rectangle, move a little bit on the left, and I will scale, and I will para this rectangle again, edit, duplicate layers, just like this, and edit duplicate layers just like this, and I will move and edit duplicate layers. Now what we will do we select all these rectangles. First I will play the last one where I want, the first one where I want, and I will select all these rectangles. I will go on the alignment panels, and we will define first, we can check the align vertically, just like this, and I will use space vertically not space vertically, space horizontally. Now, if I want to create something like a grid with a structure, I need to create a group with the different rectangles. We can group here or right click group or you can go right click, you will find groups here. And now we have a group, so I can place my group maybe on this area, and I will duplicate this group, edit, duplicate layers, and we can move a little bit. Edit, duplicate layers, edit, duplicate layers. So I can duplicate here, but I can also Sylxis 31, edit, duplicate layers, and dragging and moving like this or Sylexs one, edit, duplicate layers, and move, for example here. So now with all these different groups, I can select the first one, place where I want here, select the last one, place where I want here as well, and now I can select all the rectangles, all the groups like this with a rectangle inside, and I will use also the alig panels. First, I will align to center and because I have group, it's going to work properly. And I need to use halig this time vertically and the distribution, this one, space, vertically. And thanks to that, as you can see, I will obtain this render. Now, if I want to perfectly center everything, you can create again a complete group. This is why the group are useful when you want to work also with alignment and distribution. So I can select all this rectangle just like this. And then I will go right click here and I will create a complete group. And thanks to that, I can move this complete group in the center. Or if I don't use the snapping option or I want to use alignment panels, I can click here and center to the spread horizontally and center to the spread vertically. Here we have created a perfect structure with the right space between different element and we have center perfectly the different element. So it's important also to mix the align and distribute with sometime groups to perfectly have the right alignment and distribution between the different object. 171. Master alignments: We're going to see how to work with aligment. For this, we're going to work with a vector mode. You have the possibility to work with aligment in different mode and you can use in the pixel mode, but it's also useful in the layout mode, but we are going to focus with a vector mode because we'll use most of the time in the vector mode. First, I will create a rectangle just here and I will generate a rectangle on this area. I will fill with color, so we'll define colors. And for the stroke, I will remove the stroke that I was used before. So this rectangle, you need to understand first that you can use the snapping options. And when you go on the right, you have different type of snapping options like Snap two guide, Snap two sprint for example, or Snap two margin if you have a margins. And thanks to that, if you activate this one because if you deactivate this one, as you can see, you cannot find the center or find any horizontal or vertical axis. But if I use the snapping options, activate, I can find my vertical medals, my horizontal Midles and I can place in the center also is. So you can create multiple elements. For example, I create an rectangle, just like that. You find an er ones, and I can find also the Midl just here. Something interesting as well. I'm going to remove this rectangle is the aligment panel. By default in this vector mode, you can find the ligament panels here and you can work with distribution as well. Here we have aligned horizontally and vertically. If you have only one object selected, the reference will be the spread or the page if you prefer. So if I go here, I will go on the left of the spread. Automatically, you will recognize the spread. If never you are using a margin, like for example, in the layout mode, you will be able to snap to go directly on the margin. So here we are going to go on the spread. Center right. Here you can do the same vertically. For example, I can go on the top. Mdals and bottom. If I want to put my rectangle on the top, left corner, I will go on left top. If I want to go on the midle, I will select center Mdals just like that. Now, for example, I define a rectangle here and you work with maybe two object. I will select another rectangles. I will define some red colors, and I will place these rectangles here. So now I have I would like to align the two rectangle. So if I see the two rectangles, just like this, first, you need to understand if you have the snapping option if you don't have the snapping options one more time. So if you deactivate the snapping options, as you can see, you cannot find or snap to any corners. Now if you activate the snapping option, I have all the objects snapping activated and some snapping options here. Now you lx the rectangle, you can, for example, find the center of the shape, or you can snap to this corner here or you can snap to this corner. So it's pretty easy to align even if you don't use the alignment panels, as you can see. But if you use the aligment panel, you can select the two object, go in the alignment, and automatically if you use, for example, left, here, he defines selection bond. In selection bond, what is this, it is the selection. So he will align the object or the foreground with the object on the background. But you can also use the first selected or use the last selected. So depending on the first or last selected, it will be just a little bit different or you can use a selection bond. And if I'm using center and center, he will center the red rectangle on the blue rectangle. Now if you switch, for example, for spread, just like this, he will hanging the two rectangle or more object to the spread. So it means to the page in this case, and I can put my two rectangles on the left of the page or on the right, or if I want to be on the top left, I will define left here and top or the bottom right. I will go on the right now, and if I want to put my two object in the midals, I will stick my two object, I will go on alignment and center and center, just like this. As you can see, it's convenient. Now you have also the possibility if I select all this, I will create another series of rectangles. And this time we create multiple rectangles and we'll go and edit, duplicate layers or selection in this case. So as I explained, you can just edit with the same, for example, value here, and thanks to that, you can repeat this process, but you can also deselect, select the rectangle again and you can just dragging and moving, Diselt select the rectangle again, edit duplicate the layers. You need to understand that you can try to move the element you have automatically guide generated, like what you can find the same space. And when you have the green area, here's the green arrow, you can see the same space. And you can define, for example, the same space or you can align also your different object together with the smart guide. Now, if it's not the case, something that we can do. Also, it is to deselect everything, you select all the rectangles, and now you can use lin. If for example, I want to align to this rectangle here. I will select this one first, and I will select all the other rectangle we shift, and I selected this one first. Now I will go in the aliment panels, and in the alignment panels, I will align top here, we are on the spread, so it means on the page. But if instead to use the spread, I was using the first selected, as you can see, will be aligned to this rectangle, just like that. After I will explain that we can complete with a distribution if we want to have the same space between the element. Now I can repeat the process also here, just like that, just like this, here and here. If I want to align all my rectangle maybe to this one. It can be also the last selected, depend about what you want to do. Let's use the last selected this time. I will select this one, this one, then this one, this one, this one, we shift, and I will select this one as the last selected. And now I will go into alignment, and here we'll select this time horizontally, and I will use, for example, right. But instead to use spread, I will select the last selected, and I'm going to be aligned to this one, as you can see. But if you want to be on the spread, you can also align on the spread or depends if I see selection bond, or in this case, I'm going to not change anything in this case. And if it's the spread, I can go on the right, or I can go on the left or in the M dots with all my element and the spread in this case is a page. See if you have a double page, the spread will be the double page. Here, it will be for the layout mode. But in this case, I only have one page. If I want to come back, that's selected, I can use, for example, this one. After I'm going to show you how you can use the distribution panels as well. 172. Logo landscape part 2: We're going to continue with these training. And for this, something that we're going to do is to add more elements. So we'll go on this area here and we'll create a circle, so I will select the ellipse tools. And I will create a circle, I will press shift to convert this ellipse to circles, and we'll activate colors. I activate to clear green color first, and I will play this element around maybe here. And I will scale a little bit and try to place around this area. Then we'll duplicate and edit duplicate the layers will place another one, maybe around here, and we'll make something a little bit darker. And then I will go and edit, duplicate the layer, we place another one, maybe here, and I will make something a little bit darker as well. This one will go right click here and arrange to back and this one. Now, first, let's start with this one arrange to back, then this one, right click, arrange to back, and then this one, right click, arrange and to back, just like that. Let's start with this type of work. We can play this one around here, maybe this one around here, and I think this one around maybe this area, just like that. So after to do this work, what we need to do we need to generate cut to cut all the part all the part below this red area. So how to process will use the boolean operations. So concretely, what you can do, you can use the pain tools, and you can generate a just like this, for example, here. Here, here, and here. If the snapping option is not pretty good, you can deactivate temporarily the snapping options. It will be pretty better, and we can just change the colors. And now you can select the circles, and this element for this element, just remove totally the stroke, just like that, and you can select this one and this one, and I will be able to apply the boolean operation substrate, just like this. After that, we'll repeat this process. We take the pen tool again and we'll work with this circle. So we'll define another area here and until maybe here, here and here, and we can select these circles, and one more time, we need to deactivate the stroke, just like this and we si these circles and these polylines, and we will use substrate. Then we will repeat the process in times. I will take the pin tools, and I will work with the circle so we can define the area maybe from here to here, then here, here and here. And after that, I will change stroke and we deactivate the stroke here one more time, and we'll take the circles and this one. And I will go on substrate here. So we'll click on substrate just like this. Here. So now I have this different element. I need also to substrate here. So I forgot to do also in this area. So one element here, here, and here and here, let this activate the stroke, and I will click on this circle and the holy lines and substrake as well. Now I will select this different element, and I will generate two groups, so right click groups, and I will duplicate this group, and duplicate the layers, and I will play this one here. We'll try to not have to cut again. So maybe I can scale a little bit with shift. And as you can see hoops, I think I made some mistake. Yes, I don't need to press shift to scale with the groups, and we can try to make maybe something here. I think like this, it's pretty decent. Let's try to reduce a little bit, put little on the right it's not extremely easy to perfectly fit if I go, we can adjust this definitely not a problem. So we can just scale a little bit more just like this. And if we need to cut another part, it's not a problem. So we can, for example, maybe cut this part. And for this I can ungroup. I will go ungroup here, you can ungroup also from these panels, and I will use one more time these tools. First, I will escape, I will use the pain tools, and we will create another small cut on this area, and we'll deactivate the strokes one more time, selection tools, select these circles and this element, and I will use a boolean operations, substrate one more time, and now it's pretty better we can generate together groups with this element and generator groups. So now it's okay for that. We'll add some. So here we have a group, group, group, groups of element. No, this element I didn't group, so it's okay no problems. And I will add text. So for this, we'll select the text tools here. And we have just artistic text tool. It's going to be enough for what I want to do. And I will just here for cell. After do this type of work, we select the text, we'll go on the options and we will change the font family. And I will select frontlangti heavy then we will scale until maybe this area. So we can move here on the left, as you can see, and as you can see, you can just it's not possible. I forgot to reactivate the snapping options. So now it's going to work, and now I can snap here. And on this area, its same I can snap here. Maybe we can scale a little bit of text on these directions. So we shift, you can scale a little bit more on these directions. And I will double click on house, and I will recuperate this green color just like this. And I will select four cells, and I will recuperate this red color just like this. Perfect. So now what we are going to do, we can play the text at our convenience. I think here, it's interesting. And we can just craft a complete group so I can select all the elements, right click here and just generate complete groups. And that's it. We have our logo here as you can see with these groups, and you can double click. You can rename for logo on this area. Because we were on the vector format, it's perfectly, as you can see, the quality is perfect for the logo because it is a vector format, so it means after you can scale so logo, reduce the logo, increase the logo, totally, it's not a problem because we will keep the same quality. In this case, I will reduce a little bit, place the logo in the center, and it's okay for this training. 173. Logo landscape part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo, and it will be interesting training to see different features. To crat this logo, the first thing that we're going to do is to create rectangles. And I created a new document 1,600 pixels wide and 1,200 pixels eight, 1,600 pixels wide and 1,200 pixels eight. And we will start with a rectangle just like this, and we will create first rectangle on these directions, and we will define red colors just like this. So this rectangle, I can scale a little bit on these directions and these directions. And what I will do, I will use transform features. So here we work in the vector mode because we create a logo and to create a logo, we need to work with a vector mode and with a vector format. I'll select the transform tools and here you can use shares and you can apply this type of transformation on this direction or on this direction. We'll go on the left here and we'll apply a value at minus, and I will tap minus and I will replace the value by 40. I think 46 is little too much. I will replace by 42, just like that. After to do this type of work, maybe I think 46 can be pretty decent. I will adjust after if I need. So I will just change and I will put 46. So after to do this work, we have this element. We will duplicate this element with edit and duplicate the layers, and we'll play the same layer here. And what we will do we scale little bit on these directions just like that. And maybe this one we can scale just a little bit as well. This one will change the color. This one will change the color. This one concretely will make something a little bit darker for the red colors. And I will move here, and this one we will use the flip options. So we click on Transform here and flip horizontal. Not this one, this one we can just click here. So this one we're going to do. We'll click on this one and transform, flip horizontal. And I will play this one just here. We just need to zoom here. And to snap this one, when I use my selection tools, you just need to place here. You can zoom to have access to your pixel grade because when you share the precision is not extremely good, so we need to zoom here to have the best precision, just like that. And this one we can extend a little bit on this direction a little bit more. And that's it. We can add this first element. I will say these two element, I think we can scale a little bit on these direction and scale a little bit on this direction, it's pretty better for what I want to do. Now I will add another rectangle. I will say the rectangle tool with snap here, create another rectangle around this area just like that. And now what I will do, I will just select these colors. So with the color picker tools, we repay this color to activate this color here. And what we will do after we will create another rectangles. We'll create another rectangle, small rectangles here. I will reactivate this color, this one, and we will make something a little bit darker again. And I will play this one around maybe here, and I will reduce a little bit, scale little bit the size on this area and put this on the background. So right click, arrange and to back just like that. Thanks to that, I created my first element. Maybe we can adjust little bit these rectangles and I can select all the element to generate a complete group. So we can go right click here and we can create complete groups. Now maybe we can scale the group just like this, keeping the proportions and placing the group on this area. So I think this is the first element that we are going to create, as you can see, I can come back to my linear panels. And now, as you can see, we have complete groups. At any moment, I can come back to an element of the group. If for example, I want to adjust this rectangle, as you can see, I can adjust this rectangle or if I want to address this one or any element inside the group, it's definitely possible. So this one, for example, I can scale or this one I can scale as well, just like this. So it's possible to scale your element after. So now what I will do I will click on my groups. I will place the groups around here. We reduce ittle bitter size, and I will duplicate. So I will edit duplicate layers, and I will place one here, we'll place just on the front, and we need to go on this area to zoom and to place on this corner, as you can see, so we need to place here on this corner. Then we will duplicate again. So I did duplicates the layer, so we'll duplicate again just like this. And after to be here, we will flip. So I will click here transforms, flip horizontal, then we will scale a little bit, and I will play this one just here, and we can zoom in and just place this one around here. So this one will be a little bit smaller. And after that, what we will do we select all this element, generate a complete groups, so rightly crap to groups, play the groups around here. Maybe we can scale a little bit. The groups hoops I think I break the proportions, so I can press shift to keep the proportion and place the group just here. And now we'll create a rectangle. So we'll select the rectangle tools. We'll snap around as you can see, we have this area and we can snap here, and we can go left click until to snap on the right and define some green color. So I'll select some green color, maybe this green color can be pretty decent for what I want to do. Then we will adjust a little bit. The size will move a little bit on the top just like this, and maybe it's too much. Yes, just like that. Let's try to adjust again, here. And I will convert this rectangle to care. So we'll use convert to cars. And thanks to that, we can slip in so point on the top right corner of the rectangle and we can jragging and moving a little bit. Not too much, just dragging and moving a little bit. Maybe it's too much, just like that. And that's it. So thanks to that, we have created this first part. We can select all here, not create to complete groups, but just raging and moving, maybe around the midle little bit on the top of the midals and we are going to continue after. 174. Adjustment tint: We're going to see the adjustment recolor. For this, I selected this image and I selected this image. To see this adjustment recolor, will go on the right, and we can find this recolor adjustment. So after to click on the recolor adjustment, what you can do concretely, you can place a range of color, and for this, you can define the u. And you can place it is like to put something in front of your image and you can define colors. And as you can see, automatically, you have something like incrustation effect. So you select a color, for example, if I want to create an effect like orange, I will put some orange color. After I can adjust with the saturation value. So concretely, if I decrease the saturation here, I will desaturate my image. And if I jogging and moving here, we can change the value of the saturation. For example, here, I have a value of 50%. And if I put the saturation like the maximum, I can extend the colors as you can see. By default, if I just double click, we can come back to 0% and we can increase the saturation again. You can also adjust the lightness value, so you can decrease the lightness like this, or you can increase the lightness like this as well. And that's it. You can just apply this type of transformation using this one. So it is like to place like a frame with the colors on the front, and then you can adjust these colors. You can adjust also the value of saturation and you can also adjust the luminosity. At any moment, if I want to try another color, I can change. If I want to make more blue effect, I can put some blue here, and if I don't want 100% of saturation, I can also decrease little bit of saturation. Sometimes it is also interesting because if you don't put too much saturation, you can make something a little bit like vantage effect, so you desaturate a little bit. And at the same time, you put some color like little orange or maybe a little yellow, and you can make something like this for your image. I can also decrease a little bit the lightness in this case. So I'm going to remove this one and let's see our second image. I will zoom a little bit on my image, we select the adjustment, and one more time, we'll define recolors. Let's first apply a value for the hue and I will apply something little bit in blue, just like this, and I will decrease the saturation. Let's put 60%, and I will change the lightness and I will reduce a little bit. And that's it. So you can create this type of effect using this adjustment. So now what can be useful, you can also define a selection. So I can remove this one. Let's take a look about this bridge here. And I will try to select the bridge, and for this, we will select the fruit selection tools. And with the fruit selection tools, will define a tolerance value, and I will define a tolerance value around ten, and I will select the contiguous area, and I will start first with. So after to do this work, I will zoom a little bit here, and I will select my layers and left click here to try to select some area. Maybe we can try to complete, so I can select this, and we can complete with ad and I can add or left click just like this to try to extend maybe a little bit my selections. Oh, I will click on this area. I will click here, I will click here. I will click here as well. This area, maybe this one, this one, this one Oops. Let's just come back into panels, this one, this one, and maybe I can try here. But this area is selected, I will undo these panels. Maybe I can try to extend here. I have this area. Maybe we can use directly substract and we can try to subtract some area, and I can come back with add. Let's take a look if I add here, maybe at here. Yeah, I think we can try to stay like this. Maybe I can Oops. Let's just come back. I will click on add again, maybe at here, but we can also change the tolerance value. Let's try to increase, and I will click on Add again, left click. And yes, definitely, it's not pretty good here. So I'm going to come back, and it's going to be difficult to perfectly select the bridge. So if I just come back to tolerance, I will come back to ten. I will select Add again and we'll come back with this. So, after to do this type of work, if I apply this adjustment, so I will click here adjustment, I will define recolors and I will apply only on these selections, as you can see. So for example, I can define a u and I can change the value. In this case, I'm not going to change the color because some area not taken con, but I can just the bridges in red. So I can reinforce just keeping the red color, for example. And after that, I can just improve little bit of saturation. So if you put 50, it is like to come back to the original way of saturation. And just increase a little bit of saturation, maybe. I will put 70%, and here I can increase the lightness, decrease the lightness. Here we could select this area, maybe, and I will just validate like this. I will just click outside and I will press scape as you can see, it can be an interesting way to maybe reinforce the bridge area. And if I take a look, the most difficult things will be to perfectly craft a complete selection of the bridge. I think it can be difficult, but in this case, we can select some area and try to reinforce the red color. If I take a look before, after and before after with this example. 175. Filters part 2: We're going to continue with the filters. We have seen how we can add filters, and we have seen how it can be interesting and that you can edit the filters after that. So for this, we will focus again on this image first. So to add filters, as I explained before, you just click on filters and you can just select the type of filter that you want. Other types of blur that you can use, I show you just before the Goshen blue. So you just click on the Goshen Blur, you define, for example, a radius, and the Gaussian blur will be appears on all the layer below. You can also play the Gaussian blur inside. Apply this on on the layer. Perfectly nondestructive, you can double click. Adjust again, you can also move like this because it is a live filters. And at any moment, you can, for example, delete this one. Another thing is you can apply your filters directly on the selection. So for example, I can use rectangular selection tools, and just to show you just made a basic selection here, and I will apply your filters and the filters will be applied only on this area. So if I select another blur, like for example, the motion blur, just here, I can define a radius, and it is like if you use a motion blur to have something like directional for simple reason that you can give a strength and you have the possibility to define a rotation value. And maybe I can put 45 degrees. Can also just dragging and moving here and change little bits of rotation at the same time just dragging the mouse, as you can see. You can also preserve the alpha to have the edge pretty better on this area. And as you can see, if I just press escape, the blur wheel appears only on the selection. It is definitely something interesting to use. So you can apply only on selections first. And if I just continue, I will click on this area. I will go one more time on filters. So you have also different filters. Let's select, for example, glitch, just like this. And with a glitch, we can define a strand here, and we can also adjust with a number of channels and create a glitch effect. So now if I just get out of this, I will select this one this image. Another interesting things that we can do. When you click on image, you can use the Liquify mode, and the Liquify mode will allow you can be pretty interesting on the face. But you can also have this directly on filters. So I can click on filters and you can find Liquify. And you can use this directly this mode inside filters. And you will have different options. So you can, for example, liquify push forward. You can define we'll see that more details after. And here you have a construction mesh. You can define on the right to different parameters of the brush, like for example, size. And as you can see zoom little bit and I use this first one, you can also ragging and moving like this, so I can change little bit of smile or I can pull little bits of eyes like this or the noise like this, as you can see. You can also liquify push left tools, and it is another way to process and we can just push like this as well. So you can make some transformation with these different tools. You are liquifil tools, and you can just turn around just like this, depending one more time on the size of the brush, harness opacity and the speed value as well. You also change the number of division of your grid to make more precision. If I click Liquify Pinch tools, here, this one, you can, for example, increase a little bit the size of the brush, and if I go on the noise, we can just pinch like this. You can also just use turbulence. You can have the mesh cm tool. So you have a lot of type of options just here. If I silica in this one, I will increase the size, little bit of speed, and as you can see, we can change the size of the brush and we can extend the size of the noise. So we can increase the size here. But at the opposite, you can use this one if you want to decrease the size, or I can decrease the size of the ice here and the eye on this area. No you have a lot of options. So if you, for example, just press escape here and you click on Don, as you can see, it will be inside the liquify filters. So we can see the difference before and after, and definitely it's pretty convenient. And if we dile click, we can edit again and you can also adjust if you need. And if I just click here, I can select Liquify, and it's non destructive, I can remove at any moment. So now let's select the face of the woman. I will click on this area and I will define one selection tools like the fruit selection tools. We use the Tryons value around ten or 12%. We will use this mode, the new mode, and I will go left click outside. Don't forget to select the layers and left click outside. Then one more time, we invert the selection with Shift Control E and I can invert the selection. I will go and edit, I will copy the selection with Control C. And we will go on this area, and I will just go on edit and pass the selection with Control V or just edit and pass, and we will place one more times the face of the woman around this area one more time. So we'll play this one around here. Now after to do this type of work, I will just click. Something that I would like to do it is on these background layers, I will place I want to show you that if you have multiple layers, and for example, you apply your filters, and I decide to apply some filters where filter we use pixelate. But we define pixelate here. And if I define pixelate, as you can see, it will apply on all the layers like this. I will preserve the alpha to have a better stroke. Now if I just want to have this only on these background layers, I just need to put big sold inside the backgrounds. And as you can see, the Big Slit will be applied only on these layers. I can double click. I can address the number on antization just like this, and we will upturn this render as you can see. You can also apply multiple filters at the same time if you need. So for example, I can add this one, but I can also add another one if I need, so you can complete with another one. If I want to also put something like maybe a lens distortions, I can apply a lens distortions as well. So you can apply multiple filters at the same time. If I want to apply a displace, I can apply some displace value and put this one just here. And if I apply another one, like, for example, I want to create something like a median draw, I can also apply a median brlow. So you can apply multiple elements at the same time. I just click here and I remove this one, click here, remove this one, click here, remove this one, click here, remove this one. You can also on these background layers, if I just go on filters, another interesting things can be to use we have, for example, the vignette mode and you can define exposure just like this. You can define exposure and harness. First, define the harness at 100%. Then switch for the type of exposure that you want wise on the edge or black on the edge. Then you can use a scale value and you can reduce like this, and you can also use a shape. But something you can do if you move here, it's not possible to edit, even if it is a live filters, but I can change a little bit of exposure, change a little bit hardness. I can scale value just like this, maybe the shape here, and we can create this type of render. And at any moment I can adjust, I can just double click and we can adjust again to different properties. Perfectly non destructive. So what does it mean? It means we can click on the layers. You can also rename, for it to tell you. You can double click and you can also rename if you need. Generally, we can keep the same name, but we can rename as well. 176. Filters with brushes part 2: We are going to continue with the filters with brushes. So we have this image, and I will click on this image. I will go right click and I will duplicate the layers. Then we'll click on this image, and I will go right click and I will duplicate the layers as well. Then we will go on this area. And as I explained, we have used the filter brush tools, and you can use also, for example, directly the blur brush tools. It is a little bit different because you are not going to create a new layer, so you will apply directly on the layers that you have selected. So for example, if I'm here, I can apply directly on these layers. I'll select the blur brush tools. You use a brush here by default, as you can see, we have 100% here, 100%, and 80%. And on this area, this is the power of the brush, so it means accumulation. When you click on more here, you will be redirected with brush options, and you can also edit and choose a different and adjust your brush as you want. You can even add a stabilizer with this type of tools. So I define your size just like this. And if I just go left click here, I can just add some blur. I just need to select the layer or it's not going to work properly. So don't forget to select the layers, and then you can add a blur using a brush. If you put 100%, in the case of the blue, it's not a big problem. But generally, you never put when you make this type of adjustment, the maximum of hardness. As you can see, I can put some blue directly on the sky area just using a brush and we apply this directly on the layers. Now, if I just continue on other tools, it is a sharpen brush tool. So sharpen brush tools at the opposite, you can increase the level of details. And if you want to improve image, you want to sharpen, you can do this type of work. When I click on this tool, I have 60% here. We can define here clarity, and we have also here the pixels value for the stabilizer. Here, I'm not going to use the stabilizer. It's going to be okay. So I'm just going to go left click here, and we can just sharpen. So we can increase little bits or level of details. Here I add some blue, and here I will sharpen on this area. If you use this too much, after it's little strange about the render, you will have the feeling to burn little bits of the pixels if you apply this too much. Let's take a look before, after and before after. You can reinforce the lever of details, but you need to be careful to not apply this too much or after it looks like later you burn the pixels just like that. If, for example, you decrease a brush, you decrease a brush like this, and you click here, you can see we have multiple size of brushes that we use. And at any moment, you can come back to the brush that you want. So it's also something extremely powerful and extremely useful. When I continue, you can also use the median brush tool. With the median brush tools, I will go on the right, and with these tools, it will little bit like blur, but it's not really blur, just that it will take different pixels and to assemble this pixel into one and you will have the feeling to have little bit like a pontific or anything like this because you will assembly different pixels to create only one pixels. This one is the median, as you can see, the median brush tools, just like that. We have different things. Here you can sharpen, here you can use the median, and here you can use the Blur. The last possibility is smudge. Smudge, what is this? I'm going to delete these background layers and we will duplicate again, I will go right click and I will duplicate again. The smudge tools, you can define here the strength, and here you can define just a value of the flow. If you just go left click, you will be able to mix the pixels and you can pull the pixels on a direction. Sometimes it's a little bit long, but you can pull the direction and create some effect using this. Here, I have 100%, but you can decrease. You can also change the value just like this. And as you can see, you can have more flu just using this type of tool. You can just spread the pixels exactly like if you were using finger, if you are using a finger and you want to spray the color, you can do this type of work, and for this, you can use the smudge brush tools. So this is the way to process. I'm going to click here and I will delete on the keyboard. If I come back to this image, this image, I have duplicated this image. One more time, I will click on the layers and what I would like to do. I would like, for example, to sharpen some areas. So we click on the sharpen tools, and I will go around the ice here, and I will define my different value. Let us start with the size of the brush. I will define also my opacity value through value and harness value. Let's keep 100%, 100%, and 60%. I will go left click here and I will just sharpen little bits eyes to recuperate some details. Then we will go on the right and I will use my brush one more time. Don't forget that you can also create a selection and to use a brush inside the selection if you want to stay in a specific area, even if with a brush, you can also have precision. And if I just go here, it is the same. I can reinfort maybe the texture of the mouse and Tory for the texture of the mouse. I will decrease it better size, and I will use my brush also on the mouse, left click first. If you go left click again, you will reactivate one more time value just like this. And I will just put another ones just like that. So if I just click on this area, I will take a look with before after before, after, before and after. But you can see we can repreate some level of details. It is the same on this area before, after, before and after. Just here. So as you can see, it's pretty convenient. So you need to understand when you use a filter brush tool, automatically, you will create a new filter layers, and it's totally non destructive. But when you work with blur brush tool, the sharpened brush tool, the median brush tool, or the smudge brush tool, you need to understand that you will impact directly the layers. And this is why it is important to duplicate the layer in this type of case.